 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| User's Manual 78K0/KD1 8-Bit Single-Chip Microcontrollers PD780121 PD780122 PD780123 PD780124 PD78F0124 PD780121(A) PD780122(A) PD780123(A) PD780124(A) PD78F0124(A) PD780121(A1) PD780122(A1) PD780123(A1) PD780124(A1) PD78F0124(A1) PD780121(A2) PD780122(A2) PD780123(A2) PD780124(A2) Document No. U16315EJ2V0UD00 (2nd edition) Date Published November 2003 N CP(K) (c) Printed in Japan [MEMO] 2 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD NOTES FOR CMOS DEVICES 1 PRECAUTION AGAINST ESD FOR SEMICONDUCTORS Note: Strong electric field, when exposed to a MOS device, can cause destruction of the gate oxide and ultimately degrade the device operation. Steps must be taken to stop generation of static electricity as much as possible, and quickly dissipate it once, when it has occurred. Environmental control must be adequate. When it is dry, humidifier should be used. It is recommended to avoid using insulators that easily build static electricity. Semiconductor devices must be stored and transported in an anti-static container, static shielding bag or conductive material. All test and measurement tools including work bench and floor should be grounded. The operator should be grounded using wrist strap. Semiconductor devices must not be touched with bare hands. Similar precautions need to be taken for PW boards with semiconductor devices on it. 2 HANDLING OF UNUSED INPUT PINS FOR CMOS Note: No connection for CMOS device inputs can be cause of malfunction. If no connection is provided to the input pins, it is possible that an internal input level may be generated due to noise, etc., hence causing malfunction. CMOS devices behave differently than Bipolar or NMOS devices. Input levels of CMOS devices must be fixed high or low by using a pull-up or pull-down circuitry. Each unused pin should be connected to VDD or GND with a resistor, if it is considered to have a possibility of being an output pin. All handling related to the unused pins must be judged device by device and related specifications governing the devices. 3 STATUS BEFORE INITIALIZATION OF MOS DEVICES Note: Power-on does not necessarily define initial status of MOS device. Production process of MOS does not define the initial operation status of the device. Immediately after the power source is turned ON, the devices with reset function have not yet been initialized. Hence, power-on does not guarantee out-pin levels, I/O settings or contents of registers. Device is not initialized until the reset signal is received. Reset operation must be executed immediately after power-on for devices having reset function. Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. HP9000 series 700 and HP-UX are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. SPARCstation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc. Solaris and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. TRON stands for The Realtime Operating system Nucleus. ITRON is an abbreviation of Industrial TRON. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 3 These commodities, technology or software, must be exported in accordance with the export administration regulations of the exporting country. Diversion contrary to the law of that country is prohibited. * The information in this document is current as of May, 2003. The information is subject to change without notice. For actual design-in, refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data sheets or data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of NEC Electronics products. Not all products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC Electronics sales representative for availability and additional information. * No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of NEC Electronics. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. * NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document or any other liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others. * Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these circuits, software and information in the design of a customer's equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of the customer. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software and information. * While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products, customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To minimize risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC Electronics products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as redundancy, fire-containment and anti-failure features. * NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades: "Standard", "Special" and "Specific". The "Specific" quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customerdesignated "quality assurance program" for a specific application. The recommended applications of an NEC Electronics product depend on its quality grade, as indicated below. Customers must check the quality grade of each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application. "Standard": Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment and industrial robots. "Special": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed for life support). "Specific": Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life support systems and medical equipment for life support, etc. The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications not intended by NEC Electronics, they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to determine NEC Electronics' willingness to support a given application. (Note) (1) "NEC Electronics" as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority-owned subsidiaries. (2) "NEC Electronics products" means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics (as defined above). M8E 02. 11-1 4 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD Regional Information Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country. Before using any NEC Electronics product in your application, pIease contact the NEC Electronics office in your country to obtain a list of authorized representatives and distributors. They will verify: * * * * * Device availability Ordering information Product release schedule Availability of related technical literature Development environment specifications (for example, specifications for third-party tools and components, host computers, power plugs, AC supply voltages, and so forth) Network requirements * In addition, trademarks, registered trademarks, export restrictions, and other legal issues may also vary from country to country. [GLOBAL SUPPORT] http://www.necel.com/en/support/support.html NEC Electronics America, Inc. (U.S.) Santa Clara, California Tel: 408-588-6000 800-366-9782 NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH Duesseldorf, Germany Tel: 0211-65 03 01 * Sucursal en Espana Madrid, Spain Tel: 091-504 27 87 * Succursale Francaise Velizy-Villacoublay, France Tel: 01-30-67 58 00 * Filiale Italiana Milano, Italy Tel: 02-66 75 41 * Branch The Netherlands Eindhoven, The Netherlands Tel: 040-244 58 45 * Tyskland Filial Taeby, Sweden Tel: 08-63 80 820 * United Kingdom Branch Milton Keynes, UK Tel: 01908-691-133 NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd. Hong Kong Tel: 2886-9318 NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd. Seoul Branch Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-558-3737 NEC Electronics Shanghai, Ltd. Shanghai, P.R. China Tel: 021-6841-1138 NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd. Taipei, Taiwan Tel: 02-2719-2377 NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd. Novena Square, Singapore Tel: 6253-8311 J03.4 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 5 INTRODUCTION Readers This manual is intended for user engineers who wish to understand the functions of the 78K0/KD1 and design and develop application systems and programs for these devices. The target products are as follows. 78K0/KD1: PD780121, 780122, 780123, 780124, 78F0124, 780121(A), 780122(A), 780123(A), 780123(A1), 780124(A), 780124(A1), 78F0124(A), 78F0124(A1), 780121(A1), 780121(A2), 780122(A1), 780122(A2), 780123(A2), 780124(A2) Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions described in the Organization below. Organization The 78K0/KD1 manual is separated into two parts: this manual and the instructions edition (common to the 78K/0 Series). 78K0/KD1 User's Manual (This Manual) 78K/0 Series User's Manual Instructions * Pin functions * Internal block functions * Interrupts * Other on-chip peripheral functions * Electrical specifications * CPU functions * Instruction set * Explanation of each instruction 6 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical engineering, logic circuits, and microcontrollers. * When using this manual as the manual for (A) grade products, (A1) grade products, and (A2) grade products: Only the quality grade differs between standard products and (A), (A1), and (A2) grade products. Read the part number as follows. * * * * * PD780121 PD780121(A), 780121(A1), 780121(A2) PD780122 PD780122(A), 780122(A1), 780122(A2) PD780123 PD780123(A), 780123(A1), 780123(A2) PD780124 PD780124(A), 780124(A1), 780124(A2) PD78F0124 PD78F0124(A), 78F0124(A1) * To gain a general understanding of functions: Read this manual in the order of the CONTENTS. The mark revised points. * How to interpret the register format: For a bit number enclosed in brackets, the bit name is defined as a reserved word in the assembler, and is already defined in the header file named sfrbit.h in the C compiler. * To check the details of a register when you know the register name: Refer to APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX. * To know details of the 78K/0 Series instructions: Refer to the separate document 78K/0 Series Instructions User's Manual (U12326E). Caution Examples in this manual employ the "standard" quality grade for general electronics. circuit actually used. Conventions Data significance: Note: Caution: Remark: Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Information requiring particular attention When using examples in this manual for the "special" quality grade, review the quality grade of each part and/or shows major Active low representations: xxx (overscore over pin and signal name) Supplementary information ... xxxx or xxxxB Numerical representations: Binary ... xxxx Decimal Hexadecimal ... xxxxH User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 7 Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions. However, preliminary versions are not marked as such. Documents Related to Devices Document Name 78K0/KD1 User's Manual 78K/0 Series Instructions User's Manual Document No. This manual U12326E Documents Related to Development Tools (Software) (User's Manuals) Document Name RA78K0 Assembler Package Operation Language Structured Assembly Language CC78K0 C Compiler Operation Language SM78K Series System Simulator Ver. 2.30 or Later Operation (Windows TM Document No. U14445E U14446E U11789E U14297E U14298E Based) U15373E U15802E External Part User Open Interface Specifications ID78K Series Integrated Debugger Ver. 2.30 or Later RX78K0 Real-Time OS Operation (Windows Based) Fundamentals Installation Project Manager Ver. 3.12 or Later (Windows Based) U15185E U11537E U11536E U14610E Documents Related to Development Tools (Hardware) (User's Manuals) Document Name IE-78K0-NS In-Circuit Emulator IE-78K0-NS-A In-Circuit Emulator IE-78K0K1-ET In-Circuit Emulator IE-780148-NS-EM1 Emulation Board Document No. U13731E U14889E To be prepared To be prepared Documents Related to Flash Memory Programming Document Name PG-FP3 Flash Memory Programmer User's Manual PG-FP4 Flash Memory Programmer User's Manual Document No. U13502E U15260E 8 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD Other Related Documents Document Name SEMICONDUCTOR SELECTION GUIDE - Products and Packages Semiconductor Device Mount Manual Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices NEC Semiconductor Device Reliability/Quality Control System Guide to Prevent Damage for Semiconductor Devices by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Document No. X13769X Note C11531E C10983E C11892E Note See the "Semiconductor Device Mount Manual" website (http://www.necel.com/pkg/en/mount/index.html). Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice. Be sure to use the latest version of each document for designing. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 9 CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE ............................................................................................................................ 17 1.1 Features ...................................................................................................................................... 17 1.2 Applications................................................................................................................................ 18 1.3 Ordering Information ................................................................................................................. 19 1.4 Pin Configuration (Top View).................................................................................................... 21 1.5 K1 Family Lineup........................................................................................................................ 23 1.5.1 1.5.2 78K0/Kx1 product lineup................................................................................................................ 23 V850ES/Kx1 product lineup ........................................................................................................... 25 1.6 1.7 Block Diagram ............................................................................................................................ 27 Outline of Functions .................................................................................................................. 28 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................... 30 2.1 Pin Function List ........................................................................................................................ 30 2.2 Description of Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 34 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 P00 to P03 (port 0) ........................................................................................................................ 34 P10 to P17 (port 1) ........................................................................................................................ 34 P20 to P27 (port 2) ........................................................................................................................ 35 P30 to P33 (port 3) ........................................................................................................................ 35 P60 to P63 (port 6) ........................................................................................................................ 36 P70 to P77 (port 7) ........................................................................................................................ 36 P120 (port 12)................................................................................................................................ 36 P130 (port 13)................................................................................................................................ 36 P140 (port 14)................................................................................................................................ 36 AVREF ............................................................................................................................................. 37 AVSS............................................................................................................................................... 37 RESET........................................................................................................................................... 37 REGC ............................................................................................................................................ 37 2.2.14 X1 and X2 ...................................................................................................................................... 37 2.2.15 XT1 and XT2.................................................................................................................................. 37 2.2.16 2.2.17 2.2.18 2.2.19 VDD and EVDD................................................................................................................................. 37 VSS and EVSS ................................................................................................................................. 37 VPP (flash memory versions only) .................................................................................................. 37 IC (mask ROM versions only) ........................................................................................................ 38 2.3 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins......................................... 39 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE ...................................................................................................... 42 3.1 Memory Space ............................................................................................................................ 42 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 Internal program memory space .................................................................................................... 48 Internal data memory space .......................................................................................................... 49 Special function register (SFR) area.............................................................................................. 49 Data memory addressing............................................................................................................... 50 Control registers ............................................................................................................................ 55 General-purpose registers ............................................................................................................. 59 Special Function Registers (SFRs)................................................................................................ 60 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 3.2 Processor Registers .................................................................................................................. 55 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 10 3.3 Instruction Address Addressing .............................................................................................. 64 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 Relative addressing ........................................................................................................................64 Immediate addressing ....................................................................................................................65 Table indirect addressing ...............................................................................................................66 Register addressing........................................................................................................................66 Implied addressing .........................................................................................................................67 Register addressing........................................................................................................................68 Direct addressing............................................................................................................................69 Short direct addressing...................................................................................................................70 Special function register (SFR) addressing ....................................................................................71 Register indirect addressing ...........................................................................................................72 Based addressing...........................................................................................................................73 Based indexed addressing .............................................................................................................74 Stack addressing ............................................................................................................................75 3.4 Operand Address Addressing .................................................................................................. 67 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 3.4.9 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS........................................................................................................... 76 4.1 Port Functions............................................................................................................................ 76 4.2 Port Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 78 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 Port 0..............................................................................................................................................79 Port 1..............................................................................................................................................82 Port 2..............................................................................................................................................87 Port 3..............................................................................................................................................88 Port 6..............................................................................................................................................90 Port 7..............................................................................................................................................91 Port 12............................................................................................................................................92 Port 13............................................................................................................................................93 Port 14............................................................................................................................................94 4.3 4.4 Registers Controlling Port Function ........................................................................................ 95 Port Function Operations.......................................................................................................... 99 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 Writing to I/O port ...........................................................................................................................99 Reading from I/O port .....................................................................................................................99 Operations on I/O port ....................................................................................................................99 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR .................................................................................................... 100 5.1 Functions of Clock Generator ................................................................................................ 100 5.2 Configuration of Clock Generator .......................................................................................... 100 5.3 Registers Controlling Clock Generator ................................................................................. 102 5.4 System Clock Oscillator.......................................................................................................... 109 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 X1 oscillator ..................................................................................................................................109 Subsystem clock oscillator............................................................................................................109 When subsystem clock is not used...............................................................................................112 Ring-OSC oscillator ......................................................................................................................112 Prescaler ......................................................................................................................................112 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 Clock Generator Operation ..................................................................................................... 113 Time Required to Switch Between Ring-OSC Clock and X1 Input Clock .......................... 120 Time Required for CPU Clock Switchover ............................................................................ 121 Clock Switching Flowchart and Register Setting ................................................................. 122 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 11 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4 5.8.5 Switching from Ring-OSC clock to X1 input clock.........................................................................122 Switching from X1 input clock to Ring-OSC clock.........................................................................123 Switching from X1 input clock to subsystem clock........................................................................124 Switching from subsystem clock to X1 input clock........................................................................125 Register settings ...........................................................................................................................126 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 ........................................................................... 127 6.1 Functions of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 ......................................................................... 127 6.2 Configuration of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00................................................................... 128 6.3 Registers Controlling 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 .......................................................... 132 6.4 Operation of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 ......................................................................... 138 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 Interval timer operation .................................................................................................................138 PPG output operations .................................................................................................................141 Pulse width measurement operations ...........................................................................................144 External event counter operation ..................................................................................................152 Square-wave output operation......................................................................................................155 One-shot pulse output operation...................................................................................................157 6.5 Cautions for 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 ......................................................................... 162 CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51........................................................... 165 7.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51............................................................. 165 7.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 ...................................................... 167 7.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 ............................................. 169 7.4 Operations of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51........................................................... 174 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 Operation as interval timer............................................................................................................174 Operation as external event counter .............................................................................................176 Square-wave output operation......................................................................................................177 PWM output operation ..................................................................................................................178 7.5 Cautions for 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 ............................................................. 182 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 .......................................................................................... 183 8.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 ..................................................................................... 183 8.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1............................................................................... 183 8.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 ...................................................................... 187 8.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 ..................................................................................... 192 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 Operation as interval timer/square-wave output ...........................................................................192 Operation as PWM output mode...................................................................................................195 Carrier generator mode operation (8-bit timer H1 only) ................................................................201 CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER................................................................................................................ 208 9.1 Functions of Watch Timer ....................................................................................................... 208 9.2 Configuration of Watch Timer................................................................................................. 210 9.3 Register Controlling Watch Timer .......................................................................................... 210 9.4 Watch Timer Operations.......................................................................................................... 212 9.4.1 9.4.2 Watch timer operation...................................................................................................................212 Interval timer operation .................................................................................................................213 9.5 Cautions for Watch Timer ....................................................................................................... 214 12 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER ..................................................................................................... 215 10.1 Functions of Watchdog Timer ................................................................................................ 215 10.2 Configuration of Watchdog Timer.......................................................................................... 217 10.3 Registers Controlling Watchdog Timer ................................................................................. 218 10.4 Operation of Watchdog Timer ................................................................................................ 220 10.4.1 Watchdog timer operation when "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" is selected by mask option ......220 10.4.2 10.4.3 10.4.4 Watchdog timer operation when "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by mask option............................................................................................................................................221 Watchdog timer operation in STOP mode (when "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by mask option) ..............................................................................................................222 Watchdog timer operation in HALT mode (when "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by mask option) ..............................................................................................................224 CHAPTER 11 CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROLLER ............................................................................... 225 11.1 Functions of Clock Output Controller ................................................................................... 225 11.2 Configuration of Clock Output Controller ............................................................................. 225 11.3 Registers Controlling Clock Output Controller .................................................................... 226 11.4 Clock Output Controller Operations ...................................................................................... 227 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER ......................................................................................................... 228 12.1 Functions of A/D Converter .................................................................................................... 228 12.2 Configuration of A/D Converter.............................................................................................. 229 12.3 Registers Used in A/D Converter ........................................................................................... 231 12.4 A/D Converter Operations....................................................................................................... 236 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 Basic operations of A/D converter ................................................................................................236 Input voltage and conversion results ............................................................................................238 A/D converter operation mode......................................................................................................239 12.5 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table .............................................................. 242 12.6 Cautions for A/D Converter..................................................................................................... 244 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 ...................................................................................... 249 13.1 Functions of Serial Interface UART0 ..................................................................................... 249 13.2 Configuration of Serial Interface UART0 ............................................................................... 250 13.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface UART0 ...................................................................... 253 13.4 Operation of Serial Interface UART0...................................................................................... 258 13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3 Operation stop mode ....................................................................................................................258 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode................................................................................259 Dedicated baud rate generator .....................................................................................................265 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 ...................................................................................... 270 14.1 Functions of Serial Interface UART6 ..................................................................................... 270 14.2 Configuration of Serial Interface UART6 ............................................................................... 274 14.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface UART6 ...................................................................... 277 14.4 Operation of Serial Interface UART6...................................................................................... 285 14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3 Operation stop mode ....................................................................................................................285 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode................................................................................286 Dedicated baud rate generator .....................................................................................................301 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 13 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 ........................................................................................ 308 15.1 Functions of Serial Interface CSI10........................................................................................ 308 15.2 Configuration of Serial Interface CSI10 ................................................................................. 308 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface CSI10......................................................................... 310 15.4 Operation of Serial Interface CSI10 ........................................................................................ 313 15.4.1 Operation stop mode ....................................................................................................................313 15.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode...................................................................................................................314 CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................ 322 16.1 Interrupt Function Types ......................................................................................................... 322 16.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration ..................................................................................... 322 16.3 Registers Controlling Interrupt Functions............................................................................. 327 16.4 Interrupt Servicing Operations ............................................................................................... 333 16.4.1 Maskable interrupt request acknowledgement..............................................................................333 16.4.2 Software interrupt request acknowledgement...............................................................................335 16.4.3 16.4.4 Multiple interrupt servicing ............................................................................................................336 Interrupt request hold....................................................................................................................339 CHAPTER 17 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 340 17.1 Functions of Key Interrupt ...................................................................................................... 340 17.2 Configuration of Key Interrupt................................................................................................ 340 17.3 Register Controlling Key Interrupt ......................................................................................... 341 CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION .................................................................................................. 342 18.1 Standby Function and Configuration..................................................................................... 342 18.1.1 Standby function ...........................................................................................................................342 18.1.2 Registers controlling standby function ..........................................................................................343 18.2 Standby Function Operation................................................................................................... 346 18.2.1 HALT mode...................................................................................................................................346 18.2.2 STOP mode ..................................................................................................................................351 CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 355 19.1 Register for Confirming Reset Source................................................................................... 361 CHAPTER 20 CLOCK MONITOR ........................................................................................................ 362 20.1 Functions of Clock Monitor..................................................................................................... 362 20.2 Configuration of Clock Monitor .............................................................................................. 362 20.3 Register Controlling Clock Monitor........................................................................................ 363 20.4 Operation of Clock Monitor..................................................................................................... 364 CHAPTER 21 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT...................................................................................... 369 21.1 Functions of Power-on-Clear Circuit...................................................................................... 369 21.2 Configuration of Power-on-Clear Circuit ............................................................................... 370 21.3 Operation of Power-on-Clear Circuit...................................................................................... 370 21.4 Cautions for Power-on-Clear Circuit ...................................................................................... 371 CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR ....................................................................................... 373 22.1 Functions of Low-Voltage Detector........................................................................................ 373 14 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 22.2 22.3 22.4 22.5 Configuration of Low-Voltage Detector................................................................................. 373 Registers Controlling Low-Voltage Detector ........................................................................ 374 Operation of Low-Voltage Detector........................................................................................ 377 Cautions for Low-Voltage Detector........................................................................................ 381 CHAPTER 23 REGULATOR ................................................................................................................. 385 23.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................... 385 CHAPTER 24 MASK OPTIONS ........................................................................................................... 387 CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124................................................................................................................... 388 25.1 Internal Memory Size Switching Register ............................................................................. 389 25.2 Writing with Flash Programmer.............................................................................................. 390 25.3 Programming Environment..................................................................................................... 397 25.4 Communication Mode ............................................................................................................. 397 25.5 Handling of Pins on Board...................................................................................................... 400 25.5.1 25.5.2 25.5.3 25.5.4 25.5.5 25.5.6 25.5.7 25.6.1 VPP pin ..........................................................................................................................................400 Serial interface pins ......................................................................................................................400 RESET pin....................................................................................................................................402 Port pins .......................................................................................................................................402 REGC pin .....................................................................................................................................402 Other signal pins...........................................................................................................................402 Power supply ................................................................................................................................402 Controlling flash memory ..............................................................................................................403 25.6 Programming Method.............................................................................................................. 403 25.6.2 Flash memory programming mode...............................................................................................403 25.6.3 Selecting communication mode....................................................................................................404 25.6.4 Communication commands ..........................................................................................................404 CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET ...................................................................................................... 406 26.1 Conventions Used in Operation List...................................................................................... 406 26.1.1 Operand identifiers and specification methods .............................................................................406 26.1.2 Description of operation column ...................................................................................................407 26.1.3 Description of flag operation column ............................................................................................407 26.2 Operation List........................................................................................................................... 408 26.3 Instructions Listed by Addressing Type ............................................................................... 416 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) ................................................................................................................... 419 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)................................ 438 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)................................ 457 CHAPTER 30 PACKAGE DRAWING .................................................................................................. 471 CHAPTER 31 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS........................................................... 472 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 15 CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT................................................................................................. 474 32.1 Cautions for Wait...................................................................................................................... 474 32.2 Peripheral Hardware That Generates Wait ............................................................................ 475 32.3 Example of Wait Occurrence .................................................................................................. 476 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS............................................................................................... 477 A.1 Software Package..................................................................................................................... 480 A.2 Language Processing Software.............................................................................................. 480 A.3 Control Software ...................................................................................................................... 481 A.4 Flash Memory Writing Tools ................................................................................................... 481 A.5 Debugging Tools (Hardware) .................................................................................................. 482 A.5.1 A.5.2 When using in-circuit emulators IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0-NS-A .................................................482 When using in-circuit emulator IE-78K0K1-ET..............................................................................483 A.6 Debugging Tools (Software) ................................................................................................... 484 A.7 Embedded Software................................................................................................................. 485 APPENDIX B NOTES ON TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN ................................................................... 486 APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX ......................................................................................................... 488 C.1 Register Index (In Alphabetical Order with Respect to Register Names) .......................... 488 C.2 Register Index (In Alphabetical Order with Respect to Register Symbol) ......................... 491 APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY ..................................................................................................... 494 D.1 Major Revisions in This Edition.............................................................................................. 494 16 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 1.1 Features Minimum instruction execution time can be changed from high speed (0.2 s: @ 10 MHz operation with X1 input clock) to ultra low-speed (122 s: @ 32.768 kHz operation with subsystem clock) General-purpose register: 8 bits x 32 registers (8 bits x 8 registers x 4 banks) ROM, RAM capacities Item Part Number Program Memory (ROM) Mask ROM 8 KB 16 KB 24 KB 32 KB Flash memory 32 KB Note Data Memory Internal High-Speed RAM 512 bytes PD780121 PD780122 PD780123 PD780124 PD78F0124 1024 bytes 1024 bytes Note Note The internal flash memory and internal high-speed RAM capacities can be changed using the internal memory size switching register (IMS). On-chip power-on-clear (POC) circuit and low-voltage detector (LVI) Short startup is possible via the CPU default start using the on-chip Ring-OSC On-chip clock monitor function using on-chip Ring-OSC On-chip watchdog timer (operable with Ring-OSC clock) On-chip key interrupt function On-chip clock output controller On-chip regulator I/O ports: 39 (N-ch open drain: 4) Timer: 7 channels Serial interface: 2 channels (UART (LIN (Local Interconnect Network)-bus supported): 1 channel, CSI/UARTNote: 1 channel) 10-bit resolution A/D converter: 8 channels Supply voltage: VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V (standard product, (A) grade product) VDD = 3.3 to 5.5 V ((A1) grade product, (A2) grade product) Operating ambient temperature: TA = -40 to +85C (standard product, (A) grade product) TA = -40 to +105C (flash memory version of (A1) grade product) TA = -40 to +110C (mask ROM version of (A1) grade product) TA = -40 to +125C (mask ROM version of (A2) grade product) Note Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 17 CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 1.2 Applications Automotive equipment * System control for body electricals (power windows, keyless entry reception, etc.) * Sub-microcontrollers for control Home audio, car audio AV equipment PC peripheral equipment (keyboards, etc.) Household electrical appliances * Outdoor air conditioner units * Microwave ovens, electric rice cookers Industrial equipment * Pumps * Vending machines * FA (Factory Automation) 18 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 1.3 Ordering Information Part Number Package 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) Quality Grade Standard Standard Standard Standard Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special Special PD780121GB-xxx-8ET PD780122GB-xxx-8ET PD780123GB-xxx-8ET PD780124GB-xxx-8ET PD780121GB(A)-xxx-8ET PD780122GB(A)-xxx-8ET PD780123GB(A)-xxx-8ET PD780124GB(A)-xxx-8ET PD780121GB(A1)-xxx-8ET PD780122GB(A1)-xxx-8ET PD780123GB(A1)-xxx-8ET PD780124GB(A1)-xxx-8ET PD780121GB(A2)-xxx-8ET PD780122GB(A2)-xxx-8ET PD780123GB(A2)-xxx-8ET PD780124GB(A2)-xxx-8ET PD78F0124M1GB-8ET PD78F0124M2GB-8ET PD78F0124M3GB-8ET PD78F0124M4GB-8ET PD78F0124M5GB-8ET PD78F0124M6GB-8ET PD78F0124M1GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M2GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M3GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M4GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M5GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M6GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M1GB(A1)-8ET PD78F0124M2GB(A1)-8ET PD78F0124M5GB(A1)-8ET PD78F0124M6GB(A1)-8ET Remark xxx indicates ROM code suffix. Please refer to "Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices" (Document No. C11531E) published by NEC Electronics Corporation to know the specification of the quality grade on the device and its recommended applications. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 19 CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE Mask ROM versions (PD780121, 780122, 780123, and 780124) include mask options. When ordering, it is possible to select "Power-on-clear (POC) circuit can be used/cannot be used", "Ring-OSC clock can be stopped/cannot be stopped by software" and "Pull-up resistor incorporated/not incorporated in 1-bit units (P60 to P63 pins)". Flash memory versions corresponding to the mask options of the mask ROM versions are as follows. Table 1-1. Flash Memory Versions Corresponding to Mask Options of Mask ROM Versions Mask Option POC Circuit POC cannot be used Ring-OSC Cannot be stopped Flash Memory Versions (Part Number) PD78F0124M1GB-8ET PD78F0124M1GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M1GB(A1)-8ET PD78F0124M2GB-8ET PD78F0124M2GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M2GB(A1)-8ET PD78F0124M3GB-8ET PD78F0124M3GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M4GB-8ET PD78F0124M4GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M5GB-8ET PD78F0124M5GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M5GB(A1)-8ET PD78F0124M6GB-8ET PD78F0124M6GB(A)-8ET PD78F0124M6GB(A1)-8ET Can be stopped by software POC used (VPOC = 2.85 V 0.15 V) Cannot be stopped Can be stopped by software POC used (VPOC = 3.5 V 0.2 V) Cannot be stopped Can be stopped by software 20 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 1.4 Pin Configuration (Top View) * 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) P20/ANI0 P21/ANI1 P22/ANI2 P23/ANI3 P24/ANI4 P25/ANI5 P26/ANI6 P27/ANI7 P70/KR0 P71/KR1 P72/KR2 P73/KR3 P74/KR4 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 AVREF AVSS VPP/IC VDD REGC VSS X1 X2 RESET XT1 XT2 P130 P120/INTP0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 P75/KR5 P76/KR6 P77/KR7 P00/TI000 P01/TI010/TO00 P02 P03 P10/SCK10/TxD0 P11/SI10/RxD0 P12/SO10 P13/TxD6 P14/RxD6 EVDD P33/TI51/TO51/INTP4 P17/TI50/TO50 P16/TOH1/INTP5 P140/PCL/INTP6 P32/INTP3 P31/INTP2 P30/INTP1 P15/TOH0 Cautions 1. Connect the IC (Internally Connected) pin directly to VSS. 2. Connect the AVSS pin to VSS. 3. Connect the REGC pin as follows. Standard Product and (A) Grade Product When regulator is used When regulator is not used (A1) Grade Product and (A2) Grade Product Connect to VSS via a capacitor (1 F: - (Regulator cannot be used.) recommended) Connect directly to VDD 4. Connect the VPP pin to EVSS or VSS during normal operation. Remark Figures in parentheses apply to the PD78F0124. EVSS P60 P61 P62 P63 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 21 CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE Pin Identification ANI0 to ANI7: AVREF: AVSS: EVDD: EVSS: IC: KR0 to KR7: P00 to P03: P10 to P17: P20 to P27: P30 to P33: P60 to P63: P70 to P77: P120: P130: P140: Analog input Analog reference voltage Analog ground Power supply for port Ground for port Internally connected Key return Port 0 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 6 Port 7 Port 12 Port 13 Port 14 PCL: REGC: RESET: RxD0, RxD6: SCK10: SI10: SO10: TO00, TO50, TO51, TOH0, TOH1: TxD0, TxD6: VDD: VPP: VSS: X1, X2: XT1, XT2: Timer output Transmit data Power supply Programming power supply Ground Crystal oscillator (X1 input clock) Crystal oscillator (Subsystem clock) Programmable clock output Regulator capacitance Reset Receive data Serial clock input/output Serial data input Serial data output INTP0 to INTP6: External interrupt input TI000, TI010,TI50, TI51: Timer input 22 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 1.5 K1 Family Lineup 1.5.1 78K0/Kx1 product lineup 78K0/KB1: 30-pin (7.62 mm 0.65 mm pitch) PD78F0103 PD780103 PD780102 PD780101 Flash memory: 24 KB, RAM: 768 bytes Mask ROM: 24 KB, RAM: 768 bytes Mask ROM: 16 KB, RAM: 768 bytes Mask ROM: 8 KB, RAM: 512 bytes 78K0/KC1: 44-pin (10 x 10 mm 0.8 mm pitch) PD78F0114 PD780114 PD780113 PD780112 PD780111 Flash memory: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB Mask ROM: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB Mask ROM: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB Mask ROM: 16 KB, RAM: 512 bytes Mask ROM: 8 KB, RAM: 512 bytes 78K0/KD1: 52-pin (10 x 10 mm 0.65 mm pitch) PD78F0124 PD780124 PD780123 PD780122 PD780121 Flash memory: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB Mask ROM: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB Mask ROM: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB Mask ROM: 16 KB, RAM: 512 bytes Mask ROM: 8 KB, RAM: 512 bytes 78K0/KE1: 64-pin (10 x 10 mm 0.5 mm pitch, 12 x 12 mm 0.65 mm pitch, 14 x 14 mm 0.8 mm pitch) PD78F0134 PD780134 PD780133 PD780132 PD780131 Flash memory: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB Mask ROM: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB Mask ROM: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB Mask ROM: 16 KB, RAM: 512 bytes Mask ROM: 8 KB, RAM: 512 bytes PD78F0138 PD780138 Flash memory: 60 KB, RAM: 2 KB Mask ROM: 60 KB, RAM: 2 KB Mask ROM: 48 KB, RAM: 2 KB PD780136 78K0/KF1: 80-pin (12 x 12 mm 0.5 mm pitch, 14 x 14 mm 0.65 mm pitch) PD78F0148 PD780148 PD780146 PD780144 PD780143 Flash memory: 60 KB, RAM: 2 KB Mask ROM: 60 KB, RAM: 2 KB Mask ROM: 48 KB, RAM: 2 KB Mask ROM: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB Mask ROM: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 23 CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE The list of functions in the 78K0/Kx1 is shown below. Part Number Item Package Internal memory (bytes) Mask ROM 30 pins 8 K 16 K 24 K Flash memory RAM Power supply voltage Minimum instruction execution time 0.2 s (when 10 MHz, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V) 0.24 s (when 8.38 MHz, VDD = 3.3 to 5.5 V) 0.4 s (when 5 MHz, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V) - 17 4 1 - 1 ch 1 ch 2 ch - 1 ch Note 78K0/KB1 78K0/KC1 78K0/KD1 78K0/KE1 78K0/KF1 44 pins - 8 K 24 K 16 K 32 K - 512 - 32 K 1K 52 pins 8 K 24 K 16 K 32 K - 512 32 K 1K 512 - 64 pins 8 K 24 K 16 K 32 K - 32 K 1K - 48 K 60 K - 60 K 2K 1K - 80 pins 24 K 48 K 32 K 60 K - 60 K 2K - - 512 24 K 768 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Clock X1 input Sub Ring-OSC 2 to 10 MHz 32.768 kHz 240 kHz (TYP.) 19 26 8 38 54 Port CMOS I/O CMOS input CMOS output N-ch open-drain I/O 4 2 ch 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch Timer 16 bits (TM0) 8 bits (TM5) 8 bits (TMH) For watch WDT 1 ch Serial 3-wire CSI interface Automatic transmit/ receive 3-wire CSI UART Note 1 ch - - 4 ch 6 11 - 12 4 ch Provided 7 15 8 16 1 ch 1 ch 8 ch 9 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch 1 ch UART supporting LIN-bus 10-bit A/D converter Interrupt External Internal Key return input Reset RESET pin POC LVI Clock monitor WDT Multiplier/divider ROM correction Standby function Operating ambient temperature - - 9 19 17 20 8 ch 2.85 V 0.15 V/3.5 V 0.20 V (selectable by mask option) 3.1 V/3.3 V 0.15 V/3.5 V/3.7 V/3.9 V/4.1 V/4.3 V 0.2 V (selectable by software) Provided Provided 16 bits x 16 bits, 32 bits / 16 bits Provided HALT/STOP mode Standard products, special (A) products: -40 to +85C Special (A1) products: -40 to +110C (mask ROM version), -40 to +105C (flash memory version) Special (A2) products: -40 to +125C (mask ROM version) - Note Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins. 24 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 1.5.2 V850ES/Kx1 product lineup V850ES/KF1 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) PD703208 PD703208Y PD703209 PD703209Y PD703210 PD703210Y PD70F3210 PD70F3210Y Mask ROM: 64 KB, RAM: 4 KB I2C products Mask ROM: 96 KB, RAM: 4 KB I2C products Mask ROM: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB I2C products Flash memory: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB I2C products V850ES/KG1 100-pin plastic LQFP (fine pitch) (14 x 14) PD703212 PD703212Y PD703213 PD703213Y PD703214 PD703214Y PD70F3214 PD70F3214Y Mask ROM: 64 KB, RAM: 4 KB I2C products Mask ROM: 96 KB, RAM: 4 KB I2C products Mask ROM: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB I2C products Flash memory: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB I2C products V850ES/KJ1 144-pin plastic LQFP (fine pitch) (20 x 20) PD703216 PD703216Y PD703217 PD703217Y PD70F3217 PD70F3217Y Mask ROM: 96 KB, RAM: 6 KB I2C products Mask ROM: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB I2C products Flash memory: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB I2C products User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 25 CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE The list of functions in the V850ES/Kx1 is shown below. Function Part No. Timer 8-Bit 16-Bit TMH Watch WDT 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch CSI 2 ch Serial Interface CSIA 1 ch UART 2 ch IC - 1 ch - 1 ch - 1 ch - 1 ch 2 ch 4 ch 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch - 1 ch - 1 ch - 1 ch - 1 ch 2 ch 6 ch 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch 3 ch 2 ch 3 ch - 2 ch - 2 ch - 2 ch 16 ch 2 ch 12 ch 128 - 8 ch 2 ch 6 ch 84 - 8 ch - 6 ch 67 - 2 A/D D/A RTO I/O Other PD703208 PD703208Y V850ES/KF1 V850ES/KG1 V850ES/KJ1 PD703209 PD703209Y PD703210 PD703210Y PD70F3210 PD70F3210Y PD703212 PD703212Y PD703213 PD703213Y PD703214 PD703214Y PD70F3214 PD70F3214Y PD703216 PD703216Y PD703217 PD703217Y PD70F3217 PD70F3217Y 26 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 1.6 Block Diagram TO00/TI010/P01 TI000/P00 16-bit timer/ event counter 00 Port 0 4 P00 to P03 Port 1 TOH0/P15 8-bit timer H0 Port 2 8 P10 to P17 8 P20 to P27 TOH1/P16 8-bit timer H1 Port 3 4 P30 to P33 TI50/TO50/P17 8-bit timer/ event counter 50 Port 6 4 P60 to P63 Port 7 TI51/TO51/P33 8-bit timer/ event counter 51 78K/0 CPU core 8 P70 to P77 Port 12 ROM (Flash memory) P120 Watch timer Port 13 P130 Watchdog timer Port 14 P140 RxD0/P11 TxD0/P10 Serial interface UART0 Clock output control PCL/P140 Clock monitor RxD6/P14 TxD6/P13 SI10/P11 SO10/P12 SCK10/P10 ANI0/P20 to ANI7/P27 AVREF AVSS INTP0/P120 INTP1/P30 to INTP4/P33 INTP5/P16 INTP6/P140 System control 4 Interrupt control RESET X1 X2 XT1 XT2 8 A/D converter Reset control Serial interface UART6 Internal high-speed RAM Power on clear/ low voltage indicator Key return 8 POC/LVI control KR0/P70 to KR7/P77 Serial interface CSI10 Ring-OSC IC VDD, VSS, EVDD EVSS (VPP) Voltage regulator REGC Remark Items in parentheses are available in the PD78F0124. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 27 CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 1.7 Outline of Functions (1/2) Item Internal memory (bytes) Mask ROM Flash memory High-speed RAM Expansion RAM Memory space X1 input clock (oscillation frequency) Standard products, (A) grade products 64 KB Ceramic/crystal/external clock oscillation REGC pin is connected directly to VDD: 10 MHz (VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V), 8.38 MHz (VDD = 3.3 to 5.5 V), 5 MHz (VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V) 1 F capacitor is connected to REGC pin: (A1) grade products 8.38 MHz (VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V) 512 PD780121 8K PD780122 16 K - PD780123 24 K PD780124 32 K PD78F0124 - 32 K 1K Note 1K - Note REGC pin is connected directly to VDD: 10 MHz (VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V), 8.38 MHz (VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V), 5 MHz (VDD = 3.3 to 5.5 V) (A2) grade products REGC pin is connected directly to VDD: 8.38 MHz (VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V), 5 MHz (VDD = 3.3 to 5.5 V) Ring-OSC clock (oscillation frequency) Subsystem clock (oscillation frequency) General-purpose registers Minimum instruction execution time On-chip Ring oscillation (240 kHz (TYP.)) Crystal/external clock oscillation (32.768 kHz) 8 bits x 32 registers (8 bits x 8 registers x 4 banks) 0.2 s/0.4 s/0.8 s/1.6 s/3.2 s (X1 input clock: @ fXP = 10 MHz operation) 8.3 s/16.6 s/33.2 s/66.4 s/132.8 s (TYP.) (Ring-OSC clock: @ fR = 240 kHz (TYP.) operation) 122 s (subsystem clock: @ fXT = 32.768 kHz operation) Instruction set * 16-bit operation * Multiply/divide (8 bits x 8 bits, 16 bits / 8 bits) * Bit manipulate (set, reset, test, and Boolean operation) * BCD adjust, etc. I/O ports Total: CMOS I/O CMOS input CMOS output N-ch open-drain I/O 39 26 8 1 4 Timers * 16-bit timer/event counter: 1 channel * 8-bit timer/event counter: * 8-bit timer: * Watch timer * Watchdog timer: Timer outputs 5 (PWM output: 3) * 78.125 kHz, 156.25 kHz, 312.5 kHz, 625 kHz, 1.25 MHz, 2.5 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz (X1 input clock: 10 MHz) * 32.768 kHz (subsystem clock: 32.768 kHz) 10-bit resolution x 8 channels 2 channels 2 channels 1 channel 1 channel Clock output A/D converter Note The internal flash memory capacity and internal high-speed RAM capacity can be changed using the internal memory size switching register (IMS). 28 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (2/2) Item Serial interface PD780121 PD780122 Note PD780123 1 channel : 1 channel PD780124 PD78F0124 * UART mode supporting LIN-bus: * 3-wire serial I/O mode/UART mode Vectored interrupt sources Key interrupt Reset Internal External 15 8 Key interrupt (INTKR) occurs by detecting falling edge of key input pins (KR0 to KR7). * Reset using RESET pin * Internal reset by watchdog timer * Internal reset by clock monitor * Internal reset by power-on-clear * Internal reset by low-voltage detector Supply voltage Standard products, (A) grade products: VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V (A1) grade products, (A2) grade products: VDD = 3.3 to 5.5 V * Standard products, (A) grade products: TA = -40 to +85C * (A1) grade products: TA = -40 to +110C (mask ROM versions), -40 to +105C (flash memory versions) * (A2) grade products: TA = -40 to +125C (mask ROM versions) Operating ambient temperature Package * 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) Note Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins. An outline of the timer is shown below. 16-Bit Timer/ Event Counter 00 8-Bit Timer/ Event Counters 50 and 51 TM00 Operation mode Function Interval timer External event counter Timer output PPG output PWM output Pulse width measurement Square-wave output Interrupt source 1 channel 1 channel 1 output 1 output - 2 inputs 1 output 2 TM50 TM51 TMH0 TMH1 Note 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 Watch Timer Watchdog Timer 1 channel 1 channel 1 channel 1 channel 1 channel 1 channel 1 channel 1 channel 1 output - 1 output - 1 output 1 1 output - 1 output - 1 output 1 - 1 output - 1 output - 1 output 1 - 1 output - 1 output - 1 output 1 - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - Note The watch timer function and interval timer function can be used simultaneously. Remark TM51 and TMH1 can be used in combination as a carrier generator mode. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 29 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.1 Pin Function List There are three types of pin I/O buffer power supplies: AVREF, EVDD, and VDD. The relationship between these power supplies and the pins is shown below. Table 2-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies Power Supply AVREF EVDD VDD Corresponding Pins P20 to P27 Port pins other than P20 to P27 Pins other than port pins 30 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (1) Port pins Pin Name P00 P01 P02 P03 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P20 to P27 Input Port 2. 8-bit input-only port. P30 to P32 I/O Port 3. 4-bit I/O port. Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. P33 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P60 to P63 I/O Port 6. 4-bit I/O port (N-ch open drain). Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a mask option only for mask ROM versions. P70 to P77 I/O Port 7. 8-bit I/O port. Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P120 I/O Port 12. 1-bit I/O port. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P130 Output Port 13. 1-bit output-only port. P140 I/O Port 14. 1-bit I/O port. Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Input PCL/INTP6 Output - Input INTP0 Input KR0 to KR7 Input - INTP4/TI51/TO51 Input INTP1 to INTP3 Input I/O I/O I/O Port 0. 4-bit I/O port. Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Port 1. 8-bit I/O port. Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Input Function After Reset Input Alternate Function TI000 TI010/TO00 - - SCK10/TxD0 SI10/RxD0 SO10 TxD6 RxD6 TOH0 TOH1/INTP5 TI50/TO50 ANI0 to ANI7 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 31 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2) Non-port pins (1/2) Pin Name INTP0 INTP1 to INTP3 INTP4 INTP5 INTP6 SI10 SO10 SCK10 RxD0 RxD6 TxD0 TxD6 TI000 Input External count clock input to 16-bit timer/event counter 00 Capture trigger input to capture registers (CR000, CR010) of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 TI010 Capture trigger input to capture register (CR000) of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 TO00 TI50 TI51 TO50 TO51 TOH0 TOH1 PCL ANI0 to ANI7 AVREF Output Input Input - Input - Output Output Input 16-bit timer/event counter 00 output External count clock input to 8-bit timer/event counter 50 External count clock input to 8-bit timer/event counter 51 8-bit timer/event counter 50 output 8-bit timer/event counter 51 output 8-bit timer H0 output 8-bit timer H1 output Clock output (for trimming of X1 input clock, subsystem clock) A/D converter analog input A/D converter reference voltage input and positive power supply for port 2 AVSS A/D converter ground potential. Make the same potential as EVSS or VSS. KR0 to KR7 REGC Key interrupt input Connecting regulator output stabilization capacitor. Connect to VSS via a capacitor (1F: recommended). To use the CPU at high speed (fXP = 10 MHz, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V), connect this pin directly to VDD. RESET X1 X2 XT1 XT2 Input Input - Input - Connecting resonator for subsystem clock System reset input Connecting resonator for X1 input clock - - - - - - - - - - Input - P70 to P77 - - - Input Input - Input Input Input P01/TI010 P17/TO50 P33/TO51/INTP4 P17/TI50 P33/TI51/INTP4 P15 P16/INTP5 P140/INTP6 P20 to P27 - P01/TO00 Input Output Serial data output from asynchronous serial interface Input Input Output I/O Input Serial data input to serial interface Serial data output from serial interface Clock input/output for serial interface Serial data input to asynchronous serial interface Input Input Input Input I/O Input Function External interrupt request input for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified After Reset Input Alternate Function P120 P30 to P32 P33/TI51/TO51 P16/TOH1 P140/PCL P11/RxD0 P12 P10/TxD0 P11/SI10 P14 P10/SCK10 P13 P00 32 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2) Non-port pins (2/2) Pin Name VDD EVDD VSS EVSS IC VPP I/O - - - - - - Function Positive power supply (except for ports) Positive power supply for ports Ground potential (except for ports) Ground potential for ports Internally connected. Connect directly to EVSS or VSS. Flash memory programming mode setting. High-voltage application for program write/verify. Connect to EVSS or VSS in normal operation mode. After Reset - - - - - - Alternate Function - - - - - - User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 33 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.2 Description of Pin Functions 2.2.1 P00 to P03 (port 0) P00 to P03 function as a 4-bit I/O port. These pins also function as timer I/O. The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P00 to P03 function as a 4-bit I/O port. P00 to P03 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register 0 (PM0). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0). (2) Control mode P00 to P03 function as timer I/O. (a) TI000 This is the pin for inputting an external count clock to 16-bit timer/event counter 00 and is also for inputting a capture trigger signal to the capture registers (CR000, CR010) of 16-bit timer/event counter 00. (b) TI010 This is the pin for inputting a capture trigger signal to the capture register (CR000) of 16-bit timer/event counter 00. (c) TO00 This is a timer output pin. 2.2.2 P10 to P17 (port 1) P10 to P17 function as an 8-bit I/O port. These pins also function as pins for external interrupt request input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, and timer I/O. The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P10 to P17 function as an 8-bit I/O port. P10 to P17 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register 1 (PM1). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1). (2) Control mode P10 to P17 function as external interrupt request input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, and timer I/O. (a) SI10 This is a serial interface serial data input pin. (b) SO10 This is a serial interface serial data output pin. (c) SCK10 This is a serial interface serial clock I/O pin. (d) RxD0, RxD6 These are serial data input pins of the asynchronous serial interface. 34 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (e) TxD0, TxD6 These are serial data output pins of the asynchronous serial interface. (f) TI50 This is a pin for inputting an external count clock to 8-bit timer/event counter 50. (g) TO50, TOH0, and TOH1 These are timer output pins. (h) INTP5 This is an external interrupt request input pin for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. 2.2.3 P20 to P27 (port 2) P20 to P27 function as an 8-bit input-only port. These pins also function as pins for A/D converter analog input. The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P20 to P27 function as an 8-bit input-only port. (2) Control mode P20 to P27 function as A/D converter analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7). When using these pins as analog input pins, see (5) ANI0/P20 to ANI7/P27 in 12.6 Cautions for A/D Converter. 2.2.4 P30 to P33 (port 3) P30 to P33 function as a 4-bit I/O port. These pins also function as pins for external interrupt request input and timer I/O. The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P30 to P33 function as a 4-bit I/O port. P30 to P33 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register 3 (PM3). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3). (2) Control mode P30 to P33 function as external interrupt request input pins and timer I/O pins. (a) INTP1 to INTP4 These are the external interrupt request input pins for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. (b) TI51 This is an external count clock input pin to 8-bit timer/event counter 51. (c) TO51 This is a timer output pin. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 35 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.2.5 P60 to P63 (port 6) P60 to P63 function as a 4-bit I/O port. P60 to P63 can be set to input port or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 6 (PM6). P60 to P63 are N-ch open-drain pins. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a mask option only for mask ROM versions. 2.2.6 P70 to P77 (port 7) P70 to P77 function as an 8-bit I/O port. These pins also function as key interrupt input pins. The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P70 to P77 function as an 8-bit I/O port. P70 to P77 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register 7 (PM7). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7). (2) Control mode P70 to P77 function as key interrupt input pins. 2.2.7 P120 (port 12) P120 functions as a 1-bit I/O port. This pin also functions as a pin for external interrupt request input. The following operation modes can be specified. (1) Port mode P120 functions as a 1-bit I/O port. P120 can be set to input or output using port mode register 12 (PM12). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 12 (PU12). (2) Control mode P120 functions as an external interrupt request input pin (INTP0) for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. 2.2.8 P130 (port 13) P130 functions as a 1-bit output-only port. 2.2.9 P140 (port 14) P140 functions as a 1-bit I/O port. This pin also functions as a pin for external interrupt request input and clock output. The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P140 functions as a 1-bit I/O port. P140 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register 14 (PM14). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 14 (PU14). (2) Control mode P140 functions as external interrupt request input and clock output. (a) INTP6 This is the external interrupt request input pin for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. 36 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (b) PCL This is a clock output pin. 2.2.10 AVREF This is the A/D converter reference voltage input pin. When A/D converter is not used, connect this pin to EVDD or VDDNote. Note Connect port 2 directly to EVDD when it is used as a digital port. 2.2.11 AVSS This is the A/D converter ground potential pin. Even when the A/D converter is not used, always use this pin with the same potential as the EVSS pin or VSS pin. 2.2.12 RESET This is the active-low system reset input pin. 2.2.13 REGC This is the pin for connecting the capacitor for the regulator. When using the regulator, connect this pin to VSS via a capacitor (1 F: recommended). When the regulator is not used, connect this pin directly to VDD pin. Caution A regulator cannot be used with (A1) grade products and (A2) grade products. connect the REGC pin of these products directly to VDD. 2.2.14 X1 and X2 These are the pins for connecting a resonator for X1 input clock oscillation. When supplying an external clock, input a signal to the X1 pin and input the inverse signal to the X2 pin. 2.2.15 XT1 and XT2 These are the pins for connecting a resonator for subsystem clock oscillation. When supplying an external clock, input a signal to the XT1 pin and input the inverse signal to the XT2 pin. 2.2.16 VDD and EVDD VDD is the positive power supply pin for other than ports. EVDD is the positive power supply pin for ports. 2.2.17 VSS and EVSS VSS is the ground potential pin for other than ports. EVSS is the ground potential pin for ports. 2.2.18 VPP (flash memory versions only) This is a pin for flash memory programming mode setting and high-voltage application for program write/verify. Connect to EVSS or VSS in the normal operation mode. Be sure to User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 37 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.2.19 IC (mask ROM versions only) The IC (Internally Connected) pin is provided to set the test mode to check the 78K0/KD1 at shipment. Connect it directly to EVSS or VSS pin with the shortest possible wire in the normal operation mode. When a potential difference is produced between the IC pin and the EVSS or VSS pin because the wiring between these two pins is too long or external noise is input to the IC pin, the user's program may not operate normally. * Connect the IC pin directly to EVSS or VSS pin. EVSS or VSS IC As short as possible 38 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.3 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins Table 2-2 shows the types of pin I/O circuits and the recommended connections of unused pins. Refer to Figure 2-1 for the configuration of the I/O circuit of each type. Table 2-2. Pin I/O Circuit Types Pin Name P00/TI000 P01/TI010/TO00 P02 P03 P10/SCK10/TxD0 P11/SI10/RxD0 P12/SO10 P13/TxD6 P14/RxD6 P15/TOH0 P16/TOH1/INTP5 P17/TI50/TO50 P20/ANI0 to P27/ANI7 P30/INTP1 to P32/INTP3 P33/TI51/TO51/INTP4 P60, P61 (Mask ROM version) P60, P61 (Flash memory version) P62, P63 (Mask ROM version) P62, P63 (Flash memory version) P70/KR0 to P77/KR7 P120/INTP0 P130 P140/PCL/INTP6 3-C 8-A Output I/O 13-S 13-R 13-V 13-W 8-A Input: Independently connect to EVDD or EVSS via a resistor. 9-C 8-A Input I/O Connect to EVDD or EVSS. Input: Independently connect to EVDD or EVSS via a resistor. 8-A 5-A 8-A 5-A I/O Circuit Type 8-A I/O I/O Input: Recommended Connection of Unused Pins Independently connect to EVDD or EVSS via a resistor. Output: Leave open. Output: Leave open. Input: Connect to EVSS. the output latch of the port to 0. Output: Leave this pin open at low-level output after clearing Output: Leave open. Leave open. Input: Independently connect to EVDD or EVSS via a resistor. - Connect directly to EVDD or VDD. - - Leave open. Connect directly to EVDD or VDD Note Output: Leave open. RESET XT1 XT2 AVREF AVSS IC VPP Connect directly to EVSS or VSS. 2 16 Input . Connect directly to EVSS or VSS. Note Connect port 2 directly to EVDD when it is used as a digital port. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 39 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Figure 2-1. Pin I/O Circuit List (1/2) Type 2 Type 8-A EVDD Pullup enable P-ch VDD IN Data Schmitt-triggered input with hysteresis characteristics Output disable P-ch IN/OUT N-ch Type 3-C Type 9-C EVDD P-ch Data N-ch OUT IN P-ch N-ch AVSS VREF (threshold voltage) + - Comparator Input enable Type 5-A EVDD Type 13-R Pullup enable VDD Data P-ch P-ch IN/OUT Data Output disable IN/OUT N-ch Output disable N-ch Input enable 40 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Figure 2-1. Pin I/O Circuit List (2/2) Type 13-S Type 13-W Mask option EVDD IN/OUT Data Output disable N-ch IN/OUT Data Output disable N-ch Input enable Middle-voltage input buffer Type 13-V EVDD Mask option Type 16 Feedback cut-off IN/OUT P-ch Data Output disable N-ch Input enable Middle-voltage input buffer XT1 XT2 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 41 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.1 Memory Space Products in the 78K0/KD1 can each access a 64 KB memory space. Figures 3-1 to 3-5 show the memory maps. Caution Regardless of the internal memory capacity, the initial value of the internal memory size switching register (IMS) of all products in the 78K0/KD1 is fixed (IMS = CFH). Therefore, set the value corresponding to each product as indicated below. Table 3-1. Set Values of Internal Memory Size Switching Register (IMS) Internal Memory Size Switching Register (IMS) PD780121 PD780122 PD780123 PD780124 PD78F0124 42H 44H C6H C8H Value corresponding to mask ROM version 42 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-1. Memory Map (PD780121) F F F FH Special function registers (SFR) 256 x 8 bits F F 0 0H F E F FH F E E 0H F E D FH General-purpose registers 32 x 8 bits Internal high-speed RAM 512 x 8 bits F D 0 0H F C F FH Data memory space 1 F F FH Program area 1 0 0 0H 0 F F FH CALLF entry area Reserved 0 8 0 0H 0 7 F FH Program area 0 0 8 0H 0 0 7 FH 2 0 0 0H 1 F F FH Program memory space 0 0 0 0H Internal ROM 8192 x 8 bits 0 0 4 0H 0 0 3 FH Vector table area 0 0 0 0H CALLT table area User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 43 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-2. Memory Map (PD780122) F F F FH Special function registers (SFR) 256 x 8 bits F F 0 0H F E F FH F E E 0H F E D FH General-purpose registers 32 x 8 bits Internal high-speed RAM 512 x 8 bits F D 0 0H F C F FH Data memory space 3 F F FH Program area 1 0 0 0H 0 F F FH CALLF entry area Reserved 0 8 0 0H 0 7 F FH Program area 0 0 8 0H 0 0 7 FH 4 0 0 0H 3 F F FH Program memory space 0 0 0 0H Internal ROM 16384 x 8 bits 0 0 4 0H 0 0 3 FH Vector table area 0 0 0 0H CALLT table area 44 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-3. Memory Map (PD780123) F F F FH Special function registers (SFR) 256 x 8 bits F F 0 0H F E F FH F E E 0H F E D FH General-purpose registers 32 x 8 bits Internal high-speed RAM 1024 x 8 bits F B 0 0H F A F FH Data memory space 5 F F FH Program area 1 0 0 0H 0 F F FH CALLF entry area Reserved 0 8 0 0H 0 7 F FH Program area 0 0 8 0H 0 0 7 FH 6 0 0 0H 5 F F FH Program memory space 0 0 0 0H Internal ROM 24576 x 8 bits 0 0 4 0H 0 0 3 FH Vector table area 0 0 0 0H CALLT table area User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 45 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-4. Memory Map (PD780124) F F F FH Special function registers (SFR) 256 x 8 bits F F 0 0H F E F FH F E E 0H F E D FH General-purpose registers 32 x 8 bits Internal high-speed RAM 1024 x 8 bits F B 0 0H F A F FH Data memory space 7 F F FH Program area 1 0 0 0H 0 F F FH CALLF entry area Reserved 0 8 0 0H 0 7 F FH Program area 0 0 8 0H 0 0 7 FH 8 0 0 0H 7 F F FH Program memory space 0 0 0 0H Internal ROM 32768 x 8 bits 0 0 4 0H 0 0 3 FH Vector table area 0 0 0 0H CALLT table area 46 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-5. Memory Map (PD78F0124) F F F FH Special function registers (SFR) 256 x 8 bits F F 0 0H F E F FH F E E 0H F E D FH General-purpose registers 32 x 8 bits Internal high-speed RAM 1024 x 8 bits F B 0 0H F A F FH Data memory space 7 F F FH Program area 1 0 0 0H 0 F F FH CALLF entry area Reserved 0 8 0 0H 0 7 F FH Program area 0 0 8 0H 0 0 7 FH 8 0 0 0H 7 F F FH Program memory space 0 0 0 0H Flash memory 32768 x 8 bits 0 0 4 0H 0 0 3 FH Vector table area 0 0 0 0H CALLT table area User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 47 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.1.1 Internal program memory space The internal program memory space stores the program and table data. Normally, it is addressed with the program counter (PC). 78K0/KD1 products incorporate internal ROM (mask ROM or flash memory), as shown below. Table 3-2. Internal ROM Capacity Part Number Structure Internal ROM Capacity 8192 x 8 bits (0000H to 1FFFH) 16384 x 8 bits (0000H to 3FFFH) 24576 x 8 bits (0000H to 5FFFH) 32768 x 8 bits (0000H to 7FFFH) Flash memory PD780121 PD780122 PD780123 PD780124 PD78F0124 Mask ROM The internal program memory space is divided into the following areas. (1) Vector table area The 64-byte area 0000H to 003FH is reserved as a vector table area. The program start addresses for branch upon reset signal input or generation of each interrupt request are stored in the vector table area. Of the 16-bit address, the lower 8 bits are stored at even addresses and the higher 8 bits are stored at odd addresses. Table 3-3. Vector Table Vector Table Address 0000H Interrupt Source RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, WDT 0004H 0006H 0008H 000AH 000CH 000EH 0010H 0012H 0014H 0016H 0018H INTLVI INTP0 INTP1 INTP2 INTP3 INTP4 INTP5 INTSRE6 INTSR6 INTST6 INTCSI10/INTST0 Vector Table Address 001AH 001CH 001EH 0020H 0022H 0024H 0026H 0028H 002AH 002CH 002EH 0030H Interrupt Source INTTMH1 INTTMH0 INTTM50 INTTM000 INTTM010 INTAD INTSR0 INTWTI INTTM51 INTKR INTWT INTP6 (2) CALLT instruction table area The 64-byte area 0040H to 007FH can store the subroutine entry address of a 1-byte call instruction (CALLT). (3) CALLF instruction entry area The area 0800H to 0FFFH can perform a direct subroutine call with a 2-byte call instruction (CALLF). 48 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.1.2 Internal data memory space 78K0/KD1 products incorporate the following internal high-speed RAMs. Table 3-4. Internal High-Speed RAM Capacity Part Number Internal High-Speed RAM 512 x 8 bits (FD00H to FEFFH) PD780121 PD780122 PD780123 PD780124 PD78F0124 1024 x 8 bits (FB00H to FEFFH) The 32-byte area FEE0H to FEFFH is assigned to four general-purpose register banks consisting of eight 8-bit registers per one bank. This area cannot be used as a program area in which instructions are written and executed. The internal high-speed RAM can also be used as a stack memory. 3.1.3 Special function register (SFR) area On-chip peripheral hardware special function registers (SFRs) are allocated in the area FF00H to FFFFH (refer to Table 3-5 Special Function Register List in 3.2.3 Special Function Registers (SFRs)). Caution Do not access addresses to which SFRs are not assigned. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 49 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.1.4 Data memory addressing Addressing refers to the method of specifying the address of the instruction to be executed next or the address of the register or memory relevant to the execution of instructions. Several addressing modes are provided for addressing the memory relevant to the execution of instructions for the 78K0/KD1, based on operability and other considerations. For areas containing data memory in particular, special addressing methods designed for the functions of special function registers (SFR) and general-purpose registers are available for use. Figures 3-6 to 3-10 show correspondence between data memory and addressing. For details of each addressing mode, refer to 3.4 Operand Address Addressing. Figure 3-6. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (PD780121) F F F FH Special function registers (SFR) 256 x 8 bits F F 2 0H F F 1 FH F F 0 0H F E F FH F E E 0H F E D FH General-purpose registers 32 x 8 bits Register addressing Short direct addressing SFR addressing Internal high-speed RAM 512 x 8 bits F E 2 0H F E 1 FH F D 0 0H F C F FH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 2 0 0 0H 1 F F FH Internal ROM 8192 x 8 bits 0 0 0 0H 50 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-7. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (PD780122) F F F FH Special function registers (SFR) 256 x 8 bits F F 2 0H F F 1 FH F F 0 0H F E F FH F E E 0H F E D FH General-purpose registers 32 x 8 bits Register addressing Short direct addressing SFR addressing Internal high-speed RAM 512 x 8 bits F E 2 0H F E 1 FH F D 0 0H F C F FH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 4 0 0 0H 3 F F FH Internal ROM 16384 x 8 bits 0 0 0 0H User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 51 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-8. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (PD780123) F F F FH Special function registers (SFR) 256 x 8 bits F F 2 0H F F 1 FH F F 0 0H F E F FH F E E 0H F E D FH General-purpose registers 32 x 8 bits Register addressing Short direct addressing SFR addressing Internal high-speed RAM 1024 x 8 bits F E 2 0H F E 1 FH F B 0 0H F A F FH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 6 0 0 0H 5 F F FH Internal ROM 24576 x 8 bits 0 0 0 0H 52 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-9. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (PD780124) F F F FH Special function registers (SFR) 256 x 8 bits F F 2 0H F F 1 FH F F 0 0H F E F FH F E E 0H F E D FH General-purpose registers 32 x 8 bits Register addressing Short direct addressing SFR addressing Internal high-speed RAM 1024 x 8 bits F E 2 0H F E 1 FH F B 0 0H F A F FH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 8 0 0 0H 7 F F FH Internal ROM 32768 x 8 bits 0 0 0 0H User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 53 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-10. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (PD78F0124) F F F FH Special function registers (SFR) 256 x 8 bits F F 2 0H F F 1 FH F F 0 0H F E F FH F E E 0H F E D FH General-purpose registers 32 x 8 bits Register addressing Short direct addressing SFR addressing Internal high-speed RAM 1024 x 8 bits F E 2 0H F E 1 FH F B 0 0H F A F FH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 8 0 0 0H 7 F F FH Flash memory 32768 x 8 bits 0 0 0 0H 54 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.2 Processor Registers The 78K0/KD1 products incorporate the following processor registers. 3.2.1 Control registers The control registers control the program sequence, statuses and stack memory. The control registers consist of a program counter (PC), a program status word (PSW) and a stack pointer (SP). (1) Program counter (PC) The program counter is a 16-bit register that holds the address information of the next program to be executed. In normal operation, the PC is automatically incremented according to the number of bytes of the instruction to be fetched. When a branch instruction is executed, immediate data and register contents are set. RESET input sets the reset vector table values at addresses 0000H and 0001H to the program counter. Figure 3-11. Format of Program Counter 15 PC PC15 PC14 PC13 PC12 PC11 PC10 PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 0 PC0 (2) Program status word (PSW) The program status word is an 8-bit register consisting of various flags set/reset by instruction execution. Program status word contents are automatically stacked upon interrupt request generation or PUSH PSW instruction execution and are restored upon execution of the RETB, RETI and POP PSW instructions. RESET input sets the PSW to 02H. Figure 3-12. Format of Program Status Word 7 PSW IE Z RBS1 AC RBS0 0 ISP 0 CY (a) Interrupt enable flag (IE) This flag controls the interrupt request acknowledge operations of the CPU. When 0, the IE flag is set to the interrupt disabled (DI) state, and all maskable interrupts are disabled. Other interrupt requests are all disabled. When 1, the IE flag is set to the interrupt enabled (EI) state and interrupt request acknowledgement is controlled with an in-service priority flag (ISP), an interrupt mask flag for various interrupt sources, and a priority specification flag. The IE flag is reset (0) upon DI instruction execution or interrupt acknowledgement and is set (1) upon EI instruction execution. (b) Zero flag (Z) When the operation result is zero, this flag is set (1). It is reset (0) in all other cases. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 55 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE (c) Register bank select flags (RBS0 and RBS1) These are 2-bit flags to select one of the four register banks. In these flags, the 2-bit information that indicates the register bank selected by SEL RBn instruction execution is stored. (d) Auxiliary carry flag (AC) If the operation result has a carry from bit 3 or a borrow at bit 3, this flag is set (1). It is reset (0) in all other cases. (e) In-service priority flag (ISP) This flag manages the priority of acknowledgeable maskable vectored interrupts. When this flag is 0, lowlevel vectored interrupt requests specified by a priority specification flag register (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, PR1H) (refer to 16.3 (3) Priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L)) can not be acknowledged. Actual request acknowledgement is controlled by the interrupt enable flag (IE). (f) Carry flag (CY) This flag stores overflow and underflow upon add/subtract instruction execution. It stores the shift-out value upon rotate instruction execution and functions as a bit accumulator during bit operation instruction execution. (3) Stack pointer (SP) This is a 16-bit register to hold the start address of the memory stack area. Only the internal high-speed RAM area can be set as the stack area. Figure 3-13. Format of Stack Pointer 15 SP SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 0 SP0 The SP is decremented ahead of write (save) to the stack memory and is incremented after read (restored) from the stack memory. Each stack operation saves/restores data as shown in Figures 3-14 and 3-15. Caution Since RESET input makes the SP contents undefined, be sure to initialize the SP before using the stack. 56 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-14. Data to Be Saved to Stack Memory (a) PUSH rp instruction (when SP = FEE0H) SP FEE0H FEE0H FEDFH Register pair higher Register pair lower SP FEDEH FEDEH (b) CALL, CALLF, CALLT instructions (when SP = FEE0H) SP FEE0H FEE0H FEDFH PC15 to PC8 PC7 to PC0 SP FEDEH FEDEH (c) Interrupt, BRK instructions (when SP = FEE0H) SP FEE0H FEE0H FEDFH FEDEH PSW PC15 to PC8 PC7 to PC0 SP FEDDH FEDDH User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 57 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-15. Data to Be Restored from Stack Memory (a) POP rp instruction (when SP = FEDEH) SP FEE0H FEE0H FEDFH Register pair higher Register pair lower SP FEDEH FEDEH (b) RET instruction (when SP = FEDEH) SP FEE0H FEE0H FEDFH PC15 to PC8 PC7 to PC0 SP FEDEH FEDEH (c) RETI, RETB instructions (when SP = FEDDH) SP FEE0H FEE0H FEDFH FEDEH PSW PC15 to PC8 PC7 to PC0 SP FEDDH FEDDH 58 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.2.2 General-purpose registers General-purpose registers are mapped at particular addresses (FEE0H to FEFFH) of the data memory. The general-purpose registers consists of 4 banks, each bank consisting of eight 8-bit registers (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, and H). Each register can be used as an 8-bit register, and two 8-bit registers can also be used in a pair as a 16-bit register (AX, BC, DE, and HL). These registers can be described in terms of function names (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H, AX, BC, DE, and HL) and absolute names (R0 to R7 and RP0 to RP3). Register banks to be used for instruction execution are set by the CPU control instruction (SEL RBn). Because of the 4-register bank configuration, an efficient program can be created by switching between a register for normal processing and a register for interrupts for each bank. Figure 3-16. Configuration of General-Purpose Registers (a) Absolute name 16-bit processing FEFFH R7 BANK0 FEF8H RP3 R6 R5 BANK1 FEF0H RP1 R2 R1 BANK3 FEE0H 15 0 7 0 RP0 R0 RP2 R4 R3 BANK2 FEE8H 8-bit processing (b) Function name 16-bit processing FEFFH H BANK0 FEF8H HL L D BANK1 FEF0H BC C A BANK3 FEE0H 15 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 8-bit processing DE E B BANK2 FEE8H AX X 0 7 0 59 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.2.3 Special Function Registers (SFRs) Unlike a general-purpose register, each special function register has a special function. SFRs are allocated to the FF00H to FFFFH area. Special function registers can be manipulated like general-purpose registers, using operation, transfer and bit manipulation instructions. The manipulatable bit units, 1, 8, and 16, depend on the special function register type. Each manipulation bit unit can be specified as follows. * 1-bit manipulation Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 1-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfr.bit). This manipulation can also be specified with an address. * 8-bit manipulation Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 8-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfr). This manipulation can also be specified with an address. * 16-bit manipulation Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 16-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfrp). When specifying an address, describe an even address. Table 3-5 gives a list of the special function registers. The meanings of items in the table are as follows. * Symbol Symbol indicating the address of a special function register. It is a reserved word in the RA78K0, and is defined by the header file "sfrbit.h" in the CC78K0. When using the RA78K0, ID78K0-NS, ID78K0, or SM78K0, symbols can be written as an instruction operand. * R/W Indicates whether the corresponding special function register can be read or written. R/W: Read/write enable R: W: Read only Write only * Manipulatable bit units Indicates the manipulatable bit unit (1, 8, or 16). "-" indicates a bit unit for which manipulation is not possible. * After reset Indicates each register status upon RESET input. 60 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-5. Special Function Register List (1/3) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulatable Bit Unit 1 Bit FF00H FF01H FF02H FF03H FF06H FF07H FF08H FF09H FF0AH FF0BH FF0CH FF0DH FF0EH FF0FH FF10H FF11H FF12H FF13H FF14H FF15H FF16H FF17H FF18H FF19H FF1AH FF1BH FF1FH FF20H FF21H FF23H FF26H FF27H FF28H FF29H FF2AH FF2BH FF2CH FF2EH FF30H FF31H 8-bit timer counter 50 8-bit timer compare register 50 8-bit timer H compare register 00 8-bit timer H compare register 10 8-bit timer H compare register 01 8-bit timer H compare register 11 8-bit timer counter 51 Port mode register 0 Port mode register 1 Port mode register 3 Port mode register 6 Port mode register 7 A/D converter mode register Analog input channel specification register Power-fail comparison mode register Power-fail comparison threshold register Port mode register 12 Port mode register 14 Pull-up resistor option register 0 Pull-up resistor option register 1 TM50 CR50 CMP00 CMP10 CMP01 CMP11 TM51 PM0 PM1 PM3 PM6 PM7 ADM ADS PFM PFT PM12 PM14 PU0 PU1 R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH 00H 00H 00H 00H FFH FFH 00H 00H 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 CR010 R/W - - 0000H 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 CR000 R/W - - 0000H Receive buffer register 6 Transmit buffer register 6 Port register 12 Port register 13 Port register 14 Serial I/O shift register 10 16-bit timer counter 00 RXB6 TXB6 P12 P13 P14 SIO10 TM00 R R/W R/W R/W R/W R R - - - - - - - - - - - FFH FFH 00H 00H 00H 00H 0000H Port register 0 Port register 1 Port register 2 Port register 3 Port register 6 Port register 7 A/D conversion result register P0 P1 P2 P3 P6 P7 ADCR R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R - 8 Bits - 16 Bits - - - - - - After Reset 00H 00H Undefined 00H 00H 00H Undefined User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 61 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-5. Special Function Register List (2/3) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulatable Bit Unit 1 Bit FF33H FF37H FF3CH FF3EH FF40H FF41H FF43H FF48H FF49H FF4FH FF50H Pull-up resistor option register 3 Pull-up resistor option register 7 Pull-up resistor option register 12 Pull-up resistor option register 14 Clock output selection register 8-bit timer compare register 51 8-bit timer mode control register 51 External interrupt rising edge enable register External interrupt falling edge enable register Input switch control register Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 FF53H Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 FF55H Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 FF56H FF57H FF58H FF69H FF6AH FF6BH FF6CH FF6DH FF6EH FF6FH FF70H Clock selection register 6 Baud rate generator control register 6 Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 8-bit timer H mode register 0 Timer clock selection register 50 8-bit timer mode control register 50 8-bit timer H mode register 1 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 Key return mode register Watch timer operation mode register Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 FF71H FF72H FF73H Baud rate generator control register 0 Receive buffer register 0 Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 FF74H FF80H FF81H FF84H FF8CH FF98H FF99H FFA0H FFA1H Transmit shift register 0 Serial operation mode register 10 Serial clock selection register 10 Transmit buffer register 10 Timer clock selection register 51 Watchdog timer mode register Watchdog timer enable register Ring-OSC mode register Main clock mode register TXS0 CSIM10 CSIC10 SOTB10 TCL51 WDTM WDTE RCM MCM W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FFH 00H 00H Undefined 00H 67H 9AH 00H 00H BRGC0 RXB0 ASIS0 R/W R R - - - - - - 1FH FFH 00H CKSR6 BRGC6 ASICL6 TMHMD0 TCL50 TMC50 TMHMD1 TMCYC1 KRM WTM ASIM0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 00H FFH 16H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 01H ASIF6 R - - 00H ASIS6 R - - 00H PU3 PU7 PU12 PU14 CKS CR51 TMC51 EGP EGN ISC ASIM6 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W - 8 Bits 16 Bits - - - - - - - - - - - After Reset 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 01H 62 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-5. Special Function Register List (3/3) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulatable Bit Unit 1 Bit FFA2H FFA3H FFA4H FFA9H FFACH FFBAH FFBBH FFBCH FFBDH FFBEH FFBFH FFE0H FFE1H FFE2H FFE4H FFE5H FFE6H FFE8H FFE9H FFEAH FFF0H FFFBH Main OSC control register MOC R/W R R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W IF0L IF0H IF1L MK0 R/W R/W R/W MK0L R/W MK0H R/W MK1L PR0 R/W PR0L R/W PR0H R/W PR1L Note 2 After Reset 00H 00H 05H 00H 00H Note 1 8 Bits 16 Bits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Oscillation stabilization time counter status register OSTC Oscillation stabilization time select register Clock monitor mode register Reset control flag register 16-bit timer mode control register 00 Prescaler mode register 00 Capture/compare control register 00 16-bit timer output control register 00 Low-voltage detection register Low-voltage detection level selection register Interrupt request flag register 0L Interrupt request flag register 0H Interrupt request flag register 1L Interrupt mask flag register 0L Interrupt mask flag register 0H Interrupt mask flag register 1L Priority specification flag register 0L Priority specification flag register 0H Priority specification flag register 1L Internal memory size switching register Processor clock control register OSTS CLM RESF TMC00 PRM00 CRC00 TOC00 LVIM LVIS IF0 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H - 00H FFH FFH - FFH FFH FFH R/W R/W R/W - - - FFH CFH 00H IMS PCC Notes 1. 2. This value varies depending on the reset source. The initial value of IMS is fixed (IMS = CFH) in all products in the 78K0/KD1 regardless of the internal memory capacity. Therefore, set the following value to each product. Internal Memory Size Switching Register (IMS) PD780121 PD780122 PD780123 PD780124 PD78F0124 42H 44H C6H C8H Value corresponding to mask ROM version User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 63 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.3 Instruction Address Addressing An instruction address is determined by program counter (PC) contents and is normally incremented (+1 for each byte) automatically according to the number of bytes of an instruction to be fetched each time another instruction is executed. When a branch instruction is executed, the branch destination information is set to the PC and branched by the following addressing (for details of instructions, refer to 78K/0 Series Instructions User's Manual (U12326E)). 3.3.1 Relative addressing [Function] The value obtained by adding 8-bit immediate data (displacement value: jdisp8) of an instruction code to the start address of the following instruction is transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched. displacement value is treated as signed two's complement data (-128 to +127) and bit 7 becomes a sign bit. In other words, relative addressing consists of relative branching from the start address of the following instruction to the -128 to +127 range. This function is carried out when the BR $addr16 instruction or a conditional branch instruction is executed. [Illustration] 15 PC + 15 8 7 S jdisp8 15 PC 0 6 0 0 ... PC indicates the start address of the instruction after the BR instruction. The When S = 0, all bits of are 0. When S = 1, all bits of are 1. 64 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.3.2 Immediate addressing [Function] Immediate data in the instruction word is transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched. This function is carried out when the CALL !addr16 or BR !addr16 or CALLF !addr11 instruction is executed. CALL !addr16 and BR !addr16 instructions can be branched to the entire memory space. The CALLF !addr11 instruction is branched to the 0800H to 0FFFH area. [Illustration] In the case of CALL !addr16 and BR !addr16 instructions 7 CALL or BR Low Addr. High Addr. 0 15 PC 87 0 In the case of CALLF !addr11 instruction 76 fa10-8 fa7-0 4 3 CALLF 0 15 PC 0 0 0 0 11 10 1 87 0 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 65 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.3.3 Table indirect addressing [Function] Table contents (branch destination address) of the particular location to be addressed by bits 1 to 5 of the immediate data of an operation code are transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched. This function is carried out when the CALLT [addr5] instruction is executed. This instruction references the address stored in the memory table from 40H to 7FH, and allows branching to the entire memory space. [Illustration] 7 Operation code 1 6 1 5 ta4-0 1 0 1 15 Effective address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 1 5 10 0 7 Memory (Table) Low Addr. 0 Effective address+1 High Addr. 15 PC 8 7 0 3.3.4 Register addressing [Function] Register pair (AX) contents to be specified with an instruction word are transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched. This function is carried out when the BR AX instruction is executed. [Illustration] 7 rp A 0 7 X 0 15 PC 8 7 0 66 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4 Operand Address Addressing The following methods are available to specify the register and memory (addressing) to undergo manipulation during instruction execution. 3.4.1 Implied addressing [Function] The register that functions as an accumulator (A and AX) among the general-purpose registers is automatically (implicitly) addressed. Of the 78K0/KD1 instruction words, the following instructions employ implied addressing. Instruction MULU DIVUW ADJBA/ADJBS ROR4/ROL4 Register to Be Specified by Implied Addressing A register for multiplicand and AX register for product storage AX register for dividend and quotient storage A register for storage of numeric values that become decimal correction targets A register for storage of digit data that undergoes digit rotation [Operand format] Because implied addressing can be automatically employed with an instruction, no particular operand format is necessary. [Description example] In the case of MULU X With an 8-bit x 8-bit multiply instruction, the product of A register and X register is stored in AX. In this example, the A and AX registers are specified by implied addressing. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 67 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.2 Register addressing [Function] The general-purpose register to be specified is accessed as an operand with the register bank select flags (RBS0 to RBS1) and the register specify codes (Rn and RPn) of an operation code. Register addressing is carried out when an instruction with the following operand format is executed. When an 8-bit register is specified, one of the eight registers is specified with 3 bits in the operation code. [Operand format] Identifier r rp Description X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H AX, BC, DE, HL `r' and `rp' can be described by absolute names (R0 to R7 and RP0 to RP3) as well as function names (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H, AX, BC, DE, and HL). [Description example] MOV A, C; when selecting C register as r Operation code 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 Register specify code INCW DE; when selecting DE register pair as rp Operation code 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Register specify code 68 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.3 Direct addressing [Function] The memory to be manipulated is directly addressed with immediate data in an instruction word becoming an operand address. [Operand format] Identifier addr16 Description Label or 16-bit immediate data [Description example] MOV A, !0FE00H; when setting !addr16 to FE00H Operation code 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 OP code 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 FEH [Illustration] 7 OP code addr16 (lower) addr16 (upper) 0 Memory User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 69 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.4 Short direct addressing [Function] The memory to be manipulated in the fixed space is directly addressed with 8-bit data in an instruction word. This addressing is applied to the 256-byte space FE20H to FF1FH. Internal RAM and special function registers (SFRs) are mapped at FE20H to FEFFH and FF00H to FF1FH, respectively. The SFR area (FF00H to FF1FH) where short direct addressing is applied is a part of the overall SFR area. Ports that are frequently accessed in a program and compare and capture registers of the timer/event counter are mapped in this area, allowing SFRs to be manipulated with a small number of bytes and clocks. When 8-bit immediate data is at 20H to FFH, bit 8 of an effective address is cleared to 0. When it is at 00H to 1FH, bit 8 is set to 1. Refer to the [Illustration]. [Operand format] Identifier saddr saddrp Description Immediate data that indicate label or FE20H to FF1FH Immediate data that indicate label or FE20H to FF1FH (even address only) [Description example] MOV 0FE30H, A; when transferring value of A register to saddr (FE30H) Operation code 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 OP code 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 30H (saddr-offset) [Illustration] 7 OP code saddr-offset 0 Short direct memory 15 Effective address 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 87 0 When 8-bit immediate data is 20H to FFH, = 0 When 8-bit immediate data is 00H to 1FH, = 1 70 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.5 Special function register (SFR) addressing [Function] A memory-mapped special function register (SFR) is addressed with 8-bit immediate data in an instruction word. This addressing is applied to the 240-byte spaces FF00H to FFCFH and FFE0H to FFFFH. However, the SFRs mapped at FF00H to FF1FH can be accessed with short direct addressing. [Operand format] Identifier sfr sfrp Description Special function register name 16-bit manipulatable special function register name (even address only) [Description example] MOV PM0, A; when selecting PM0 (FF20H) as sfr Operation code 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 OP code 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 20H (sfr-offset) [Illustration] 7 OP code sfr-offset 0 SFR 15 Effective address 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 87 1 0 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 71 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.6 Register indirect addressing [Function] Register pair contents specified by a register pair specify code in an instruction word and by a register bank select flag (RBS0 and RBS1) serve as an operand address for addressing the memory. This addressing can be carried out for all the memory spaces. [Operand format] Identifier - [DE], [HL] Description [Description example] MOV A, [DE]; when selecting [DE] as register pair Operation code 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 [Illustration] 16 DE D 87 E The memory address specified with the register pair DE 0 7 The contents of the memory addressed are transferred. 7 A 0 Memory 0 72 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.7 Based addressing [Function] 8-bit immediate data is added as offset data to the contents of the base register, that is, the HL register pair in the register bank specified by the register bank select flag (RBS0 and RBS1), and the sum is used to address the memory. Addition is performed by expanding the offset data as a positive number to 16 bits. A carry from the 16th bit is ignored. This addressing can be carried out for all the memory spaces. [Operand format] Identifier - [HL + byte] Description [Description example] MOV A, [HL + 10H]; when setting byte to 10H Operation code 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 [Illustration] 16 HL H 87 L +10 0 7 The contents of the memory addressed are transferred. 7 A 0 Memory 0 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 73 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.8 Based indexed addressing [Function] The B or C register contents specified in an instruction word are added to the contents of the base register, that is, the HL register pair in the register bank specified by the register bank select flag (RBS0 and RBS1), and the sum is used to address the memory. Addition is performed by expanding the B or C register contents as a positive number to 16 bits. A carry from the 16th bit is ignored. This addressing can be carried out for all the memory spaces. [Operand format] Identifier - [HL + B], [HL + C] Description [Description example] In the case of MOV A, [HL + B] (selecting B register) Operation code 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 [Illustration] 16 HL H + 7 B 0 8 7 L 0 7 The contents of the memory addressed are transferred. 7 A 0 Memory 0 74 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.9 Stack addressing [Function] The stack area is indirectly addressed with the stack pointer (SP) contents. This addressing method is automatically employed when the PUSH, POP, subroutine call and return instructions are executed or the register is saved/reset upon generation of an interrupt request. With stack addressing, only the internal high-speed RAM area can be accessed. [Description example] In the case of PUSH DE (saving DE register) Operation code 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 [Illustration] 7 SP FEE0H FEE0H FEDFH SP FEDEH FEDEH D E Memory 0 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 75 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.1 Port Functions There are two types of pin I/O buffer power supplies: AVREF and EVDD. The relationship between these power supplies and the pins is shown below. Table 4-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies Power Supply AVREF EVDD Corresponding Pins P20 to P27 Port pins other than P20 to P27 78K0/KD1 products are provided with the ports shown in Figure 4-1, which enable variety of control operations. The functions of each port are shown in Table 4-2. In addition to the function as digital I/O ports, these ports have several alternate functions. For details of the alternate functions, refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS. Figure 4-1. Port Types P30 Port 3 P33 P60 Port 6 P63 P70 P00 Port 0 P03 P10 Port 1 P17 Port 7 P20 P77 Port 12 Port 13 Port 14 P120 P130 P140 P27 Port 2 76 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-2. Port Functions Pin Name P00 P01 P02 P03 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P20 to P27 Input Port 2. 8-bit input-only port. P30 to P32 I/O Port 3. 4-bit I/O port. Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. P33 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P60 to P63 I/O Port 6. 4-bit I/O port (N-ch open drain). Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a mask option only for mask ROM versions. P70 to P77 I/O Port 7. 8-bit I/O port. Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P120 I/O Port 12. 1-bit I/O port. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P130 Output Port 13. 1-bit output-only port. P140 I/O Port 14. 1-bit I/O port. Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Input PCL/INTP6 Output - Input INTP0 Input KR0 to KR7 Input - INTP4/TI51/TO51 Input INTP1 to INTP3 Input I/O I/O I/O Port 0. 4-bit I/O port. Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Port 1. 8-bit I/O port. Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Input Function After Reset Input Alternate Function TI000 TI010/TO00 - - SCK10/TxD0 SI10/RxD0 SO10 TxD6 RxD6 TOH0 TOH1/INTP5 TI50/TO50 ANI0 to ANI7 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 77 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2 Port Configuration Ports include the following hardware. Table 4-3. Port Configuration Item Control registers Configuration Port mode register (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM6, PM7, PM12, PM14) Port register (P0 to P3, P6, P7, P12 to P14) Pull-up resistor option register (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, PU12, PU14) Port Pull-up resistor Total: 39 (CMOS I/O: 26, CMOS input: 8, CMOS output: 1, N-ch open drain I/O: 4) * Mask ROM version Total: 30 (software control: 26, mask option specification: 4) * Flash memory version: Total: 26 78 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.1 Port 0 Port 0 is a 4-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 0 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 0 (PM0). When the P00 to P03 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0). This port can also be used for timer I/O. RESET input sets port 0 to input mode. Figures 4-2 to 4-4 show block diagrams of port 0. Figure 4-2. Block Diagram of P00 and P03 EVDD WRPU PU0 PU00, PU03 P-ch Alternate function RD Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P00, P03) WRPM PM0 PM00, PM03 Selector P00/TI000, P03 PU0: PM0: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 0 Port mode register 0 Read signal WRxx: Write signal User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 79 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-3. Block Diagram of P01 EVDD WRPU PU0 PU01 P-ch Alternate function RD Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P01) WRPM PM0 PM01 Selector P01/TI010/TO00 Alternate function PU0: PM0: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 0 Port mode register 0 Read signal WRxx: Write signal 80 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-4. Block Diagram of P02 EVDD WRPU PU0 PU02 RD P-ch Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P02) WRPM PM0 PM02 Selector P02 Alternate function PU0: PM0: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 0 Port mode register 0 Read signal WRxx: Write signal User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 81 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.2 Port 1 Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 1 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 1 (PM1). When the P10 to P17 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1). This port can also be used for external interrupt request input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, and timer I/O. RESET input sets port 1 to input mode. Figures 4-5 to 4-9 show block diagrams of port 1. Caution When P10/SCK10/TxD0, P11/SI10/RxD0, and P12/SO10 are used as general-purpose ports, do not write to serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10). Figure 4-5. Block Diagram of P10 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU10 P-ch Alternate function RD Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P10) WRPM PM1 PM10 Selector P10/SCK10/TxD0 Alternate function PU1: PM1: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 1 Port mode register 1 Read signal WRxx: Write signal 82 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-6. Block Diagram of P11 and P14 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU11, PU14 P-ch Alternate function RD Internal bus Selector WRPORT Output latch (P11, P14) WRPM PM1 PM11, PM14 P11/SI10/RxD0, P14/RxD6 PU1: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 1 Read signal PM1: Port mode register 1 WRxx: Write signal User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 83 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-7. Block Diagram of P12 and P15 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU12, PU15 RD P-ch Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P12, P15) WRPM PM1 PM12, PM15 Selector P12/SO10, P15/TOH0 Alternate function PU1: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 1 Read signal PM1: Port mode register 1 WRxx: Write signal 84 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-8. Block Diagram of P13 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU13 RD P-ch Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P13) WRPM PM1 PM13 Selector P13/TxD6 Alternate function PU1: PM1: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 1 Port mode register 1 Read signal WRxx: Write signal User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 85 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-9. Block Diagram of P16 and P17 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU16, PU17 P-ch Alternate function RD Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P16, P17) WRPM PM1 PM16, PM17 Selector P16/TOH1/INTP5, P17/TI50/TO50 Alternate function PU1: PM1: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 1 Port mode register 1 Read signal WRxx: Write signal 86 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.3 Port 2 Port 2 is an 8-bit input-only port. This port can also be used for A/D converter analog input. Figure 4-10 shows a block diagram of port 2. Figure 4-10. Block Diagram of P20 to P27 RD Internal bus A/D converter P20/ANI0 to P27/ANI7 RD: Read signal User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 87 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.4 Port 3 Port 3 is a 4-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 3 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 3 (PM3). When used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3). This port can also be used for external interrupt request input. RESET input sets port 3 to input mode. Figures 4-11 and 4-12 show block diagrams of port 3. Figure 4-11. Block Diagram of P30 to P32 EVDD WRPU PU3 PU30 to PU32 P-ch Alternate function RD Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P30 to P32) WRPM PM3 PM30 to PM32 Selector P30/INTP1 to P32/INTP3 PU3: PM3: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 3 Port mode register 3 Read signal WRxx: Write signal 88 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-12. Block Diagram of P33 EVDD WRPU PU3 PU33 P-ch Alternate function RD Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P33) WRPM PM3 PM33 Selector P33/INTP4/TI51/TO51 Alternate function PU3: PM3: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 3 Port mode register 3 Read signal WRxx: Write signal User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 89 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.5 Port 6 Port 6 is a 4-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 6 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 6 (PM6). This port has the following functions for pull-up resistors. These functions differ depending on whether the product is a mask ROM version or a flash memory version. Table 4-4. Pull-up Resistor of Port 6 Pins P60 to P63 Mask ROM version An on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by mask option Flash memory version On-chip pull-up resistors are not provided The P60 to P63 pins are N-ch open-drain pins. RESET input sets port 6 to input mode. Figure 4-13 shows a block diagram of port 6. Figure 4-13. Block Diagram of P60 to P63 EVDD RD Mask option resistor Mask ROM versions only No pull-up resistor for flash memory versions Selector Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P60 to P63) P60 to P63 WRPM PM6 PM60 to PM63 PM6: RD: Port mode register 6 Read signal WRxx: Write signal 90 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.6 Port 7 Port 7 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 7 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 7 (PM7). When the P70 to P77 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7). This port can also be used for key return input. RESET input sets port 7 to input mode. Figure 4-14 shows a block diagram of port 7. Figure 4-14. Block Diagram of P70 to P77 EVDD WRPU PU7 PU70 to PU77 P-ch Alternate function RD Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P70 to P77) WRPM PM7 PM70 to PM77 Selector P70/KR0 to P77/KR7 PU7: PM7: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 7 Port mode register 7 Read signal WRxx: Write signal User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 91 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.7 Port 12 Port 12 is a 1-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 12 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 12 (PM12). When used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 12 (PU12). This port can also be used for external interrupt input. RESET input sets port 12 to input mode. Figure 4-15 shows a block diagram of port 12. Figure 4-15. Block Diagram of P120 EVDD WRPU PU12 PU120 P-ch Alternate function RD Internal bus Selector WRPORT Output latch (P120) WRPM PM12 PM120 P120/INTP0 PU12: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 12 Read signal PM12: Port mode register 12 WRxx: Write signal 92 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.8 Port 13 Port 13 is a 1-bit output-only port. Figure 4-16 shows a block diagram of port 13. Figure 4-16. Block Diagram of P130 RD Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P130) P130 RD: Read signal WDxx: Write signal Remark When reset is effected, P130 outputs a low level. If P130 is set to output a high level immediately after reset is released, the output signal of P130 can be dummy-output as the reset signal to the CPU. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 93 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.9 Port 14 Port 14 is a 1-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 14 can be set to the input mode or output mode using port mode register 14 (PM14). When the P140 pin is used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 14 (PU14). This port can also be used for external interrupt request input and clock output. RESET input sets port 14 to input mode. Figure 4-17 shows a block diagram of port 14. Figure 4-17. Block Diagram of P140 EVDD WRPU PU14 PU140 P-ch Alternate function RD Internal bus WRPORT Output latch (P140) WRPM PM14 PM140 Selector P140/PCL/INTP6 Alternate function PU14: RD: Pull-up resistor option register 14 Read signal PM14: Port mode register 14 WRxx: Write signal 94 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function Port functions are controlled by the following three types of registers. * Port mode registers (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM6, PM7, PM12, PM14) * Port registers (P0 to P3, P6, P7, P12 to P14) * Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, PU12, PU14) (1) Port mode registers (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM6, PM7, PM12, and PM14) These registers specify input or output mode for the port in 1-bit units. These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets these registers to FFH. When port pins are used as alternate-function pins, set the port mode register and output latch as shown in Table 4-5. Figure 4-18. Format of Port Mode Register Symbol PM0 7 1 7 PM1 PM17 7 PM3 1 7 PM6 1 7 PM7 PM77 7 PM12 1 7 PM14 1 6 1 6 PM16 6 1 6 1 6 PM76 6 1 6 1 5 1 5 PM15 5 1 5 1 5 PM75 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 PM14 4 1 4 1 4 PM74 4 1 4 1 3 PM03 3 PM13 3 PM33 3 PM63 3 PM73 3 1 3 1 2 PM02 2 PM12 2 PM32 2 PM62 2 PM72 2 1 2 1 1 PM01 1 PM11 1 PM31 1 PM61 1 PM71 1 1 1 1 0 PM00 0 PM10 0 PM30 0 PM60 0 PM70 0 PM120 0 PM140 FF2EH FFH R/W FF2CH FFH R/W FF27H FFH R/W FF26H FFH R/W FF23H FFH R/W FF21H FFH R/W Address FF20H After reset FFH R/W R/W PMmn Pmn pin I/O mode selection (m = 0, 1, 3, 6, 7, 12, 14; n = 0 to 7) 0 1 Output mode (output buffer on) Input mode (output buffer off) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 95 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-5. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function Pin Name Alternate Function Function Name P00 P01 TI000 TI010 TO00 P10 SCK10 I/O Input Input Output Input Output TxD0 P11 SI10 RxD0 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 SO10 TxD6 RxD6 TOH0 TOH1 INTP5 P17 TI50 TO50 P30 to P32 P33 INTP1 to INTP3 INTP4 TI51 TO51 P70 to P77 P120 P140 KR0 to KR7 INTP0 PCL INTP6 Output Input Input Output Output Input Output Output Input Input Output Input Input Input Output Input Input Output Input 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 x x 0 x 1 1 x x 0 1 x 0 0 x x 0 x x x 0 x x 0 x PMxx Pxx Remark x: Pxx: Don't care Port output latch PMxx: Port mode register 96 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (2) Port registers (P0 to P3, P6, P7, P12 to P14) These registers write the data that is output from the chip when data is output from a port. If the data is read in the input mode, the pin level is read. If it is read in the output mode, the value of the output latch is read. These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears these registers to 00H (but P2 is undefined). Figure 4-19. Format of Port Register Symbol P0 7 0 7 P1 P17 7 P2 P27 7 P3 0 7 P6 0 7 P7 P77 7 P12 0 7 P13 0 7 P14 0 6 0 6 P16 6 P26 6 0 6 0 6 P76 6 0 6 0 6 0 5 0 5 P15 5 P25 5 0 5 0 5 P75 5 0 5 0 5 0 4 0 4 P14 4 P24 4 0 4 0 4 P74 4 0 4 0 4 0 3 P03 3 P13 3 P23 3 P33 3 P63 3 P73 3 0 3 0 3 0 2 P02 2 P12 2 P22 2 P32 2 P62 2 P72 2 0 2 0 2 0 1 P01 1 P11 1 P21 1 P31 1 P61 1 P71 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 P00 0 P10 0 P20 0 P30 0 P60 0 P70 0 P120 0 P130 0 P140 FF0EH 00H (output latch) R/W FF0DH 00H (output latch) R/W FF0CH 00H (output latch) R/W FF07H 00H (output latch) R/W FF06H 00H (output latch) R/W FF03H 00H (output latch) R/W FF02H Undefined R FF01H 00H (output latch) R/W Address FF00H After reset 00H (output latch) R/W R/W Pmn m = 0 to 3, 6, 7, 12 to 14; n = 0 to 7 Output data control (in output mode) Input data read (in input mode) Input low level Input high level 0 1 Output 0 Output 1 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 97 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (3) Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, PU12, and PU14) These registers specify whether the on-chip pull-up resistors of P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, or P140 are to be used or not. On-chip pull-up resistors can be used in 1-bit units only for the bits set to input mode of the pins to which the use of an on-chip pull-up resistor has been specified in PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, PU12, and PU14. On-chip pull-up resistors cannot be connected to bits set to output mode and bits used as alternate-function output pins, regardless of the settings of PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, PU12, and PU14. These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears these registers to 00H. Caution Use of a pull-up resistor can be specified for P60 to P63 pins by a mask option only in the mask ROM versions. Figure 4-20. Format of Pull-up Resistor Option Register Symbol PU0 7 0 7 PU1 PU17 7 PU3 0 7 PU7 PU77 7 PU12 0 7 PU14 0 6 0 6 PU16 6 0 6 PU76 6 0 6 0 5 0 5 PU15 5 0 5 PU75 5 0 5 0 4 0 4 PU14 4 0 4 PU74 4 0 4 0 3 PU03 3 PU13 3 PU33 3 PU73 3 0 3 0 2 PU02 2 PU12 2 PU32 2 PU72 2 0 2 0 1 PU01 1 PU11 1 PU31 1 PU71 1 0 1 0 0 PU00 0 PU10 0 PU30 0 PU70 0 PU120 0 PU140 FF3EH 00H R/W FF3CH 00H R/W FF37H 00H R/W FF33H 00H R/W FF31H 00H R/W Address FF30H After reset 00H R/W R/W PUmn Pmn pin on-chip pull-up resistor selection (m = 0, 1, 3, 7, 12, 14; n = 0 to 7) 0 1 On-chip pull-up resistor not connected On-chip pull-up resistor connected 98 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.4 Port Function Operations Port operations differ depending on whether the input or output mode is set, as shown below. Caution In the case of a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction, although a single bit is manipulated, the port is accessed as an 8-bit unit. Therefore, on a port with a mixture of input and output pins, the output latch contents for pins specified as input are undefined, even for bits other than the manipulated bit. 4.4.1 Writing to I/O port (1) Output mode A value is written to the output latch by a transfer instruction, and the output latch contents are output from the pin. Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again. The data of the output latch is cleared by reset. (2) Input mode A value is written to the output latch by a transfer instruction, but since the output buffer is off, the pin status does not change. Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again. 4.4.2 Reading from I/O port (1) Output mode The output latch contents are read by a transfer instruction. The output latch contents do not change. (2) Input mode The pin status is read by a transfer instruction. The output latch contents do not change. 4.4.3 Operations on I/O port (1) Output mode An operation is performed on the output latch contents, and the result is written to the output latch. The output latch contents are output from the pins. Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again. The data of the output latch is cleared by reset. (2) Input mode The pin level is read and an operation is performed on its contents. The result of the operation is written to the output latch, but since the output buffer is off, the pin status does not change. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 99 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.1 Functions of Clock Generator The clock generator generates the clock to be supplied to the CPU and peripheral hardware. The following three system clock oscillators are available. * X1 oscillator The X1 oscillator oscillates a clock of fXP = 2.0 to 10.0 MHz. Oscillation can be stopped by executing the STOP instruction or setting the main OSC control register (MOC) and processor clock control register (PCC). * Ring-OSC oscillator The Ring-OSC oscillator oscillates a clock of fR = 240 kHz (TYP.). Oscillation can be stopped by setting the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) when "Can be stopped by software" is set by a mask option and the X1 input clock is used as the CPU clock. * Subsystem clock oscillator The subsystem clock oscillator oscillates a clock of fXT = 32.768 kHz. Oscillation cannot be stopped. When subsystem clock oscillator is not used, setting not to use the on-chip feedback resistor is possible using the processor clock control register (PCC), and the operating current can be reduced in the STOP mode. Remarks 1. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 2. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency 3. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency 5.2 Configuration of Clock Generator The clock generator includes the following hardware. Table 5-1. Configuration of Clock Generator Item Control registers Configuration Processor clock control register (PCC) Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) Main clock mode register (MCM) Main OSC control register (MOC) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) X1 oscillator Ring-OSC oscillator Subsystem clock oscillator Oscillator 100 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-1. Block Diagram of Clock Generator Internal bus Main OSC control register (MOC) MCC CLS MSTOP Main clock mode register (MCM) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 3 4 STOP X1 oscillation stabilization time counter Oscillation stabilization MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST time counter 11 13 14 15 16 status register (OSTC) Controller Control signal Processor clock control register (PCC) CLS CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 MCS MCM0 C P U CPU clock (fCPU) X1 X1 oscillator X2 fXP fX Operation clock switch fX 2 Ring-OSC oscillator Prescaler fX 22 fX 23 fX 24 Selector fCPU fR Watch clock, clock output function Prescaler Clock to peripheral hardware Mask option 1: Cannot be stopped 0. Can be stopped RSTOP Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) Internal bus Prescaler 8-bit timer H1, watchdog timer 1/2 fXT Subsystem clock oscillator XT1 XT2 FRC User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 101 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3 Registers Controlling Clock Generator The following six registers are used to control the clock generator. * Processor clock control register (PCC) * Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) * Main clock mode register (MCM) * Main OSC control register (MOC) * Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) * Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) (1) Processor clock control register (PCC) The PCC register is used to select the CPU clock, the division ratio, main system clock oscillator operation/stop and whether to use the on-chip feedback resistorNote of the subsystem clock oscillator. The PCC is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears PCC to 00H. Note The feedback resistor is required to control the bias point of the oscillation waveform so that the bias point is in the middle of the power supply voltage. When the subsystem clock is not used, the operating current in the STOP mode can be reduced by setting bit 6 (FRC) of PCC to 1 (see Figure 5-11 Subsystem Clock Feedback Resistor). 102 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-2. Format of Processor Clock Control Register (PCC) Address: FFFBH Symbol PCC After reset: 00H <6> FRC R/W Note 1 <7> MCC MCC 0 1 FRC 0 1 CLS 0 1 CSS Note 4 <5> CLS <4> CSS 3 0 2 PCC2 Note 2 1 PCC1 0 PCC0 Control of X1 oscillator operation Oscillation possible Oscillation stopped Subsystem clock feedback resistor selection On-chip feedback resistor used On-chip feedback resistor not used Note 3 CPU clock status X1 input clock or Ring-OSC clock Subsystem clock PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CPU Clock (fCPU) Selection MCM0 = 0 MCM0 = 1 fXP fXP/2 2 3 4 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 fX fX/2 fX/2 fX/2 fX/2 2 3 4 fR fR/2 fR/2 fR/2 fR/2 fXP/2 fXP/2 fXP/2 1 0 0 0 0 1 fXT/2 Other than above Setting prohibited Notes 1. 2. Bit 5 is read-only. When the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock, MCC should be used to stop the X1 oscillator operation. When the CPU is operating on the Ring-OSC clock, use bit 7 (MSTOP) of the main OSC control register (MOC) to stop the X1 oscillator operation (this cannot be set by MCC). A STOP instruction should not be used. 3. 4. This bit can be set to 1 only when the subsystem clock is not used. Be sure to switch CSS from 1 to 0 when bits 1 (MCS) and 0 (MCM0) of the main clock mode register (MCM) are 1. Caution Be sure to set bit 3 to 0. Remarks 1. MCM0: Bit 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM) 2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency (X1 input clock oscillation frequency or Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency) 3. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency 4. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 5. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 103 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR The fastest instruction can be executed in 2 clocks of the CPU clock in the 78K0/KD1. Therefore, the relationship between the CPU clock (fCPU) and minimum instruction execution time is as shown in the Table 5-2. Table 5-2. Relationship Between CPU Clock and Minimum Instruction Execution Time CPU Clock (fCPU) X1 Input Clock 0.2 s 0.4 s 2 Note Minimum Instruction Execution Time: 2/fCPU Ring-OSC Clock 8.3 s (TYP.) 16.6 s (TYP.) 33.2 s (TYP.) 66.4 s (TYP.) 132.8 s (TYP.) - - 122.1 s Note Subsystem Clock (at 32.768 kHz Operation) - - - - - (at 10 MHz Operation) fX fX/2 fX/2 fX/2 fX/2 (at 240 kHz (TYP.) Operation) 0.8 s 1.6 s 3.2 s 3 4 fXT/2 Note The main clock mode register (MCM) is used to set the CPU clock (X1 input clock/Ring-OSC clock) (see Figure 5-4). (2) Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) This register sets the operation mode of Ring-OSC. This register is valid when "Can be stopped by software" is set for Ring-OSC by a mask option, and the X1 input clock or subsystem clock is selected as the CPU clock. If "Cannot be stopped" is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option, settings for this register are invalid. RCM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 5-3. Format of Ring-OSC Mode Register (RCM) Address: FFA0H Symbol RCM 7 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 <0> RSTOP RSTOP 0 1 Ring-OSC oscillating Ring-OSC stopped Ring-OSC oscillating/stopped Caution Make sure that the bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register (MCM) is 1 before setting RSTOP. 104 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR (3) Main clock mode register (MCM) This register sets the CPU clock (X1 input clock/Ring-OSC clock). MCM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 5-4. Format of Main Clock Mode Register (MCM) Address: FFA1H Symbol MCM 7 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 R/W Note 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 <1> MCS <0> MCM0 MCS 0 1 Operates with Ring-OSC clock Operates with X1 input clock CPU clock status MCM0 0 1 Ring-OSC clock X1 input clock Selection of clock supplied to CPU Note Bit 1 is read-only. Cautions 1. When Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the divided clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator output (fX) is supplied to the peripheral hardware (fX = 240 kHz (TYP.)). Operation of the peripheral hardware with Ring-OSC clock cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, when Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock supplied to the CPU, do not use peripheral hardware. In addition, stop the peripheral hardware before switching the clock supplied to the CPU from the X1 input clock to the Ring-OSC clock. Note, however, that the following peripheral hardware can be used when the CPU operates on the Ring-OSC clock. * Watchdog timer * Clock monitor * 8-bit timer H1 when fR/27 is selected as count clock * Peripheral hardware selecting external clock as the clock source (Except when external count clock of TM00 is selected (TI000 valid edge)) 2. Set MCS = 1 and MCM0 = 1 before switching subsystem clock operation to X1 input clock operation (bit 4 (CSS) of the processor clock control register (PCC) is changed from 1 to 0). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 105 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR (4) Main OSC control register (MOC) This register selects the operation mode of the X1 input clock. This register is used to stop the X1 oscillator operation when the CPU is operating with the Ring-OSC clock. Therefore, this register is valid only when the CPU is operating with the Ring-OSC clock. MOC can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 5-5. Format of Main OSC Control Register (MOC) Address: FFA2H Symbol MOC After reset: 00H <7> MSTOP 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 MSTOP 0 1 X1 oscillator operating X1 oscillator stopped Control of X1 oscillator operation Cautions 1. Make sure that bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register (MCM) is 0 before setting MSTOP. 2. To stop X1 oscillation when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock, set bit 7 (MCC) of the processor clock control register (PCC) to 1 (setting by MSTOP is not possible). 106 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR (5) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) This is the status register of the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time counter. If the Ring-OSC clock is used as the CPU clock, the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time can be checked. OSTC can be read by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When reset is released (reset by RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT), the STOP instruction, MSTOP = 1, and MCC = 1 clear OSTC to 00H. Figure 5-6. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC) Address: FFA3H Symbol OSTC 7 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 R 5 0 4 MOST11 3 MOST13 2 MOST14 1 MOST15 0 MOST16 MOST11 1 1 1 1 1 MOST13 0 1 1 1 1 MOST14 0 0 1 1 1 MOST15 0 0 0 1 1 MOST16 0 0 0 0 1 Oscillation stabilization time status 2 /fXP min. (204.8 s min.) 11 2 /fXP min. (819.2 s min.) 13 2 /fXP min. (1.64 ms min.) 2 /fXP min. (3.27 ms min.) 2 /fXP min. (6.55 ms min.) 16 15 14 Cautions 1. After the above time has elapsed, the bits are set to 1 in order from MOST11 and remain 1. 2. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is being used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows. * Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time Oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS. Note, therefore, that only the status up to the oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS is set to OSTC after STOP mode is released. 3. The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after STOP mode release until clock oscillation starts ("a" below) regardless of whether STOP mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation. STOP mode release X1 pin voltage waveform a Remarks 1. Values in parentheses are reference values for operation with fXP = 10 MHz. 2. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 107 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR (6) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) This register is used to select the X1 oscillation stabilization wait time when STOP mode is released. The wait time set by OSTS is valid only after STOP mode is released with the X1 input clock selected as CPU clock. After STOP mode is released with Ring-OSC selected as CPU clock, the oscillation stabilization time must be confirmed by OSTC. OSTS can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets OSTS to 05H. Figure 5-7. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS) Address: FFA4H Symbol OSTS 7 0 After reset: 05H 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 OSTS2 1 OSTS1 0 OSTS0 OSTS2 0 0 0 1 1 OSTS1 0 1 1 0 0 Other than above OSTS0 1 0 1 0 1 11 Oscillation stabilization time selection 2 /fXP (204.8 s) 2 /fXP (819.2 s) 13 2 /fXP (1.64 ms) 2 /fXP (3.27 ms) 2 /fXP (6.55 ms) Setting prohibited 16 15 14 Cautions 1. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is being used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows. * Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time Oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS. Note, therefore, that only the status up to the oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS is set to OSTC after STOP mode is released. 2. The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after STOP mode release until clock oscillation starts ("a" below) regardless of whether STOP mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation. STOP mode release X1 pin voltage waveform a Remarks 1. Values in parentheses are reference values for operation with fXP = 10 MHz. 2. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 108 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.4 System Clock Oscillator 5.4.1 X1 oscillator The X1 oscillator oscillates with a crystal resonator or ceramic resonator (Standard: 8.38 MHz, 10 MHz when REGC pin is directly connected to VDD) connected to the X1 and X2 pins. An external clock can be input to the X1 oscillator when the REGC pin is directly connected to VDD. In this case, input the clock signal to the X1 pin and input the inverse signal to the X2 pin. Figure 5-8 shows the examples of the external circuit of the X1 oscillator. Figure 5-8. Examples of External Circuit of X1 Oscillator (a) Crystal, ceramic oscillation VSS X1 (b) External clock External clock X1 X2 Crystal resonator or ceramic resonator X2 5.4.2 Subsystem clock oscillator The subsystem clock oscillator oscillates with a crystal resonator (Standard: 32.768 kHz) connected to the XT1 and XT2 pins. External clocks can be input to the subsystem clock oscillator when the REGC pin is directly connected to VDD. In this case, input the clock signal to the XT1 pin and the inverse signal to the XT2 pin. Figure 5-9 shows the examples of the external circuit of the subsystem clock oscillator. Figure 5-9. Examples of External Circuit of Subsystem Clock Oscillator (a) Crystal oscillation (b) External clock External clock VSS XT1 32.768 kHz XT2 XT1 XT2 Cautions are listed on the next page. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 109 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator and subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the Figure 5-10 to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. Note that the subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power consumption. Figure 5-10 shows examples of incorrect resonator connection. Figure 5-10. Examples of Incorrect Resonator Connection (1/2) (a) Too long wiring (b) Crossed signal line PORT VSS X1 X2 VSS X1 X2 Remark When using the subsystem clock, replace X1 and X2 with XT1 and XT2, respectively. Also, insert resistors in series on the XT2 side. 110 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-10. Examples of Incorrect Resonator Connection (2/2) (c) Wiring near high alternating current (d) Current flowing through ground line of oscillator (potential at points A, B, and C fluctuates) VDD Pmn VSS X1 X2 VSS X1 X2 High current A B High current C (e) Signals are fetched VSS X1 X2 Remark When using the subsystem clock, replace X1 and X2 with XT1 and XT2, respectively. Also, insert resistors in series on the XT2 side. Cautions 2. When X2 and XT1 are wired in parallel, the crosstalk noise of X2 may increase with XT1, resulting in malfunctioning. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 111 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.4.3 When subsystem clock is not used If it is not necessary to use the subsystem clock for low power consumption operations and watch operations, connect the XT1 and XT2 pins as follows. XT1: Connect directly to EVDD or VDD XT2: Leave open In this state, however, some current may leak via the on-chip feedback resistor of the subsystem clock oscillator when the X1 input clock and Ring-OSC clock stop. To minimize leakage current, the above on-chip feedback resistor can be set not to be used via bit 6 (FRC) of the processor clock control register (PCC). In this case also, connect the XT1 and XT2 pins as described above. Figure 5-11. Subsystem Clock Feedback Resistor FRC P-ch Feedback resistor XT1 XT2 Remark The feedback resistor is required to control the bias point of the oscillation waveform so that the bias point is in the middle of the power supply voltage. 5.4.4 Ring-OSC oscillator Ring-OSC oscillator is incorporated in the 78K0/KD1. "Can be stopped by software" or "Cannot be stopped" can be selected by a mask option. The Ring-OSC clock always oscillates after RESET release (240 kHz (TYP.)). 5.4.5 Prescaler The prescaler generates various clocks by dividing the X1 oscillator output when the X1 input clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU. Caution When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock supplied to the CPU, the prescaler generates various clocks by dividing the Ring-OSC oscillator output (fX = 240 kHz (TYP.)). 112 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.5 Clock Generator Operation The clock generator generates the following clocks and controls the operation modes of the CPU, such as standby mode. * X1 input clock fXP * Ring-OSC clock fR * Subsystem clock fXT * CPU clock fCPU * Clock to peripheral hardware The CPU starts operation when the on-chip Ring-OSC oscillator starts outputting after reset release in the 78K0/KD1, thus enabling the following. (1) Enhancement of security function When the X1 input clock is set as the CPU clock by the default setting, the device cannot operate if the X1 input clock is damaged or badly connected and therefore does not operate after reset is released. However, the start clock of the CPU is the on-chip Ring-OSC clock, so the device can be started by the Ring-OSC clock after reset release by the clock monitor (detection of X1 input clock stop). Consequently, the system can be safely shut down by performing a minimum operation, such as acknowledging a reset source by software or performing safety processing when there is a malfunction. (2) Improvement of performance Because the CPU can be started without waiting for the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time, the total performance can be improved. A timing diagram of the CPU default start using Ring-OSC is shown in Figure 5-12. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 113 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-12. Timing Diagram of CPU Default Start Using Ring-OSC X1 input clock (fXP) Ring-OSC clock (fR) Subsystem clock (fXT) RESET Switched by software CPU clock Operation stopped: 17/fR Ring-OSC clock X1 input clock X1 oscillation stabilization time: 211/fXP to 216/fXPNote Note Check using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). (a) When the RESET signal is generated, bit 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM) is set to 0 and the RingOSC clock is set as the CPU clock. However, a clock is supplied to the CPU after 17 clocks of the Ring-OSC clock have elapsed after RESET release (or clock supply to the CPU stops for 17 clocks). During the RESET period, oscillation of the X1 input clock and Ring-OSC clock is stopped. (b) After RESET release, the CPU clock can be switched from the Ring-OSC clock to the X1 input clock using bit 0 (MCM0) of the main clock mode register (MCM) after the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time has elapsed. At this time, check the oscillation stabilization time using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) before switching the CPU clock. The CPU clock status can be checked using bit 1 (MCS) of MCM. (c) Ring-OSC can be set to stopped/oscillating using the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) when "Can be stopped by software" is selected for the Ring-OSC by a mask option, if the X1 input or subsystem clock is used as the CPU clock. Make sure that MCS is 1 at this time. (d) When Ring-OSC is used as the CPU clock, the X1 input clock can be set to stopped/oscillating using the main OSC control register (MOC). Make sure that MCS is 0 at this time. When the subsystem clock is used as the CPU clock, whether the X1 input clock stops or oscillates can be set by the processor clock control register (PCC). In addition, HALT mode can be used during operation with the subsystem clock, but STOP mode cannot be used (subsystem clock oscillation cannot be stopped by the STOP instruction). (e) Select the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time (211/fXP, 213/fXP, 214/fXP, 215/fXP, 216/fXP) using the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) when releasing STOP mode while X1 input clock is being used as the CPU clock. In addition, when releasing STOP mode while RESET is released and Ring-OSC clock is being used as the CPU clock, check the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). 114 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR A status transition diagram of this product is shown in Figure 5-13, and the relationship between the operation clocks in each operation status and between the oscillation control flag and oscillation status of each clock are shown in Tables 5-3 and 5-4, respectively. Figure 5-13. Status Transition Diagram (1/4) (1) When "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by mask option (when subsystem clock is not used) HALTNote 4 Interrupt Interrupt HALT instruction Status 4 RSTOP = 0 CPU clock: fXP fXP: Oscillating fR: Oscillation stopped RSTOP = 1Note 1 Status 3 CPU clock: fXP fXP: Oscillating fR: Oscillating Interrupt HALT instruction MCM0 = 0 MCM0 = 1Note 2 HALT instruction HALT instruction Interrupt Status 2 CPU clock: fR fXP: Oscillating fR: Oscillating MSTOP = 1Note 3 Status 1 CPU clock: fR fXP: Oscillation stopped fR: Oscillating MSTOP = 0 Interrupt STOP instruction STOP instruction Interrupt STOP instruction STOP instruction Interrupt Interrupt STOPNote 4 Reset release ResetNote 5 Notes 1. 2. When shifting from status 3 to status 4, make sure that bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register (MCM) is 1. Before shifting from status 2 to status 3 after reset and STOP are released, check the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time status using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). 3. 4. When shifting from status 2 to status 1, make sure that MCS is 0. When "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by a mask option, the watchdog timer stops operating in the HALT and STOP modes, regardless of the source clock of the watchdog timer. However, oscillation of Ring-OSC does not stop even in the HALT and STOP modes if RSTOP = 0. 5. All reset sources (RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 115 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-13. Status Transition Diagram (2/4) (2) When "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by mask option (when subsystem clock is used) Status 6 CPU clock: fXT fXP: Oscillation stopped fR: Oscillating/ oscillation stopped MCC = 1 MCC = 0 HALT instruction Interrupt HALTNote 4 HALT instruction Interrupt HALT instruction Interrupt HALT instruction HALT instruction Interrupt Status 5 CPU clock: fXT fXP: Oscillating fR: Oscillating/ oscillation stopped CSS = 0Note 5 CSS = 1Note 5 Status 4 Status 3 CPU clock: fXP RSTOP = 0 CPU clock: fXP fXP: Oscillating fXP: Oscillating fR: Oscillation RSTOP = 1Note 1 fR: Oscillating stopped Interrupt Status 1 Status 2 MCM0 = 0 MSTOP = 1Note 3 CPU clock: fR CPU clock: fR fXP: Oscillation fXP: Oscillating stopped MCM0 = 1Note 2 fR: Oscillating MSTOP = 0 fR: Oscillating STOP STOP instruction instruction Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt STOPNote 4 Reset release STOP instruction ResetNote 6 Notes 1. 2. When shifting from status 3 to status 4, make sure that bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register (MCM) is 1. Before shifting from status 2 to status 3 after reset and STOP are released, check the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time status using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). 3. 4. When shifting from status 2 to status 1, make sure that MCS is 0. When "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by a mask option, the clock supply to the watchdog timer is stopped after the HALT or STOP instruction has been executed, regardless of the setting of bit 0 (RSTOP) of the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) and bit 0 (MCM0) of the main clock mode register (MCM). 5. 6. The operation cannot be shifted between subsystem clock operation and Ring-OSC operation. All reset sources (RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT) 116 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-13. Status Transition Diagram (3/4) (3) When "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" is selected by mask option (when subsystem clock is not used) HALT Interrupt Interrupt HALT instruction HALT instruction Interrupt HALT instruction Status 3 CPU clock: fXP fXP: Oscillating fR: Oscillating MCM0 = 0 MCM0 = 1Note 1 Status 2 CPU clock: fR fXP: Oscillating fR: Oscillating MSTOP = 1Note 2 MSTOP = 0 STOP instruction Status 1 CPU clock: fR fXP: Oscillation stopped fR: Oscillating Interrupt STOP instruction STOP instruction Interrupt Interrupt STOPNote 3 Reset release ResetNote 4 Notes 1. Before shifting from status 2 to status 3 after reset and STOP are released, check the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time status using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). 2. 3. When shifting from status 2 to status 1, make sure that MCS is 0. The watchdog timer operates using Ring-OSC even in STOP mode if "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" is selected by a mask option. Ring-OSC division can be selected as the count source of 8-bit timer H1 (TMH1), so clear the watchdog timer using the TMH1 interrupt request before watchdog timer overflow. If this processing is not performed, an internal reset signal is generated at watchdog timer overflow after STOP instruction execution. 4. All reset sources (RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 117 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-13. Status Transition Diagram (4/4) (4) When "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" is selected by mask option (when subsystem clock is used) Status 5 CPU clock: fXT fXP: Oscillation stopped fR: Oscillating Interrupt MCC = 0 MCC = 1 HALT instruction Status 4 CPU clock: fXT fXP: Oscillating fR: Oscillating Interrupt HALT HALT instruction CSS = 0Note 4 CSS = 1Note 4 Status 3 CPU clock: fXP fXP: Oscillating fR: Oscillating Interrupt HALT instruction MCM0 = 0 MCM0 = 1Note 1 Status 2 CPU clock: fR fXP: Oscillating fR: Oscillating Interrupt HALT instruction Interrupt HALT instruction MSTOP = 1Note 2 MSTOP = 0 STOP instruction Status 1 CPU clock: fR fXP: Oscillation stopped fR: Oscillating Interrupt STOP instruction STOP instruction Interrupt Interrupt STOPNote 3 Reset release ResetNote 5 Notes 1. Before shifting from status 2 to status 3 after reset and STOP are released, check the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time status using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). 2. 3. When shifting from status 2 to status 1, make sure that MCS is 0. The watchdog timer operates using Ring-OSC even in STOP mode if "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" is selected by a mask option. Ring-OSC division can be selected as the count source of 8-bit timer H1 (TMH1), so clear the watchdog timer using the TMH1 interrupt request before watchdog timer overflow. If this processing is not performed, an internal reset signal is generated at watchdog timer overflow after STOP instruction execution. 4. 5. The operation cannot be shifted between subsystem clock operation and Ring-OSC operation. All reset sources (RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT) 118 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Table 5-3. Relationship Between Operation Clocks in Each Operation Status Status Operation Mode Reset STOP HALT Oscillating Stopped X1 Oscillator MSTOP = 0 MSTOP = 1 MCC = 0 Stopped MCC = 1 Stopped Oscillating Oscillating Stopped Ring-OSC Oscillator Note 1 Note 2 RSTOP = 0 RSTOP = 1 Subsystem CPU Clock Clock Oscillator After Release Prescaler Clock Supplied to Peripherals MCM0 = 0 MCM0 = 1 Oscillating Ring-OSC Stopped Note 3 Note 4 Stopped Ring-OSC X1 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. When "Cannot be stopped" is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option. When "Can be stopped by software" is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option. Operates using the CPU clock at STOP instruction execution. Operates using the CPU clock at HALT instruction execution. Caution The RSTOP setting is valid only when "Can be stopped by software" is set for Ring-OSC by a mask option. Remark MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC) MCC: MCM0: Bit 7 of the processor clock control register (PCC) Bit 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM) Table 5-4. Oscillation Control Flags and Clock Oscillation Status X1 Oscillator MSTOP = 1 Note RSTOP: Bit 0 of the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) Ring-OSC Oscillator Oscillating RSTOP = 0 RSTOP = 1 Stopped Setting prohibited Oscillating MSTOP = 0 Note RSTOP = 0 RSTOP = 1 Oscillating Stopped MCC = 1 Note RSTOP = 0 RSTOP = 1 Stopped Oscillating Stopped MCC = 0 Note RSTOP = 0 RSTOP = 1 Oscillating Oscillating Stopped Note Setting X1 oscillator oscillating/stopped differs depending on the CPU clock used. * When the Ring-OSC clock is used as the CPU clock: Set using the MSTOP bit * When the subsystem clock is used as the CPU clock: Set using the MCC bit Caution The RSTOP setting is valid only when "Can be stopped by software" is set for Ring-OSC by a mask option. Remark MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC) MCC: Bit 7 of the processor clock control register (PCC) RSTOP: Bit 0 of the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 119 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.6 Time Required to Switch Between Ring-OSC Clock and X1 Input Clock Bit 0 (MCM0) of the main clock mode register (MCM) is used to switch between the Ring-OSC clock and X1 input clock. In the actual switching operation, switching does not occur immediately after MCM0 rewrite; several instructions are executed using the pre-switch clock after switching MCM0 (see Table 5-5). Bit 1 (MCS) of MCM is used to judge that operation is performed using either the Ring-OSC clock or X1 input clock. To stop the original clock after switching the clock, wait for the number of clocks shown in Table 5-5. Table 5-5. Time Required to Switch Between Ring-OSC Clock and X1 Input Clock PCC PCC2 0 0 0 0 1 PCC1 0 0 1 1 0 PCC0 0 1 0 1 0 fXP/fR + 1 clock fXP/2fR + 1 clock fXP/4fR + 1 clock fXP/8fR + 1 clock fXP/16fR + 1 clock Time Required for Switching X1Ring-OSC Ring-OSCX1 2 clocks Caution To calculate the maximum time, set fR = 120 kHz. Remarks 1. PCC: Processor clock control register 2. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 3. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency 4. The maximum time is the number of clocks of the CPU clock before switching. 120 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.7 Time Required for CPU Clock Switchover The CPU clock can be switched using bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) and bit 4 (CSS) of the processor clock control register (PCC). The actual switchover operation is not performed immediately after rewriting to the PCC; operation continues on the pre-switchover clock for several instructions (see Table 5-6). Whether the system is operating on the X1 input clock (or Ring-OSC clock) or the subsystem clock can be ascertained using bit 5 (CLS) of the PCC register. Table 5-6. Maximum Time Required for CPU Clock Switchover Set Value Before Switchover CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 Set Value After Switchover 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 x x x 16 clocks 16 clocks 16 clocks 16 clocks fXP/fXT clocks (306 clocks) 0 0 1 8 clocks 8 clocks 8 clocks 8 clocks fXP/2fXT clocks (153 clocks) 0 1 0 4 clocks 4 clocks 4 clocks 4 clocks fXP/4fXT clocks (77 clocks) 0 1 1 2 clocks 2 clocks 2 clocks 2 clocks fXP/8fXT clocks (39 clocks) 1 x 0 x 0 x 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock fXP/16fXT clocks (20 clocks) 1 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock Remarks 1. The maximum time is the number of clocks of the CPU clock before switching. 2. Figures in parentheses apply to operation with fXP = 10 MHz and fXT = 32.768 kHz. Caution Selection of the CPU clock cycle division factor (PCC0 to PCC2) and switchover from the X1 input clock to the subsystem clock (changing CSS from 0 to 1) should not be set simultaneously. Simultaneous setting is possible, however, for selection of the CPU clock cycle division factor (PCC0 to PCC2) and switchover from the subsystem clock to the X1 input clock (changing CSS from 1 to 0). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 121 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.8 Clock Switching Flowchart and Register Setting 5.8.1 Switching from Ring-OSC clock to X1 input clock Figure 5-14. Switching from Ring-OSC Clock to X1 Input Clock (Flowchart) After reset release Register initial value after reset PCC = 00H RCM = 00H MCM = 00H MOC = 00H OSTC = 00H OSTS = 05HNote ; fCPU = fR ; Ring-OSC oscillation ; Ring-OSC clock operation ; X1 oscillation ; Oscillation stabilization time status register ; Oscillation stabilization time fXP/216 Each processing OSTC checkNote X1 oscillation stabilization time has not elapsed ; X1 oscillation stabilization time status check Ring-OSC clock operation X1 oscillation stabilization time has elapsed PCC setting Ring-OSC clock operation (dividing set PCC) MCM.0 1 MCM.1 (MCS) is changed from 0 to 1 X1 input clock operation X1 input clock operation Note Check the oscillation stabilization wait time of the X1 oscillator after reset release using the OSTC register and then switch to the X1 input clock operation after the oscillation stabilization wait time has elapsed. The OSTS register setting is valid only after STOP mode is released by interrupt during X1 input clock operation. 122 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.8.2 Switching from X1 input clock to Ring-OSC clock Figure 5-15. Switching from X1 Input Clock to Ring-OSC Clock (Flowchart) Register setting in X1 input clock operation PCC.7 (MCC) = 0 PCC.4 (CSS) = 0 MCM = 03H ; X1 oscillation ; X1 input clock or Ring-OSC clock ; X1 input clock operation Yes: RSTOP = 1 X1 input clock operation RCM.0Note (RSTOP) = 1? ; Ring-OSC oscillating? No: RSTOP = 0 RSTOP = 0 MCM0 0 ; Ring-OSC clock operation MCM.1 (MCS) is changed from 1 to 0 Ring-OSC clock operation Ring-OSC clock operation Note Required only when "clock can be stopped by software" is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 123 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.8.3 Switching from X1 input clock to subsystem clock Figure 5-16. Switching from X1 Input Clock to Subsystem Clock (Flowchart) Register setting in X1 input clock operation PCC.7 (MCC) = 0 PCC.4 (CSS) = 0 MCM = 03H ; X1 oscillation ; X1 input clock or Ring-OSC clock ; X1 input clock operation X1 input clock operation CSS 1Note ; Subsystem clock operation MCS = 1 not changed. CLS is changed from 0 to 1. Subsystem clock Subsystem clock operation Note Set CSS to 1 after confirming that oscillation of the subsystem clock is stabilized. 124 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.8.4 Switching from subsystem clock to X1 input clock Figure 5-17. Switching from Subsystem Clock to X1 Input Clock (Flowchart) PCC.4 (CSS) = 1 MCM = 03H ; Subsystem clock operation No: X1 oscillating MCC = 1? ; X1 oscillating? Yes: X1 oscillation stopped MCC 0 Subsystem clock operation ; X1 oscillation enabled OSTC check X1 oscillation stabilization time not elapsed ; Wait for X1 oscillation stabilization time X1 oscillation stabilization time elapsed CSS 0 ; X1 input clock operation CLS is changed from 1 to 0. MCS = 1 not changed. X1 input clock operation X1 input clock operation User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 125 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.8.5 Register settings The table below shows the statuses of the setting flags and status flags when each mode is set. Table 5-7. Clock and Register Setting fCPU Mode PCC Register Setting Flag MCM MOC RCM Note 1 Status Flag PCC MCM Register Register Register Register Register MCC X1 input clock Note 2 CSS 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 MCM0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 Note 5 MSTOP RSTOP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Note 6 CLS 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 MCS 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 Ring-OSC oscillating Ring-OSC stopped 0 0 0 0 Note 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 Ring-OSC clock X1 oscillating X1 stopped Subsystem clock Note 4 X1 oscillating, Ring-OSC oscillating X1 stopped, Ring-OSC oscillating X1 oscillating, Ring-OSC stopped X1 stopped, Ring-OSC stopped 0 1 0 1 Note 5 Note 6 Note 5 Note 6 1 Note 5 Note 6 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Valid only when "clock can be stopped by software" is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option. Do not set MCC = 1 or MSTOP = 1 during X1 input clock operation (even if MCC = 1 or MSTOP = 1 is set, the X1 oscillation does not stop). Do not set MCC = 1 during Ring-OSC operation (even if MCC = 1 is set, the X1 oscillation does not stop). To stop X1 oscillation during Ring-OSC operation, use MSTOP. Shifting to subsystem clock operation mode must be performed from the X1 input clock operation mode. From subsystem clock operation mode, only X1 input clock operation mode can be shifted to. Do not set MCM0 = 0 (shifting to Ring-OSC operation) during subsystem clock operation. Do not set MSTOP = 1 during subsystem clock operation (even if MSTOP = 1 is set, X1 oscillation does not stop). To stop X1 oscillation during subsystem clock operation, use MCC. 126 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 6.1 Functions of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 16-bit timer/event counter 00 has the following functions. * Interval timer * PPG output * Pulse width measurement * External event counter * Square-wave output * One-shot pulse output (1) Interval timer 16-bit timer/event counter 00 generates an interrupt request at the preset time interval. (2) PPG output 16-bit timer/event counter 00 can output a rectangular wave whose frequency and output pulse width can be set freely. (3) Pulse width measurement 16-bit timer/event counter 00 can measure the pulse width of an externally input signal. (4) External event counter 16-bit timer/event counter 00 can measure the number of pulses of an externally input signal. (5) Square-wave output 16-bit timer/event counter 00 can output a square wave with any selected frequency. (6) One-shot pulse output 16-bit timer/event counter 00 can output a one-shot pulse whose output pulse width can be set freely. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 127 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 6.2 Configuration of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 16-bit timer/event counter 00 includes the following hardware. Table 6-1. Configuration of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 Item Timer counter Register Timer input Timer output Control registers 16 bits (TM00) 16-bit timer capture/compare register: 16 bits (CR000, CR010) TI000, TI010 TO00, output controller 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 16-bit timer capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) Port mode register 0 (PM0) Port register 0 (P0) Configuration Figure 6-1 shows the block diagram. Figure 6-1. Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 Internal bus Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) CRC002CRC001 CRC000 Selector INTTM000 Selector TI010/TO00/P01 Noise eliminator 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) Match Selector fX fX/22 fX/28 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) Match Clear Output controller Output latch (P01) PM01 TO00/TI010/ P01 fX Noise eliminator 2 Noise eliminator 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) Selector TI000/P00 INTTM010 CRC002 PRM001 PRM000 Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00 OSPT00 OSPE00 TOC004 LVS00 LVR00 TOC001 TOE00 16-bit timer output 16-bit timer mode control register 00 control register 00 (TOC00) (TMC00) Internal bus 128 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 (1) 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) TM00 is a 16-bit read-only register that counts count pulses. The counter is incremented in synchronization with the rising edge of the input clock. Figure 6-2. Format of 16-Bit Timer Counter 00 (TM00) Address: FF10H, FF11H Symbol After reset: 0000H FF11H R FF10H TM00 The count value is reset to 0000H in the following cases. <1> At RESET input <2> If TMC003 and TMC002 are cleared <3> If the valid edge of TI000 is input in the mode in which clear & start occurs when inputting the valid edge of TI000 <4> If TM00 and CR000 match in the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM00 and CR000 <5> OSPT00 is set in one-shot pulse output mode (2) 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) CR000 is a 16-bit register that has the functions of both a capture register and a compare register. Whether it is used as a capture register or as a compare register is set by bit 0 (CRC000) of capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00). CR000 can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-3. Format of 16-Bit Timer Capture/Compare Register 000 (CR000) Address: FF12H, FF13H Symbol CR000 After reset: 0000H FF13H R/W FF12H * When CR000 is used as a compare register The value set in CR000 is constantly compared with the 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) count value, and an interrupt request (INTTM000) is generated if they match. The set value is held until CR000 is rewritten. * When CR000 is used as a capture register It is possible to select the valid edge of the TI000 pin or the TI010 pin as the capture trigger. The TI000 or TI010 valid edge is set using prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) (see Table 6-2). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 129 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Table 6-2. CR000 Capture Trigger and Valid Edges of TI000 and TI010 Pins (1) TI000 pin valid edge selected as capture trigger (CRC001 = 1, CRC000 = 1) CR000 Capture Trigger TI000 Pin Valid Edge ES001 Falling edge Rising edge No capture operation Rising edge Falling edge Both rising and falling edges 0 0 1 ES000 1 0 1 (2) TI010 pin valid edge selected as capture trigger (CRC001 = 0, CRC000 = 1) CR000 Capture Trigger TI010 Pin Valid Edge ES101 Falling edge Rising edge Both rising and falling edges Falling edge Rising edge Both rising and falling edges 0 0 1 ES100 0 1 1 Remarks 1. Setting ES001, ES000 = 1, 0 and ES101, ES100 = 1, 0 is prohibited. 2. ES001, ES000: ES101, ES100: Bits 5 and 4 of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) Bits 7 and 6 of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) CRC001, CRC000: Bits 1 and 0 of capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) Cautions 1. Set a value other than 0000H in CR000 in the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM00 and CR000. However, in the free-running mode and in the clear mode using the valid edge of TI000, if CR000 is cleared to 0000H, an interrupt request (INTTM000) is generated when the value of CR000 changes from 0000H to 0001H following overflow (FFFFH). 2. When P01 is used as the valid edge input pin of TI010, it cannot be used as the timer output (TO00). Moreover, when P01 is used as TO00, it cannot be used as the valid edge input pin of TI010. 3. When CR000 is used as a capture register, read data is undefined if the register read time and capture trigger input conflict (the capture data itself is the correct value). If count stop input and capture trigger input conflict, the captured data is undefined. 4. Do not rewrite CR000 during TM00 operation. 130 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 (3) 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) CR010 is a 16-bit register that has the functions of both a capture register and a compare register. Whether it is used as a capture register or a compare register is set by bit 2 (CRC002) of capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00). CR010 can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-4. Format of 16-Bit Timer Capture/Compare Register 010 (CR010) Address: FF14H, FF15H After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol FF15H FF14H CR010 * When CR010 is used as a compare register The value set in the CR010 is constantly compared with 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) count value, and an interrupt request (INTTM010) is generated if they match. The set value is held until CR010 is rewritten. * When CR010 is used as a capture register It is possible to select the valid edge of the TI000 pin as the capture trigger. The TI000 valid edge is set by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) (see Table 6-3). Table 6-3. CR010 Capture Trigger and Valid Edge of TI000 Pin (CRC002 = 1) CR010 Capture Trigger TI000 Pin Valid Edge ES001 Falling edge Rising edge Both rising and falling edges Falling edge Rising edge Both rising and falling edges 0 0 1 ES000 0 1 1 Remarks 1. Setting ES001, ES000 = 1, 0 is prohibited. 2. ES001, ES000: Bits 5 and 4 of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) CRC002: Bit 2 of capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) Cautions 1. If the CR010 register is cleared to 0000H, an interrupt request (INTTM010) is generated after the TM00 register overflows, after the timer is cleared and started on a match between the TM00 register and the CR000 register, or after the timer is cleared by the valid edge of TI000 or a one-shot trigger. 2. When CR010 is used as a capture register, read data is undefined if the register read time and capture trigger input conflict (the capture data itself is the correct value). If count stop input and capture trigger input conflict, the captured data is undefined. 3. CR010 can be rewritten during TM00 operation. For details, see Caution 2 in Figure 6-15. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 131 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 6.3 Registers Controlling 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 The following six registers are used to control 16-bit timer/event counter 00. * 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) * Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) * 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) * Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) * Port mode register 0 (PM0) * Port register 0 (P0) (1) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) This register sets the 16-bit timer operating mode, the 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) clear mode, and output timing, and detects an overflow. TMC00 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears TMC00 to 00H. Caution 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) starts operation at the moment TMC002 and TMC003 are set to values other than 0, 0 (operation stop mode), respectively. Set TMC002 and TMC003 to 0, 0 to stop the operation. 132 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-5. Format of 16-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 00 (TMC00) Address FFBAH Symbol TMC00 7 0 6 0 After reset: 00H 5 0 4 0 R/W 3 2 1 <0> TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00 TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 Operating mode and clear mode selection TO00 inversion timing selection Interrupt request generation 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Operation stop (TM00 cleared to 0) Free-running mode No change Not generated Match between TM00 and CR000 or match between TM00 and CR010 Generated on match between TM00 and CR000, or match between TM00 and CR010 0 1 1 Match between TM00 and CR000, match between TM00 and CR010 or TI000 valid edge - 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 Clear & start occurs on TI000 valid edge Clear & start occurs on match between TM00 and CR000 Match between TM00 and CR000 or match between TM00 and CR010 1 1 1 Match between TM00 and CR000, match between TM00 and CR010 or TI000 valid edge OVF00 0 1 Overflow not detected Overflow detected 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) overflow detection Cautions 1. Timer operation must be stopped before writing to bits other than the OVF00 flag. 2. Set the valid edge of the TI000/P00 pin using prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). 3. If any of the following modes: the mode in which clear & start occurs on match between TM00 and CR000, the mode in which clear & start occurs at the TI00 valid edge, or freerunning mode is selected, when the set value of CR000 is FFFFH and the TM00 value changes from FFFFH to 0000H, the OVF00 flag is set to 1. Remarks 1. TO00: 2. TI000: 3. TM00: 16-bit timer/event counter 00 output pin 16-bit timer/event counter 00 input pin 16-bit timer counter 00 4. CR000: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 5. CR010: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 133 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 (2) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) This register controls the operation of the 16-bit timer capture/compare registers (CR000, CR010). CRC00 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears CRC00 to 00H. Figure 6-6. Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 00 (CRC00) Address: FFBCH Symbol CRC00 7 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 CRC002 1 CRC001 0 CRC000 CRC002 0 1 CR010 operating mode selection Operates as compare register Operates as capture register CRC001 0 1 CR000 capture trigger selection Captures on valid edge of TI010 Captures on valid edge of TI000 by reverse phase CRC000 0 1 CR000 operating mode selection Operates as compare register Operates as capture register Cautions 1. Timer operation must be stopped before setting CRC00. 2. When the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM00 and CR000 is selected with 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00), CR000 should not be specified as a capture register. 3. The capture operation is not performed if both the rising and falling edges are specified as the valid edge of TI000. 4. To ensure that the capture operation is performed properly, the capture trigger requires a pulse two cycles longer than the count clock selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). (3) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) This register controls the operation of the 16-bit timer/event counter 00 output controller. It sets/resets the timer output F/F (LV00), enables/disables output inversion and 16-bit timer/event counter 00 timer output, enables/disables the one-shot pulse output operation, and sets the one-shot pulse output trigger via software. TOC00 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears TOC00 to 00H. 134 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-7. Format of 16-Bit Timer Output Control Register 00 (TOC00) Address: FFBDH Symbol TOC00 7 0 After reset: 00H <6> OSPT00 R/W <5> OSPE00 4 TOC004 <3> LVS00 <2> LVR00 1 TOC001 <0> TOE00 OSPT00 0 1 One-shot pulse output trigger control via software No one-shot pulse trigger One-shot pulse trigger OSPE00 0 1 One-shot pulse output operation control Successive pulse output mode One-shot pulse output mode Note TOC004 0 1 Timer output F/F control using match of CR010 and TM00 Disables inversion operation Enables inversion operation LVS00 0 0 1 1 LVR00 0 1 0 1 No change Timer output F/F status setting Timer output F/F reset (0) Timer output F/F set (1) Setting prohibited TOC001 0 1 Timer output F/F control using match of CR000 and TM00 Disables inversion operation Enables inversion operation TOE00 0 1 Timer output control Disables output (output fixed to level 0) Enables output Note The one-shot pulse output mode operates correctly only in the free-running mode and the mode in which clear & start occurs at the TI000 valid edge. In the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between the TM00 register and CR000 register, one-shot pulse output is not possible because an overflow does not occur. Cautions 1. Timer operation must be stopped before setting other than TOC004. 2. If LVS00 and LVR00 are read, 0 is read. 3. OSPT00 is automatically cleared after data is set, so 0 is read. 4. Do not set OSPT00 to 1 other than in one-shot pulse output mode. 5. A write interval of two cycles or more of the count clock selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) is required to write to OSPT00 successively. 6. Do not set LVS00 to 1 before TOE00, and do not set LVS00 and TOE00 to 1 simultaneously. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 135 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 (4) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) This register is used to set the 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) count clock and TI000 and TI010 input valid edges. PRM00 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears PRM00 to 00H. Figure 6-8 Format of Prescaler Mode Register 00 (PRM00) Address: FFBBH Symbol PRM00 7 ES101 After reset: 00H 6 ES100 R/W 5 ES001 4 ES000 3 0 2 0 1 PRM001 0 PRM000 ES101 0 0 1 1 ES100 0 1 0 1 Falling edge Rising edge Setting prohibited TI010 valid edge selection Both falling and rising edges ES001 0 0 1 1 ES000 0 1 0 1 Falling edge Rising edge Setting prohibited TI000 valid edge selection Both falling and rising edges PRM001 0 0 1 1 PRM000 0 1 0 1 fX (10 MHz) fX/2 (2.5 MHz) fX/2 (39.06 kHz) TI000 valid edge Note 8 2 Count clock selection Note The external clock requires a pulse two cycles longer than internal clock (fX). 136 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the count clock is the Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 is not guaranteed. When an external clock is used and when the Ring-OSC clock is selected and supplied to the CPU, the operation of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 is not guaranteed, either, because the Ring-OSC clock is supplied as the sampling clock to eliminate noise. 2. Always set data to PRM00 after stopping the timer operation. 3. If the valid edge of TI000 is to be set for the count clock, do not set the clear & start mode using the valid edge of TI000 and the capture trigger. 4. If the TI000 or TI010 pin is high level immediately after system reset, the rising edge is immediately detected after the rising edge or both the rising and falling edges are set as the valid edge(s) of the TI000 pin or TI010 pin to enable the operation of 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00). Care is therefore required when pulling up the TI000 or TI010 pin. However, when reenabling operation after the operation has been stopped once, the rising edge is not detected. 5. When P01 is used as the TI010 valid edge, it cannot be used as the timer output (TO00), and when used as TO00, it cannot be used as the TI010 valid edge. (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0) This register sets port 0 input/output in 1-bit units. When using the P01/TO00/TI010 pin for timer output, set PM01 and the output latch of P01 to 0. When using the P01/TO00/TI010 pin for timer input, clear PM01 to 0. At this time, the output latch of P01 may be 0 or 1. PM0 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets PM0 to FFH. Figure 6-9. Format of Port Mode Register 0 (PM0) Address: FF20H Symbol PM0 7 1 6 1 After reset: FFH 5 1 4 1 R/W 3 2 1 0 PM03 PM02 PM01 PM00 PM0n 0 1 P0n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 3) Output mode (output buffer on) Input mode (output buffer off) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 137 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 6.4 Operation of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 6.4.1 Interval timer operation Setting 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) and capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) as shown in Figure 6-10 allows operation as an interval timer. Setting The basic operation setting procedure is as follows. <1> Set the CRC00 register (see Figure 6-10 for the set value). <2> Set any value to the CR000 register. <3> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register. <4> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figure 6-10 for the set value). Caution CR000 cannot be rewritten during TM00 operation. Remark For how to enable the INTTM000 interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. Interrupt requests are generated repeatedly using the count value preset in 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) as the interval. When the count value of 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) matches the value set in CR000, counting continues with the TM00 value cleared to 0 and the interrupt request signal (INTTM000) is generated. The count clock of the 16-bit timer/event counter 00 can be selected with bits 0 and 1 (PRM000, PRM001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). 138 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-10. Control Register Settings for Interval Timer Operation (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 7 TMC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00 1 1 0/1 0 Clears and starts on match between TM00 and CR000. (b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 7 CRC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000 0/1 0/1 0 CR000 used as compare register (c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000 PRM00 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 3 0 2 0 PRM001 PRM000 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock. Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with the interval timer. See the description of the respective control registers for details. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 139 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-11. Interval Timer Configuration Diagram 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) INTTM000 fX fX/22 fX/28 TI000/P00 Noise eliminator Selector 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) Note OVF00 Clear circuit fX Note OVF00 is set to 1 only when 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 is set to FFFFH. Figure 6-12. Timing of Interval Timer Operation t Count clock TM00 count value 0000H 0001H N 0000H 0001H Clear N N 0000H 0001H Clear N N N Timer operation enabled CR000 INTTM000 N Interrupt acknowledged Interrupt acknowledged Remark Interval time = (N + 1) x t N = 0001H to FFFFH 140 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 6.4.2 PPG output operations Setting 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) and capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) as shown in Figure 6-13 allows operation as PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator) output. Setting The basic operation setting procedure is as follows. <1> Set the CRC00 register (see Figure 6-13 for the set value). <2> Set any value to the CR000 register as the cycle. <3> Set any value to the CR010 register as the duty factor. <4> Set the TOC00 register (see Figure 6-13 for the set value). <5> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register. <6> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figure 6-13 for the set value). Caution To change the value of the duty factor (the value of the CR010 register) during operation, see Caution 2 in Figure 6-15 PPG Output Operation Timing. Remarks 1. For the setting of the TO00 pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0). 2. For how to enable the INTTM000 interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. In the PPG output operation, rectangular waves are output from the TO00 pin with the pulse width and the cycle that correspond to the count values preset in 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) and in 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000), respectively. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 141 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-13. Control Register Settings for PPG Output Operation (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 7 TMC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00 1 1 0 0 Clears and starts on match between TM00 and CR000. (b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 7 CRC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000 0 x 0 CR000 used as compare register CR010 used as compare register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) 7 TOC00 0 OSPT00 OSPE00 TOC004 LVS00 LVR00 TOC001 TOE00 0 0 1 0/1 0/1 1 1 Enables TO00 output Inverts output on match between TM00 and CR000 Specifies initial value of TO00 output F/F (setting "11" is prohibited.) Inverts output on match between TM00 and CR010 Disables one-shot pulse output (d) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000 PRM00 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 3 0 2 0 PRM001 PRM000 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock. Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Cautions 1. Values in the following range should be set in CR000 and CR010: 0000H CR010 < CR000 FFFFH 2. The cycle of the pulse generated through PPG output (CR000 setting value + 1) has a duty of (CR010 setting value + 1)/(CR000 setting value + 1). Remark x: Don't care 142 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-14. Configuration of PPG Output 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) fX fX/22 fX/28 TI000/P00 Noise eliminator fX Selector 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) Clear circuit Output controller TO00/TI010/P01 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) Figure 6-15. PPG Output Operation Timing t Count clock TM00 count value N 0000H 0001H M-1 M N-1 N 0000H 0001H Clear CR000 capture value CR010 capture value TO00 Pulse width: (M + 1) x t 1 cycle: (N + 1) x t N M Clear Cautions 1. CR000 cannot be rewritten during TM00 operation. 2. In the PPG output operation, change the pulse width (rewrite CR010) during TM00 operation using the following procedure. <1> Disable the timer output inversion operation by match of TM00 and CR010 (TOC004 = 0) <2> Disable the INTTM010 interrupt (TMMK010 = 1) <3> Rewrite CR010 <4> Wait for 1 cycle of the TM00 count clock <5> Enable the timer output inversion operation by match of TM00 and CR010 (TOC004 = 1) <6> Clear the interrupt request flag of INTTM010 (TMIF010 = 0) <7> Enable the INTTM010 interrupt (TMMK010 = 0) Remark 0000H M < N FFFFH User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 143 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 6.4.3 Pulse width measurement operations It is possible to measure the pulse width of the signals input to the TI000 pin and TI010 pin using 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00). There are two measurement methods: measuring with TM00 used in free-running mode, and measuring by restarting the timer in synchronization with the edge of the signal input to the TI000 pin. When an interrupt occurs, read the valid value of the capture register, check the overflow flag, and then calculate the necessary pulse width. Clear the overflow flag after checking it. The capture operation is not performed until the signal pulse width is sampled in the count clock cycle selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) and the valid level of the TI000 or TI010 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width. Figure 6-16. CR010 Capture Operation with Rising Edge Specified Count clock TM00 TI000 Rising edge detection CR010 INTTM010 N N-3 N-2 N-1 N N+1 Setting The basic operation setting procedure is as follows. <1> Set the CRC00 register (see Figures 6-17, 6-20, 6-22, and 6-24 for the set value). <2> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register. <3> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figures 6-17, 6-20, 6-22, and 6-24 for the set value). Caution To use two capture registers, set the TI000 and TI010 pins. Remarks 1. For the setting of the TI000 (or TI010) pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0). 2. For how to enable the INTTM000 (or INTTM010) interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 FUNCTIONS. INTERRUPT 144 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 (1) Pulse width measurement with free-running counter and one capture register When 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is operated in free-running mode, and the edge specified by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) is input to the TI000 pin, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) and an external interrupt request signal (INTTM010) is set. Specify both the rising and falling edges by using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of PRM00. Sampling is performed using the count clock selected by PRM00, and a capture operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width. Figure 6-17. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter and One Capture Register (When TI000 and CR010 Are Used) (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 7 TMC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00 0 1 0/1 0 Free-running mode (b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 7 CRC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000 1 0/1 0 CR000 used as compare register CR010 used as capture register (c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000 PRM00 0/1 0/1 1 1 3 0 2 0 PRM001 PRM000 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock (setting "11" is prohibited). Specifies both edges for pulse width detection. Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement. See the description of the respective control registers for details. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 145 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-18. Configuration Diagram for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter fX Selector fX/22 fX/28 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) OVF00 TI000 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) INTTM010 Internal bus Figure 6-19. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with Free-Running Counter and One Capture Register (with Both Edges Specified) t Count clock TM00 count value TI000 pin input CR010 capture value INTTM010 OVF00 (D1 - D0) x t (10000H - D1 + D2) x t Note (D3 - D2) x t D0 D1 D2 D3 0000H 0001H D0 D0 + 1 D1 D1 + 1 FFFFH 0000H D2 D3 Note Clear OVF00 by software. 146 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 (2) Measurement of two pulse widths with free-running counter When 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is operated in free-running mode, it is possible to simultaneously measure the pulse widths of the two signals input to the TI000 pin and the TI010 pin. When the edge specified by bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) is input to the TI000 pin, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) and an interrupt request signal (INTTM010) is set. Also, when the edge specified by bits 6 and 7 (ES100 and ES101) of PRM00 is input to the TI010 pin, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) and an interrupt request signal (INTTM000) is set. Specify both the rising and falling edges as the edges of the TI000 and TI010 pins, by using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) and bits 6 and 7 (ES100 and ES101) of PRM00. Sampling is performed using the count clock cycle selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00), and a capture operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 or TI010 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width. Figure 6-20. Control Register Settings for Measurement of Two Pulse Widths with Free-Running Counter (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 7 TMC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00 0 1 0/1 0 Free-running mode (b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 7 CRC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000 1 0 1 CR000 used as capture register Captures valid edge of TI010 pin to CR000 CR010 used as capture register (c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000 PRM00 1 1 1 1 3 0 2 0 PRM001 PRM000 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock (setting "11" is prohibited). Specifies both edges for pulse width detection. Specifies both edges for pulse width detection. Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement. See the description of the respective control registers for details. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 147 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-21. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with Free-Running Counter (with Both Edges Specified) t Count clock TM00 count value TI000 pin input CR010 capture value INTTM010 TI010 pin input CR000 capture value INTTM000 OVF00 Note D1 D2 + 1 D0 D1 D2 0000H 0001H D0 D0 + 1 D1 D1 + 1 FFFFH 0000H D2 D2 + 1 D2 + 2 D3 (D1 - D0) x t (10000H - D1 + D2) x t (D3 - D2) x t (10000H - D1 + (D2 + 1)) x t Note Clear OVF00 by software. 148 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 (3) Pulse width measurement with free-running counter and two capture registers When 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is operated in free-running mode, it is possible to measure the pulse width of the signal input to the TI000 pin. When the rising or falling edge specified by bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) is input to the TI000 pin, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) and an interrupt request signal (INTTM010) is set. Also, when the inverse edge to that of the capture operation is input into CR010, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000). Sampling is performed using the count clock cycle selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00), and a capture operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width. Figure 6-22. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter and Two Capture Registers (with Rising Edge Specified) (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 7 TMC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00 0 1 0/1 0 Free-running mode (b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 7 CRC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000 1 1 1 CR000 used as capture register Captures to CR000 at inverse edge to valid edge of TI000. CR010 used as capture register (c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000 PRM00 0/1 0/1 0 1 3 0 2 0 PRM001 PRM000 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock (setting "11" is prohibited). Specifies rising edge for pulse width detection. Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement. See the description of the respective control registers for details. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 149 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-23. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with Free-Running Counter and Two Capture Registers (with Rising Edge Specified) t Count clock TM00 count value TI000 pin input CR010 capture value CR000 capture value INTTM010 OVF00 (D1 - D0) x t (10000H - D1 + D2) x t Note (D3 - D2) x t D0 D1 D2 D3 0000H 0001H D0 D0 + 1 D1 D1 + 1 FFFFH 0000H D2 D2 + 1 D3 Note Clear OVF00 by software. (4) Pulse width measurement by means of restart When input of a valid edge to the TI000 pin is detected, the count value of 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010), and then the pulse width of the signal input to the TI000 pin is measured by clearing TM00 and restarting the count operation. Either of two edgesrising or fallingcan be selected using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). Sampling is performed using the count clock cycle selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) and a capture operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width. 150 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-24. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement by Means of Restart (with Rising Edge Specified) (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 7 TMC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00 1 0 0/1 0 Clears and starts at valid edge of TI000 pin. (b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 7 CRC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000 1 1 1 CR000 used as capture register Captures to CR000 at inverse edge to valid edge of TI000. CR010 used as capture register (c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000 PRM00 0/1 0/1 0 1 3 0 2 0 PRM001 PRM000 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock (setting "11" is prohibited). Specifies rising edge for pulse width detection. Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Figure 6-25. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation by Means of Restart (with Rising Edge Specified) t Count clock TM00 count value TI000 pin input CR010 capture value CR000 capture value 0000H 0001H D0 0000H 0001H D1 D2 0000H 0001H D0 D1 D2 INTTM010 D1 x t D2 x t User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 151 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 6.4.4 External event counter operation Setting The basic operation setting procedure is as follows. <1> Set the CRC00 register (see Figure 6-26 for the set value). <2> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register. <3> Set any value to the CR000 register (0000H cannot be set). <4> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figure 6-26 for the set value). Remarks 1. For the setting of the TI000 pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0). 2. For how to enable the INTTM000 interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. The external event counter counts the number of external clock pulses input to the TI000 pin using 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00). TM00 is incremented each time the valid edge specified by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) is input. When the TM00 count value matches the 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) value, TM00 is cleared to 0 and the interrupt request signal (INTTM000) is generated. Input a value other than 0000H to CR000 (a count operation with 1-bit pulse cannot be carried out). Any of three edgesrising, falling, or both edgescan be selected using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). Sampling is performed using the internal clock (fX) and an operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width. 152 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-26. Control Register Settings in External Event Counter Mode (with Rising Edge Specified) (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 7 TMC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00 1 1 0/1 0 Clears and starts on match between TM00 and CR000. (b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 7 CRC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000 0/1 0/1 0 CR000 used as compare register (c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000 PRM00 0/1 0/1 0 1 3 0 2 0 PRM001 PRM000 1 1 Selects external clock. Specifies rising edge for pulse width detection. Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with the external event counter. See the description of the respective control registers for details. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 153 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-27. Configuration Diagram of External Event Counter Internal bus 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) Match INTTM000 Clear fX Noise eliminator 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) OVF00Note Valid edge of TI000 Note OVF00 is set to 1 only when CR000 is set to FFFFH. Figure 6-28. External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified) TI000 pin input TM00 count value CR000 INTTM000 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H N N-1 N 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H Caution When reading the external event counter count value, TM00 should be read. 154 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 6.4.5 Square-wave output operation Setting The basic operation setting procedure is as follows. <1> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register. <2> Set the CRC00 register (see Figure 6-29 for the set value). <3> Set the TOC00 register (see Figure 6-29 for the set value). <4> Set any value to the CR000 register (0000H cannot be set). <5> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figure 6-29 for the set value). Caution CR000 cannot be rewritten during TM00 operation. Remarks 1. For the setting of the TO00 pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0). 2. For how to enable the INTTM000 interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. A square wave with any selected frequency can be output at intervals determined by the count value preset to 16bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000). The TO00 pin output status is reversed at intervals determined by the count value preset to CR000 + 1 by setting bit 0 (TOE00) and bit 1 (TOC001) of 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) to 1. This enables a square wave with any selected frequency to be output. Figure 6-29. Control Register Settings in Square-Wave Output Mode (1/2) (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 7 TMC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00 1 1 0 0 Clears and starts on match between TM00 and CR000. (b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 7 CRC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000 0/1 0/1 0 CR000 used as compare register User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 155 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-29. Control Register Settings in Square-Wave Output Mode (2/2) (c) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) 7 TOC00 0 OSPT00 OSPE00 TOC004 LVS00 LVR00 TOC001 TOE00 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 1 1 Enables TO00 output. Inverts output on match between TM00 and CR000. Specifies initial value of TO00 output F/F (setting "11" is prohibited). Does not invert output on match between TM00 and CR010. Disables one-shot pulse output. (d) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000 PRM00 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 3 0 2 0 PRM001 PRM000 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock. Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with square-wave output. See the description of the respective control registers for details. Figure 6-30. Square-Wave Output Operation Timing Count clock TM00 count value CR000 INTTM000 TO00 pin output 0000H 0001H 0002H N N-1 N 0000H 0001H 0002H N-1 N 0000H 156 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 6.4.6 One-shot pulse output operation 16-bit timer/event counter 00 can output a one-shot pulse in synchronization with a software trigger or an external trigger (TI000 pin input). Setting The basic operation setting procedure is as follows. <1> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register. <2> Set the CRC00 register (see Figures 6-31 and 6-33 for the set value). <3> Set the TOC00 register (see Figures 6-31 and 6-33 for the set value). <4> Set any value to the CR000 and CR010 registers (0000H cannot be set). <5> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figures 6-31 and 6-33 for the set value). Remarks 1. For the setting of the TO00 pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0). 2. For how to enable the INTTM000 (if necessary, INTTM010) interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. (1) One-shot pulse output with software trigger A one-shot pulse can be output from the TO00 pin by setting 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00), capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00), and 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) as shown in Figure 6-27, and by setting bit 6 (OSPT00) of the TOC00 register to 1 by software. By setting the OSPT00 bit to 1, 16-bit timer/event counter 00 is cleared and started, and its output becomes active at the count value (N) set in advance to 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010). After that, the output becomes inactive at the count value (M) set in advance to 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000)Note. Even after the one-shot pulse has been output, the TM00 register continues its operation. To stop the TM00 register, the TMC003 and TMC002 bits of the TMC00 register must be set to 00. Note The case where N < M is described here. When N > M, the output becomes active with the CR000 register and inactive with the CR010 register. Do not set N to M. Cautions 1. Do not set the OSPT00 bit to 1 while the one-shot pulse is being output. To output the oneshot pulse again, wait until the current one-shot pulse output is completed. 2. When using the one-shot pulse output of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 with a software trigger, do not change the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function port pin. Because the external trigger is valid even in this case, the timer is cleared and started even at the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function port pin, resulting in the output of a pulse at an undesired timing. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 157 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-31. Control Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output with Software Trigger (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 7 TMC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 TMC003 0 TMC002 TMC001 1 0 OVF00 0 Free-running mode (b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 7 CRC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000 0 0/1 0 CR000 as compare register CR010 as compare register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) 7 TOC00 0 OSPT00 OSPE00 TOC004 0 1 1 LVS00 0/1 LVR00 0/1 TOC001 1 TOE00 1 Enables TO00 output Inverts output upon match between TM00 and CR000 Specifies initial value of TO00 output F/F (setting "11" is prohibited.) Inverts output upon match between TM00 and CR010 Sets one-shot pulse output mode Set to 1 for output (d) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) ES101 PRM00 0/1 ES100 0/1 ES001 0/1 ES000 0/1 3 0 2 0 PRM001 PRM000 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock. Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Caution Do not set 0000H to the CR000 and CR010 registers. 158 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-32. Timing of One-Shot Pulse Output Operation with Software Trigger Set TMC00 to 0CH (TM00 count starts) Count clock TM00 count 0000H 0001H CR010 set value CR000 set value OSPT00 INTTM010 INTTM000 TO00 pin output N M N N+1 N M 0000H N-1 N N M M-1 M M+1 M+2 N M Caution 16-bit timer counter 00 starts operating as soon as a value other than 00 (operation stop mode) is set to the TMC003 and TMC002 bits. Remark N User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 159 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-33. Control Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output with External Trigger (with Rising Edge Specified) (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) 7 TMC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 TMC003 1 TMC002 TMC001 0 0 OVF00 0 Clears and starts at valid edge of TI000 pin (b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 7 CRC00 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000 0 0/1 0 CR000 used as compare register CR010 used as compare register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) 7 TOC00 0 OSPT00 OSPE00 TOC004 0 1 1 LVS00 0/1 LVR00 0/1 TOC001 1 TOE00 1 Enables TO00 output Inverts output upon match between TM00 and CR000 Specifies initial value of TO00 output F/F (setting "11" is prohibited.) Inverts output upon match between TM00 and CR010 Sets one-shot pulse output mode (d) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) ES101 PRM00 0/1 ES100 0/1 ES001 0 ES000 1 3 0 2 0 PRM001 PRM000 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock (setting "11" is prohibited). Specifies the rising edge for pulse width detection. Setting invalid (setting "10" is prohibited.) Caution Do not set 0000H to the CR000 and CR010 registers. 160 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Figure 6-34. Timing of One-Shot Pulse Output Operation with External Trigger (with Rising Edge Specified) When TMC00 is set to 08H (TM00 count starts) t Count clock TM00 count value 0000H 0001H CR010 set value CR000 set value TI000 pin input INTTM010 INTTM000 TO00 pin output N M 0000H N M N N+1 N+2 N M M-2 M-1 M N M M+1 M+2 Caution 16-bit timer counter 00 starts operating as soon as a value other than 00 (operation stop mode) is set to the TMC002 and TMC003 bits. Remark N 161 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 6.5 Cautions for 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 (1) Timer start errors An error of up to one clock may occur in the time required for a match signal to be generated after timer start. This is because 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is started asynchronously to the count clock. Figure 6-35. Start Timing of 16-Bit Timer Counter 00 (TM00) Count clock TM00 count value 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H Timer start (2) 16-bit timer capture/compare register setting (in the mode in which clear & start occurs on match between TM00 and CR000) Set 16-bit timer capture/compare registers 000, 010 (CR000, CR010) to other than 0000H. This means a 1-pulse count operation cannot be performed when 16-bit timer/event counter 00 is used as an event counter. (3) Capture register data retention timing The values of 16-bit timer capture/compare registers 000 and 010 (CR000 and CR010) are not guaranteed after 16-bit timer/event counter 00 has been stopped. (4) Valid edge setting Set the valid edge of the TI000 pin after setting bits 2 and 3 (TMC002 and TMC003) of 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) to 0, 0, respectively, and then stopping timer operation. The valid edge is set using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). (5) Re-triggering one-shot pulse (a) One-shot pulse output by software When a one-shot pulse is output, do not set the OSPT00 bit to 1. Do not output the one-shot pulse again until INTTM000, which occurs upon a match with the CR000 register, or INTTM010, which occurs upon a match with the CR010 register, occurs. (b) One-shot pulse output with external trigger If the external trigger occurs again while a one-shot pulse is output, it is ignored. (c) One-shot pulse output function When using the one-shot pulse output of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 with a software trigger, do not change the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate function port pin. Because the external trigger is valid even in this case, the timer is cleared and started even at the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate function port pin, resulting in the output of a pulse at an undesired timing. 162 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 (6) Operation of OVF00 flag <1> The OVF00 flag is also set to 1 in the following case. When of the following modes: the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM00 and CR000, the mode in which clear & start occurs on a TI00 valid edge, or the free-running mode, is selected CR000 is set to FFFFH TM00 is counted up from FFFFH to 0000H. Figure 6-36. Operation Timing of OVF00 Flag Count clock CR000 TM00 OVF00 INTTM000 FFFFH FFFEH FFFFH 0000H 0001H <2> Even if the OVF00 flag is cleared before the next count clock (before TM00 becomes 0001H) after the occurrence of TM00 overflow, the OVF00 flag is re-set newly and clear is disabled. (7) Conflicting operations Conflict between the read period of the 16-bit timer capture/compare register (CR000/CR010) and capture trigger input (CR000/CR010 used as capture register) Capture trigger input has priority. The data read from CR000/CR010 is undefined. Figure 6-37. Capture Register Data Retention Timing Count clock TM00 count value Edge input INTTM010 Capture read signal CR010 capture value X N+2 M+1 N N+1 N+2 M M+1 M+2 Capture Capture, but read value is not guaranteed User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 163 CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 (8) Timer operation <1> Even if 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is read, the value is not captured by 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010). <2> Regardless of the CPU's operation mode, when the timer stops, the input signals to the TI000/TI010 pins are not acknowledged. <3> The one-shot pulse output mode operates correctly only in the free-running mode and the mode in which clear & start occurs at the TI000 valid edge. In the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between the TM00 register and CR000 register, one-shot pulse output is not possible because an overflow does not occur. (9) Capture operation <1> If TI000 valid edge is specified as the count clock, a capture operation by the capture register specified as the trigger for TI000 is not possible. <2> To ensure the reliability of the capture operation, the capture trigger requires a pulse two cycles longer than the count clock selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). <3> The capture operation is performed at the falling edge of the count clock. An interrupt request input (INTTM000/INTTM010), however, is generated at the rise of the next count clock. (10) Compare operation A capture operation may not be performed for CR000/CR010 set in compare mode even if a capture trigger has been input. (11) Edge detection <1> If the TI000 or TI010 pin is high level immediately after system reset and the rising edge or both the rising and falling edges are specified as the valid edge of the TI000 or TI010 pin to enable the 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) operation, a rising edge is detected immediately after the operation is enabled. Be careful therefore when pulling up the TI000 or TI010 pin. However, the rising edge is not detected at restart after the operation has been stopped once. <2> The sampling clock used to eliminate noise differs when the TI000 valid edge is used as the count clock and when it is used as a capture trigger. In the former case, the count clock is fX, and in the latter case the count clock is selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). The capture operation is started only after a valid edge is detected twice by sampling the valid edge, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width. 164 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 7.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51 have the following functions. * Interval timer * External event counter * Square-wave output * PWM output Figures 7-1 and 7-2 show the block diagrams of 8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51. Figure 7-1. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 50 Internal bus Mask circuit 8-bit timer compare register 50 (CR50) TI50/TO50/P17 fX fX/2 fX/22 fX/26 fX/28 fX/213 Match Selector Selector Note 1 INTTM50 To TMH0 To UART0 To UART6 TO50/ TI50/P17 Output latch (P17) PM17 8-bit timer OVF counter 50 (TM50) Clear R Note 2 S R Invert level 3 Selector TCL502 TCL501 TCL500 Timer clock selection register 50 (TCL50) TCE50 TMC506 LVS50 LVR50 TMC501 TOE50 8-bit timer mode control register 50 (TMC50) Internal bus Notes 1. 2. Timer output F/F PWM output F/F Selector S Q INV User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 165 CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 Figure 7-2. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 51 Internal bus Mask circuit 8-bit timer compare register 51 (CR51) TI51/TO51/P33/INTP4 fX fX/2 fX/24 fX/26 fX/28 fX/212 Match Selector Note 1 INTTM51 Selector 8-bit timer OVF counter 51 (TM51) Clear Selector S Q INV R Note 2 S R Invert level TO51/TI51/ P33/INTP4 Output latch (P33) PM33 3 Selector TCL512 TCL511 TCL510 Timer clock selection register 51 (TCL51) TCE51 TMC516 LVS51 LVR51 TMC511 TOE51 8-bit timer mode control register 51 (TMC51) Internal bus Notes 1. 2. Timer output F/F PWM output F/F 166 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 7.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51 include the following hardware. Table 7-1. Configuration of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 Item Timer register Register Timer input Timer output Control registers 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n) TI5n TO5n Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n) 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) Port mode register 1 (PM1) or port mode register 3 (PM3) Port register 1 (P1) or port register 3 (P3) Configuration (1) 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) TM5n is an 8-bit register that counts the count pulses and is read-only. The counter is incremented in synchronization with the rising edge of the count clock. Figure 7-3. Format of 8-Bit Timer Counter 5n (TM5n) Address: FF16H (TM50), FF1FH (TM51) Symbol TM5n (n = 0, 1) After reset: 00H R In the following situations, the count value is cleared to 00H. <1> RESET input <2> When TCE5n is cleared <3> When TM5n and CR5n match in the mode in which clear & start occurs upon a match of the TM5n and CR5n. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 167 CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 (2) 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n) CR5n can be read and written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Except in PWM mode, the value set in CR5n is constantly compared with the 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) count value, and an interrupt request (INTTM5n) is generated if they match. In PWM mode, when the TO5n pin becomes active due to a TM5n overflow and the values of TM5n and CR5n match, the TO5n pin becomes inactive. The value of CR5n can be set within 00H to FFH. RESET input clears CR5n to 00H. Figure 7-4. Format of 8-Bit Timer Compare Register 5n (CR5n) Address: FF17H (CR50), FF41H (CR51) Symbol CR5n (n = 0, 1) After reset: 00H R/W Cautions 1. In the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM5n and CR5n (TMC5n6 = 0), do not write other values to CR5n during operation. 2. In PWM mode, make the CR5n rewrite period 3 count clocks of the count clock (clock selected by TCL5n) or more. Remark n = 0, 1 168 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 7.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 The following four registers are used to control 8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51. * Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n) * 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) * Port mode register 1 (PM1) or port mode register 3 (PM3) * Port register 1 (P1) or port register 3 (P3) (1) Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n) This register sets the count clock of 8-bit timer/event counter 5n and the valid edge of TI5n input. TCL5n can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears TCL5n to 00H. Remark n = 0, 1 Figure 7-5. Format of Timer Clock Selection Register 50 (TCL50) Address: FF6AH Symbol TCL50 7 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 TCL502 1 TCL501 0 TCL500 TCL502 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 TCL501 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 TCL500 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 TI50 falling edge TI50 rising edge fX (10 MHz) fX/2 (5 MHz) fX/2 (2.5 MHz) fX/2 (156.25 kHz) fX/2 (39.06 kHz) fX/2 (1.22 kHz) 13 8 6 2 Count clock selection Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the count clock is the RingOSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 50 is not guaranteed. 2. When rewriting TCL50 to other data, stop the timer operation beforehand. 3. Be sure to set bits 3 to 7 to 0. Remarks 1. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 2. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fX = 10 MHz. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 169 CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 Figure 7-6. Format of Timer Clock Selection Register 51 (TCL51) Address: FF8CH Symbol TCL51 7 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 TCL512 1 TCL511 0 TCL510 TCL512 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 TCL511 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 TCL510 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 TI51 falling edge TI51 rising edge fX (10 MHz) fX/2 (5 MHz) fX/2 (625 kHz) fX/2 (156.25 kHz) fX/2 (39.06 kHz) fX/2 (2.44 kHz) 12 8 6 4 Count clock selection Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the count clock is the RingOSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is not guaranteed. 2. When rewriting TCL51 to other data, stop the timer operation beforehand. 3. Be sure to set bits 3 to 7 to 0. Remarks 1. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 2. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fX = 10 MHz. 170 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 (2) 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) TMC5n is a register that performs the following five types of settings. <1> 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) count operation control <2> 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) operating mode selection <3> Timer output F/F (flip-flop) status setting <4> Active level selection in timer F/F control or PWM (free-running) mode <5> Timer output control TMC5n can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Remark n = 0, 1 Figure 7-7. Format of 8-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 50 (TMC50) Address: FF6BH Symbol TMC50 After reset: 00H <7> TCE50 6 TMC506 R/W 5 0 4 0 <3> LVS50 <2> LVR50 1 TMC501 <0> TOE50 TCE50 0 1 TM50 count operation control After clearing to 0, count operation disabled (counter stopped) Count operation start TMC506 0 1 TM50 operating mode selection Mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM50 and CR50 PWM (free-running) mode LVS50 0 0 1 1 LVR50 0 1 0 1 No change Timer output F/F status setting Timer output F/F reset (0) Timer output F/F set (1) Setting prohibited TMC501 In other modes (TMC506 = 0) Timer F/F control In PWM mode (TMC506 = 1) Active level selection Active-high Active-low 0 1 Inversion operation disabled Inversion operation enabled TOE50 0 1 Timer output control Output disabled (TM50 output is low level) Output enabled (Refer to Caution and Remark on the page after the next.) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 171 CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 Figure 7-8. Format of 8-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 51 (TMC51) Address: FF43H Symbol TMC51 After reset: 00H <7> TCE51 6 TMC516 R/W 5 0 4 0 <3> LVS51 <2> LVR51 1 TMC511 <0> TOE51 TCE51 0 1 TM51 count operation control After clearing to 0, count operation disabled (counter stopped) Count operation start TMC516 0 1 TM51 operating mode selection Mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM51 and CR51 PWM (free-running) mode LVS51 0 0 1 1 LVR51 0 1 0 1 No change Timer output F/F status setting Timer output F/F reset (0) Timer output F/F set (1) Setting prohibited TMC511 In other modes (TMC516 = 0) Timer F/F control In PWM mode (TMC516 = 1) Active level selection Active-high Active-low 0 1 Inversion operation disabled Inversion operation enabled TOE51 0 1 Timer output control Output disabled (TM51 output is the low level) Output enabled Cautions 1. The settings of LVS5n and LVR5n are valid in other than PWM mode. 2. Do not rewrite following bits simultaneously. * TMC5n1 and TOE5n * TMC5n6 and TOE5n * TMC5n1 and TMC5n6 * TMC5n6 and LVS5n, LVR5n * TOE5n and LVS5n, LVR5n 3. Stop operation before rewriting TMC5n6. Remarks 1. In PWM mode, PWM output is made inactive by setting TCE5n to 0. 2. If LVS5n and LVR5n are read, the value is 0. 3. The values of the TMC5n6, LVS5n, LVR5n, TMC5n1, and TOE5n bits are reflected at the TO5n pin regardless of the value of TCE5n. 4. n = 0, 1 172 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 (3) Port mode register 1 and 3 (PM1, PM3) These registers set ports 1 and 3 input/output in 1-bit units. When using the P17/TO50/TI50 and P33/TO51/TI51/INTP4 pins for timer output, set PM17 and PM33 and the output latches of P17 and P33 to 0. When using the P17/TO50/TI50 and P33/TO51/TI51/INTP4 pins for timer input, set PM17 and PM33 to 1. The output latches of P17 and P33 at this time may be 0 or 1. PM1 and PM3 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets these registers to FFH. Figure 7-9. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1) Address: FF21H Symbol PM1 7 PM17 After reset: FFH 6 PM16 R/W 5 PM15 4 PM14 3 PM13 2 PM12 1 PM11 0 PM10 PM1n 0 1 P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7) Output mode (output buffer on) Input mode (output buffer off) Figure 7-10. Format of Port Mode Register 3 (PM3) Address: FF23H Symbol PM3 7 0 After reset: FFH 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 PM33 2 PM32 1 PM31 0 PM30 PM3n 0 1 P3n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 3) Output mode (output buffer on) Input mode (output buffer off) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 173 CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 7.4 Operations of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 7.4.1 Operation as interval timer 8-bit timer/event counter 5n operates as an interval timer that generates interrupt requests repeatedly at intervals of the count value preset to 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n). When the count value of 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) matches the value set to CR5n, counting continues with the TM5n value cleared to 0 and an interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) is generated. The count clock of TM5n can be selected with bits 0 to 2 (TCL5n0 to TCL5n2) of timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n). Setting <1> Set the registers. * TCL5n: * CR5n: * TMC5n: Select the count clock. Compare value Stop the count operation, select the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM5n and CR5n. (TMC5n = 0000xxx0B x = Don't care) <2> After TCE5n = 1 is set, the count operation starts. <3> If the values of TM5n and CR5n match, INTTM5n is generated (TM5n is cleared to 00H). <4> INTTM5n is generated repeatedly at the same interval. Set TCE5n to 0 to stop the count operation. Caution Do not write other values to CR5n during operation. Figure 7-11. Interval Timer Operation Timing (1/2) (a) Basic operation t Count clock TM5n count value 00H 01H N 00H 01H N 00H 01H N Count start CR5n TCE5n INTTM5n N Clear N Clear N N Interrupt acknowledged Interval time Interrupt acknowledged Interval time Remark Interval time = (N + 1) x t N = 00H to FFH n = 0, 1 174 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 Figure 7-11. Interval Timer Operation Timing (2/2) (b) When CR5n = 00H t Count clock TM5n 00H CR5n TCE5n INTTM5n Interval time 00H 00H 00H 00H (c) When CR5n = FFH t Count clock TM5n CR5n TCE5n INTTM5n Interrupt acknowledged Interval time Interrupt acknowledged FFH 01H FEH FFH FFH 00H FEH FFH FFH 00H Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 175 CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 7.4.2 Operation as external event counter The external event counter counts the number of external clock pulses to be input to TI5n by 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n). TM5n is incremented each time the valid edge specified by timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n) is input. Either the rising or falling edge can be selected. When the TM5n count value matches the value of 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n), TM5n is cleared to 0 and an interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) is generated. Whenever the TM5n value matches the value of CR5n, INTTM5n is generated. Setting <1> Set each register. * Set the port mode register (PM17 or PM33)Note to 1. * TCL5n: Select TI5n input edge. TI5n falling edge TCL5n = 00H TI5n rising edge TCL5n = 01H * CR5n: Compare value CR5n, disable the timer F/F inversion operation, disable timer output. (TMC5n = 0000xx00B x = Don't care) <2> When TCE5n = 1 is set, the number of pulses input from TI5n is counted. <3> When the values of TM5n and CR5n match, INTTM5n is generated (TM5n is cleared to 00H). <4> After these settings, INTTM5n is generated each time the values of TM5n and CR5n match. Note 8-bit timer/event counter 50: PM17 8-bit timer/event counter 51: PM33 Figure 7-12. External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified) TI5n Count start TM5n count value CR5n INTTM5n 00 01 02 03 04 05 N-1 N N 00 01 02 03 * TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select the mode in which clear & start occurs on match of TM5n and Remark N = 00H to FFH n = 0, 1 176 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 7.4.3 Square-wave output operation A square wave with any selected frequency is output at intervals determined by the value preset to 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n). The TO5n pin output status is inverted at intervals determined by the count value preset to CR5n by setting bit 0 (TOE5n) of 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) to 1. This enables a square wave with any selected frequency to be output (duty = 50%). Setting <1> Set each register. * Set the port output latch (P17 or P33)Note and port mode register (PM17 or PM33)Note to 0. * TCL5n: Select the count clock. * CR5n: Compare value CR5n. LVS5n 1 0 LVR5n 0 1 Timer Output F/F Status Setting High-level output Low-level output * TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM5n and Timer output F/F inversion enabled Timer output enabled (TMC5n = 00001011B or 00000111B) <2> After TCE5n = 1 is set, the count operation starts. <3> The timer output F/F is inverted by a match of TM5n and CR5n. After INTTM5n is generated, TM5n is cleared to 00H. <4> After these settings, the timer output F/F is inverted at the same interval and a square wave is output from TO5n. The frequency is as follows. Frequency = 1/2t (N + 1) (N: 00H to FFH) Note 8-bit timer/event counter 50: P17, PM17 8-bit timer/event counter 51: P33, PM33 Caution Do not write other values to CR5n during operation. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 177 CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 Figure 7-13. Square-Wave Output Operation Timing t Count clock TM5n count value 00H 01H 02H N-1 N 00H 01H 02H N-1 N 00H Count start CR5n N TO5nNote Note The initial value of TO5n output can be set by bits 2 and 3 (LVR5n, LVS5n) of 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n). 7.4.4 PWM output operation 8-bit timer/event counter 5n operates as a PWM output when bit 6 (TMC5n6) of 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) is set to 1. The duty pulse determined by the value set to 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n) is output from TO5n. Set the active level width of the PWM pulse to CR5n; the active level can be selected with bit 1 (TMC5n1) of TMC5n. The count clock can be selected with bits 0 to 2 (TCL5n0 to TCL5n2) of timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n). PWM output can be enabled/disabled with bit 0 (TOE5n) of TMC5n. Caution In PWM mode, make the CR5n rewrite interval 3 count clocks of the count clock (clock selected by TCL5n) or more. Remark n = 0, 1 178 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 (1) PWM output basic operation Setting <1> Set each register. * Set the port output latch (P17 or P33)Note and port mode register (PM17 or PM33)Note to 0. * TCL5n: Select the count clock. * CR5n: Compare value The timer output F/F is not changed. TMC5n1 0 1 Active-high Active-low Active Level Selection * TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select PWM mode. Timer output enabled (TMC5n = 01000001B or 01000011B) <2> The count operation starts when TCE5n = 1. Set TCE5n to 0 to stop the count operation. Note 8-bit timer/event counter 50: P17, PM17 8-bit timer/event counter 51: P33, PM33 PWM output operation <1> PWM output (output from TO5n) outputs an inactive level until an overflow occurs. <2> When an overflow occurs, the active level is output. The active level is output until CR5n matches the count value of 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n). <3> After the CR5n matches the count value, the inactive level is output until an overflow occurs again. <4> Operations <2> and <3> are repeated until the count operation stops. <5> When the count operation is stopped with TCE5n = 0, PWM output becomes inactive. For details of timing, see Figures 7-14 and 7-15. The cycle, active-level width, and duty are as follows. * Cycle = 28t * Active-level width = Nt * Duty = N/28 (N = 00H to FFH) Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 179 CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 Figure 7-14. PWM Output Operation Timing (a) Basic operation (active level = H) t Count clock TM5n CR5n TCE5n INTTM5n TO5n <1> <5> <2> Active level <3> Inactive level Active level 00H 01H N FFH 00H 01H 02H N N+1 FFH 00H 01H 02H M 00H (b) CR5n = 00H t Count clock TM5n CR5n TCE5n INTTM5n TO5n L Inactive level Inactive level 00H 01H 00H FFH 00H 01H 02H N N+1 N+2 FFH 00H 01H 02H M 00H (c) CR5n = FFH t TM5n CR5n TCE5n INTTM5n TO5n 00H 01H FFH FFH 00H 01H 02H N N+1 N+2 FFH 00H 01H 02H M 00H Inactive level Active level Active level Inactive level Inactive level Remarks 1. <1> to <3> and <5> in Figure 7-14 (a) correspond to <1> to <3> and <5> in PWM output operation in 7.4.4 (1) PWM output basic operation. 2. n = 0, 1 180 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 (2) Operation with CR5n changed Figure 7-15. Timing of Operation with CR5n Changed (a) CR5n value is changed from N to M before clock rising edge of FFH Value is transferred to CR5n at overflow immediately after change. t Count clock TM5n CR5n TCE5n INTTM5n TO5n <2> <1> CR5n change (N M) H N N+1 N+2 N FFH 00H 01H 02H M M M+1 M+2 FFH 00H 01H 02H M M+1 M+2 (b) CR5n value is changed from N to M after clock rising edge of FFH Value is transferred to CR5n at second overflow. t Count clock TM5n CR5n TCE5n INTTM5n TO5n <1> CR5n change (N M) <2> H N N+1 N+2 N FFH 00H 01H 02H N N N+1 N+2 FFH 00H 01H 02H M M M+1 M+2 Caution When reading from CR5n between <1> and <2> in Figure 7-15, the value read differs from the actual value (read value: M, actual value of CR5n: N). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 181 CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 7.5 Cautions for 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 (1) Timer start error An error of up to one clock may occur in the time required for a match signal to be generated after timer start. This is because 8-bit timer counters 50 and 51 (TM50, TM51) are started asynchronously to the count clock. Figure 7-16. 8-Bit Timer Counter 5n Start Timing Count clock TM5n count value 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H Timer start Remark n = 0, 1 182 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 8.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 8-bit timers H0 and H1 have the following functions. * Interval timer * PWM pulse output mode * Square-wave output * Carrier generator mode (8-bit timer H1 only) 8.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 8-bit timers H0 and H1 include the following hardware. Table 8-1. Configuration of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 Item Timer register Registers 8-bit timer counter Hn 8-bit timer H compare register 0n (CMP0n) 8-bit timer H compare register 1n (CMP1n) Timer output Control registers TOHn 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1) Port mode register 1 (PM1) Port register 1 (P1) Note Configuration Note 8-bit timer H1 only Remark n = 0, 1 Figures 8-1 and 8-2 show the block diagrams. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 183 Selector 184 8-bit timer H mode control register 0 (TMHMD0) 3 2 Decoder User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD Figure 8-1. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer H0 Internal bus TMHE0 CKS02 CKS01 CKS00 TMMD01 TMMD00 TOLEV0 TOEN0 8-bit timer H compare register 10 (CMP10) 8-bit timer H compare register 00 (CMP00) TOH0/P15 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Selector Match fX fX/2 fX/22 fX/26 fX/210 8-bit timer/ event counter 50 output Interrupt generator F/F R Output controller Level inversion Output latch (P15) PM15 8-bit timer counter H0 Clear PWM mode signal 1 0 INTTMH0 Timer H enable signal (1) 8-bit timer H compare register 0n (CMP0n) Figure 8-2. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer H1 Internal bus 8-bit timer H mode control register 1 (TMHMD1) TMHE1 CKS12 CKS11 CKS10 TMMD11 TMMD10 TOLEV1 TOEN1 8-bit timer H compare register 1 1 (CMP11) 8-bit timer H compare register 0 1 (CMP01) 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 RMC1 NRZB1 NRZ1 (TMCYC1) Reload/ interrupt control INTTM51 TOH1/ INTP5/ P16 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 3 2 Decoder Selector Match fX fX/22 fX/24 fX/26 fX/212 fR/27 Interrupt generator F/F R Output controller Level inversion Output latch (P16) PM16 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD Selector 8-bit timer counter H1 Carrier generator mode signal PWM mode signal 1 0 INTTMH1 Clear Timer H enable signal 185 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 (1) 8-bit timer H compare register 0n (CMP0n) This register can be read/written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 8-3. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Compare Register 0n (CMP0n) Address: FF18H (CMP00), FF1AH (CMP01) Symbol CMP0n (n = 0, 1) 7 6 5 4 After reset: 00H 3 R/W 2 1 0 Caution CMP0n cannot be rewritten during timer count operation. (2) 8-bit timer H compare register 1n (CMP1n) This register can be read/written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 8-4. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Compare Register 1n (CMP1n) Address: FF19H (CMP10), FF1BH (CMP11) Symbol CMP1n (n = 0, 1) 7 6 5 4 After reset: 00H 3 R/W 2 1 0 CMP1n can be rewritten during timer count operation. In the carrier generator mode, an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is generated if the values of the timer counter and CMP1n match after setting CMP1n. The timer counter value is cleared at the same time. If the CMP1n value is rewritten during timer operation, transfer is performed at the timing at which the counter value and CMP1n value match. If the transfer timing and writing from CPU to CMP1n register conflict, transfer is not performed. Caution In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set CMP1n when starting the timer count operation (TMHEn = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHEn = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to CMP1n). Remark n = 0, 1 186 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 8.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 The following four registers are used to control 8-bit timers H0 and H1. * 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) * 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)Note * Port mode register 1 (PM1) * Port register 1 (P1) Note 8-bit timer H1 only (1) 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) This register controls the mode of timer H. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 187 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Figure 8-5. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 0 (TMHMD0) Address: FF69H <7> TMHMD0 TMHE0 After reset: 00H 6 CKS02 R/W 5 CKS01 4 CKS00 3 2 <1> <0> TOEN0 TMMD01 TMMD00 TOLEV0 TMHE0 0 1 Timer operation enable Stops timer count operation (counter is cleared to 0) Enables timer count operation (count operation started by inputting clock) CKS02 0 0 0 0 1 1 CKS01 0 0 1 1 0 0 CKS00 0 1 0 1 0 1 fX fX/2 fX/2 fX/2 2 6 Count clock (fCNT) selection (10 MHz) (5 MHz) (2.5 MHz) (156.25 kHz) (9.77 kHz) fX/210 TM50 outputNote Setting prohibited Other than above TMMD01 TMMD00 0 1 0 0 Interval timer mode PWM output mode Setting prohibited Timer operation mode Other than above TOLEV0 0 1 Low level High level Timer output level control (in default mode) TOEN0 0 1 Disables output Enables output Timer output control Note To select the TM50 output as a count clock, start operation by setting 8-bit timer/event counter 50 in the PWM output mode (bit 6 (TMC506) of the TMC50 register = 1), and then set CKS02, CKS01, and CKS00 to 1, 0, and 1, respectively. Set the high/low level width of the count clock so that the specifications of the input width of TI50 are satisfied (see AC Characteristics (1) Basic operation in CHAPTER 27 to CHAPTER 29). It is not necessary to enable the TO50 pin as a timer output pin (bit 0 (TOE50) of the TMC register may be 0 or 1). 188 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the count clock is the Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer H0 is not guaranteed. 2. When TMHE0 = 1, setting the other bits of the TMHMD0 register is prohibited. 3. In the PWM output mode, be sure to set 8-bit timer H compare register 10 (CMP10) when starting the timer count operation (TMHE0 = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHE0 = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the CMP10 register). Remarks 1. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 2. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fX = 10 MHz User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 189 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Figure 8-6. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 1 (TMHMD1) Address: FF6CH <7> TMHMD1 TMHE1 After reset: 00H 6 CKS12 R/W 5 CKS11 4 CKS10 3 2 <1> <0> TOEN1 TMMD11 TMMD10 TOLEV1 TMHE1 0 1 Timer operation enable Stops timer count operation (counter is cleared to 0) Enables timer count operation (count operation started by inputting clock) CKS12 0 0 0 0 1 1 CKS11 0 0 1 1 0 0 CKS10 0 1 0 1 0 1 fX fX/2 fX/2 2 4 Count clock (fCNT) selection (10 MHz) (2.5 MHz) (625 kHz) (156.25 kHz) (2.44 kHz) (1.88 kHz (TYP.)) fX/26 fX/2 12 7 fR/2 Other than above Setting prohibited TMMD11 TMMD10 0 0 1 0 1 0 Interval timer mode Timer operation mode Carrier generator mode PWM output mode Setting prohibited Other than above TOLEV1 0 1 Low level High level Timer output level control (in default mode) TOEN1 0 1 Disables output Enables output Timer output control Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the count clock is the RingOSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer H1 is not guaranteed (except when CKS12, CKS11, CKS10 = 1, 0, 1 (fR/27)). 2. When TMHE1 = 1, setting the other bits of the TMHMD1 register is prohibited. 3. In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set 8-bit timer H compare register 11 (CMP11) when starting the timer count operation (TMHE1 = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHE1 = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the CMP11 register). 4. When the carrier generator mode is used, set so that the count clock frequency of TMH1 becomes more than 6 times the count clock frequency of TM51. 190 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Remarks 1. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 2. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency 3. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fX = 10 MHz, fR = 240 kHz (TYP.). (2) 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1) This register controls the remote control output and carrier pulse output status of 8-bit timer H1. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 8-7. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Carrier Control Register 1 (TMCYC1) Address: FF6DH 7 TMCYC1 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 R/WNote 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 RMC1 1 NRZB1 <0> NRZ1 RMC1 0 0 1 1 NRZB1 0 1 0 1 Low-level output Remote control output High-level output Low-level output Carrier pulse output NRZ1 0 1 Carrier pulse output status flag Carrier output disabled status (low-level status) Carrier output enabled status (RMC1 = 1: Carrier pulse output, RMC1 = 0: High-level status) Note Bit 0 is read-only. (3) Port mode register 1 (PM1) This register sets port 1 input/output in 1-bit units. When using the P15/TOH0 and P16/TOH1/INTP5 pins for timer output, clear PM15 and PM16 and the output latches of P15 and P16 to 0. PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to FFH. Figure 8-8. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1) Address: FF21H Symbol PM1 7 PM17 After reset: FFH 6 PM16 R/W 5 PM15 4 PM14 3 PM13 2 PM12 1 PM11 0 PM10 PM1n 0 1 P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7) Output mode (output buffer on) Input mode (output buffer off) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 191 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 8.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 8.4.1 Operation as interval timer/square-wave output When 8-bit timer counter Hn and compare register 0n (CMP0n) match, an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is generated and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. Compare register 1n (CMP1n) is not used in interval timer mode. Since a match of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register is not detected even if the CMP1n register is set, timer output is not affected. By setting bit 0 (TOENn) of timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) to 1, a square wave of any frequency (duty = 50%) is output from TOHn. (1) Usage Generates the INTTMHn signal repeatedly at the same interval. <1> Set each register. Figure 8-9. Register Setting During Interval Timer/Square-Wave Output Operation (i) Setting timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) TMHEn TMHMDn 0 CKSn2 0/1 CKSn1 0/1 CKSn0 0/1 TMMDn1 TMMDn0 TOLEVn 0 0 0/1 TOENn 0/1 Timer output setting Timer output level inversion setting Interval timer mode setting Count clock (fCNT) selection Count operation stopped (ii) CMP0n register setting * Compare value (N) <2> Count operation starts when TMHEn = 1. <3> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the INTTMHn signal is generated and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. Interval time = (N +1)/fCNT <4> Subsequently, the INTTMHn signal is generated at the same interval. To stop the count operation, clear TMHEn to 0. Remark n = 0, 1 192 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 (2) Timing chart The timing of the interval timer/square-wave output operation is shown below. Figure 8-10. Timing of Interval Timer/Square-Wave Output Operation (1/2) (a) Basic operation Count clock Count start 8-bit timer counter Hn 00H 01H N 00H Clear 01H N 00H Clear 01H 00H CMP0n N TMHEn INTTMHn Interval time TOHn <1> <2> Level inversion, match interrupt occurrence, 8-bit timer counter Hn clear <3> <2> Level inversion, match interrupt occurrence, 8-bit timer counter Hn clear <1> The count operation is enabled by setting the TMHEn bit to 1. The count clock starts counting no more than 1 clock after the operation is enabled. <2> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, the TOHn output level is inverted, and the INTTMHn signal is output. <3> The INTTMHn signal and TOHn output become inactive by clearing the TMHEn bit to 0 during timer Hn operation. If these are inactive from the first, the level is retained. Remark n = 0, 1 N = 01H to FEH User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 193 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Figure 8-10. Timing of Interval Timer/Square-Wave Output Operation (2/2) (b) Operation when CMP0n = FFH Count clock Count start 8-bit timer counter Hn 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H Clear FEH FFH 00H Clear CMP0n FFH TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn Interval time (c) Operation when CMP0n = 00H Count clock Count start 8-bit timer counter Hn 00H CMP0n 00H TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn Interval time Remark n = 0, 1 194 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 8.4.2 Operation as PWM output mode In PWM output mode, a pulse with an arbitrary duty and arbitrary cycle can be output. 8-bit timer compare register 0n (CMP0n) controls the cycle of timer output (TOHn). Rewriting the CMP0n register during timer operation is prohibited. 8-bit timer compare register 1n (CMP1n) controls the duty of timer output (TOHn). Rewriting the CMP1n register during timer operation is possible. The operation in PWM output mode is as follows. TOHn output becomes active and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 0 when 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match after the timer count is started. TOHn output becomes inactive when 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register match. (1) Usage In PWM output mode, a pulse for which an arbitrary duty and arbitrary cycle can be set is output. <1> Set each register. Figure 8-11. Register Setting in PWM Output Mode (i) Setting timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) CKSn2 0/1 CKSn1 0/1 CKSn0 0/1 TMMDn1 TMMDn0 TOLEVn 1 0 0/1 TOENn 1 TMHEn TMHMDn 0 Timer output enabled Timer output level inversion setting PWM output mode selection Count clock (fCNT) selection Count operation stopped (ii) Setting CMP0n register * Compare value (N): Cycle setting (iii) Setting CMP1n register * Compare value (M): Duty setting Remarks 1. n = 0, 1 2. 00H CMP1n (M) < CMP0n (N) FFH <2> The count operation starts when TMHEn = 1. <3> The CMP0n register is the compare register that is to be compared first after counter operation is enabled. When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is generated, and TOHn output becomes active. At the same time, the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn is changed from the CMP0n register to the CMP1n register. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 195 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 <4> When 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register match, TOHn output becomes inactive and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn is changed from the CMP1n register to the CMP0n register. generated. <5> By performing procedures <3> and <4> repeatedly, a pulse with an arbitrary duty can be obtained. <6> To stop the count operation, set TMHEn = 0. If the setting value of the CMP0n register is N, the setting value of the CMP1n register is M, and the count clock frequency is fCNT, the PWM pulse output cycle and duty are as follows. PWM pulse output cycle = (N+1)/fCNT Duty = Active width : Total width of PWM = (M + 1) : (N + 1) At this time, 8-bit timer counter Hn is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not Cautions 1. In PWM output mode, three operation clocks (signal selected using the CKSn2 to CKSn0 bits of the TMHMDn register) are required to transfer the CMP1n register value after rewriting the register. 2. Be sure to set the CMP1n register when starting the timer count operation (TMHEn = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHEn = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the CMP1n register). 196 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 (2) Timing chart The operation timing in PWM output mode is shown below. Caution Make sure that the CMP1n register setting value (M) and CMP0n register setting value (N) are within the following range. 00H CMP1n (M) < CMP0n (N) FFH Remark n = 0, 1 Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (1/4) (a) Basic operation Count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn 00H 01H A5H 00H 01H 02H A5H 00H 01H 02H A5H 00H CMP0n A5H CMP1n 01H TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn (TOLEVn = 0) <1> TOHn (TOLEVn = 1) <2> <3> <4> <1> The count operation is enabled by setting the TMHEn bit to 1. Start 8-bit timer counter Hn by masking one count clock to count up. At this time, TOHn output remains inactive (when TOLEVn = 0). <2> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the TOHn output level is inverted, the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, and the INTTMHn signal is output. <3> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register match, the level of the TOHn output is returned. At this time, the 8-bit timer counter value is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not output. <4> Clearing the TMHEn bit to 0 during timer Hn operation makes the INTTMHn signal and TOHn output inactive. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 197 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (2/4) (b) Operation when CMP0n = FFH, CMP1n = 00H Count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn 00H 01H FFH 00H 01H 02H FFH 00H 01H 02H FFH 00H CMP0n FFH CMP1n 00H TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn (TOLEVn = 0) (c) Operation when CMP0n = FFH, CMP1n = FEH Count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H CMP0n FFH CMP1n FEH TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn (TOLEVn = 0) Remark n = 0, 1 198 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (3/4) (d) Operation when CMP0n = 01H, CMP1n = 00H Count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn 00H 01H 00H 01H 00H 00H 01H 00H 01H CMP0n 01H CMP1n 00H TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn (TOLEVn = 0) Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 199 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (4/4) (e) Operation by changing CMP1n (CMP1n = 01H 03H, CMP0n = A5H) Count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn 00H 01H 02H A5H 00H 01H 02H 03H A5H 00H 01H 02H 03H A5H 00H CMP0n A5H CMP1n 01H <2> 01H (03H) <2>' 03H TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn (TOLEVn = 0) <1> <3> <4> <5> <6> <1> The count operation is enabled by setting TMHEn = 1. Start 8-bit timer counter Hn by masking one count clock to count up. At this time, the TOHn output remains inactive (when TOLEVn = 0). <2> The CMP1n register value can be changed during timer counter operation. This operation is asynchronous to the count clock. <3> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, the TOHn output becomes active, and the INTTMHn signal is output. <4> If the CMP1n register value is changed, the value is latched and not transferred to the register. When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register before the change match, the value is transferred to the CMP1n register and the CMP1n register value is changed (<2>'). However, three count clocks or more are required from when the CMP1n register value is changed to when the value is transferred to the register. If a match signal is generated within three count clocks, the changed value cannot be transferred to the register. <5> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register after the change match, the TOHn output becomes inactive. 8-bit timer counter Hn is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not generated. <6> Clearing the TMHEn bit to 0 during timer Hn operation makes the INTTMHn signal and TOHn output inactive. Remark n = 0, 1 200 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 8.4.3 Carrier generator mode operation (8-bit timer H1 only) The carrier clock generated by 8-bit timer H1 is output in the cycle set by 8-bit timer/event counter 51. In carrier generator mode, the output of the 8-bit timer H1 carrier pulse is controlled by 8-bit timer/event counter 51, and the carrier pulse is output from the TOH1 output. (1) Carrier generation In carrier generator mode, 8-bit timer H compare register 01 (CMP01) generates a low-level width carrier pulse waveform and 8-bit timer H compare register 11 (CMP11) generates a high-level width carrier pulse waveform. Rewriting the CMP11 register during 8-bit timer H1 operation is possible but rewriting the CMP01 register is prohibited. (2) Carrier output control Carrier output is controlled by the interrupt request signal (INTTM51) of 8-bit timer/event counter 51 and the NRZB1 and RMC1 bits of the 8-bit timer H carrier control register (TMCYC1). The relationship between the outputs is shown below. RMC1 Bit 0 0 1 1 NRZB1 Bit 0 1 0 1 Output Low-level output High-level output Low-level output Carrier pulse output User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 201 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 To control the carrier pulse output during a count operation, the NRZ1 and NRZB1 bits of the TMCYC1 register have a master and slave bit configuration. The NRZ1 bit is read-only but the NRZB1 bit can be read and written. The INTTM51 signal is synchronized with the 8-bit timer H1 count clock and output as the INTTM5H1 signal. The INTTM5H1 signal becomes the data transfer signal of the NRZ1 bit, and the NRZB1 bit value is transferred to the NRZ1 bit. The timing for transfer from the NRZB1 bit to the NRZ1 bit is as shown below. Figure 8-13. Transfer Timing TMHE1 8-bit timer H1 count clock INTTM51 INTTM5H1 <1> NRZ1 0 <2> NRZB1 1 0 1 1 0 RMC1 <1> The INTTM51 signal is synchronized with the count clock of 8-bit timer H1 and is output as the INTTM5H1 signal. <2> The value of the NRZB1 bit is transferred to the NRZ1 bit at the second clock from the rising edge of the INTTM5H1 signal. Cautions 1. Do not rewrite the NRZB1 bit again until at least the second clock after it has been rewritten, or else the transfer from the NRZB1 bit to the NRZ1 bit is not guaranteed. 2. When 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is used in the carrier generator mode, an interrupt is generated at the timing of <1>. When 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is used in a mode other than the carrier generator mode, the timing of the interrupt generation differs 202 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 (3) Usage Outputs an arbitrary carrier clock from the TOH1 pin. <1> Set each register. Figure 8-14. Register Setting in Carrier Generator Mode (i) Setting 8-bit timer H mode register 1 (TMHMD1) CKS12 0/1 CKS11 0/1 CKS10 0/1 TMMD11 TMMD10 TOLEV1 0 1 0/1 TOEN1 0/1 TMHE1 TMHMD1 0 Timer output enabled Timer output level inversion setting Carrier generator mode selection Count clock (fCNT) selection Count operation stopped (ii) CMP01 register setting * Compare value (iii) CMP11 register setting * Compare value (iv) TMCYC1 register setting * RMC1 = 1 ... Remote control output enable bit * NRZB1 = 0/1 ... Carrier output enable bit (v) TCL51 and TMC51 register setting * Refer to 7.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51. <2> When TMHE1 = 1, 8-bit timer H1 starts counting. <3> When TCE51 of 8-bit timer mode control register 51 (TMC51) is set to 1, 8-bit timer/event counter 51 starts counting. <4> After the count operation is enabled, the first compare register to be compared is the CMP01 register. When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP01 register value match, the INTTMH1 signal is generated, 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared, and at the same time, the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter H1 is switched from the CMP01 register to the CMP11 register. <5> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11 register value match, the INTTMH1 signal is generated, 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared, and at the same time, the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter H1 is switched from the CMP11 register to the CMP01 register. <6> By performing procedures <4> and <5> repeatedly, a carrier clock is generated. <7> The INTTM51 signal is synchronized with count clock of 8-bit timer H1 and output as the INTTM5H1 signal. The INTTM5H1 signal becomes the data transfer signal for the NRZB1 bit, and the NRZB1 bit value is transferred to the NRZ1 bit. <8> When the NRZ1 bit is high level, a carrier clock is output from the TOH1 pin. <9> By performing the procedures above, an arbitrary carrier clock is obtained. To stop the count operation, set TMHE1 to 0. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 203 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 If the setting value of the CMP01 register is N, the setting value of the CMP11 register is M, and the count clock frequency is fCNT, the carrier clock output cycle and duty are as follows. Carrier clock output cycle = (N + M + 2)/fCNT Duty = High-level width : Carrier clock output width = (M + 1) : (N + M + 2) Cautions 1. Be sure to set the CMP11 register when starting the timer count operation (TMHE1 = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHE1 = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the CMP11 register). 2. Set so that the count clock frequency of TMH1 becomes more than 6 times the count clock frequency of TM51. (4) Timing chart The carrier output control timing is shown below. Cautions 1. Set the values of the CMP01 and CMP11 registers in a range of 01H to FFH. 2. In the carrier generator mode, three operating clocks (signal selected by CKS12 to CKS10 bits of TMHMD1 register) or more are required from when the CMP11 register value is changed to when the value is transferred to the register. 3. Be sure to set the RMC1 bit before the count operation is started. 204 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Figure 8-15. Carrier Generator Mode Operation Timing (1/3) (a) Operation when CMP01 = N, CMP11 = N 8-bit timer Hn count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn count value CMPn0 CMPn1 TMHEn INTTMHn <1> <2> Carrier clock 8-bit timer 5n count clock TM5n count value CR5n TCE5n <5> INTTM5n INTTM5Hn NRZBn NRZn Carrier clock TOHn <7> 0 0 1 <6> 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H L L 00H 01H L 00H 01H 00H N 00H N 00H N 00H N N 00H N 00H N N <3> <4> <1> When TMHE1 = 0 and TCE51 = 0, 8-bit timer counter H1 operation is stopped. <2> When TMHE1 = 1 is set, 8-bit timer counter H1 starts a count operation. At that time, the carrier clock is held at the inactive level. <3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP01 register value, the first INTTMH1 signal is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter H1 is switched from the CMP01 register to the CMP11 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to 00H. <4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP11 register value, the INTTMH1 signal is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter H1 is switched from the CMP11 register to the CMP01 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to 00H. By performing procedures <3> and <4> repeatedly, a carrier clock with duty fixed to 50% is generated. <5> When the INTTM51 signal is generated, it is synchronized with 8-bit timer H1 count clock and output as the INTTM5H1 signal. <6> The INTTM5H1 signal becomes the data transfer signal for the NRZB1 bit, and the NRZB1 bit value is transferred to the NRZ1 bit. <7> When NRZ1 = 0 is set, the TOH1 output becomes low level. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 205 CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Figure 8-15. Carrier Generator Mode Operation Timing (2/3) (b) Operation when CMP01 = N, CMP11 = M 8-bit timer Hn count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H N 00H 01H M 00H N 00H 01H M 00H N 00H CMPn0 CMPn1 TMHEn INTTMHn <1> <2> N M <3> <4> Carrier clock 8-bit timer 5n count clock TM5n count value CR5n TCE5n 00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H L <5> INTTM5n INTTM5Hn NRZBn NRZn Carrier clock 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 <6> TOHn <7> <1> When TMHE1 = 0 and TCE51 = 0, 8-bit timer counter H1 operation is stopped. <2> When TMHE1 = 1 is set, 8-bit timer counter H1 starts a count operation. At that time, the carrier clock is held at the inactive level. <3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP01 register value, the first INTTMH1 signal is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter H1 is switched from the CMP01 register to the CMP11 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to 00H. <4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP11 register value, the INTTMH1 signal is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter H1 is switched from the CMP11 register to the CMP01 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to 00H. By performing procedures <3> and <4> repeatedly, a carrier clock with duty fixed to other than 50% is generated. <5> When the INTTM51 signal is generated, it is synchronized with 8-bit timer H1 count clock and output as the INTTM5H1 signal. <6> A carrier signal is output at the first rising edge of the carrier clock if NRZ1 is set to 1. <7> When NRZ1 = 0, the TOH1 output is held at the high level and is not changed to low level while the carrier clock is high level (from <6> and <7>, the high-level width of the carrier clock waveform is guaranteed). 206 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Figure 8-15. Carrier Generator Mode Operation Timing (3/3) (c) Operation when CMP11 is changed 8-bit timer H1 count clock 8-bit timer counter H1 count value 00H 01H N 00H 01H M 00H N 00H 01H L 00H CMP01 <3> CMP11 M M (L) N <3>' L TMHE1 INTTMH1 <2> Carrier clock <1> <4> <5> <1> When TMHE1 = 1 is set, 8-bit timer H1 starts a count operation. At that time, the carrier clock is held at the inactive level. <2> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP01 register value, 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared and the INTTMH1 signal is output. <3> The CMP11 register can be rewritten during 8-bit timer H1 operation, however, the changed value (L) is latched. The CMP11 register is changed when the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11 register value before the change (M) match (<3>'). <4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11 register value before the change (M) match, the INTTMH1 signal is output, the carrier signal is inverted, and 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to 00H. <5> The timing at which the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11 register value match again is indicated by the value after the change (L). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 207 CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER 9.1 Functions of Watch Timer The watch timer has the following functions. * Watch timer * Interval timer The watch timer and the interval timer can be used simultaneously. Figure 9-1 shows the watch timer block diagram. Figure 9-1. Watch Timer Block Diagram Clear Selector Selector fWX 5-bit counter fWX/25 Clear Selector fWX/24 INTWT fX/27 fXT fW 11-bit prescaler fW/24 fW/25 fW/26 fW/27 fW/28 fW/210 fW/211 fW/29 Selector INTWTI WTM7 WTM6 WTM5 WTM4 WTM3 WTM2 WTM1 WTM0 Watch timer operation mode register (WTM) Internal bus Remark fX: fXT: fW: fWX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency Subsystem clock oscillation frequency Watch timer clock frequency fWX or fW/29 208 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER (1) Watch timer When the X1 input clock or subsystem clock is used, interrupt requests (INTWT) are generated at preset intervals. Table 9-1. Watch Timer Interrupt Time Interrupt Time 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 14 13 5 4 When Operated at fXT = 32.768 kHz 488 s 977 s 0.25 s 0.5 s When Operated at fX = 10 MHz 205 s 410 s 0.105 s 0.210 s Remark fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency fW: Watch timer clock frequency (2) Interval timer Interrupt requests (INTWTI) are generated at preset time intervals. Table 9-2. Interval Timer Interval Time Interval Time 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 When Operated at fXT = 32.768 kHz 488 s 977 s 1.95 ms 3.91 ms 7.81 ms 15.6 ms 31.3 ms 62.5 ms When Operated at fX = 10 MHz 205 s 410 s 820 s 1.64 ms 3.28 ms 6.55 ms 13.1 ms 26.2 ms Remark fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency fW: Watch timer clock frequency User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 209 CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER 9.2 Configuration of Watch Timer The watch timer includes the following hardware. Table 9-3. Watch Timer Configuration Item Counter Prescaler Control register 5 bits x 1 11 bits x 1 Watch timer operation mode register (WTM) Configuration 9.3 Register Controlling Watch Timer The watch timer is controlled by the watch timer operation mode register (WTM). * Watch timer operation mode register (WTM) This register sets the watch timer count clock, enables/disables operation, prescaler interval time, and 5-bit counter operation control. WTM is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears WTM to 00H. 210 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER Figure 9-2. Format of Watch Timer Operation Mode Register (WTM) Address: FF6FH Symbol WTM 7 WTM7 After reset: 00H 6 WTM6 R/W 5 WTM5 4 WTM4 3 WTM3 2 WTM2 <1> WTM1 <0> WTM0 WTM7 0 1 fX/2 (78.125 kHz) fXT (32.768 kHz) 7 Watch timer count clock selection WTM6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 WTM5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 WTM4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Prescaler interval time selection WTM3 0 0 1 1 WTM2 0 1 0 1 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 4 5 13 14 Interrupt time selection WTM1 0 1 Clear after operation stop Start 5-bit counter operation control WTM0 0 1 Watch timer operation enable Operation stop (clear both prescaler and timer) Operation enable Caution Do not change the count clock and interval time (by setting bits 4 to 7 (WTM4 to WTM7) of WTM) during watch timer operation. Remarks 1. fW: Watch timer clock frequency (fX/27 or fXT) 2. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 3. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency 4. Figures in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 10 MHz, fXT = 32.768 kHz. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 211 CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER 9.4 Watch Timer Operations 9.4.1 Watch timer operation The watch timer generates an interrupt request (INTWT) at a specific time interval by using the X1 input clock or subsystem clock. When bit 0 (WTM0) and bit 1 (WTM1) of the watch timer operation mode register (WTM) are set to 1, the count operation starts. When these bits are set to 0, the 5-bit counter is cleared and the count operation stops. When the interval timer is simultaneously operated, zero-second start can be achieved only for the watch timer by setting WTM1 to 0. In this case, however, the 11-bit prescaler is not cleared. Therefore, an error up to 211 x 1/fW seconds occurs in the first overflow (INTWT) after zero-second start. The interrupt request is generated at the following time intervals. Table 9-4. Watch Timer Interrupt Time WTM3 WTM2 Interrupt Time Selection 14 When Operated at fXT = 32.768 kHz (WTM7 = 1) When Operated at fX = 10 MHz (WTM7 = 0) 0.210 s 0.105 s 410 s 205 s 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 4 5 13 0.5 s 0.25 s 977 s 488 s Remark fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency fW: Watch timer clock frequency 212 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER 9.4.2 Interval timer operation The watch timer operates as interval timer which generates interrupt requests (INTWTI) repeatedly at an interval of the preset count value. The interval time can be selected with bits 4 to 6 (WTM4 to WTM6) of the watch timer operation mode register (WTM). When bit 0 (WTM0) of the WTM is set to 1, the count operation starts. When this bit is set to 0, the count operation stops. Table 9-5. Interval Timer Interval Time WTM6 WTM5 WTM4 4 Interval Time When Operated at fXT = 32.768 kHz (WTM7 = 1) 488 s 977 s 1.95 ms 3.91 ms 7.81 ms 15.6 ms 31.3 ms 62.5 ms When Operated at fX = 10 MHz (WTM7 = 0) 205 s 410 s 820 s 1.64 ms 3.28 ms 6.55 ms 13.1 ms 26.2 ms 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 2 /fW 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Remark fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency fW: Watch timer clock frequency Figure 9-3. Operation Timing of Watch Timer/Interval Timer 5-bit counter 0H Start Count clock Watch timer interrupt INTWT Interrupt time of watch timer (0.5 s) Interrupt time of watch timer (0.5 s) Interval timer interrupt INTWTI Interval time (T) nxT T nxT Overflow Overflow Remark fW: Watch timer clock frequency n: The number of times of interval timer operations Figures in parentheses are for operation with fW = 32.768 kHz (WTM7 = 1, WTM3, WTM2 = 0, 0) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 213 CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER 9.5 Cautions for Watch Timer When operation of the watch timer and 5-bit counter is enabled by the watch timer mode control register (WTM) (by setting bits 0 (WTM0) and 1 (WTM1) of WTM to 1), the interval until the first interrupt request (INTWT) is generated after the register is set does not exactly match the specification made with bit 3 (WTM3) of WTM. This is because there is a delay of one 11-bit prescaler output cycle until the 5-bit counter starts counting. Subsequently, however, the INTWT signal is generated at the specified intervals. Figure 9-4. Example of Generation of Watch Timer Interrupt Request (INTWT) (When Interrupt Period = 0.5 s) It takes 0.515625 seconds for the first INTWT to be generated (29 x 1/32768 = 0.015625 s longer). INTWT is then generated every 0.5 seconds. WTM0, WTM1 0.515625 s 0.5 s 0.5 s INTWT 214 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER 10.1 Functions of Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer is used to detect an inadvertent program loop. If a program loop is detected, an internal reset signal is generated. When a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer, bit 4 (WDTRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1. For details of RESF, refer to CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION. Table 10-1. Loop Detection Time of Watchdog Timer Loop Detection Time During Ring-OSC Clock Operation fR/2 (8.53 ms) fR/2 (17.07 ms) fR/2 (34.13 ms) fR/2 (68.27 ms) fR/2 (136.53 ms) fR/2 (273.07 ms) fR/2 (546.13 ms) fR/2 (1.09 s) 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 During X1 Input Clock Operation fXP/2 (819.2 s) 13 fXP/2 (1.64 ms) fXP/2 (3.28 ms) fXP/2 (6.55 ms) fXP/2 (13.11 ms) fXP/2 (26.21 ms) fXP/2 (52.43 ms) fXP/2 (104.86 ms) 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 Remarks 1. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency 2. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 3. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fR = 240 kHz (TYP.), fXP = 10 MHz The operation mode of the watchdog timer (WDT) is switched according to the mask option setting of the on-chip Ring-OSC as shown in Table 10-2. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 215 CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER Table 10-2. Mask Option Setting and Watchdog Timer Operation Mode Mask Option Ring-OSC Cannot Be Stopped Watchdog timer clock source Operation after reset Operation starts with the maximum interval (fR/2 ). Operation mode selection The interval can be changed only once. 18 Ring-OSC Can Be Stopped by Software * Selectable by software (fXP, fR or stopped) * When reset is released: fR Operation starts with maximum interval (fR/2 ). The clock selection/interval can be changed only once. 18 Fixed to fR Note 1 . Features The watchdog timer cannot be stopped The watchdog timer can be stopped in standby mode Note 2 . Notes 1. 2. As long as power is being supplied, Ring-OSC oscillation cannot be stopped (except in the reset period). The conditions under which clock supply to the watchdog timer is stopped differ depending on the clock source of the watchdog timer. <1> If the clock source is fXP, clock supply to the watchdog timer is stopped under the following conditions. * When fXP is stopped * In HALT/STOP mode * During oscillation stabilization time <2> If the clock source is fR, clock supply to the watchdog timer is stopped under the following conditions. * If the CPU clock is fXP and if fR is stopped by software before execution of the STOP instruction * In HALT/STOP mode Remarks 1. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency 2. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 216 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER 10.2 Configuration of Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer includes following hardware. Table 10-3. Configuration of Watchdog Timer Item Control registers Configuration Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) Figure 10-1. Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer fR/22 fXP/2 4 Clock input controller 2 fR/211 to fR/218 16-bit counter Selector or fXP/213 to fXP/220 3 Output controller Internal reset signal Clear 3 Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) 0 1 1 WDCS4 WDCS3 WDCS2 WDCS1 WDCS0 Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) Internal bus Mask option (to set "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" or "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software") User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 217 CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER 10.3 Registers Controlling Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer is controlled by the following two registers. * Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) * Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) (1) Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) This register sets the overflow time and operation clock of the watchdog timer. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction and can be read many times, but can be written only once after reset is released. RESET input sets this register to 67H. Figure 10-2. Format of Watchdog Timer Mode Register (WDTM) Address: FF98H Symbol WDTM 7 0 After reset: 67H 6 1 R/W 5 1 4 WDCS4 3 WDCS3 2 WDCS2 1 WDCS1 0 WDCS0 WDCS4 0 0 1 Note 1 WDCS3 0 1 x Note 1 Operation clock selection Ring-OSC clock (fR) X1 input clock (fXP) Watchdog timer operation stopped WDCS2 Note 2 WDCS1 Note 2 WDCS0 Note 2 Overflow time setting During Ring-OSC clock operation 11 During X1 input clock operation fXP/2 (819.2 s) 13 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 fR/2 (8.53 ms) fR/2 (17.07 ms) fR/2 (34.13 ms) fR/2 (68.27 ms) fR/2 (136.53 ms) fR/2 (273.07 ms) fR/2 (546.13 ms) fR/2 (1.09 s) 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 fXP/2 (1.64 ms) fXP/2 (3.28 ms) fXP/2 (6.55 ms) fXP/2 (13.11 ms) fXP/2 (26.21 ms) fXP/2 (52.43 ms) fXP/2 (104.86 ms) 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 Notes 1. 2. If "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" is specified by a mask option, this cannot be set. The RingOSC clock will be selected no matter what value is written. Reset is released at the maximum cycle (WDCS2, 1, 0 = 1, 1, 1). Cautions 1. If data is written to WDTM, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to WDTM when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, refer to CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT. 2. Set bits 7, 6, and 5 to 0, 1, and 1, respectively (when "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" is selected by a mask option, other values are ignored). 218 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER Cautions 3. After reset is released, WDTM can be written only once by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. If writing attempted a second time, an internal reset signal is generated. 4. WDTM cannot be set by a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction. Remarks 1. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency 2. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 3. x: Don't care 4. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fR = 240 kHz (TYP.), fXP = 10 MHz (2) Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) Writing ACH to WDTE clears the watchdog timer counter and starts counting again. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to 9AH. Figure 10-3. Format of Watchdog Timer Enable Register (WDTE) Address: FF99H Symbol WDTE 7 After reset: 9AH 6 R/W 5 4 3 2 1 0 Cautions 1. If a value other than ACH is written to WDTE, an internal reset signal is generated. 2. If a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction is executed for WDTE, an internal reset signal is generated. 3. The value read from WDTE is 9AH (this differs from the written value (ACH)). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 219 CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER 10.4 Operation of Watchdog Timer 10.4.1 Watchdog timer operation when "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" is selected by mask option The operation clock of watchdog timer is fixed to the Ring-OSC. After reset is released, operation is started at the maximum cycle (bits 2, 1, and 0 (WDCS2, WDCS1, WDCS0) of the watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) = 1, 1, 1). The watchdog timer operation cannot be stopped. The following shows the watchdog timer operation after reset release. 1. The status after reset release is as follows. * Operation clock: Ring-OSC clock * Cycle: fR/218 (1.09 seconds: At operation with fR = 240 kHz (TYP.)) * Counting starts 2. The following should be set in the watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) by an 8-bit memory manipulation instructionNotes 1, 2. * Cycle: Set using bits 2 to 0 (WDCS2 to WDCS0) 3. After the above procedures are executed, writing ACH to WDTE clears the count to 0, enabling recounting. The operation clock (Ring-OSC clock) cannot be changed. If any value is written to bits 3 and 4 (WDCS3, WDCS4) of WDTM, it is ignored. 2. As soon as WDTM is written, the counter of the watchdog timer is cleared. Notes 1. Caution In this mode, operation of the watchdog timer absolutely cannot be stopped even during STOP instruction execution. For 8-bit timer H1 (TMH1), a division of the Ring-OSC can be selected as the count source, so clear the watchdog timer using the interrupt request of TMH1 before the watchdog timer overflows after STOP instruction execution. If this processing is not performed, an internal reset signal is generated when the watchdog timer overflows after STOP instruction execution. 220 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER 10.4.2 Watchdog timer operation when "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by mask option The operation clock of the watchdog timer can be selected as either the Ring-OSC clock or the X1 input clock. After reset is released, operation is started at the maximum cycle (bits 2, 1, and 0 (WDCS2, WDCS1, WDCS0) of the watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) = 1, 1, 1) of the Ring-OSC clock. The following shows the watchdog timer operation after reset release. 1. The status after reset release is as follows. * Operation clock: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency (fR) * Cycle: fR/218 (1.09 seconds: At operation with fR = 240 kHz (TYP.)) * Counting starts 2. The following should be set in the watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) by an 8-bit memory manipulation instructionNotes 1, 2, 3. * Operation clock: Any of the following can be selected using bits 3 and 4 (WDCS3 and WDCS4). Ring-OSC clock (fR) X1 input clock (fXP) Watchdog timer operation stopped * Cycle: Set using bits 2 to 0 (WDCS2 to WDCS0) 3. After the above procedures are executed, writing ACH to WDTE clears the count to 0, enabling recounting. As soon as WDTM is written, the counter of the watchdog timer is cleared. Set bits 7, 6, and 5 to 0, 1, 1, respectively. Do not set the other values. If the watchdog timer is stopped by setting WDCS4 and WDCS3 to 1 and x, respectively, an internal reset signal is not generated even if the following processing is performed. * WDTM is written a second time. * A 1-bit memory manipulation instruction is executed to WDTE. * A value other than ACH is written to WDTE. Caution In this mode, watchdog timer operation is stopped during HALT/STOP instruction execution. After HALT/STOP mode is released, counting is started again using the operation clock of the watchdog timer set before HALT/STOP instruction execution by WDTM. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its value. For the watchdog timer operation during STOP mode and HALT mode in each status, refer to 10.4.3 Watchdog timer operation in STOP mode and 10.4.4 Watchdog timer operation in HALT mode. Notes 1. 2. 3. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 221 CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER 10.4.3 Watchdog timer operation in STOP mode (when "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by mask option) The watchdog timer stops counting during STOP instruction execution regardless of whether the X1 input clock or Ring-OSC clock is being used. (1) When the CPU clock and the watchdog timer operation clock are the X1 input clock (fXP) when the STOP instruction is executed When STOP instruction is executed, operation of the watchdog timer is stopped. After STOP mode is released, counting stops for the oscillation stabilization time set by the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) and then counting is started again using the operation clock before the operation was stopped. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its value. Figure 10-4. Operation in STOP Mode (CPU Clock and WDT Operation Clock: X1 Input Clock) Normal operation CPU operation fXP STOP Oscillation stabilization time Normal operation Oscillation stopped fR Watchdog timer Oscillation stabilization time (set by OSTS register) Operating Operation stopped Operating (2) When the CPU clock is the X1 input clock (fXP) and the watchdog timer operation clock is the Ring-OSC clock (fR) when the STOP instruction is executed When the STOP instruction is executed, operation of the watchdog timer is stopped. After STOP mode is released, counting is started again using the operation clock before the operation was stopped. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its value. Figure 10-5. Operation in STOP Mode (CPU Clock: X1 Input Clock, WDT Operation Clock: Ring-OSC Clock) Normal operation CPU operation fXP STOP Oscillation stabilization time Normal operation Oscillation stopped fR Watchdog timer Oscillation stabilization time (set by OSTS register) Operating Operation stopped Operating 222 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER (3) When the CPU clock is the Ring-OSC clock (fR) and the watchdog timer operation clock is the X1 input clock (fXP) when the STOP instruction is executed When the STOP instruction is executed, operation of the watchdog timer is stopped. After STOP mode is released, counting is stopped until the timing of <1> or <2>, whichever is earlier, and then counting is started using the operation clock before the operation was stopped. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its value. <1> The oscillation stabilization time set by the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) elapses. <2> The CPU clock is switched to the X1 input clock (fXP). Figure 10-6. Operation in STOP Mode (CPU Clock: Ring-OSC Clock, WDT Operation Clock: X1 Input Clock) <1> Timing when counting is started after the oscillation stabilization time set by the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) has elapsed Normal operation CPU operation (Ring-OSC clock) fXP Oscillation stopped fR 17 clocks Watchdog timer Operating Operation stopped Operating Oscillation stabilization time (set by OSTS register) STOP Clock supply stopped Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock) <2> Timing when counting is started after the CPU clock is switched to the X1 input clock (fXP) Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock) Normal operation CPU operation (Ring-OSC clock) fXP Oscillation stopped fR 17 clocks Watchdog timer Operating Operation stopped Operating Oscillation stabilization time (set by OSTS register) Clock supply stopped CPU clock fR fXPNote STOP Normal operation (X1 input clock) Note Confirm the oscillation stabilization time of fXP using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 223 CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER (4) When CPU clock and watchdog timer operation clock are the Ring-OSC clocks (fR) during STOP instruction execution When the STOP instruction is executed, operation of the watchdog timer is stopped. After STOP mode is released, counting is started again using the operation clock before the operation was stopped. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its value. Figure 10-7. Operation in STOP Mode (CPU Clock and WDT Operation Clock: Ring-OSC Clock) Normal operation CPU operation (Ring-OSC clock) fXP Oscillation stopped fR 17 clocks Watchdog timer Operating Operation stopped Operating Oscillation stabilization time (set by OSTS register) STOP Clock supply stopped Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock) 10.4.4 Watchdog timer operation in HALT mode (when "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by mask option) The watchdog timer stops counting during HALT instruction execution regardless of whether the CPU clock is the X1 input clock (fXP), Ring-OSC clock (fR), or subsystem clock (fXT), or whether the operation clock of the watchdog timer is the X1 input clock (fXP) or Ring-OSC clock (fR). After HALT mode is released, counting is started again using the operation clock before the operation was stopped. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its value. Figure 10-8. Operation in HALT Mode CPU operation Normal operation fXP HALT Normal operation fR fXT Watchdog timer Operating Operation stopped Operating 224 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 11 CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROLLER 11.1 Functions of Clock Output Controller The clock output controller is intended for carrier output during remote controlled transmission and clock output for supply to peripheral LSIs. The clock selected with the clock output selection register (CKS) is output. Figure 11-1 shows the block diagram of clock output controller. Figure 11-1. Block Diagram of Clock Output Controller Prescaler 8 fX fX to fX/27 Selector Clock controller PCL/INTP6/P140 fXT CLOE Output latch (P140) CLOE CCS3 CCS2 CCS1 CCS0 PM140 Clock output selection register (CKS) Internal bus 11.2 Configuration of Clock Output Controller The clock output controller includes the following hardware. Table 11-1. Clock Output Controller Configuration Item Control registers Configuration Clock output selection register (CKS) Port mode register 14 (PM14) Port register 14 (P14)) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 225 CHAPTER 11 CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROLLER 11.3 Registers Controlling Clock Output Controller The following two registers are used to control the clock output controller. * Clock output selection register (CKS) * Port mode register 14 (PM14) (1) Clock output selection register (CKS) This register sets output enable/disable for clock output (PCL) and sets the output clock. CKS is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears CKS to 00H. Figure 11-2. Format of Clock Output Selection Register (CKS) Address: FF40H Symbol CKS 7 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 R/W 5 0 <4> CLOE 3 CCS3 2 CCS2 1 CCS1 0 CCS0 CLOE 0 1 PCL output enable/disable specification Clock division circuit operation stopped. PCL fixed to low level. Clock division circuit operation enabled. PCL output enabled. CCS3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 CCS2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 CCS1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 CCS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 fX (10 MHz) fX/2 (5 MHz) PCL output clock selection fX/2 (2.5 MHz) fX/2 (1.25 MHz) fX/2 (625 kHz) fX/2 (312.5 kHz) fX/2 (156.25 kHz) fX/2 (78.125 kHz) fXT (32.768 kHz) Setting prohibited 7 6 5 4 3 2 Other than above Remarks 1. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 2. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency 3. Figures in parentheses are for operation with fX = 10 MHz or fXT = 32.768 kHz. 226 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 11 CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROLLER (2) Port mode register 14 (PM14) This register sets port 14 input/output in 1-bit units. When using the P140/INTP6/PCL pin for clock output, set PM140 and the output latch of P140 to 0. PM14 is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets PM14 to FFH. Figure 11-3. Format of Port Mode Register 14 (PM14) Address: FF2EH Symbol PM14 7 1 After reset: FFH 6 1 5 1 R/W 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 PM140 PM140 0 1 P140 pin I/O mode selection Output mode (output buffer on) Input mode (output buffer off) 11.4 Clock Output Controller Operations The clock pulse is output as the following procedure. <1> Select the clock pulse output frequency with bits 0 to 3 (CCS0 to CCS3) of the clock output selection register (CKS) (clock pulse output in disabled status). <2> Set bit 4 (CLOE) of CKS to 1 to enable clock output. Remark The clock output controller is designed not to output pulses with a small width during output enable/disable switching of the clock output. As shown in Figure 11-4, be sure to start output from the low period of the clock (marked with * in the figure). When stopping output, do so after securing high level of the clock. Figure 11-4. Remote Control Output Application Example CLOE * Clock output * User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 227 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.1 Functions of A/D Converter The A/D converter converts an analog input signal into a digital value, and consists of up to eight channels (ANI0 to ANI7) with a resolution of 10 bits. The A/D converter has the following two functions. (1) 10-bit resolution A/D conversion 10-bit resolution A/D conversion is carried out repeatedly for one channel selected from analog inputs ANI0 to ANI7. Each time an A/D conversion operation ends, an interrupt request (INTAD) is generated. (2) Power-fail detection function This function is used to detect a voltage drop in a battery. The A/D conversion result (ADCR register value) and power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) value are compared. comparative condition has been matched. Figure 12-1. Block Diagram of A/D Converter AVREF ADCS bit ANI0/P20 ANI1/P21 ANI2/P22 ANI3/P23 ANI4/P24 ANI5/P25 ANI6/P26 ANI7/P27 INTAD is generated only when a Sample & hold circuit Selector AVSS Successive approximation register (SAR) Tap selector Voltage comparator AVSS INTAD Controller Comparator 3 A/D conversion result register (ADCR) Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 ADCS FR2 FR1 FR0 ADCE PFEN PFCM Analog input channel specification register (ADS) A/D converter mode register (ADM) Internal bus Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) 228 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.2 Configuration of A/D Converter The A/D converter includes the following hardware. Table 12-1. Registers of A/D Converter Used on Software Item Registers Configuration Successive approximation register (SAR) A/D conversion result register (ADCR) A/D converter mode register (ADM) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) (1) ANI0 to ANI7 pins These are the analog input pins of the 8-channel A/D converter. They input analog signals to be converted into digital signals. Pins other than the one selected as the analog input pin by the analog input channel specification register (ADS) can be used as input port pins. (2) Sample & hold circuit The sample & hold circuit samples the input signal of the analog input pin selected by the selector when A/D conversion is started, and holds the sampled analog input voltage value during A/D conversion. (3) Series resistor string The series resistor string is connected between AVREF and AVSS, and generates a voltage to be compared with the analog input signal. (4) Voltage comparator The voltage comparator compares the sampled analog input voltage and the output voltage of the series resistor string. (5) Successive approximation register (SAR) This register compares the sampled analog voltage and the voltage of the series resistor string, and converts the result, starting from the most significant bit (MSB). When the voltage value is converted into a digital value down to the least significant bit (LSB) (end of A/D conversion), the contents of the SAR register are transferred to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR). (6) A/D conversion result register (ADCR) The result of A/D conversion is loaded from the successive approximation register (SAR) to this register each time A/D conversion is completed, and the ADCR register holds the result of A/D conversion in its higher 10 bits (the lower 6 bits are fixed to 0). (7) Controller When A/D conversion has been completed or when the power-fail detection function is used, this controller compares the result of A/D conversion (value of the ADCR register) and the value of the power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT). It generates the interrupt INTAD only if a specified comparison condition is satisfied as a result. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 229 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (8) AVREF pin This pin inputs an analog power/reference voltage to the A/D converter. Always use this pin at the same potential as that of the VDD pin even when the A/D converter is not used. The signal input to ANI0 to ANI7 is converted into a digital signal, based on the voltage applied across AVREF and AVSS. In the standby mode, the current flowing through the series resistor string can be reduced by lowering the voltage input to the AVREF pin to the AVSS level. (9) AVSS pin This is the ground potential pin of the A/D converter. Always use this pin at the same potential as that of the VSS pin even when the A/D converter is not used. (10) A/D converter mode register (ADM) This register is used to set the conversion time of the analog input signal to be converted, and to start or stop the conversion operation. (11) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) This register is used to specify the port that inputs the analog voltage to be converted into a digital signal. (12) Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) This register is used to set the power-fail monitor mode. (13) Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) This register is used to set the threshold value that is to be compared with the value of the A/D conversion result register (ADCR). 230 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3 Registers Used in A/D Converter The A/D converter uses the following five registers. * A/D converter mode register (ADM) * Analog input channel specification register (ADS) * A/D conversion result register (ADCR) * Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) * Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) (1) A/D converter mode register (ADM) This register sets the conversion time for analog input to be A/D converted, and starts/stops conversion. ADM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-2. Format of A/D Converter Mode Register (ADM) Address: FF28H Symbol ADM <7> ADCS After reset: 00H 6 0 5 FR2 R/W 4 FR1 3 FR0 2 0 1 0 <0> ADCE ADCS 0 1 A/D conversion operation control Stops conversion operation Enables conversion operation FR2 FR1 FR0 Conversion time selectionNote 1 fX = 2 MHz fX = 8.38 MHz fX = 10 MHz 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 288/fX 240/fX 192/fX 144/fX 120/fX 96/fX 144 s 120 s 96 s 72 s 60 s 48 s 34.3 s 28.6 s 22.9 s 17.2 s 14.3 s 11.5 s 28.8 s 24.0 s 19.2 s 14.4 s 12.0 s 9.6 s Other than above Setting prohibited ADCE 0 1 Boost reference voltage generator operation controlNote 2 Stops operation of reference voltage generator Enables operation of reference voltage generator User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 231 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Notes 1. Set so that the A/D conversion time is as follows. * Standard products, (A) grade products: 14 s or longer but less than 100 s * (A1) grade products: * (A2) grade products: 14 s or longer but less than 60 s 16 s or longer but less than 48 s 2. A booster circuit is incorporated to realize low-voltage operation. The operation of the circuit that generates the reference voltage for boosting is controlled by ADCE, and it takes 14 s from operation start to operation stabilization. Therefore, when ADCS is set to 1 after 14 s or more has elapsed from the time ADCE is set to 1, the conversion result at that time has priority over the first conversion result. Remark fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency Table 12-2. Settings of ADCS and ADCE ADCS 0 0 1 1 ADCE 0 1 0 1 A/D Conversion Operation Stop status (DC power consumption path does not exist) Conversion waiting mode (only reference voltage generator consumes power) Conversion mode (reference voltage generator operation stopped Conversion mode (reference voltage generator operates) Note ) Note Data of first conversion cannot be used. Figure 12-3. Timing Chart When Boost Reference Voltage Generator Is Used Boost reference voltage generator: operating ADCE Boost reference voltage Conversion operation ADCS Note Conversion waiting Conversion operation Conversion stopped Note The time from the rising of the ADCE bit to the falling of the ADCS bit must be 14 s or longer to stabilize the reference voltage. Cautions 1. A/D conversion must be stopped before rewriting bits FR0 to FR2 to values other than the identical data. 2. For the sampling time of the A/D converter and the A/D conversion start delay time, see (11) in 12.6 Cautions for A/D Converter. 3. If data is written to ADM, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to ADM when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT. Remark fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency For details, see 232 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (2) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) This register specifies the input port of the analog voltage to be A/D converted. ADS can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-4. Format of Analog Input Channel Specification Register (ADS) Address: FF29H Symbol ADS 7 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 5 0 R/W 4 0 3 0 2 ADS2 1 ADS1 0 ADS0 ADS2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 ADS1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 ADS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 ANI0 ANI1 ANI2 ANI3 ANI4 ANI5 ANI6 ANI7 Analog input channel specification Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 of ADS to 0. 2. If data is written to ADS, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to ADS when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT. For details, see User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 233 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (3) A/D conversion result register (ADCR) This register is a 16-bit register that stores the A/D conversion result. The lower six bits are fixed to 0. Each time A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is loaded from the successive approximation register, and is stored in ADCR in order starting from the most significant bit (MSB). FF09H indicates the higher 8 bits of the conversion result, and FF08H indicates the lower 2 bits of the conversion result. ADCR can be read by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input makes ADCR undefined. Figure 12-5. Format of A/D Conversion Result Register (ADCR) Address: FF08H, FF09H Symbol ADCR After reset: Undefined FF09H R FF08H 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cautions 1. When writing to the A/D converter mode register (ADM) and analog input channel specification register (ADS), the contents of ADCR may become undefined. timing other than the above may cause an incorrect conversion result to be read. 2. If data is read from ADCR, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ADCR when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT. Read the conversion result following conversion completion before writing to ADM and ADS. Using 234 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (4) Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) The power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) is used to compare the A/D conversion result (value of the ADCR register) and the value of the power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT). PFM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-6. Format of Power-Fail Comparison Mode Register (PFM) Address: FF2AH Symbol PFM <7> PFEN After reset: 00H <6> PFCM 5 0 R/W 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 PFEN 0 1 Power-fail comparison enable Stops power-fail comparison (used as a normal A/D converter) Enables power-fail comparison (used for power-fail detection) PFCM Higher 8 bits of ADCR PFT Higher 8 bits of ADCR < PFT Higher 8 bits of ADCR PFT Higher 8 bits of ADCR < PFT Power-fail comparison mode selection Interrupt request signal (INTAD) generation No INTAD generation No INTAD generation INTAD generation 0 1 Caution If data is written to PFM, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to PFM when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT. (5) Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) The power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) is a register that sets the threshold value when comparing the values with the A/D conversion result. 8-bit data in PFT is compared to the higher 8 bits (FF09H) of the 10-bit A/D conversion result. PFT can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-7. Format of Power-Fail Comparison Threshold Register (PFT) Address: FF2BH Symbol PFT 7 PFT7 After reset: 00H 6 PFT6 5 PFT5 R/W 4 PFT4 3 PFT3 2 PFT2 1 PFT1 0 PFT0 Caution If data is written to PFT, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to PFT when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 235 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.4 A/D Converter Operations 12.4.1 Basic operations of A/D converter <1> Select one channel for A/D conversion using the analog input channel specification register (ADS). <2> Set ADCE to 1 and wait for 14 s or longer. <3> Set ADCS to 1 and start the conversion operation. (<4> to <10> are operations performed by hardware.) <4> The voltage input to the selected analog input channel is sampled by the sample & hold circuit. <5> When sampling has been done for a certain time, the sample & hold circuit is placed in the hold state and the input analog voltage is held until the A/D conversion operation has ended. <6> Bit 9 of the successive approximation register (SAR) is set. The series resistor string voltage tap is set to (1/2) AVREF by the tap selector. <7> The voltage difference between the series resistor string voltage tap and analog input is compared by the voltage comparator. If the analog input is greater than (1/2) AVREF, the MSB of SAR remains set to 1. If the analog input is smaller than (1/2) AVREF, the MSB is reset to 0. <8> Next, bit 8 of SAR is automatically set to 1, and the operation proceeds to the next comparison. The series resistor string voltage tap is selected according to the preset value of bit 9, as described below. * Bit 9 = 1: (3/4) AVREF * Bit 9 = 0: (1/4) AVREF The voltage tap and analog input voltage are compared and bit 8 of SAR is manipulated as follows. * Analog input voltage Voltage tap: Bit 8 = 1 * Analog input voltage < Voltage tap: Bit 8 = 0 <9> Comparison is continued in this way up to bit 0 of SAR. <10> Upon completion of the comparison of 10 bits, an effective digital result value remains in SAR, and the result value is transferred to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR) and then latched. At the same time, the A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD) can also be generated. <11> Repeat steps <4> to <10>, until ADCS is cleared to 0. To stop the A/D converter, clear ADCS to 0. To restart A/D conversion from the status of ADCE = 1, start from <3>. To restart A/D conversion from the status of ADCE = 0, however, start from <2>. 236 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Figure 12-8. Basic Operation of A/D Converter Conversion time Sampling time A/D converter operation Sampling A/D conversion SAR Undefined Conversion result ADCR Conversion result INTAD A/D conversion operations are performed continuously until bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is reset (0) by software. If a write operation is performed to one of the ADM, analog input channel specification register (ADS), power-fail comparison mode register (PFM), or power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) during an A/D conversion operation, the conversion operation is initialized, and if the ADCS bit is set (1), conversion starts again from the beginning. RESET input makes the A/D conversion result register (ADCR) undefined. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 237 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.4.2 Input voltage and conversion results The relationship between the analog input voltage input to the analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7) and the theoretical A/D conversion result (stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR)) is shown by the following expression. SAR = INT ( VAIN AVREF x 1024 + 0.5) ADCR = SAR x 64 or (ADCR - 0.5) x where, INT( ): VAIN: AVREF: SAR: AVREF 1024 VAIN < (ADCR + 0.5) x AVREF 1024 Function which returns integer part of value in parentheses Analog input voltage AVREF pin voltage Successive approximation register ADCR: A/D conversion result register (ADCR) value Figure 12-9 shows the relationship between the analog input voltage and the A/D conversion result. Figure 12-9. Relationship Between Analog Input Voltage and A/D Conversion Result SAR ADCR 1023 FFC0H 1022 FF80H 1021 A/D conversion result (ADCR) 3 FF40H 00C0H 2 0080H 1 0040H 0 1 1 3 2 5 3 2048 1024 2048 1024 2048 1024 2043 1022 2045 1023 2047 1 2048 1024 2048 1024 2048 0000H Input voltage/AVREF 238 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.4.3 A/D converter operation mode The operation mode of the A/D converter is the select mode. One channel of analog input is selected from ANI0 to ANI7 by the analog input channel specification register (ADS) and A/D conversion is executed. In addition, the following two functions can be selected by setting of bit 7 (PFEN) of the power-fail comparison mode register (PFM). * Normal 10-bit A/D converter (PFEN = 0) * Power-fail detection function (PFEN = 1) (1) A/D conversion operation (when PFEN = 0) By setting bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 1 and bit 7 (PFEN) of the power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) to 0, the A/D conversion operation of the voltage, which is applied to the analog input pin specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS), is started. When A/D conversion has been completed, the result of the A/D conversion is stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR), and an interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. Once the A/D conversion has started and when one A/D conversion has been completed, the next A/D conversion operation is immediately started. The A/D conversion operations are repeated until new data is written to ADS. If ADM, ADS, the power-fail comparison mode register (PFM), and the power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) are rewritten during A/D conversion, the A/D conversion operation under execution is stopped and restarted from the beginning. If 0 is written to ADCS during A/D conversion, A/D conversion is immediately stopped. conversion result is undefined. Figure 12-10. A/D Conversion Operation Rewriting ADM ADCS = 1 At this time, the Rewriting ADS ADCS = 0 A/D conversion ANIn ANIn ANIn ANIm ANIm Conversion is stopped Conversion result is not retained Stopped ADCR ANIn ANIn ANIm INTAD (PFEN = 0) Remarks 1. n = 0 to 7 2. m = 0 to 7 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 239 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (2) Power-fail detection function (when PFEN = 1) By setting bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 1 and bit 7 (PFEN) of the power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) to 1, the A/D conversion operation of the voltage applied to the analog input pin specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS) is started. When the A/D conversion has been completed, the result of the A/D conversion is stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR), the values are compared with power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT), and an interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated under the condition specified by bit 6 (PFCM) of PFM. <1> When PFEN = 1 and PFCM = 0 The higher 8 bits of ADCR and PFT values are compared when A/D conversion ends and INTAD is only generated when the higher 8 bits of ADCR PFT. <2> When PFEN = 1 and PFCM = 1 The higher 8 bits of ADCR and PFT values are compared when A/D conversion ends and INTAD is only generated when the higher 8 bits of ADCR < PFT. Figure 12-11. Power-Fail Detection (When PFEN = 1 and PFCM = 0) A/D conversion ANIn ANIn ANIn ANIn Higher 8 bits of ADCR 80H 7FH 80H PFT 80H INTAD (PFEN = 1) Note First conversion Condition match Note If the conversion result is not read before the end of the next conversion after INTAD is output, the result is replaced by the next conversion result. Remark n = 0 to 7 240 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER The setting methods are described below. * When used as A/D conversion operation <1> Set bit 0 (ADCE) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 1. <2> Select the channel and conversion time using bits 2 to 0 (ADS2 to ADS0) of the analog input channel specification register (ADS) and bits 5 to 3 (FR2 to FR0) of ADM. <3> Set bit 7 (ADCS) of ADM to 1. <4> An interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. <5> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 241 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.5 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table Here, special terms unique to the A/D converter are explained. (1) Resolution This is the minimum analog input voltage that can be identified. That is, the percentage of the analog input voltage per bit of digital output is called 1LSB (Least Significant Bit). The percentage of 1LSB with respect to the full scale is expressed by %FSR (Full Scale Range). 1LSB is as follows when the resolution is 10 bits. 1LSB = 1/210 = 1/1024 = 0.098%FSR Accuracy has no relation to resolution, but is determined by overall error. (2) Overall error This shows the maximum error value between the actual measured value and the theoretical value. Zero-scale error, full-scale error, integral linearity error, and differential linearity errors that are combinations of these express the overall error. Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error in the characteristics table. (3) Quantization error When analog values are converted to digital values, a 1/2LSB error naturally occurs. In an A/D converter, an analog input voltage in a range of 1/2LSB is converted to the same digital code, so a quantization error cannot be avoided. Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error, zero-scale error, full-scale error, integral linearity error, and differential linearity error in the characteristics table. Figure 12-12. Overall Error 1......1 Figure 12-13. Quantization Error 1......1 Ideal line Digital output Overall error Digital output 1/2LSB Quantization error 1/2LSB 0......0 0 Analog input AVREF 0......0 0 Analog input AVREF (4) Zero-scale error This shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical value (1/2LSB) when the digital output changes from 0......000 to 0......001. If the actual measurement value is greater than the theoretical value, it shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical value (3/2LSB) when the digital output changes from 0......001 to 0......010. 242 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (5) Full-scale error This shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical value (Full-scale - 3/2LSB) when the digital output changes from 1......110 to 1......111. (6) Integral linearity error This shows the degree to which the conversion characteristics deviate from the ideal linear relationship. It expresses the maximum value of the difference between the actual measurement value and the ideal straight line when the zero-scale error and full-scale error are 0. (7) Differential linearity error While the ideal width of code output is 1LSB, this indicates the difference between the actual measurement value and the ideal value. Figure 12-14. Zero-Scale Error 111 Digital output (Lower 3 bits) Full-scale error Figure 12-15. Full-Scale Error Ideal line 011 Digital output (Lower 3 bits) 111 010 001 000 0 1 2 3 AVREF Analog input (LSB) 110 Zero-scale error 101 Ideal line 000 0 AVREF-3 AVREF-2 AVREF-1 AVREF Analog input (LSB) Figure 12-16. Integral Linearity Error 1......1 Ideal line Digital output Figure 12-17. Differential Linearity Error 1......1 Ideal 1LSB width Digital output 0......0 0 Integral linearity error Analog input AVREF Differential linearity error 0......0 0 Analog input AVREF (8) Conversion time This expresses the time from the start of sampling to when the digital output is obtained. The sampling time is included in the conversion time in the characteristics table. (9) Sampling time This is the time the analog switch is turned on for the analog voltage to be sampled by the sample & hold circuit. Sampling time Conversion time User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 243 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6 Cautions for A/D Converter (1) Operating current in standby mode The A/D converter stops operating in the standby mode. At this time, the operating current can be reduced by clearing bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 0. Figure 12-18 shows the circuit configuration of the series resistor string. Figure 12-18. Circuit Configuration of Series Resistor String AVREF P-ch ADCS Series resistor string AVSS (2) Input range of ANI0 to ANI7 Observe the rated range of the ANI0 to ANI7 input voltage. If a voltage of AVREF or higher and AVSS or lower (even in the range of absolute maximum ratings) is input to an analog input channel, the converted value of that channel becomes undefined. In addition, the converted values of the other channels may also be affected. (3) Conflicting operations <1> Conflict between A/D conversion result register (ADCR) write and ADCR read by instruction upon the end of conversion ADCR read has priority. After the read operation, the new conversion result is written to ADCR. <2> Conflict between ADCR write and A/D converter mode register (ADM) write or analog input channel specification register (ADS) write upon the end of conversion ADM or ADS write has priority. ADCR write is not performed, nor is the conversion end interrupt signal (INTAD) generated. 244 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (4) Noise countermeasures To maintain the 10-bit resolution, attention must be paid to noise input to the AVREF pin and pins ANI0 to ANI7. Because the effect increases in proportion to the output impedance of the analog input source, it is recommended that a capacitor be connected externally, as shown in Figure 12-19, to reduce noise. Figure 12-19. Analog Input Pin Connection If there is a possibility that noise equal to or higher than AVREF or equal to or lower than AVSS may enter, clamp with a diode with a small VF value (0.3 V or lower). Reference voltage input AVREF ANI0 to ANI7 C = 100 to 1,000 pF AVSS VSS (5) ANI0/P20 to ANI7/P27 <1> The analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7) are also used as input port pins (P20 to P27). When A/D conversion is performed with any of ANI0 to ANI7 selected, do not access port 2 while conversion is in progress; otherwise the conversion resolution may be degraded. <2> If a digital pulse is applied to the pins adjacent to the pins currently used for A/D conversion, the expected value of the A/D conversion may not be obtained due to coupling noise. Therefore, do not apply a pulse to the pins adjacent to the pin undergoing A/D conversion. (6) Input impedance of ANI0 to ANI7 pins In this A/D converter, the internal sampling capacitor is charged and sampling is performed for approx. one sixth of the conversion time. Since only the leakage current flows other than during sampling and the current for charging the capacitor also flows during sampling, the input impedance fluctuates and has no meaning. To perform sufficient sampling, however, it is recommended to make the output impedance of the analog input source 10 k or lower, or attach a capacitor of around 100 pF to the ANI0 to ANI7 pins (see Figure 12-19). (7) AVREF pin input impedance A series resistor string of several tens of 10 k is connected between the AVREF and AVSS pins. Therefore, if the output impedance of the reference voltage source is high, this will result in a series connection to the series resistor string between the AVREF and AVSS pins, resulting in a large reference voltage error. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 245 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (8) Interrupt request flag (ADIF) The interrupt request flag (ADIF) is not cleared even if the analog input channel specification register (ADS) is changed. Therefore, if an analog input pin is changed during A/D conversion, the A/D conversion result and ADIF for the pre-change analog input may be set just before the ADS rewrite. Caution is therefore required since, at this time, when ADIF is read immediately after the ADS rewrite, ADIF is set despite the fact A/D conversion for the postchange analog input has not ended. When A/D conversion is stopped and then resumed, clear ADIF before the A/D conversion operation is resumed. Figure 12-20. Timing of A/D Conversion End Interrupt Request Generation ADS rewrite (start of ANIn conversion) ADS rewrite (start of ANIm conversion) ADIF is set but ANIm conversion has not ended. A/D conversion ANIn ANIn ANIm ANIm ADCR ANIn ANIn ANIm ANIm ADIF Remarks 1. n = 0 to 7 2. m = 0 to 7 (9) Conversion results just after A/D conversion start The first A/D conversion value immediately after A/D conversion starts may not fall within the rating range if the ADCS bit is set to 1 within 14 s after the ADCE bit was set to 1, or if the ADCS bit is set to 1 with the ADCE bit = 0. Take measures such as polling the A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD) and removing the first conversion result. (10) A/D conversion result register (ADCR) read operation When a write operation is performed to the A/D converter mode register (ADM) and analog input channel specification register (ADS), the contents of ADCR may become undefined. Read the conversion result following conversion completion before writing to ADM and ADS. Using a timing other than the above may cause an incorrect conversion result to be read. 246 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (11) A/D converter sampling time and A/D conversion start delay time The A/D converter sampling time differs depending on the set value of the A/D converter mode register (ADM). The delay time exists until actual sampling is started after A/D converter operation is enabled. When using a set in which the A/D conversion time must be strictly observed, care is required for the contents shown in Figure 12-21 and Table 12-3. Figure 12-21. Timing of A/D Converter Sampling and A/D Conversion Start Delay ADCS 1 or ADS rewrite ADCS Sampling timing INTAD Wait period A/D Sampling conversion time start delay time Sampling time Conversion time Conversion time Table 12-3. A/D Converter Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Start Delay Time (ADM Set Value) FR2 FR1 FR0 Conversion Time Sampling Time A/D Conversion Start Delay Time MIN. 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Other than above 0 1 0 0 1 0 288/fX 240/fX 192/fX 144/fX 120/fX 96/fX Setting prohibited 40/fX 32/fX 24/fX 20/fX 16/fX 12/fX - 32/fX 28/fX 24/fX 16/fX 14/fX 12/fX - 36/fX 32/fX 28/fX 18/fX 16/fX 14/fX - MAX. Note Note The A/D conversion start delay time is the time after wait period. For the wait function, see CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT. Remark fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency (12) Register generating wait cycle Do not read data from the ADCR register and do not write data to the ADM, ADS, PFM, and PFT registers while the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and while oscillation of the clock input to X1 is stopped. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 247 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (13) Internal equivalent circuit The equivalent circuit of the analog input block is shown below. Figure 12-22. Internal Equivalent Circuit of ANIn Pin R1 ANIn C1 C2 C3 R2 Table 12-4. Resistance and Capacitance Values of Equivalent Circuit (Reference Values) AVREF 2.7 V 4.5 V R1 12 k 4 k R2 8 k 2.7 k C1 8 pF 8 pF C2 3 pF 1.4 pF C3 2 pF 2 pF Remarks 1. The resistance and capacitance values shown in Table 12-4 are not guaranteed values. 2. n = 0 to 7 248 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 13.1 Functions of Serial Interface UART0 Serial interface UART0 has the following two modes. (1) Operation stop mode This mode is used when serial communication is not executed and can enable a reduction in the power consumption. For details, see 13.4.1 Operation stop mode. (2) Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode The functions of this mode are outlined below. For details, see 13.4.2 generator. * Two-pin configuration TXD0: Transmit data output pin RXB0: Receive data input pin * Length of communication data can be selected from 7 or 8 bits. * Dedicated on-chip 5-bit baud rate generator allowing any baud rate to be set * Transmission and reception can be performed independently. * Four operating clock inputs selectable * Fixed to LSB-first communication Cautions 1. If clock supply to serial interface UART0 is not stopped (e.g., in the HALT mode), normal operation continues. If clock supply to serial interface UART0 is stopped (e.g., in the STOP mode), each register stops operating, and holds the value immediately before clock supply was stopped. The TXD0 pin also holds the value immediately before clock supply was stopped and outputs it. However, the operation is not guaranteed after clock supply is resumed. Therefore, reset the circuit so that POWER0 = 0, RXE0 = 0, and TXE0 = 0. 2. Set POWER0 = 1 and then set TXE0 = 1 (transmission) or RXE0 = 1 (reception) to start communication. 3. TXE0 and RXE0 are synchronized by the base clock (fXCLK0) set by BRGC0. To enable transmission or reception again, set TXE0 or RXE0 to 1 at least two clocks of base clock after TXE0 or RXE0 has been cleared to 0. If TXE0 or RXE0 is set within two clocks of base clock, the transmission circuit or reception circuit may not be initialized. Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode and 13.4.3 Dedicated baud rate User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 249 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 13.2 Configuration of Serial Interface UART0 Serial interface UART0 includes the following hardware. Table 13-1. Configuration of Serial Interface UART0 Item Registers Receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) Receive shift register 0 (RXS0) Transmit shift register 0 (TXS0) Control registers Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) Port mode register 1 (PM1) Port register 1 (P1) Configuration 250 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD Figure 13-1. Block Diagram of Serial Interface UART0 Filter RxD0/ SI10/P11 Receive shift register 0 (RXS0) fX/2 Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) Baud rate generator Reception unit Internal bus INTSR0 Reception control Receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) fX/2 5 Selector fX/23 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 8-bit timer/ event counter 50 output Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) 7 7 Baud rate generator User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD INTST0 Transmission control Transmit shift register 0 (TXS0) Output latch (P10) PM10 TxD0/ SCK10/P10 Registers Transmission unit 251 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (1) Receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) This 8-bit register stores parallel data converted by receive shift register 0 (RXS0). Each time 1 byte of data has been received, new receive data is transferred to this register from receive shift register 0 (RXS0). If the data length is set to 7 bits the receive data is transferred to bits 0 to 6 of RXB0 and the MSB of RXB0 is always 0. If an overrun error (OVE0) occurs, the receive data is not transferred to RXB0. RXB0 can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. No data can be written to this register. RESET input or POWER0 = 0 sets this register to FFH. (2) Receive shift register 0 (RXS0) This register converts the serial data input to the RXD0 pin into parallel data. RXS0 cannot be directly manipulated by a program. (3) Transmit shift register 0 (TXS0) This register is used to set transmit data. Transmission is started when data is written to TXS0, and serial data is transmitted from the TXD0 pins. TXS0 can be written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. This register cannot be read. RESET input, POWER0 = 0, or TXE0 = 0 sets this register to FFH. Caution Do not write the next transmit data to TXS0 before the transmission completion interrupt signal (INTST0) is generated. 252 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 13.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface UART0 Serial interface UART0 is controlled by the following five registers. * Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) * Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) * Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) * Port mode register 1 (PM1) * Port register 1 (P1) (1) Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) This 8-bit register controls the serial communication operations of serial interface UART0. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to 01H. Figure 13-2. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 0 (ASIM0) (1/2) Address: FF70H After reset: 01H R/W Symbol ASIM0 <7> POWER0 <6> TXE0 <5> RXE0 4 PS01 3 PS00 2 CL0 1 SL0 0 1 POWER0 0 Note 1 Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously resets the internal circuit Note 2 . 1 Enables operation of the internal operation clock. TXE0 0 1 Enables/disables transmission Disables transmission (synchronously resets the transmission circuit). Enables transmission. RXE0 0 1 Enables/disables reception Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit). Enables reception. Notes 1. 2. The input from the RXD0 pin is fixed to high level when POWER0 = 0. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0), transmit shift register 0 (TXS0), and receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) are reset. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 253 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 Figure 13-2. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 0 (ASIM0) (2/2) PS01 0 0 1 1 PS00 0 1 0 1 Transmission operation Does not output parity bit. Outputs 0 parity. Outputs odd parity. Outputs even parity. Reception operation Reception without parity Reception as 0 parity Note Judges as odd parity. Judges as even parity. CL0 0 1 Specifies character length of transmit/receive data Character length of data = 7 bits Character length of data = 8 bits SL0 0 1 Number of stop bits = 1 Number of stop bits = 2 Specifies number of stop bits of transmit data Note If "reception as 0 parity" is selected, the parity is not judged. Therefore, bit 2 (PE0) of asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) is not set and the error interrupt does not occur. Cautions 1. At startup, set POWER0 to 1 and then set TXE0 to 1. To stop the operation, clear TXE0 to 0, and then clear POWER0 to 0. 2. At startup, set POWER0 to 1 and then set RXE0 to 1. To stop the operation, clear RXE0 to 0, and then clear POWER0 to 0. 3. Set POWER0 to 1 and then set RXE0 to 1 while a high level is input to the RxD0 pin. If POWER0 is set to 1 and RXE0 is set to 1 while a low level is input, reception is started. 4. TXE0 and RXE0 are synchronized by the base clock (fXCLK0) set by BRGC0. To enable transmission or reception again, set TXE0 or RXE0 to 1 at least two clocks of base clock after TXE0 or RXE0 has been cleared to 0. If TXE0 or RXE0 is set within two clocks of base clock, the transmission circuit or reception circuit may not be initialized. 5. Clear the TXE0 and RXE0 bits to 0 before rewriting the PS01, PS00, and CL0 bits. 6. Make sure that TXE0 = 0 when rewriting the SL0 bit. Reception is always performed with "number of stop bits = 1", and therefore, is not affected by the set value of the SL0 bit. 7. Be sure to set bit 0 to 1. 254 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (2) Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) This register indicates an error status on completion of reception by serial interface UART0. It includes three error flag bits (PE0, FE0, OVE0). This register is read-only by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H if bit 7 (POWER0) and bit 5 (RXE0) of ASIM0 = 0. 00H is read when this register is read. Figure 13-3. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Reception Error Status Register 0 (ASIS0) Address: FF73H After reset: 00H R Symbol ASIS0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 PE0 1 FE0 0 OVE0 PE0 0 1 Status flag indicating parity error If POWER0 = 0 and RXE0 = 0, or if ASIS0 register is read. If the parity of transmit data does not match the parity bit on completion of reception. FE0 0 1 Status flag indicating framing error If POWER0 = 0 and RXE0 = 0, or if ASIS0 register is read. If the stop bit is not detected on completion of reception. OVE0 0 1 Status flag indicating overrun error If POWER0 = 0 and RXE0 = 0, or if ASIS0 register is read. If receive data is set to the RXB register and the next reception operation is completed before the data is read. Cautions 1. The operation of the PE0 bit differs depending on the set values of the PS01 and PS00 bits of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0). 2. Only the first bit of the receive data is checked as the stop bit, regardless of the number of stop bits. 3. If an overrun error occurs, the next receive data is not written to receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) but discarded. 4. If data is read from ASIS0, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ASIS0 when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 255 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (3) Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) This register selects the base clock of serial interface UART0 and the division value of the 5-bit counter. BRGC0 can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to 1FH. Figure 13-4. Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register 0 (BRGC0) Address: FF71H After reset: 1FH R/W Symbol BRGC0 7 TPS01 6 TPS00 5 0 4 MDL04 3 MDL03 2 MDL02 1 MDL01 0 MDL00 TPS01 0 0 1 1 TPS00 0 1 0 1 TM50 output fX/2 (5 MHz) fX/2 (1.25 MHz) fX/2 (312.5 kHz) 5 3 Note Base clock (fXCLK0) selection MDL04 MDL03 MDL02 x 0 0 0 * * * * * 0 0 1 1 1 MDL01 x 0 0 1 * * * * * 1 1 0 1 1 MDL00 x 0 1 0 * * * * * 0 1 0 0 1 k x 8 9 10 * * * * * 26 27 28 30 31 Selection of 5-bit counter output clock 0 0 0 0 * * * * * 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 * * * * * 1 1 1 1 1 Setting prohibited fXCLK0/8 fXCLK0/9 fXCLK0/10 * * * * * fXCLK0/26 fXCLK0/27 fXCLK0/28 fXCLK0/30 fXCLK0/31 Note To select the TM50 output as the base clock, start an operation by setting 8-bit timer/event counter 50 so that the duty is 50% of the output in the PWM mode (bit 6 (TMC506) of the TMC50 register = 1), and then clear TPS01 and TPS00 to 0. It is not necessary to enable the TO50 pin as a timer output pin (bit 0 (TOE50) of the TMC register may be 0 or 1). Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the base clock is the RingOSC clock, the operation of serial interface UART0 is not guaranteed. 2. Make sure that bit 6 (TXE0) and bit 5 (RXE0) of the ASIM0 register = 0 when rewriting the MDL04 to MDL00 bits. 3. The baud rate value is the output clock of the 5-bit counter divided by 2. 256 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 Remarks 1. fXCLK0: Frequency of base clock selected by the TPS01 and TPS00 bits 2. fX: 3. k: 4. x: X1 input clock oscillation frequency Value set by the MDL04 to MDL00 bits (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 31) Don't care 5. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fX = 10 MHz (4) Port mode register 1 (PM1) This register sets port 1 input/output in 1-bit units. When using the P10/TxD0/SCK10 pin for serial interface data output, clear PM10 to 0 and set the output latch of P10 to 1. When using the P11/RxD0/SI10 pin for serial interface data input, set PM11 to 1. The output latch of P11 at this time may be 0 or 1. PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to FFH. Figure 13-5. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1) Address: FF21H Symbol PM1 7 PM17 After reset: FFH 6 PM16 R/W 5 PM15 4 PM14 3 PM13 2 PM12 1 PM11 0 PM10 PM1n 0 1 P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7) Output mode (output buffer on) Input mode (output buffer off) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 257 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 13.4 Operation of Serial Interface UART0 Serial interface UART0 has the following two modes. * Operation stop mode * Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode 13.4.1 Operation stop mode In this mode, serial communication cannot be executed, thus reducing the power consumption. In addition, the pins can be used as ordinary port pins in this mode. To set the operation stop mode, clear bits 7, 6, and 5 (POWER0, TXE0, and RXE0) of ASIM0 to 0. (1) Register used The operation stop mode is set by asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0). ASIM0 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to 01H. Address: FF70H After reset: 01H R/W Symbol ASIM0 <7> POWER0 <6> TXE0 <5> RXE0 4 PS01 3 PS00 2 CL0 1 SL0 0 1 POWER0 0 Note 1 Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously resets the internal circuit Note 2 . TXE0 0 Enables/disables transmission Disables transmission (synchronously resets the transmission circuit). RXE0 0 Enables/disables reception Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit). Notes 1. 2. The input from the RXD0 pin is fixed to high level when POWER0 = 0. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0), transmit shift register 0 (TXS0), and receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) are reset. Caution Clear POWER0 to 0 after clearing TXE0 and RXE0 to 0 to set the operation stop mode. To start the operation, set POWER0 to 1, and then set TXE0 and RXE0 to 1. Remark To use the RxD0/SI10/P11 and TxD0/SCK10/P10 pins as general-purpose port pins, see CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS. 258 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 13.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode In this mode, 1-byte data is transmitted/received following a start bit, and a full-duplex operation can be performed. A dedicated UART baud rate generator is incorporated, so that communication can be executed at a wide range of baud rates. (1) Registers used * Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) * Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) * Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) * Port mode register 1 (PM1) * Port register 1 (P1) The basic procedure of setting an operation in the UART mode is as follows. <1> Set the BRGC0 register (see Figure 13-4). <2> Set bits 1 to 4 (SL0, CL0, PS00, and PS01) of the ASIM0 register (see Figure 13-2). <3> Set bit 7 (POWER0) of the ASIM0 register to 1. <4> Set bit 6 (TXE0) of the ASIM0 register to 1. Transmission is enabled. Set bit 5 (RXE0) of the ASIM0 register to 1. Reception is enabled. <5> Write data to the TXS0 register. Data transmission is started. Caution Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port mode register and port register. The relationship between the register settings and pins is shown below. Table 13-2. Relationship Between Register Settings and Pins POWER0 TXE0 RXE0 PM10 P10 PM11 P11 UART0 Operation 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x Note Pin Function TxD0/SCK10/P10 SCK10/P10 SCK10/P10 TxD0 TxD0 RxD0/SI10/P11 SI10/P11 RxD0 SI10/P11 RxD0 x x Note x Note x Note Stop Reception Transmission Transmission/ reception Note Note 1 x Note x x Note 0 0 1 1 1 x Note Can be set as port function. Remark x: TXE0: RXE0: PM1x: P1x: don't care Bit 6 of ASIM0 Bit 5 of ASIM0 Port mode register Port output latch POWER0: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 259 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (2) Communication operation (a) Format and waveform example of normal transmit/receive data Figures 13-6 and 13-7 show the format and waveform example of the normal transmit/receive data. Figure 13-6. Format of Normal UART Transmit/Receive Data 1 data frame Start bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity bit Stop bit Character bits One data frame consists of the following bits. * Start bit ... 1 bit * Character bits ... 7 or 8 bits (LSB first) * Parity bit ... Even parity, odd parity, 0 parity, or no parity * Stop bit ... 1 or 2 bits The character bit length, parity, and stop bit length in one data frame are specified by asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0). Figure 13-7. Example of Normal UART Transmit/Receive Data Waveform 1. Data length: 8 bits, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H 1 data frame Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity Stop 2. Data length: 7 bits, Parity: Odd parity, Stop bit: 2 bits, Communication data: 36H 1 data frame Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Parity Stop Stop 3. Data length: 8 bits, Parity: None, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 87H 1 data frame Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Stop 260 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (b) Parity types and operation The parity bit is used to detect a bit error in communication data. Usually, the same type of parity bit is used on both the transmission and reception sides. With even parity and odd parity, a 1-bit (odd number) error can be detected. With zero parity and no parity, an error cannot be detected. (i) Even parity * Transmission Transmit data, including the parity bit, is controlled so that the number of bits that are "1" is even. The value of the parity bit is as follows. If transmit data has an odd number of bits that are "1": 1 If transmit data has an even number of bits that are "1": 0 * Reception The number of bits that are "1" in the receive data, including the parity bit, is counted. If it is odd, a parity error occurs. (ii) Odd parity * Transmission Unlike even parity, transmit data, including the parity bit, is controlled so that the number of bits that are "1" is odd. If transmit data has an odd number of bits that are "1": 0 If transmit data has an even number of bits that are "1": 1 * Reception The number of bits that are "1" in the receive data, including the parity bit, is counted. If it is even, a parity error occurs. (iii) 0 parity The parity bit is cleared to 0 when data is transmitted, regardless of the transmit data. The parity bit is not detected when the data is received. Therefore, a parity error does not occur regardless of whether the parity bit is "0" or "1". (iv) No parity No parity bit is appended to the transmit data. Reception is performed assuming that there is no parity bit when data is received. Because there is no parity bit, a parity error does not occur. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 261 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (c) Transmission The TXD0 pin outputs a high level when bit 7 (POWER0) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) is set to 1. If bit 6 (TXE0) of ASIM0 is then set to 1, transmission is enabled. Transmission can be started by writing transmit data to transmit shift register 0 (TXS0). The start bit, parity bit, and stop bit are automatically appended to the data. When transmission is started, the start bit is output from the TXD0 pin, followed by the rest of the data in order starting from the LSB. When transmission is completed, the parity and stop bits set by ASIM0 are appended and a transmission completion interrupt request (INTST0) is generated. Transmission is stopped until the data to be transmitted next is written to TXS0. Figure 13-8 shows the timing of the transmission completion interrupt request (INTST0). This interrupt occurs as soon as the last stop bit has been output. Caution After transmit data is written to TXS0, do not write the next transmit data before the transmission completion interrupt signal (INTST0) is generated. Figure 13-8. Transmission Completion Interrupt Request Timing 1. Stop bit length: 1 TXD0 (output) Start D0 D1 D2 D6 D7 Parity Stop INTST0 2. Stop bit length: 2 TXD0 (output) Start D0 D1 D2 D6 D7 Parity Stop INTST0 262 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (d) Reception Reception is enabled and the RXD0 pin input is sampled when bit 7 (POWER0) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) is set to 1 and then bit 5 (RXE0) of ASIM0 is set to 1. The 5-bit counter of the baud rate generator starts counting when the falling edge of the RXD0 pin input is detected. When the set value of baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) has been counted, the RXD0 pin input is sampled again ( as a start bit. When the start bit is detected, reception is started, and serial data is sequentially stored in receive shift register 0 (RXS0) at the set baud rate. When the stop bit has been received, the reception completion interrupt (INTSR0) is generated and the data of RXS0 is written to receive buffer register 0 (RXB0). If an overrun error (OVE0) occurs, however, the receive data is not written to RXB0. Even if a parity error (PE0) occurs while reception is in progress, reception continues to the reception position of the stop bit, and an error interrupt (INTSR0) is generated after completion of reception. Figure 13-9. Reception Completion Interrupt Request Timing in Figure 13-9). If the RXD0 pin is low level at this time, it is recognized RXD0 (input) Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity Stop INTSR0 RXB0 Cautions 1. Be sure to read receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) even if a reception error occurs. Otherwise, an overrun error will occur when the next data is received, and the reception error status will persist. 2. Reception is always performed with the "number of stop bits = 1". The second stop bit is ignored. 3. Be sure to read asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) before reading RXB0. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 263 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (e) Reception error Three types of errors may occur during reception: a parity error, framing error, or overrun error. If the error flag of asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) is set as a result of data reception, a reception error interrupt request (INTSR0) is generated. Which error has occurred during reception can be identified by reading the contents of ASIS0 in the reception error interrupt servicing (INTSR0) (see Figure 13-3). The contents of ASIS0 are reset to 0 when ASIS0 is read. Table 13-3. Cause of Reception Error Reception Error Parity error Framing error Overrun error Cause The parity specified for transmission does not match the parity of the receive data. Stop bit is not detected. Reception of the next data is completed before data is read from receive buffer register 0 (RXB0). (f) Noise filter of receive data The RXD0 signal is sampled using the base clock output by the prescaler block. If two sampled values are the same, the output of the match detector changes, and the data is sampled as input data. Because the circuit is configured as shown in Figure 13-10, the internal processing of the reception operation is delayed by two clocks from the external signal status. Figure 13-10. Noise Filter Circuit Base clock RXD0/SI10/P11 In Q Internal signal A In Q Internal signal B Match detector LD_EN 264 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 13.4.3 Dedicated baud rate generator The dedicated baud rate generator consists of a source clock selector and a 5-bit programmable counter, and generates a serial clock for transmission/reception of UART0. Separate 5-bit counters are provided for transmission and reception. (1) Configuration of baud rate generator * Base clock The clock selected by bits 7 and 6 (TPS01 and TPS00) of baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) is supplied to each module when bit 7 (POWER0) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) is 1. This clock is called the base clock and its frequency is called fXCLK0. The base clock is fixed to low level when POWER0 = 0. * Transmission counter This counter stops operation, cleared to 0, when bit 7 (POWER0) or bit 6 (TXE0) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) is 0. It starts counting when POWER0 = 1 and TXE0 = 1. The counter is cleared to 0 when the first data transmitted is written to transmit shift register 0 (TXS0). * Reception counter This counter stops operation, cleared to 0, when bit 7 (POWER0) or bit 5 (RXE0) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) is 0. It starts counting when the start bit has been detected. The counter stops operation after one frame has been received, until the next start bit is detected. Figure 13-11. Configuration of Baud Rate Generator POWER0 Baud rate generator fX/2 POWER0, TXE0 (or RXE0) fX/23 Selector fX/25 8-bit timer/ event counter 50 output fXCLK0 5-bit counter Match detector 1/2 Baud rate BRGC0: TPS01, TPS00 BRGC0: MDL04 to MDL00 Remark POWER0: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) TXE0: RXE0: BRGC0: Bit 6 of ASIM0 Bit 5 of ASIM0 Baud rate generator control register 0 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 265 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (2) Generation of serial clock A serial clock can be generated by using baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0). Select the clock to be input to the 5-bit counter by using bits 7 and 6 (TPS01 and TPS00) of BRGC0. Bits 4 to 0 (MDL04 to MDL00) of BRGC0 can be used to select the division value of the 5-bit counter. (a) Baud rate The baud rate can be calculated by the following expression. * Baud rate = fXCLK0 2xk [bps] fXCLK0: Frequency of base clock selected by the TPS01 and TPS00 bits of the BRGC0 register k: Value set by the MDL04 to MDL00 bits of the BRGC0 register (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 31) (b) Error of baud rate The baud rate error can be calculated by the following expression. * Error (%) = Actual baud rate (baud rate with error) Desired baud rate (correct baud rate) - 1 x 100 [%] Cautions 1. Keep the baud rate error during transmission to within the permissible error range at the reception destination. 2. Make sure that the baud rate error during reception satisfies the range shown in (4) Permissible baud rate range during reception. Example: Frequency of base clock = 2.5 MHz = 2,500,000 Hz Set value of MDL04 to MDL00 bits of BRGC0 register = 10000B (k = 16) Target baud rate = 76,800 bps Baud rate = 2.5 M/(2 x 16) = 2,500,000/(2 x 16) = 78,125 [bps] Error = (78,125/76,800 - 1) x 100 = 1.725 [%] 266 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (3) Example of setting baud rate Table 13-4. Set Data of Baud Rate Generator Baud Rate [bps] TPS01, TPS00 2400 4800 9600 10400 19200 31250 38400 76800 115200 153600 230400 - - 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 - - 16 15 8 20 16 8 22 16 11 fX = 10.0 MHz k Calculated ERR[%] Value - - 9766 10417 19531 31250 39063 78125 113636 156250 227273 - - 1.73 0.16 1.73 0 1.73 1.73 -1.36 1.73 -1.36 TPS01, TPS00 - 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 - 27 14 13 27 17 14 27 18 14 9 fX = 8.38 MHz k Calculated ERR[%] Value - 4850 9353 10072 19398 30809 38796 77593 116389 149643 232778 - 1.03 -2.58 -3.15 1.03 -1.41 -2.58 1.03 1.03 -2.58 1.03 TPS01, TPS00 3 3 2 2 2 - 2 1 1 - - 27 14 27 25 14 - 27 14 9 - - fX = 4.19 MHz k Calculated ERR[%] Value 2425 4676 9699 10475 18705 - 38796 74821 116389 - - 1.03 -2.58 1.03 0.72 -2.58 - 1.03 -2.58 1.03 - - Remark TPS01, TPS00: Bits 7 and 6 of baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) (setting of base clock (fXCLK0)) k: fX: ERR: Value set by the MDL04 to MDL00 bits of BRGC0 (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 31) X1 input clock oscillation frequency Baud rate error User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 267 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 (4) Permissible baud rate range during reception The permissible error from the baud rate at the transmission destination during reception is shown below. Caution Make sure that the baud rate error during reception is within the permissible error range, by using the calculation expression shown below. Figure 13-12. Permissible Baud Rate Range During Reception Latch timing Data frame length of UART0 Start bit Bit 0 FL Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit 1 data frame (11 x FL) Minimum permissible data frame length Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit FLmin Maximum permissible data frame length Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit FLmax As shown in Figure 13-12, the latch timing of the receive data is determined by the counter set by baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) after the start bit has been detected. If the last data (stop bit) meets this latch timing, the data can be correctly received. Assuming that 11-bit data is received, the theoretical values can be calculated as follows. FL = (Brate)-1 Brate: Baud rate of UART0 k: FL: Set value of BRGC0 1-bit data length Margin of latch timing: 2 clocks 268 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 Minimum permissible data frame length: FLmin = 11 x FL - k-2 2k x FL = 21k + 2 2k FL Therefore, the maximum receivable baud rate at the transmission destination is as follows. BRmax = (FLmin/11)-1 = 22k 21k + 2 Brate Similarly, the maximum permissible data frame length can be calculated as follows. 10 11 k+2 2xk 21k - 2 2xk x FLmax = 11 x FL - 21k - 2 20k x FL = FL FLmax = FL x 11 Therefore, the minimum receivable baud rate at the transmission destination is as follows. BRmin = (FLmax/11)-1 = 20k 21k - 2 Brate The permissible baud rate error between UART0 and the transmission destination can be calculated from the above minimum and maximum baud rate expressions, as follows. Table 13-5. Maximum/Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error Division Ratio (k) 8 16 24 31 Maximum Permissible Baud Rate Error +3.53% +4.14% +4.34% +4.44% Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error -3.61% -4.19% -4.38% -4.47% Remarks 1. The permissible error of reception depends on the number of bits in one frame, input clock frequency, and division ratio (k). The higher the input clock frequency and the higher the division ratio (k), the higher the permissible error. 2. k: Set value of BRGC0 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 269 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 14.1 Functions of Serial Interface UART6 Serial interface UART6 has the following two modes. (1) Operation stop mode This mode is used when serial communication is not executed and can enable a reduction in the power consumption. For details, see 14.4.1 Operation stop mode. (2) Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode This mode supports the LIN (Local Interconnect Network)-bus. The functions of this mode are outlined below. For details, see 14.4.2 generator. * Two-pin configuration TXD6: Transmit data output pin RXB6: Receive data input pin * Data length of communication data can be selected from 7 or 8 bits. * Dedicated internal 8-bit baud rate generator allowing any baud rate to be set * Transmission and reception can be performed independently. * Twelve operating clock inputs selectable * MSB- or LSB-first communication selectable * Inverted transmission operation * Synchronous break field transmission from 13 to 20 bits * More than 11 bits can be identified for synchronous break field reception (SBF reception flag provided). Cautions 1. The TXD6 output inversion function inverts only the transmission side and not the reception side. To use this function, the reception side must be ready for reception of inverted data. 2. If clock supply to serial interface UART6 is not stopped (e.g., in the HALT mode), normal operation continues. If clock supply to serial interface UART6 is stopped (e.g., in the STOP mode), each register stops operating, and holds the value immediately before clock supply was stopped. The TXD6 pin also holds the value immediately before clock supply was stopped and outputs it. However, the operation is not guaranteed after clock supply is resumed. Therefore, reset the circuit so that POWER6 = 0, RXE6 = 0, and TXE6 = 0. 3. If data is continuously transmitted, the communication timing from the stop bit to the next start bit is extended two operating clocks of the macro. However, this does not affect the result of communication because the reception side initializes the timing when it has detected a start bit. Do not use the continuous transmission function if the interface is incorporated in LIN. Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode and 14.4.3 Dedicated baud rate 270 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Remark LIN stands for Local Interconnect Network and is a low-speed (1 to 20 kbps) serial communication protocol intended to aid the cost reduction of an automotive network. LIN communication is single-master communication, and up to 15 slaves can be connected to one master. The LIN slaves are used to control the switches, actuators, and sensors, and these are connected to the LIN master via the LIN network. Normally, the LIN master is connected to a network such as CAN (Controller Area Network). In addition, the LIN bus uses a single-wire method and is connected to the nodes via a transceiver that complies with ISO9141. In the LIN protocol, the master transmits a frame with baud rate information and the slave receives it and corrects the baud rate error. Therefore, communication is possible when the baud rate error in the slave is 15% or less. Figures 14-1 and 14-2 outline the transmission and reception operations of LIN. Figure 14-1. LIN Transmission Operation Wakeup signal frame Synchronous break field Synchronous field Indent field Data field Data field Checksum field Sleep bus 8 bits Note 1 13-bitNote 2 SBF transmission 55H Data Data Data Data transmission transmission transmission transmission transmission TX6 Note 3 INTST6 Notes 1. 2. 3. Remark The wakeup signal frame is substituted by 80H transmission in the 8-bit mode. The synchronous break field is output by hardware. The output width is adjusted by baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) (see 14.4.2 (2) (h) SBF transmission). INTST6 is output on completion of each transmission. It is also output when SBF is transmitted. The interval between each field is controlled by software. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 271 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Figure 14-2. LIN Reception Operation Wakeup signal frame Sleep bus 13 bitsNote 2 SBF reception Note 3 Reception interrupt (INTSR6) SF reception ID reception Data reception Data Data reception receptionNote 5 Synchronous break field Synchronous field Indent field Data field Data field Checksum field RX6 Disable Enable Edge detection Note 1 (INTP0) Note 4 Capture timer Disable Enable Notes 1. 2. The wakeup signal is detected at the edge of the pin, and enables UART6 and sets the SBF reception mode. Reception continues until the STOP bit is detected. When an SBF with low-level data of 11 bits or more has been detected, it is assumed that SBF reception has been completed correctly, and an interrupt signal is output. If an SBF with low-level data of less than 11 bits has been detected, it is assumed that an SBF reception error has occurred. The interrupt signal is not output and the SBF reception mode is restored. 3. If SBF reception has been completed correctly, an interrupt signal is output. This SBF reception completion interrupt enables the capture timer. Detection of errors OVE6, PE6, and FE6 is suppressed, and error detection processing of UART communication and data transfer of the shift register and RXB6 is not performed. The shift register holds the reset value FFH. 4. 5. Calculate the baud rate error from the bit length of the synchronous field, disable UART6 after SF reception, and then re-set baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6). Distinguish the checksum field by software. Also perform processing by software to initialize UART6 after reception of the checksum field and to set the SBF reception mode again. To perform a LIN receive operation, use a configuration like the one shown in Figure 14-3. The wakeup signal transmitted from the LIN master is received by detecting the edge of the external interrupt (INTP0). The length of the synchronous field transmitted from the LIN master can be measured using the external event capture operation of 16-bit timer/event counter 00, and the baud rate error can be calculated. The input signal of the reception port input (RxD6) can be input to the external interrupt (INTP0) and 16-bit timer/event counter 00 by port input switch control (ISC0/ISC1), without connecting RxD6 and INTP0/TI000 externally. 272 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Figure 14-3. Port Configuration for LIN Reception Operation Selector P14/RxD6 RXD6 input Port mode (PM14) Output latch (P14) Selector Selector P120/INTP0 INTP0 input Port mode (PM120) Output latch (P120) Port input switch control (ISC0) Selector P00/TI000 TI000 input Port mode (PM00) Output latch (P00) Port input switch control (ISC1) Remark ISC0, ISC1: Bits 0 and 1 of the input switch control register (ISC) (see Figure 14-11) The peripheral functions used in the LIN communication operation are shown below. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 273 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 14.2 Configuration of Serial Interface UART6 Serial interface UART6 includes the following hardware. Table 14-1. Configuration of Serial Interface UART6 Item Registers Receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) Receive shift register 6 (RXS6) Transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) Transmit shift register 6 (TXS6) Control registers Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) Input switch control register (ISC) Port mode register 1 (PM1) Port register 1 (P1) Configuration 274 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD Figure 14-4. Block Diagram of Serial Interface UART6 TI000, INTP0Note Filter INTSR6 INTSRE6 RXD6/ P14 Reception control Receive shift register 6 (RXS6) Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) Receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) fX fX/2 fX/22 fX/23 fX/24 fX/25 fX/26 fX/27 fX/28 fX/29 fX/210 8-bit timer/ event counter 50 output Selector Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) Baud rate generator Reception unit Internal bus CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) 8 Asynchronous serial Clock selection interface transmission register 6 (CKSR6) status register 6 (ASIF6) 8 Baud rate generator Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) Transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) INTST6 Transmission control Transmit shift register 6 (TXS6) TXD6/ P13 Registers Output latch (P13) Transmission unit PM13 Note Selectable with input switch control register (ISC). 275 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (1) Receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) This 8-bit register stores parallel data converted by receive shift register 6 (RXS6). Each time 1 byte of data has been received, new receive data is transferred to this register from receive shift register 6 (RXS6). If the data length is set to 7 bits, data is transferred as follows. * In LSB-first reception, the receive data is transferred to bits 0 to 6 of RXB6 and the MSB of RXB6 is always 0. * In MSB-first reception, the receive data is transferred to bits 1 to 7 of RXB6 and the LSB of RXB6 is always 0. If an overrun error (OVE6) occurs, the receive data is not transferred to RXB6. RXB6 can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. No data can be written to this register. RESET input sets this register to FFH. (2) Receive shift register 6 (RXS6) This register converts the serial data input to the RXD6 pin into parallel data. RXS6 cannot be directly manipulated by a program. (3) Transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) This buffer register is used to set transmit data. Transmission is started when data is written to TXB6. This register can be read or written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to FFH. Cautions 1. Do not write data to TXB6 when bit 1 (TXBF6) of asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) is 1. 2. Do not refresh (write the same value to) TXB6 by software during a communication operation (when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) are 1 or when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 are 1). (4) Transmit shift register 6 (TXS6) This register transmits the data transferred from TXB6 from the TXD6 pin as serial data. Data is transferred from TXB6 immediately after TXB6 is written for the first transmission, or immediately before INTST6 occurs after one frame was transmitted for continuous transmission. Data is transferred from TXB6 and transmitted from the TXD6 pin at the falling edge of the base clock. TXS6 cannot be directly manipulated by a program. 276 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 14.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface UART6 Serial interface UART6 is controlled by the following nine registers. * Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) * Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) * Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) * Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) * Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) * Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) * Input switch control register (ISC) * Port mode register 1 (PM1) * Port register 1 (P1) (1) Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) This 8-bit register controls the serial communication operations of serial interface UART6. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to 01H. Remark ASIM6 can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication operation (when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 1 or bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 = 1). Figure 14-5. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 6 (ASIM6) (1/2) Address: FF50H After reset: 01H R/W Symbol ASIM6 <7> POWER6 <6> TXE6 <5> RXE6 4 PS61 3 PS60 2 CL6 1 SL6 0 ISRM6 POWER6 0 Note 1 Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously resets the internal circuit Note 2 . 1 Note 3 Enables operation of the internal operation clock TXE6 0 1 Enables/disables transmission Disables transmission (synchronously resets the transmission circuit). Enables transmission Notes 1. 2. The output of the TXD6 pin goes high and the input from the RXD6 pin is fixed to the high level when POWER6 = 0. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6), asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6), bit 7 (SBRF6) and bit 6 (SBRT6) of asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6), and receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) are reset. 3. Operation of the 8-bit counter output is enabled at the second base clock after 1 is written to the POWER6 bit. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 277 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Figure 14-5. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 6 (ASIM6) (2/2) RXE6 0 1 Enables/disables reception Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit). Enables reception PS61 0 0 1 1 PS60 0 1 0 1 Transmission operation Does not output parity bit. Outputs 0 parity. Outputs odd parity. Outputs even parity. Reception operation Reception without parity Reception as 0 parity Note Judges as odd parity. Judges as even parity. CL6 0 1 Specifies character length of transmit/receive data Character length of data = 7 bits Character length of data = 8 bits SL6 0 1 Number of stop bits = 1 Number of stop bits = 2 Specifies number of stop bits of transmit data ISRM6 0 1 Enables/disables occurrence of reception completion interrupt in case of error "INTSRE6" occurs in case of error (at this time, INTSR6 does not occur). "INTSR6" occurs in case of error (at this time, INTSRE6 does not occur). Note If "reception as 0 parity" is selected, the parity is not judged. Therefore, bit 2 (PE6) of asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) is not set and the error interrupt does not occur. Cautions 1. At startup, set POWER6 to 1 and then set TXE6 to 1. To stop the operation, clear TXE6 to 0, and then clear POWER6 to 0. 2. At startup, set POWER6 to 1 and then set RXE6 to 1. To stop the operation, clear RXE6 to 0, and then clear POWER6 to 0. 3. Set POWER6 to 1 and then set RXE6 to 1 while a high level is input to the RxD6 pin. If POWER6 is set to 1 and RXE6 is set to 1 while a low level is input, reception is started. 4. Clear the TXE6 and RXE6 bits to 0 before rewriting the PS61, PS60, and CL6 bits. 5. Fix the PS61 and PS60 bits to 0 when mounting the device on LIN. 6. Make sure that TXE6 = 0 when rewriting the SL6 bit. Reception is always performed with "the number of stop bits = 1", and therefore, is not affected by the set value of the SL6 bit. 7. Make sure that RXE6 = 0 when rewriting the ISRM6 bit. 278 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (2) Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) This register indicates an error status on completion of reception by serial interface UART6. It includes three error flag bits (PE6, FE6, OVE6). This register is read-only by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H if bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 = 0. 00H is read when this register is read. Figure 14-6. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Reception Error Status Register 6 (ASIS6) Address: FF53H After reset: 00H R Symbol ASIS6 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 PE6 1 FE6 0 OVE6 PE6 0 1 Status flag indicating parity error If POWER6 = 0 and RXE6 = 0, or if ASIS6 register is read If the parity of transmit data does not match the parity bit on completion of reception FE6 0 1 Status flag indicating framing error If POWER6 = 0 and RXE6 = 0, or if ASIS6 register is read If the stop bit is not detected on completion of reception OVE6 0 1 Status flag indicating overrun error If POWER6 = 0 and RXE6 = 0, or if ASIS6 register is read If receive data is set to the RXB register and the next reception operation is completed before the data is read. Cautions 1. The operation of the PE6 bit differs depending on the set values of the PS61 and PS60 bits of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6). 2. The first bit of the receive data is checked as the stop bit, regardless of the number of stop bits. 3. If an overrun error occurs, the next receive data is not written to receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) but discarded. 4. If data is read from ASIS6, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ASIS6 when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 279 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (3) Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) This register indicates the status of transmission by serial interface UART6. It includes two status flag bits (TXBF6 and TXSF6). Transmission can be continued without disruption even during an interrupt period, by writing the next data to the TXB6 register after data has been transferred from the TXB6 register to the TXS6 register. This register is read-only by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H if bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 0. Figure 14-7. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmission Status Register 6 (ASIF6) Address: FF55H After reset: 00H R Symbol ASIF6 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 TXBF6 0 TXSF6 TXBF6 0 1 Transmit buffer data flag If POWER6 = 0 or TXE6 = 0, or if data is transferred to transmit shift register 6 (TXS6) If data is written to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) (if data exists in TXB6) TXSF6 0 Transmit shift register data flag If POWER6 = 0 or TXE6 = 0, or if the next data is not transferred from transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) after completion of transfer 1 If data is transferred from transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) (if data transmission is in progress) Cautions 1. To transmit data continuously, write the first transmit data (first byte) to the TXB6 register. Be sure to check that the TXBF6 flag is "0". If so, write the next transmit data (second byte) to the TXB6 register. If data is written to the TXB6 register while the TXBF6 flag is "1", the transmit data cannot be guaranteed. 2. To initialize the transmission unit upon completion of continuous transmission, be sure to check that the TXSF6 flag is "0" after generation of the transmission completion interrupt, and then execute initialization. If initialization is executed while the TXSF6 flag is "1", the transmit data cannot be guaranteed. 280 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (4) Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) This register selects the base clock of serial interface UART6. CKSR6 can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Remark CKSR6 can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication operation (when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 1 or bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 = 1). Figure 14-8. Format of Clock Selection Register 6 (CKSR6) Address: FF56H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol CKSR6 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 TPS63 2 TPS62 1 TPS61 0 TPS60 TPS63 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 TPS62 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 TPS61 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 TPS60 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 fX (10 MHz) fX/2 (5 MHz) Base clock (fXCLK6) selection fX/2 (2.5 MHz) fX/2 (1.25 MHz) fX/2 (625 kHz) fX/2 (312.5 kHz) fX/2 (156.25 kHz) fX/2 (78.13 kHz) fX/2 (39.06 kHz) fX/2 (19.53 kHz) fX/2 (9.77 kHz) TM50 output Note 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Other than above Setting prohibited Note To select the output of TM50 as the base clock, start the operation by setting 8-bit timer/event counter 50 so that the duty is 50% of the output in the PWM mode (bit 6 (TMC506) of the TMC50 register = 1), and then set TPS63, TPS62, TPS61, and TPS60 to 1, 0, 1, and 1, respectively. It is not necessary to enable the TO50 pin as a timer output pin (bit 0 (TOE50) of the TMC register may be 0 or 1). Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the base clock is the RingOSC clock, the operation of serial interface UART6 is not guaranteed. 2. Make sure POWER6 = 0 when rewriting TPS63 to TPS60. Remarks 1. Figures in parentheses are for operation with fX = 10 MHz 2. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 281 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (5) Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) This register sets the division value of the 8-bit counter of serial interface UART6. BRGC6 can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to FFH. Remark BRGC6 can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication operation (when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 1 or bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 = 1). Figure 14-9. Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register 6 (BRGC6) Address: FF57H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol BRGC6 7 MDL67 6 MDL66 5 MDL65 4 MDL64 3 MDL63 2 MDL62 1 MDL61 0 MDL60 MDL67 MDL66 MDL65 MDL64 MDL63 MDL62 x 0 0 0 * * * * * 1 1 1 1 MDL61 x 0 0 1 * * * * * 0 0 1 1 MDL60 x 0 1 0 * * * * * 0 1 0 1 k x 8 9 10 * * * * * 252 253 254 255 Output clock selection of 8-bit counter 0 0 0 0 * * * * * 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 * * * * * 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 * * * * * 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 * * * * * 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 * * * * * 1 1 1 1 Setting prohibited fXCLK6/8 fXCLK6/9 fXCLK6/10 * * * * * fXCLK6/252 fXCLK6/253 fXCLK6/254 fXCLK6/255 Cautions 1. Make sure that bit 6 (TXE6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of the ASIM6 register = 0 when rewriting the MDL67 to MDL60 bits. 2. The baud rate is the output clock of the 8-bit counter divided by 2. Remarks 1. fXCLK6: Frequency of base clock selected by the TPS63 to TPS60 bits of CKSR6 register 2. k: Value set by MDL67 to MDL60 bits (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 255) 3. x: Don't care 282 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (6) Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) This register controls the serial communication operations of serial interface UART6. ASICL6 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to 16H. Caution ASICL6 can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication operation (when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 1 or bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 = 1). Note, however, that communication is started by the refresh operation because bit 6 (SBRT6) of ASICL6 is cleared to 0 when communication is completed (when an interrupt signal is generated). Figure 14-10. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Control Register 6 (ASICL6) Address: FF58H After reset: 16H R/W Symbol ASICL6 <7> SBRF6 <6> SBRT6 Note 5 0 4 1 3 0 2 1 1 DIR6 0 TXDLV6 SBRF6 0 1 SBF reception status flag If POWER6 = 0 and RXE6 = 0 or if SBF reception has been completed correctly SBF reception in progress SBRT6 0 1 SBF reception trigger SBF reception trigger - DIR6 0 1 MSB LSB First bit specification TXDLV6 0 1 Normal output of TXD6 Inverted output of TXD6 Enables/disables inverting TXD6 output Note Bits 2 to 5 and 7 are read-only. Cautions 1. In the case of an SBF reception error, return the mode to the SBF reception mode and hold the status of the SBRF6 flag. 2. Before setting the SBRT6 bit, make sure that bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 = 1. 3. The read value of the SBRT6 bit is always 0. SBRT6 is automatically cleared to 0 after SBF reception has been correctly completed. 4. Before rewriting the DIR6 and TXDLV6 bits, clear the TXE6 and RXE6 bits to 0. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 283 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (7) Input switch control register (ISC) The input switch control register (ISC) is used to receive a status signal transmitted from the master during LIN (Local Interconnect Network) reception. The input signal is switched by setting ISC. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 14-11. Format of Input Switch Control Register (ISC) Address: FF4FH Symbol ISC After reset: 00H 7 0 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 ISC1 0 ISC0 ISC1 0 1 TI000 (P00) RxD6 (P14) TI000 input source selection ISC0 0 1 INTP0 (P120) RxD6 (P14) INTP0 input source selection (8) Port mode register 1 (PM1) This register sets port 1 input/output in 1-bit units. When using the P13/TxD3 pin for serial interface data output, clear PM13 to 0 and set the output latch of P13 to 1. When using the P14/RxD6 pin for serial interface data input, set PM14 to 1. The output latch of P14 at this time may be 0 or 1. PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to FFH. Figure 14-12. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1) Address: FF21H Symbol PM1 7 PM17 After reset: FFH 6 PM16 R/W 5 PM15 4 PM14 3 PM13 2 PM12 1 PM11 0 PM10 PM1n 0 1 P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7) Output mode (output buffer on) Input mode (output buffer off) 284 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 14.4 Operation of Serial Interface UART6 Serial interface UART6 has the following two modes. * Operation stop mode * Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode 14.4.1 Operation stop mode In this mode, serial communication cannot be executed; therefore, the power consumption can be reduced. In addition, the pins can be used as ordinary port pins in this mode. To set the operation stop mode, clear bits 7, 6, and 5 (POWER6, TXE6, and RXE6) of ASIM6 to 0. (1) Register used The operation stop mode is set by asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6). ASIM6 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to 01H. Address: FF50H After reset: 01H R/W Symbol ASIM6 <7> POWER6 <6> TXE6 <5> RXE6 4 PS61 3 PS60 2 CL6 1 SL6 0 ISRM6 POWER6 0 Note 1 Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously resets the internal circuit Note 2 . TXE6 0 Enables/disables transmission Disables transmission operation (synchronously resets the transmission circuit). RXE6 0 Enables/disables reception Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit). Notes 1. 2. The output of the TXD6 pin goes high and the input from the RXD6 pin is fixed to high level when POWER6 = 0. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6), asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6), bit 7 (SBRF6) and bit 6 (SBRT6) of asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6), and receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) are reset. Caution Clear POWER6 to 0 after clearing TXE6 and RXE6 to 0 to set the operation stop mode. To start the operation, set POWER6 to 1, and then set TXE6 and RXE6 to 1. Remark To use the RxD6/P14 and TxD6/P13 pins as general-purpose port pins, see CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS. PORT User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 285 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 14.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode In this mode, data of 1 byte is transmitted/received following a start bit, and a full-duplex operation can be performed. A dedicated UART baud rate generator is incorporated, so that communication can be executed at a wide range of baud rates. (1) Registers used * Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) * Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) * Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) * Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) * Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) * Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) * Input switch control register (ISC) * Port mode register 1 (PM1) * Port register 1 (P1) The basic procedure of setting an operation in the UART mode is as follows. <1> Set the CKSR6 register (see Figure 14-8). <2> Set the BRGC6 register (see Figure 14-9). <3> Set bits 0 to 4 (ISRM6, SL6, CL6, PS60, PS61) of the ASIM6 register (see Figure 14-5). <4> Set bits 0 and 1 (TXDLV6, DIR6) of the ASICL6 register (see Figure 14-10). <5> Set bit 7 (POWER6) of the ASIM6 register to 1. <6> Set bit 6 (TXE6) of the ASIM6 register to 1. Transmission is enabled. Set bit 5 (RXE6) of the ASIM6 register to 1. Reception is enabled. <7> Write data to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6). Data transmission is started. Caution Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port mode register and port register. 286 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 The relationship between the register settings and pins is shown below. Table 14-2. Relationship Between Register Settings and Pins POWER6 TXE6 RXE6 PM13 P13 PM14 P14 UART6 Operation 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x Note Pin Function TxD6/P13 P13 P13 TxD6 TxD6 RxD6/P14 P14 RxD6 P14 RxD6 x x Note x Note x Note Stop Reception Transmission Transmission/ reception Note Note 1 x Note x x Note 0 0 1 1 1 x Note Can be set as port function. Remark x: TXE6: RXE6: PM1x: P1x: don't care Bit 6 of ASIM6 Bit 5 of ASIM6 Port mode register Port output latch POWER6: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 287 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (2) Communication operation (a) Format and waveform example of normal transmit/receive data Figures 14-13 and 14-14 show the format and waveform example of the normal transmit/receive data. Figure 14-13. Format of Normal UART Transmit/Receive Data 1. LSB-first transmission/reception 1 data frame Start bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity bit Stop bit Character bits 2. MSB-first transmission/reception 1 data frame Start bit D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Parity bit Stop bit Character bits One data frame consists of the following bits. * Start bit ... 1 bit * Character bits ... 7 or 8 bits * Parity bit ... Even parity, odd parity, 0 parity, or no parity * Stop bit ... 1 or 2 bits The character bit length, parity, and stop bit length in one data frame are specified by asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6). Whether data is communicated with the LSB or MSB first is specified by bit 1 (DIR6) of asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6). Whether the TXD6 pin outputs normal or inverted data is specified by bit 0 (TXDLV6) of ASICL6. 288 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Figure 14-14. Example of Normal UART Transmit/Receive Data Waveform 1. Data length: 8 bits, LSB first, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H 1 data frame Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity Stop 2. Data length: 8 bits, MSB first, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H 1 data frame Start D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Parity Stop 3. Data length: 8 bits, MSB first, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H, TXD6 pin inverted output 1 data frame Start D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Parity Stop 4. Data length: 7 bits, LSB first, Parity: Odd parity, Stop bit: 2 bits, Communication data: 36H 1 data frame Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Parity Stop Stop 5. Data length: 8 bits, LSB first, Parity: None, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 87H 1 data frame Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Stop User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 289 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (b) Parity types and operation The parity bit is used to detect a bit error in communication data. Usually, the same type of parity bit is used on both the transmission and reception sides. With even parity and odd parity, a 1-bit (odd number) error can be detected. With zero parity and no parity, an error cannot be detected. Caution Fix the PS61 and PS60 bits to 0 when the device is incorporated in LIN. (i) Even parity * Transmission Transmit data, including the parity bit, is controlled so that the number of bits that are "1" is even. The value of the parity bit is as follows. If transmit data has an odd number of bits that are "1": 1 If transmit data has an even number of bits that are "1": 0 * Reception The number of bits that are "1" in the receive data, including the parity bit, is counted. If it is odd, a parity error occurs. (ii) Odd parity * Transmission Unlike even parity, transmit data, including the parity bit, is controlled so that the number of bits that are "1" is odd. If transmit data has an odd number of bits that are "1": 0 If transmit data has an even number of bits that are "1": 1 * Reception The number of bits that are "1" in the receive data, including the parity bit, is counted. If it is even, a parity error occurs. (iii) 0 parity The parity bit is cleared to 0 when data is transmitted, regardless of the transmit data. The parity bit is not detected when the data is received. Therefore, a parity error does not occur regardless of whether the parity bit is "0" or "1". (iv) No parity No parity bit is appended to the transmit data. Reception is performed assuming that there is no parity bit when data is received. Because there is no parity bit, a parity error does not occur. 290 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (c) Normal transmission The TXD6 pin outputs a high level when bit 7 (POWER6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) is set to 1. If bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 is then set to 1, transmission is enabled. Transmission can be started by writing transmit data to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6). The start bit, parity bit, and stop bit are automatically appended to the data. When transmission is started, the data in TXB6 is transferred to transmit shift register 6 (TXS6). After that, the data is sequentially output from TXS6 to the TXD6 pin. When transmission is completed, the parity and stop bits set by ASIM6 are appended and a transmission completion interrupt request (INTST6) is generated. Transmission is stopped until the data to be transmitted next is written to TXB6. Figure 14-15 shows the timing of the transmission completion interrupt request (INTST6). This interrupt occurs as soon as the last stop bit has been output. Figure 14-15. Normal Transmission Completion Interrupt Request Timing 1. Stop bit length: 1 TXD6 (output) Start D0 D1 D2 D6 D7 Parity Stop INTST6 2. Stop bit length: 2 TXD6 (output) Start D0 D1 D2 D6 D7 Parity Stop INTST6 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 291 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (d) Continuous transmission The next transmit data can be written to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) as soon as transmit shift register 6 (TXS6) has started its shift operation. Consequently, even while the INTST6 interrupt is being serviced after transmission of one data frame, data can be continuously transmitted and an efficient communication rate can be realized. In addition, the TXB6 register can be efficiently written twice (2 bytes) without having to wait for the transmission time of one data frame, by reading bit 0 (TXSF6) of asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) when the transmission completion interrupt has occurred. To transmit data continuously, be sure to reference the ASIF6 register to check the transmission status and whether the TXB6 register can be written, and then write the data. Cautions 1. The TXBF6 and TXSF6 flags of the ASIS register change from "10" to "11", and to "01" during continuous transmission. To check the status, therefore, do not use a combination of the TXBF6 and TXSF6 flags for judgment. Read only the TXBF6 flag when executing continuous transmission. 2. When the device is incorporated in a LIN, the continuous transmission function cannot be used. Make sure that asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) is 00H before writing transmit data to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6). TXBF6 0 1 Writing enabled Writing disabled Writing to TXB6 Register Caution To transmit data continuously, write the first transmit data (first byte) to the TXB6 register. Be sure to check that the TXBF6 flag is "0". If so, write the next transmit data (second byte) to the TXB6 register. If data is written to the TXB6 register while the TXBF6 flag is "1", the transmit data cannot be guaranteed. The communication status can be checked using the TXSF6 flag. TXSF6 0 1 Transmission is completed. Transmission is in progress. Transmission Status Cautions 1. To initialize the transmission unit upon completion of continuous transmission, be sure to check that the TXSF6 flag is "0" after generation of the transmission completion interrupt, and then execute initialization. If initialization is executed while the TXSF6 flag is "1", the transmit data cannot be guaranteed. 2. During continuous transmission, an overrun error may occur, which means that the next transmission was completed before execution of INTST6 interrupt servicing after transmission of one data frame. An overrun error can be detected by developing a program that can count the number of transmit data and by referencing the TXSF6 flag. 292 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Figure 14-16 shows an example of the continuous transmission processing flow. Figure 14-16. Example of Continuous Transmission Processing Flow Set registers. Write TXB6. Transfer executed necessary number of times? No Yes Read ASIF6 TXBF6 = 0? Yes No Write TXB6. Transmission completion interrupt occurs? Yes No Transfer executed necessary number of times? No Yes Read ASIF6 TXSF6 = 0? Yes Yes Completion of transmission processing No Remark TXB6: Transmit buffer register 6 ASIF6: Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 TXBF6: Bit 1 of ASIF6 (transmit buffer data flag) TXSF6: Bit 0 of ASIF6 (transmit shift register data flag) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 293 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Figure 14-17 shows the timing of starting continuous transmission, and Figure 14-18 shows the timing of ending continuous transmission. Figure 14-17. Timing of Starting Continuous Transmission TXD6 INTST6 Start Data (1) Parity Stop Start Data (2) Parity Stop Start TXB6 FF Data (1) Data (2) Data (3) TXS6 TXBF6 TXSF6 FF Data (1) Data (2) Data (3) Note Note When ASIF6 is read, there is a period in which TXBF6 and TXSF6 = 1, 1. Therefore, judge whether writing is enabled using only the TXBF6 bit. Remark TXD6: TXB6: TXS6: ASIF6: TXD6 pin (output) Transmit buffer register 6 Transmit shift register 6 Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 INTST6: Interrupt request signal TXBF6: Bit 1 of ASIF6 TXSF6: Bit 0 of ASIF6 294 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Figure 14-18. Timing of Ending Continuous Transmission TXD6 INTST6 Stop Start Data (n - 1) Parity Stop Start Data (n) Parity Stop TXB6 Data (n - 1) Data (n) TXS6 Data (n - 1) Data (n) FF TXBF6 TXSF6 POWER6 or TXE6 Remark TXD6: INTST6: TXB6: TXS6: ASIF6: TXBF6: TXSF6: TXE6: TXD6 pin (output) Interrupt request signal Transmit buffer register 6 Transmit shift register 6 Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 Bit 1 of ASIF6 Bit 0 of ASIF6 Bit 6 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register (ASIM6) POWER6: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register (ASIM6) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 295 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (e) Normal reception Reception is enabled and the RXD6 pin input is sampled when bit 7 (POWER6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) is set to 1 and then bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 is set to 1. The 8-bit counter of the baud rate generator starts counting when the falling edge of the RXD6 pin input is detected. When the set value of baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) has been counted, the RXD6 pin input is sampled again ( as a start bit. When the start bit is detected, reception is started, and serial data is sequentially stored in the receive shift register (RXS6) at the set baud rate. When the stop bit has been received, the reception completion interrupt (INTSR6) is generated and the data of RXS6 is written to receive buffer register 6 (RXB6). If an overrun error (OVE6) occurs, however, the receive data is not written to RXB6. Even if a parity error (PE6) occurs while reception is in progress, reception continues to the reception position of the stop bit, and an error interrupt (INTSR6/INTSRE6) is generated on completion of reception. Figure 14-19. Reception Completion Interrupt Request Timing in Figure 14-19). If the RXD6 pin is low level at this time, it is recognized RXD6 (input) Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity Stop INTSR6 RXB6 Cautions 1. Be sure to read receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) even if a reception error occurs. Otherwise, an overrun error will occur when the next data is received, and the reception error status will persist. 2. Reception is always performed with the "number of stop bits = 1". The second stop bit is ignored. 3. Be sure to read asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) before reading RXB6. 296 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (f) Reception error Three types of errors may occur during reception: a parity error, framing error, or overrun error. If the error flag of asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) is set as a result of data reception, a reception error interrupt request (INTSR6/INTSRE6) is generated. Which error has occurred during reception can be identified by reading the contents of ASIS6 in the reception error interrupt servicing (INTSR6/INTSRE6) (see Figure 14-6). The contents of ASIS6 are reset to 0 when ASIS6 is read. Table 14-3. Cause of Reception Error Reception Error Parity error Framing error Overrun error Cause The parity specified for transmission does not match the parity of the receive data. Stop bit is not detected. Reception of the next data is completed before data is read from receive buffer register 6 (RXB6). The error interrupt can be separated into reception completion interrupt (INTSR6) and error interrupt (INTSRE6) by clearing bit 0 (ISRM6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) to 0. Figure 14-20. Reception Error Interrupt 1. If ISRM6 is cleared to 0 (reception completion interrupt (INTSR6) and error interrupt (INTSRE6) are separated) (a) No error during reception INTSR6 (b) Error during reception INTSR6 INTSRE6 INTSRE6 2. If ISRM6 is set to 1 (error interrupt is included in INTSR6) (a) No error during reception (b) Error during reception INTSR6 INTSRE6 INTSR6 INTSRE6 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 297 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (g) Noise filter of receive data The RXD6 signal is sampled with the base clock output by the prescaler block. If two sampled values are the same, the output of the match detector changes, and the data is sampled as input data. Because the circuit is configured as shown in Figure 14-21, the internal processing of the reception operation is delayed by two clocks from the external signal status. Figure 14-21. Noise Filter Circuit Base clock RXD6/P14 In Q Internal signal A In Q Internal signal B Match detector LD_EN (h) SBF transmission When the device is incorporated in LIN, the SBF (Synchronous Break Field) transmission control function is used for transmission. Operation. SBF transmission is used to transmit an SBF length that is a low-level width of 13 bits or more by adjusting the baud rate value of the ordinary UART transmission function. [Setting method] Transmit 00H by setting the number of character bits of the data to 8 bits and the parity bit to 0 parity or even parity. This enables a low-level transmission of a data frame consisting of 10 bits (1 bit (start bit) + 8 bits (character bits) + 1 bit (parity bit)). Adjust the baud rate value to adjust this 10-bit low level to the targeted SBF length. Example If LIN is to be transmitted under the following conditions * Base clock of UART6 = 5 MHz (set by clock selection register 6 (CKSR6)) * Target baud rate value = 19200 bps To realize the above baud rate value, the length of a 13-bit SBF is as follows if the baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) is set to 130. * 13-bit SBF length = 0.2 s x 130 x 2 x 13 = 676 s To realize a 13-bit SBF length in 10 bits, set a value 1.3 times the targeted baud rate to BRGC6. In this example, set 169 to BRGC6. The transmission length of a 10-bit low level in this case is as follows, and matches the 13-bit SBF length. * 10-bit low-level transmission length = 0.2 s x 169 x 2 x 10 = 676 s For the transmission operation of LIN, see Figure 14-1 LIN Transmission 298 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 If the number of bits set by BRGC6 runs short, adjust the number of bits by setting the base clock of UART6. Figure 14-22. Example of Setting Procedure of SBF Transmission (Flowchart) Start Read BRGC6 register and save current set value of BRGC6 register to generalpurpose register. Clear TXE6 and RXE6 bits of ASIM6 register to 0 (to disable transmission/ reception). Set value to BRGC6 register to realize desired SBF length. Clear TXE6 and RXE6 bits of ASIM6 register to 0. Set character length of data to 8 bits and parity to 0 or even using ASIM6 register. Rewrite saved BRGC6 value to BRGC6 register. Set TXE6 bit of ASIM6 register to 1 to enable transmission. Re-set PS61 bit, PS60 bit, and CL6 bit of ASIM6 register to desired value. Set TXB6 register to "00H" and start transmission. Set TXE6 bit of ASIM6 register to 1 to enable transmission. End No INTST6 occurred? Yes Figure 14-23. SBF Transmission TXD6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Stop INTST6 Remark TXD6: TXD6 pin (output) INTST6: Transmission completion interrupt request User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 299 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (i) SBF reception When the device is incorporated in LIN, the SBF (Synchronous Break Field) reception control function is used for reception. For the reception operation of LIN, see Figure 14-2 LIN Reception Operation. Reception is enabled when bit 7 (POWER6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) is set to 1 and then bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 is set to 1. SBF reception is enabled when bit 6 (SBRT6) of asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) is set to 1. In the SBF reception enabled status, the RXD6 pin is sampled and the start bit is detected in the same manner as the normal reception enable status. When the start bit has been detected, reception is started, and serial data is sequentially stored in the receive shift register 6 (RXS6) at the set baud rate. When the stop bit is received and if the width of SBF is 11 bits or more, a reception completion interrupt request (INTSR6) is generated as normal processing. At this time, the SBRF6 and SBRT6 bits are automatically cleared, and SBF reception ends. Detection of errors, such as OVE6, PE6, and FE6 (bits 0 to 2 of asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6)) is suppressed, and error detection processing of UART communication is not performed. In addition, data transfer between receive shift register 6 (RXS6) and receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) is not performed, and the reset value of FFH is retained. If the width of SBF is 10 bits or less, an interrupt does not occur as error processing after the stop bit has been received, and the SBF reception mode is restored. In this case, the SBRF6 and SBRT6 bits are not cleared. Figure 14-24. SBF Reception 1. Normal SBF reception (stop bit is detected with a width of more than 10.5 bits) RXD6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 SBRT6 /SBRF6 INTSR6 2. SBF reception error (stop bit is detected with a width of 10.5 bits or less) RXD6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SBRT6 /SBRF6 INTSR6 "0" Remark RXD6: RXD6 pin (input) SBRT6: Bit 6 of asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) SBRF6: Bit 7 of ASICL6 INTSR6: Reception completion interrupt request 300 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 14.4.3 Dedicated baud rate generator The dedicated baud rate generator consists of a source clock selector and an 8-bit programmable counter, and generates a serial clock for transmission/reception of UART6. Separate 8-bit counters are provided for transmission and reception. (1) Configuration of baud rate generator * Base clock The clock selected by bits 3 to 0 (TPS63 to TPS60) of clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) is supplied to each module when bit 7 (POWER6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) is 1. This clock is called the base clock and its frequency is called fXCLK6. The base clock is fixed to low level when POWER6 = 0. * Transmission counter This counter stops operation, cleared to 0, when bit 7 (POWER6) or bit 6 (TXE6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) is 0. It starts counting when POWER6 = 1 and TXE6 = 1. The counter is cleared to 0 when the first data transmitted is written to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6). If data are continuously transmitted, the counter is cleared to 0 again when one frame of data has been completely transmitted. If there is no data to be transmitted next, the counter is not cleared to 0 and continues counting until POWER6 or TXE6 is cleared to 0. * Reception counter This counter stops operation, cleared to 0, when bit 7 (POWER6) or bit 5 (RXE6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) is 0. It starts counting when the start bit has been detected. The counter stops operation after one frame has been received, until the next start bit is detected. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 301 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Figure 14-25. Configuration of Baud Rate Generator POWER6 fX fX/2 fX/22 fX/23 fX/24 fX/25 fX/26 fX/27 fX/28 fX/29 fX/210 8-bit timer/ event counter 50 output Baud rate generator POWER6, TXE6 (or RXE6) Selector fXCLK6 8-bit counter Match detector 1/2 Baud rate CKSR6: TPS63 to TPS60 BRGC6: MDL67 to MDL60 Remark POWER6: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) TXE6: RXE6: CKSR6: BRGC6: Bit 6 of ASIM6 Bit 5 of ASIM6 Clock selection register 6 Baud rate generator control register 6 302 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (2) Generation of serial clock A serial clock can be generated by using clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) and baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6). Select the clock to be input to the 8-bit counter by using bits 3 to 0 (TPS63 to TPS60) of CKSR6. Bits 7 to 0 (MDL67 to MDL60) of BRGC6 can be used to select the division value of the 8-bit counter. (a) Baud rate The baud rate can be calculated by the following expression. * Baud rate = fXCLK6 2xk [bps] fXCLK6: Frequency of base clock selected by TPS63 to TPS60 bits of CKSR6 register k: Value set by MDL67 to MDL60 bits of BRGC6 register (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 255) (b) Error of baud rate The baud rate error can be calculated by the following expression. * Error (%) = Actual baud rate (baud rate with error) Desired baud rate (correct baud rate) - 1 x 100 [%] Cautions 1. Keep the baud rate error during transmission to within the permissible error range at the reception destination. 2. Make sure that the baud rate error during reception satisfies the range shown in (4) Permissible baud rate range during reception. Example: Frequency of base clock = 10 MHz = 10,000,000 Hz Set value of MDL67 to MDL60 bits of BRGC6 register = 00100001B (k = 33) Target baud rate = 153600 bps Baud rate = 10 M/(2 x 33) = 10000000/(2 x 33) = 151,515 [bps] Error = (151515/153600 - 1) x 100 = -1.357 [%] User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 303 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (3) Example of setting baud rate Table 14-4. Set Data of Baud Rate Generator Baud Rate [bps] TPS63 to TPS60 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 10400 19200 31250 38400 76800 115200 153600 230400 6H 5H 4H 3H 2H 2H 1H 1H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 130 130 130 130 130 120 130 80 130 65 43 33 22 fX = 10.0 MHz k Calculated ERR[%] TPS63 to Value TPS60 601 1202 2404 4808 9615 10417 19231 31250 38462 76923 116279 151515 227272 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 0.16 0.94 -1.36 -1.36 6H 5H 4H 3H 2H 2H 1H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H fX = 8.38 MHz k Calculated ERR[%] TPS63 to Value TPS60 601 1201 2403 4805 9610 10371 19200 31268 38440 76182 116388 155185 232777 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.28 0.11 0.06 0.11 -0.80 1.03 1.03 1.03 5H 4H 3H 2H 1H 1H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H fX = 4.19 MHz k Calculated ERR[%] Value 601 1201 2403 4805 9610 10475 19220 31268 38090 77593 116389 149643 232778 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 -0.28 0.11 0.06 -0.80 1.03 1.03 -2.58 1.03 109 109 109 109 109 101 109 134 109 55 36 27 18 109 109 109 109 109 101 109 67 55 27 18 14 9 Remark TPS63 to TPS60: Bits 3 to 0 of clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) (setting of base clock (fXCLK6)) k: fX: ERR: Value set by MDL67 to MDL60 bits of baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 255) X1 input clock oscillation frequency Baud rate error 304 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (4) Permissible baud rate range during reception The permissible error from the baud rate at the transmission destination during reception is shown below. Caution Make sure that the baud rate error during reception is within the permissible error range, by using the calculation expression shown below. Figure 14-26. Permissible Baud Rate Range During Reception Latch timing Data frame length of UART6 Start bit Bit 0 FL Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit 1 data frame (11 x FL) Minimum permissible data frame length Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit FLmin Maximum permissible data frame length Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit FLmax As shown in Figure 14-26, the latch timing of the receive data is determined by the counter set by baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) after the start bit has been detected. If the last data (stop bit) meets this latch timing, the data can be correctly received. Assuming that 11-bit data is received, the theoretical values can be calculated as follows. FL = (Brate)-1 Brate: Baud rate of UART6 k: FL: Set value of BRGC6 1-bit data length Margin of latch timing: 2 clocks User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 305 CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Minimum permissible data frame length: FLmin = 11 x FL - k-2 2k x FL = 21k + 2 2k FL Therefore, the maximum receivable baud rate at the transmission destination is as follows. 22k BRmax = (FLmin/11)-1 = Brate 21k + 2 Similarly, the maximum permissible data frame length can be calculated as follows. 10 11 k+2 2xk 21k - 2 2xk x FLmax = 11 x FL - 21k - 2 20k x FL = FL FLmax = FL x 11 Therefore, the minimum receivable baud rate at the transmission destination is as follows. BRmin = (FLmax/11)-1 = 20k 21k - 2 Brate The permissible baud rate error between UART6 and the transmission destination can be calculated from the above minimum and maximum baud rate expressions, as follows. Table 14-5. Maximum/Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error Division Ratio (k) 8 20 50 100 255 Maximum Permissible Baud Rate Error +3.53% +4.26% +4.56% +4.66% +4.72% Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error -3.61% -4.31% -4.58% -4.67% -4.73% Remarks 1. The permissible error of reception depends on the number of bits in one frame, input clock frequency, and division ratio (k). The higher the input clock frequency and the higher the division ratio (k), the higher the permissible error. 2. k: Set value of BRGC6 306 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 (5) Data frame length during continuous transmission When data is continuously transmitted, the data frame length from a stop bit to the next start bit is extended by two clocks of base clock from the normal value. However, the result of communication is not affected because the timing is initialized on the reception side when the start bit is detected. Figure 14-27. Data Frame Length During Continuous Transmission 1 data frame Start bit of second byte Bit 7 FL Parity bit FL Stop bit FLstp Start bit FL Bit 0 FL Start bit FL Bit 0 FL Bit 1 FL Where the 1-bit data length is FL, the stop bit length is FLstp, and base clock frequency is fXCLK6, the following expression is satisfied. FLstp = FL + 2/fXCLK6 Therefore, the data frame length during continuous transmission is: Data frame length = 11 x FL + 2/fXCLK6 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 307 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 15.1 Functions of Serial Interface CSI10 Serial interface CSI10 has the following two modes. * Operation stop mode * 3-wire serial I/O mode (1) Operation stop mode This mode is used when serial communication is not performed and can enable a reduction in the power consumption. For details, see 15.4.1 Operation stop mode. (2) 3-wire serial I/O mode (MSB/LSB-first selectable) This mode is used to communicate 8-bit data using three lines: a serial clock line (SCK10) and two serial data lines (SI10 and SO10). The processing time of data communication can be shortened in the 3-wire serial I/O mode because transmission and reception can be simultaneously executed. In addition, whether 8-bit data is communicated with the MSB or LSB first can be specified, so this interface can be connected to any device. The 3-wire serial I/O mode can be used connecting peripheral ICs and display controllers with a clocked serial interface. For details, see 15.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode 15.2 Configuration of Serial Interface CSI10 Serial interface CSI10 includes the following hardware. Table 15-1. Configuration of Serial Interface CSI10 Item Registers Configuration Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) Transmit controller Clock start/stop controller & clock phase controller Control registers Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10) Port mode register 0 (PM0) or port mode register 1 (PM1) Port register 0 (P0) or port register 1 (P1) 308 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 Figure 15-1. Block Diagram of Serial Interface CSI10 Internal bus 8 SI10/P11/RXD0 Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) 8 Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) Output selector SO10/P12 Transmit data controller Output latch Output latch (P12) PM12 Transmit controller fX/2 fX/22 fX/23 fX/24 fX/25 fX/26 fX/27 SCK10/P10/TxD0 Selector Clock start/stop controller & clock phase controller INTCSI10 (1) Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) This register sets the transmit data. Transmission/reception is started by writing data to SOTB10 when bit 7 (CSIE10) and bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) are 1. The data written to SOTB10 is converted from parallel data into serial data by serial I/O shift register 10, and output to the serial output pin (SO10). SOTB10 can be written or read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input makes this register undefined. Caution Do not access SOTB10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication). (2) Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) This is an 8-bit register that converts data from parallel data into serial data and vice versa. This register can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reception is started by reading data from SIO10 if bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is 0. During reception, the data is read from the serial input pin (SI10) to SIO10. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Caution Do not access SIO10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 309 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface CSI10 Serial interface CSI10 is controlled by the following four registers. * Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) * Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10) * Port mode register 1 (PM1) * Port register 1 (P1) (1) Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) CSIM10 is used to select the operation mode and enable or disable operation. CSIM10 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 15-2. Format of Serial Operation Mode Register 10 (CSIM10) Address: FF80H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol CSIM10 <7> CSIE10 6 TRMD10 Note 1 5 0 4 DIR10 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 CSOT10 CSIE10 0 1 Disables operation Enables operation Note 2 Operation control in 3-wire serial I/O mode and asynchronously resets the internal circuit Note 3 . TRMD10 0 Note 5 Note 4 Transmit/receive mode control Receive mode (transmission disabled). Transmit/receive mode 1 DIR10 0 1 Note 6 First bit specification MSB LSB CSOT10 0 1 Communication is stopped. Communication is in progress. Communication status flag Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Bit 0 is a read-only bit. When using as a general-purpose port, see Caution 3 of Figure 15-3 and Table 15-2. Bit 0 (CSOT10) of CSIM10 and serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) are reset. Do not rewrite TRMD10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication). The SO10 output is fixed to the low level when TRMD10 is 0. Reception is started when data is read from SIO10. Do not rewrite DIR10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication). Caution Be sure to clear bit 5 to 0. 310 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 (2) Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10) CSIC10 specifies the timing of the data transmission/reception and sets the serial clock. CSIC10 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 15-3. Format of Serial Clock Selection Register 10 (CSIC10) Address: FF81H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol CSIC10 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 CKP10 3 DAP10 2 CKS102 1 CKS101 0 CKS100 CKP10 0 DAP10 0 Specification of data transmission/reception timing Type 1 SCK10 SO10 SI10 input timing D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 1 SCK10 SO10 SI10 input timing D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 2 1 0 SCK10 SO10 SI10 input timing D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 3 1 1 SCK10 SO10 SI10 input timing D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 4 CKS102 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 CKS101 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 CKS100 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 fX/2 (5 MHz) CSI10 serial clock selection Mode Master mode Master mode Master mode Master mode Master mode Master mode Master mode Slave mode fX/2 (2.5 MHz) fX/2 (1.25 MHz) fX/2 (625 kHz) fX/2 (312.5 kHz) fX/2 (156.25 kHz) fX/2 (78.13 kHz) External clock input to SCK10 7 6 5 4 3 2 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 311 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock supplied to the CPU, the clock of the RingOSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the serial clock. At this time, the operation of serial interface CSI10 is not guaranteed. 2. Do not write to CSIC10 while CSIE10 = 1 (operation enabled). 3. Clear CKP10 to 0 to use P10/SCK10/TxD0, P11/SI10/RxD0, and P12/SO10 as general-purpose port pins. 4. The phase type of the data clock is type 1 after reset. Remarks 1. Figures in parentheses are for operation with fx = 10 MHz 2. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency (3) Port mode register 1 (PM1) This register sets port 1 input/output in 1-bit units. When using P10/SCK10/TxD0 as the clock output pins of the serial interface, and P12/SO10 as the data output pins, clear PM10, PM12, and the output latches of P10 and P12 to 0. When using P10/SCK10/TxD0 as the clock input pins of the serial interface, and P11/SI10/RxD0 as the data input pins, set PM10 and PM11 to 1. At this time, the output latches of P10 and P11 may be 0 or 1. PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets this register to FFH. Figure 15-4. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1) Address: FF21H Symbol 7 6 After reset: FFH 5 4 R/W 3 2 1 0 PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 PM1n 0 1 P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7) Output mode (output buffer on) Input mode (output buffer off) 312 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 15.4 Operation of Serial Interface CSI10 Serial interface CSI10 can be used in the following two modes. * Operation stop mode * 3-wire serial I/O mode 15.4.1 Operation stop mode Serial communication is not executed in this mode. Therefore, the power consumption can be reduced. In addition, the P10/SCK10/TXD0, P11/SI10/RXD0, and P12/SO10 pins can be used as ordinary I/O port pins in this mode. (1) Register used The operation stop mode is set by serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10). To set the operation stop mode, clear bit 7 (CSIE10) of CSIM10 to 0. (a) Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) CSIM10 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears CSIM10 to 00H. Address: FF80H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol CSIM10 <7> CSIE10 6 TRMD10 5 0 4 DIR10 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 CSOT10 CSIE10 0 Disables operation Note 1 Operation control in 3-wire serial I/O mode and asynchronously resets the internal circuit Note 2 . Notes 1. 2. To use the SI10/RxD0/P11, SO10/P12, and SCK10/TxD0/P10 pins as general-purpose port pins, see CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS. Bit 0 (CSOT10) of CSIM10 and serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) are reset. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 313 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 15.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode The 3-wire serial I/O mode can be used for connecting peripheral ICs and display controllers that have a clocked serial interface. In this mode, communication is executed by using three lines: the serial clock (SCK10), serial output (SO10), and serial input (SI10) lines. (1) Registers used * Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) * Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10) * Port mode register 1 (PM1) * Port register 1 (P1) The basic procedure of setting an operation in the 3-wire serial I/O mode is as follows. <1> Set the CSIC10 register (see Figure 15-3). <2> Set bits 0, 4, and 6 (CSOT10, DIR10, and TRMD10) of the CSIM10 register (see Figure 15-2). <3> Set bit 7 (CSIE10) of the CSIM10 register to 1. Transmission/reception is enabled. <4> Write data to transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10). Data transmission/reception is started. Read data from serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10). Data reception is started. Caution Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port mode register and port register. 314 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 The relationship between the register settings and pins is shown below. Table 15-2. Relationship Between Register Settings and Pins CSIE10 TRMD10 PM11 P11 PM12 P12 PM10 P10 CSI10 Operation Pin Function SI10/RxD0/ SO10/P12 P11 0 x x Note 1 SCK10/ TxD0/P10 x Note 1 x Note 1 x Note 1 x Note 1 x Note 1 Stop RxD0/P11 P12 TxD0/ P10 Note 2 1 0 1 Note 1 x Note 1 x Note 1 x Note 1 1 x Slave reception Note 3 SI10 P12 SCK10 (input) Note 3 1 1 x x 0 0 1 x Slave transmission Note 3 RxD0/P11 SO10 SCK10 (input) Note 3 1 1 1 x 0 0 1 x Slave transmission/ reception Note 3 SI10 SO10 SCK10 (input) Note 3 1 0 1 Note 1 x Note 1 x Note 1 x Note 1 0 1 Master reception SI10 P12 SCK10 (output) 1 1 x x 0 0 0 1 Master transmission RxD0/P11 SO10 SCK10 (output) 1 1 1 x 0 0 0 1 Master transmission/ reception SI10 SO10 SCK10 (output) Notes 1. Can be set as port function. 2. To use P10/SCK10/TxD0 as port pins, clear CKP10 to 0. 3. To use the slave mode, set CKS102, CKS101, and CKS100 to 1, 1, 1. Remark x: CSIE10: TRMD10: CKP10: PM1x: P1x: don't care Bit 7 of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) Bit 6 of CSIM10 Bit 4 of serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10) Port mode register Port output latch CKS102, CKS101, CKS100: Bits 2 to 0 of CSIC10 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 315 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 (2) Communication operation In the 3-wire serial I/O mode, data is transmitted or received in 8-bit units. Each bit of the data is transmitted or received in synchronization with the serial clock. Data can be transmitted or received if bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is 1. Transmission/reception is started when a value is written to transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10). In addition, data can be received when bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is 0. Reception is started when data is read from serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10). After communication has been started, bit 0 (CSOT10) of CSIM10 is set to 1. When communication of 8-bit data has been completed, a communication completion interrupt request flag (CSIIF10) is set, and CSOT10 is cleared to 0. Then the next communication is enabled. Caution Do not access the control register and data register when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication). Figure 15-5. Timing in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (1/2) (1) Transmission/reception timing (Type 1; TRMD10 = 1, DIR10 = 0, CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 0) SCK10 Read/write trigger SOTB10 55H (communication data) SIO10 ABH 56H ADH 5AH B5H 6AH D5H AAH CSOT10 INTCSI10 CSIIF10 SI10 (receive AAH) SO10 55H is written to SOTB10. 316 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 Figure 15-5. Timing in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (2/2) (2) Transmission/reception timing (Type 2; TRMD10 = 1, DIR10 = 0, CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 1) SCK10 Read/write trigger SOTB10 55H (communication data) SIO10 ABH 56H ADH 5AH B5H 6AH D5H AAH CSOT10 INTCSI10 CSIIF10 SI10 (input AAH) SO10 55H is written to SOTB10. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 317 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 Figure 15-6. Timing of Clock/Data Phase (a) Type 1; CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 0 SCK10 SI10 capture SO10 Writing to SOTB10 or reading from SIO10 CSIIF10 CSOT10 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 (b) Type 2; CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 1 SCK10 SI10 capture SO10 Writing to SOTB10 or reading from SIO10 CSIIF10 CSOT10 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 (c) Type 3; CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 0 SCK10 SI10 capture SO10 Writing to SOTB10 or reading from SIO10 CSIIF10 CSOT10 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 (d) Type 4; CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 1 SCK10 SI10 capture SO10 Writing to SOTB10 or reading from SIO10 CSIIF10 CSOT10 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 318 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 (3) Timing of output to SO10 pin (first bit) When communication is started, the value of transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) is output from the SO10 pin. The output operation of the first bit at this time is described below. Figure 15-7. Output Operation of First Bit (1) When CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 0 (or CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 0) SCK10 Writing to SOTB10 or reading from SIO10 SOTB10 SIO10 Output latch SO10 First bit 2nd bit The first bit is directly latched by the SOTB10 register to the output latch at the falling (or rising) edge of SCK10, and output from the SO10 pin via an output selector. Then, the value of the SOTB10 register is transferred to the SIO10 register at the next rising (or falling) edge of SCK10, and shifted one bit. At the same time, the first bit of the receive data is stored in the SIO10 register via the SI10 pin. The second and subsequent bits are latched by the SIO10 register to the output latch at the next falling (or rising) edge of SCK10, and the data is output from the SO10 pin. (2) When CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 1 (or CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 1) SCK10 Writing to SOTB10 or reading from SIO10 SOTB10 SIO10 Output latch SO10 First bit 2nd bit 3rd bit The first bit is directly latched by the SOTB10 register at the falling edge of the write signal of the SOTB10 register or the read signal of the SIO10 register, and output from the SO10 pin via an output selector. Then, the value of the SOTB10 register is transferred to the SIO10 register at the next falling (or rising) edge of SCK10, and shifted one bit. At the same time, the first bit of the receive data is stored in the SIO10 register via the SI10 pin. The second and subsequent bits are latched by the SIO10 register to the output latch at the next rising (or falling) edge of SCK10, and the data is output from the SO10 pin. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 319 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 (4) Output value of SO10 pin (last bit) After communication has been completed, the SO10 pin holds the output value of the last bit. Figure 15-8. Output Value of SO10 Pin (Last Bit) (1) Type 1; when CKP10 = 0 and DAP10 = 0 (or CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 0) SCK10 Writing to SOTB10 or reading from SIO10 SOTB10 SIO10 Output latch ( Next request is issued.) SO10 Last bit (2) Type 2; when CKP10 = 0 and DAP10 = 1 (or CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 1) SCK10 Writing to SOTB10 or reading from SIO10 SOTB10 SIO10 Output latch ( Next request is issued.) SO10 Last bit 320 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 (5) SO10 output The status of the SO10 output is as follows if bit 7 (CSIE10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is cleared to 0. Table 15-3. SO10 Output Status TRMD10 TRMD10 = 0 TRMD10 = 1 Note DAP10 - DAP10 = 0 DIR10 - - DIR10 = 0 DIR10 = 1 SO10 Output Outputs low level Note . Value of SO10 latch (low-level output) DAP10 = 1 Value of bit 7 of SOTB10 Value of bit 0 of SOTB10 Note Status after reset Caution If a value is written to TRMD10, DAP10, and DIR10, the output value of SO10 changes. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 321 CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 16.1 Interrupt Function Types The following two types of interrupt functions are used. (1) Maskable interrupts These interrupts undergo mask control. Maskable interrupts can be divided into a high interrupt priority group and a low interrupt priority group by setting the priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L). Multiple interrupt servicing can be applied to low-priority interrupts when high-priority interrupts are generated. If two or more interrupts with the same priority are generated simultaneously, each interrupt is serviced according to its predetermined priority (see Table 16-1). A standby release signal is generated and STOP and HALT modes are released. Eight external interrupt requests and 15 internal interrupt requests are provided as maskable interrupts. (2) Software interrupt This is a vectored interrupt generated by executing the BRK instruction. It is acknowledged even when interrupts are disabled. The software interrupt does not undergo interrupt priority control. 16.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration A total of 24 interrupt sources exist for maskable and software interrupts (see Table 16-1). 322 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Table 16-1. Interrupt Source List (1/2) Interrupt Type Maskable Default Note 1 Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Interrupt Source Name INTLVI INTP0 INTP1 INTP2 INTP3 INTP4 INTP5 INTSRE6 INTSR6 INTST6 INTCSI10/ INTST0 INTTMH1 INTTMH0 INTTM50 INTTM000 UART6 reception error generation End of UART6 reception End of UART6 transmission End of CSI10 communication/end of UART0 transmission Match between TMH1 and CRH1 (when compare register is specified) Match between TMH0 and CRH0 (when compare register is specified) Match between TM50 and CR50 (when compare register is specified) Match between TM00 and CR000 (when compare register is specified), TI010 pin valid edge detection (when capture register is specified) Match between TM00 and CR010 (when compare register is specified), TI000 pin valid edge detection (when capture register is specified) End of A/D conversion End of UART0 reception or reception error generation Watch timer reference time interval signal Match between TM51 and CR51 (when compare register is specified) Key interrupt detection Watch timer overflow Pin input edge detection External Internal External Internal Trigger Low-voltage detection Note 3 Internal/ External Internal External Vector Table Address 0004H 0006H 0008H 000AH 000CH 000EH 0010H 0012H 0014H 0016H 0018H 001AH 001CH 001EH 0020H Basic Configuration Note 2 Type (A) (B) Pin input edge detection (A) 15 INTTM010 0022H 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 INTAD INTSR0 INTWTI INTTM51 INTKR INTWT INTP6 0024H 0026H 0028H 002AH 002CH 002EH 0030H (C) (A) (B) Notes 1. 2. 3. The default priority is the priority applicable when two or more maskable interrupts are generated simultaneously. 0 is the highest priority, and 28 is the lowest. Basic configuration types (A) to (D) correspond to (A) to (D) in Figure 16-1. When bit 1 (LVIMD) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) is set to 0. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 323 CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Table 16-1. Interrupt Source List (2/2) Interrupt Type Software Reset Default Note 1 Priority - - Interrupt Source Name BRK RESET POC LVI Trigger BRK instruction execution Reset input Power-on clear Note 3 Internal/ External - - Vector Table Address 003EH 0000H Basic Configuration Note 2 Type (D) - Low-voltage detection Note 4 Clock monitor X1 oscillation stop detection WDT WDT overflow Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. The default priority is the priority applicable when two or more maskable interrupts are generated simultaneously. 0 is the highest priority, and 28 is the lowest. Basic configuration types (A) to (D) correspond to (A) to (D) in Figure 16-1. When "POC used" is selected by a mask option. When bit 1 (LVIMD) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) is set to 1. 324 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 16-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (1/2) (A) Internal maskable interrupt Internal bus MK IE PR ISP Interrupt request IF Priority controller Vector table address generator Standby release signal (B) External maskable interrupt (INTP0 to INTP6) Internal bus External interrupt edge enable register (EGP, EGN) MK IE PR ISP Interrupt request Edge detector IF Priority controller Vector table address generator Standby release signal IF: IE: ISP: MK: PR: Interrupt request flag Interrupt enable flag In-service priority flag Interrupt mask flag Priority specification flag User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 325 CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 16-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (2/2) (C) External maskable interrupt (INTKR) Internal bus MK IE PR ISP Interrupt request Key interrupt detector IF Priority controller Vector table address generator 1 when KRMn = 1 (n = 0 to 7) Standby release signal (D) Software interrupt Internal bus Interrupt request Priority controller Vector table address generator IF: IE: ISP: MK: PR: Interrupt request flag Interrupt enable flag In-service priority flag Interrupt mask flag Priority specification flag KRM: Key return mode register 326 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 16.3 Registers Controlling Interrupt Functions The following 6 types of registers are used to control the interrupt functions. * Interrupt request flag register (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L) * Interrupt mask flag register (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L) * Priority specification flag register (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L) * External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP) * External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN) * Program status word (PSW) Table 16-2 shows a list of interrupt request flags, interrupt mask flags, and priority specification flags corresponding to interrupt request sources. Table 16-2. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources Interrupt Source Interrupt Request Flag Register INTLVI INTP0 INTP1 INTP2 INTP3 INTP4 INTP5 INTSRE6 INTSR6 INTST6 INTCSI10 INTST0 INTTMH1 INTTMH0 INTTM50 INTTM000 INTTM010 INTAD INTSR0 INTWTI INTTM51 INTKR INTWT INTP6 TMIFH1 TMIFH0 TMIF50 TMIF000 TMIF010 ADIF SRIF0 WTIIF TMIF51 KRIF WTIF PIF6 IF1L TMMKH1 TMMKH0 TMMK50 TMMK000 TMMK010 ADMK SRMK0 WTIMK TMMK51 KRMK WTMK PMK6 MK1L TMPRH1 TMPRH0 TMPR50 TMPR000 TMPR010 ADPR SRPR0 WTIPR TMPR51 KRPR WTPR PPR6 PR1L LVIIF PIF0 PIF1 PIF2 PIF3 PIF4 PIF5 SREIF6 SRIF6 STIF6 DUALIF0 Note 1 Interrupt Mask Flag Register LVIMK PMK0 PMK1 PMK2 PMK3 PMK4 PMK5 SREMK6 MK0L Priority Specification Flag Register LVIPR PPR0 PPR1 PPR2 PPR3 PPR4 PPR5 SREPR6 PR0L IF0L IF0H SRMK6 STMK6 DUALMK0 Note 2 MK0H SRPR6 STPR6 DUALPR0 Note 2 PR0H Notes 1. 2. If either of the two types of interrupt sources is generated, these flags are set (1). Both types of interrupt sources are supported. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 327 CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS (1) Interrupt request flag registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L) The interrupt request flags are set to 1 when the corresponding interrupt request is generated or an instruction is executed. They are cleared to 0 when an instruction is executed upon acknowledgment of an interrupt request or upon RESET input. When an interrupt is acknowledged, the interrupt request flag is automatically cleared and then the interrupt routine is entered. IF0L, IF0H, and IF1L are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When IF0L and IF0H are combined to form 16-bit register IF0, they are set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears these registers to 00H. Figure 16-2. Format of Interrupt Request Flag Registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L) Address: FFE0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol IF0L <7> SREIF6 <6> PIF5 <5> PIF4 <4> PIF3 <3> PIF2 <2> PIF1 <1> PIF0 <0> LVIIF Address: FFE1H Symbol IF0H After reset: 00H <7> <6> TMIF000 R/W <5> TMIF50 <4> TMIFH0 <3> TMIFH1 <2> DUALIF0 <1> STIF6 <0> SRIF6 TMIF010 Address: FFE2H Symbol IF1L After reset: 00H 7 0 Note R/W <5> WTIF <4> KRIF <3> TMIF51 <2> WTIIF <1> SRIF0 <0> ADIF 6 PIF6 XXIFX 0 1 Interrupt request flag No interrupt request signal is generated Interrupt request is generated, interrupt request status Note Be sure to set bit 7 of IF1L to 0. Cautions 1. When operating a timer, serial interface, or A/D converter after standby release, operate it once after clearing the interrupt request flag. An interrupt request flag may be set by noise. 2. If an interrupt request corresponding to a flag of the interrupt request flag register is generated while the interrupt request flag register is being manipulated (including by 1-bit memory manipulation), the flag corresponding to the interrupt request may not be set to 1. 328 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS (2) Interrupt mask flag registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L) The interrupt mask flags are used to enable/disable the corresponding maskable interrupt servicing. MK0L, MK0H, and MK1L are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When MK0L and MK0H are combined to form 16-bit register MK0, they are set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets these registers to FFH. Figure 16-3. Format of Interrupt Mask Flag Registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L) Address: FFE4H Symbol MK0L After reset: FFH <7> SREMK6 <6> PMK5 R/W <5> PMK4 <4> PMK3 <3> PMK2 <2> PMK1 <1> PMK0 <0> LVIMK Address: FFE5H Symbol MK0H After reset: FFH <7> <6> TMMK000 R/W <5> TMMK50 <4> TMMKH0 <3> TMMKH1 <2> DUALMK0 <1> STMK6 <0> SRMK6 TMMK010 Address: FFE6H Symbol MK1L After reset: FFH 7 1 Note R/W <5> WTMK <4> KRMK <3> TMMK51 <2> WTIMK <1> SRMK0 <0> ADMK 6 PMK6 XXMKX 0 1 Interrupt servicing enabled Interrupt servicing disabled Interrupt servicing control Note Be sure to set bit 7 of MK1L to 1. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 329 CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS (3) Priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L) The priority specification flag registers are used to set the corresponding maskable interrupt priority order. PR0L, PR0H, and PR1L are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. If PR0L and PR0H are combined to form 16-bit register PR0, they are set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets these registers to FFH. Figure 16-4. Format of Priority Specification Flag Registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L) Address: FFE8H Symbol PR0L After reset: FFH <7> SREPR6 <6> PPR5 R/W <5> PPR4 <4> PPR3 <3> PPR2 <2> PPR1 <1> PPR0 <0> LVIPR Address: FFE9H Symbol PR0H After reset: FFH <7> <6> TMPR000 R/W <5> TMPR50 <4> TMPRH0 <3> TMPRH1 <2> DUALPRO <1> STPR6 <0> SRPR6 TMPR010 Address: FFEAH Symbol PR1L After reset: FFH 7 1 Note R/W <5> WTPR <4> KRPR <3> TMPR51 <2> WTIPR <1> SRPR0 <0> ADPR 6 PPR6 XXPRX 0 1 High priority level Low priority level Priority level selection Note Be sure to set bit 7 of PR1L to 1. 330 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS (4) External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP), external interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN) These registers specify the valid edge for INTP0 to INTP6. EGP and EGN are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears these registers to 00H. Figure 16-5. Format of External Interrupt Rising Edge Enable Register (EGP) and External Interrupt Falling Edge Enable Register (EGN) Address: FF48H Symbol EGP After reset: 00H 7 0 6 EGP6 R/W 5 EGP5 4 EGP4 3 EGP3 2 EGP2 1 EGP1 0 EGP0 Address: FF49H Symbol EGN After reset: 00H 7 0 6 EGN6 R/W 5 EGN5 4 EGN4 3 EGN3 2 EGN2 1 EGN1 0 EGN0 EGPn 0 0 1 1 EGNn 0 1 0 1 INTPn pin valid edge selection (n = 0 to 6) Edge detection disabled Falling edge Rising edge Both rising and falling edges Table 16-3 shows the ports corresponding to EGPn and EGNn. Table 16-3. Ports Corresponding to EGPn and EGNn Detection Enable Register EGP0 EGP1 EGP2 EGP3 EGP4 EGP5 EGP6 EGN0 EGN1 EGN2 EGN3 EGN4 EGN5 EGN6 P120 P30 P31 P32 P33 P16 P140 Edge Detection Port Interrupt Request Signal INTP0 INTP1 INTP2 INTP3 INTP4 INTP5 INTP6 Caution Select the port mode by clearing EGPn and EGNn to 0 because an edge may be detected when the external interrupt function is switched to the port function. Remark n = 0 to 6 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 331 CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS (5) Program status word (PSW) The program status word is a register used to hold the instruction execution result and the current status for an interrupt request. The IE flag that sets maskable interrupt enable/disable and the ISP flag that controls multiple interrupt servicing are mapped to the PSW. Besides 8-bit read/write, this register can carry out operations using bit manipulation instructions and dedicated instructions (EI and DI). When a vectored interrupt request is acknowledged, if the BRK instruction is executed, the contents of the PSW are automatically saved into a stack and the IE flag is reset to 0. If a maskable interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents of the priority specification flag of the acknowledged interrupt are transferred to the ISP flag. The PSW contents are also saved into the stack with the PUSH PSW instruction. They are restored from the stack with the RETI, RETB, and POP PSW instructions. RESET input sets PSW to 02H. Figure 16-6. Format of Program Status Word <7> PSW IE <6> Z <5> RBS1 <4> AC <3> RBS0 2 0 <1> ISP 0 CY After reset 02H Used when normal instruction is executed ISP 0 Priority of interrupt currently being serviced High-priority interrupt servicing (low-priority interrupt disabled) Interrupt request not acknowledged, or lowpriority interrupt servicing (all maskable interrupts enabled) 1 IE 0 1 Interrupt request acknowledgement enable/disable Disabled Enabled 332 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 16.4 Interrupt Servicing Operations 16.4.1 Maskable interrupt request acknowledgement A maskable interrupt request becomes acknowledgeable when the interrupt request flag is set to 1 and the mask (MK) flag corresponding to that interrupt request is cleared to 0. A vectored interrupt request is acknowledged if interrupts are in the interrupt enabled state (when the IE flag is set to 1). However, a low-priority interrupt request is not acknowledged during servicing of a higher priority interrupt request (when the ISP flag is reset to 0). The times from generation of a maskable interrupt request until interrupt servicing is performed are listed in Table 16-4 below. For the interrupt request acknowledgement timing, see Figures 16-8 and 16-9. Table 16-4. Time from Generation of Maskable Interrupt Request Until Servicing Minimum Time When xxPR = 0 When xxPR = 1 7 clocks 8 clocks Maximum Time 32 clocks 33 clocks Note Note If an interrupt request is generated just before a divide instruction, the wait time becomes longer. Remark 1 clock: 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU clock) If two or more maskable interrupt requests are generated simultaneously, the request with a higher priority level specified in the priority specification flag is acknowledged first. If two or more interrupt requests have the same priority level, the request with the highest default priority is acknowledged first. An interrupt request that is held pending is acknowledged when it becomes acknowledgeable. Figure 16-7 shows the interrupt request acknowledgement algorithm. If a maskable interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents are saved into the stacks in the order of PSW, then PC, the IE flag is reset (0), and the contents of the priority specification flag corresponding to the acknowledged interrupt are transferred to the ISP flag. The vector table data determined for each interrupt request is loaded into the PC and branched. Restoring from an interrupt is possible by using the RETI instruction. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 333 CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 16-7. Interrupt Request Acknowledgement Processing Algorithm Start No xxIF = 1? Yes (interrupt request generation) No xxMK = 0? Yes Interrupt request held pending Yes (High priority) xxPR = 0? No (Low priority) Yes Any high-priority interrupt request among those simultaneously generated with xxPR = 0? Interrupt request held pending No No IE = 1? Yes Any high-priority interrupt request among those simultaneously generated with xxPR = 0? Yes No Any high-priority interrupt request among those simultaneously generated? Interrupt request held pending Yes Interrupt request held pending No Vectored interrupt servicing IE = 1? Yes ISP = 1? Yes Interrupt request held pending No Interrupt request held pending No Interrupt request held pending Vectored interrupt servicing xxIF: Interrupt request flag xxMK: Interrupt mask flag xxPR: Priority specification flag IE: ISP: Flag that controls acknowledgement of maskable interrupt request (1 = Enable, 0 = Disable) Flag that indicates the priority level of the interrupt currently being serviced (0 = High-priority interrupt servicing, 1 = No interrupt request acknowledged, or low-priority interrupt servicing) 334 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 16-8. Interrupt Request Acknowledgement Timing (Minimum Time) 6 clocks CPU processing xxIF (xxPR = 1) 8 clocks xxIF (xxPR = 0) 7 clocks Instruction Instruction PSW and PC saved, jump to interrupt servicing Interrupt servicing program Remark 1 clock: 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU clock) Figure 16-9. Interrupt Request Acknowledgement Timing (Maximum Time) 25 clocks 6 clocks PSW and PC saved, jump to interrupt servicing CPU processing xxIF (xxPR = 1) Instruction Divide instruction Interrupt servicing program 33 clocks xxIF (xxPR = 0) 32 clocks Remark 1 clock: 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU clock) 16.4.2 Software interrupt request acknowledgement A software interrupt request is acknowledged by BRK instruction execution. disabled. If a software interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents are saved into the stacks in the order of the program status word (PSW), then program counter (PC), the IE flag is reset (0), and the contents of the vector table (003EH, 003FH) are loaded into the PC and branched. Restoring from a software interrupt is possible by using the RETB instruction. Caution Do not use the RETI instruction for restoring from the software interrupt. Software interrupts cannot be User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 335 CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 16.4.3 Multiple interrupt servicing Multiple interrupt servicing occurs when another interrupt request is acknowledged during execution of an interrupt. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur unless the interrupt request acknowledgement enabled state is selected (IE = 1). When an interrupt request is acknowledged, interrupt request acknowledgement becomes disabled (IE = 0). Therefore, to enable multiple interrupt servicing, it is necessary to set (1) the IE flag with the EI instruction during interrupt servicing to enable interrupt acknowledgement. Moreover, even if interrupts are enabled, multiple interrupt servicing may not be enabled, this being subject to interrupt priority control. Two types of priority control are available: default priority control and programmable priority control. Programmable priority control is used for multiple interrupt servicing. In the interrupt enabled state, if an interrupt request with a priority equal to or higher than that of the interrupt currently being serviced is generated, it is acknowledged for multiple interrupt servicing. If an interrupt with a priority lower than that of the interrupt currently being serviced is generated during interrupt servicing, it is not acknowledged for multiple interrupt servicing. Interrupt requests that are not enabled because interrupts are in the interrupt disabled state or because they have a lower priority are held pending. When servicing of the current interrupt ends, the pending interrupt request is acknowledged following execution of at least one main processing instruction execution. Table 16-5 shows relationship between interrupt requests enabled for multiple interrupt servicing and Figure 16-10 shows multiple interrupt servicing examples. Table 16-5. Relationship Between Interrupt Request Enabled for Multiple Interrupt Servicing During Interrupt Servicing Multiple Interrupt Request Maskable Interrupt Request PR = 0 Interrupt Being Serviced Maskable interrupt ISP = 0 ISP = 1 Software interrupt IE = 1 IE = 0 x x x IE = 1 x PR = 1 IE = 0 x x x Software Interrupt Request Remarks 1. : Multiple interrupt servicing enabled 2. x: Multiple interrupt servicing disabled 3. ISP and IE are flags contained in the PSW. ISP = 0: An interrupt with higher priority is being serviced. ISP = 1: No interrupt request has been acknowledged, or an interrupt with a lower priority is being serviced. IE = 0: IE = 1: Interrupt request acknowledgement is disabled. Interrupt request acknowledgement is enabled. 4. PR is a flag contained in PR0L, PR0H, and PR1L. PR = 0: Higher priority level PR = 1: Lower priority level 336 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 16-10. Examples of Multiple Interrupt Servicing (1/2) Example 1. Multiple interrupt servicing occurs twice Main processing INTxx servicing INTyy servicing INTzz servicing EI IE = 0 EI INTyy (PR = 0) IE = 0 EI INTzz (PR = 0) IE = 0 INTxx (PR = 1) RETI IE = 1 IE = 1 RETI IE = 1 RETI During servicing of interrupt INTxx, two interrupt requests, INTyy and INTzz, are acknowledged, and multiple interrupt servicing takes place. Before each interrupt request is acknowledged, the EI instruction must always be issued to enable interrupt request acknowledgment. Example 2. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur due to priority control Main processing INTxx servicing INTyy servicing EI IE = 0 EI INTxx (PR = 0) INTyy (PR = 1) IE = 1 RETI 1 instruction execution IE = 0 RETI IE = 1 Interrupt request INTyy issued during servicing of interrupt INTxx is not acknowledged because its priority is lower than that of INTxx, and multiple interrupt servicing does not take place. The INTyy interrupt request is held pending, and is acknowledged following execution of one main processing instruction. PR = 0: Higher priority level PR = 1: Lower priority level IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgment disabled User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 337 CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 16-10. Examples of Multiple Interrupt Servicing (2/2) Example 3. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur because interrupts are not enabled Main processing IE = 0 EI INTyy (PR = 0) RETI IE = 1 INTxx servicing INTyy servicing INTxx (PR = 0) 1 instruction execution IE = 0 RETI IE = 1 Interrupts are not enabled during servicing of interrupt INTxx (EI instruction is not issued), therefore, interrupt request INTyy is not acknowledged and multiple interrupt servicing does not take place. The INTyy interrupt request is held pending, and is acknowledged following execution of one main processing instruction. PR = 0: Higher priority level IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgment disabled 338 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 16.4.4 Interrupt request hold There are instructions where, even if an interrupt request is issued for them while another instruction is being executed, request acknowledgement is held pending until the end of execution of the next instruction. instructions (interrupt request hold instructions) are listed below. * MOV PSW, #byte * MOV A, PSW * MOV PSW, A * MOV1 PSW. bit, CY * MOV1 CY, PSW. bit * AND1 CY, PSW. bit * OR1 CY, PSW. bit * XOR1 CY, PSW. bit * SET1 PSW. bit * CLR1 PSW. bit * RETB * RETI * PUSH PSW * POP PSW * BT PSW. bit, $addr16 * BF PSW. bit, $addr16 * BTCLR PSW. bit, $addr16 * EI * DI * Manipulation instructions for the IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, PR0L, PR0H, and PR1L registers Caution The BRK instruction is not one of the above-listed interrupt request hold instructions. However, the software interrupt activated by executing the BRK instruction causes the IE flag to be cleared to 0. Therefore, even if a maskable interrupt request is generated during execution of the BRK instruction, the interrupt request is not acknowledged. Figure 16-11 shows the timing at which interrupt requests are held pending. Figure 16-11. Interrupt Request Hold PSW and PC saved, jump to interrupt servicing Interrupt servicing program These CPU processing Instruction N Instruction M xxIF Remarks 1. Instruction N: Interrupt request hold instruction 2. Instruction M: Instruction other than interrupt request hold instruction 3. The xxPR (priority level) values do not affect the operation of xxIF (interrupt request). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 339 CHAPTER 17 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION 17.1 Functions of Key Interrupt A key interrupt (INTKR) can be generated by setting the key return mode register (KRM) and inputting a falling edge to the key interrupt input pins (KR0 to KR7). Table 17-1. Assignment of Key Interrupt Detection Pins Flag KRM0 KRM1 KRM2 KRM3 KRM4 KRM5 KRM6 KRM7 Description Controls KR0 signal in 1-bit units. Controls KR1 signal in 1-bit units. Controls KR2 signal in 1-bit units. Controls KR3 signal in 1-bit units. Controls KR4 signal in 1-bit units. Controls KR5 signal in 1-bit units. Controls KR6 signal in 1-bit units. Controls KR7 signal in 1-bit units. 17.2 Configuration of Key Interrupt The key interrupt includes the following hardware. Table 17-2. Configuration of Key Interrupt Item Control register Configuration Key return mode register (KRM) Figure 17-1. Block Diagram of Key Interrupt KR7 KR6 KR5 KR4 KR3 KR2 KR1 KR0 Edge detector INTKR KRM7 KRM6 KRM5 KRM4 KRM3 KRM2 KRM1 KRM0 Key return mode register (KRM) 340 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION 17.3 Register Controlling Key Interrupt (1) Key return mode register (KRM) This register controls the KRM0 to KRM7 bits using the KR0 to KR7 signals, respectively. This register is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 17-2. Format of Key Return Mode Register (KRM) Address: FF6EH Symbol KRM 7 KRM7 After reset: 00H 6 KRM6 5 KRM5 R/W 4 KRM4 3 KRM3 2 KRM2 KRM1 0 KRM0 KRMn 0 1 Key interrupt mode control Does not detect key interrupt signal Detects key interrupt signal Cautions 1. If any of the KRM0 to KRM7 bits used is set to 1, set bits 0 to 7 (PU70 to PU77) of the corresponding pull-up resistor register 7 (PU7) to 1. 2. If KRM is changed, the interrupt request flag may be set. Therefore, disable interrupts and then change the KRM register. Clear the interrupt request flag and enable interrupts. 3. The bits not used in the key interrupt mode can be used as normal ports. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 341 CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION 18.1 Standby Function and Configuration 18.1.1 Standby function Table 18-1. Relationship Between Operation Clocks in Each Operation Status Status X1 Oscillator Ring-OSC Oscillator Subsystem CPU Clock Clock Operation Mode Reset STOP HALT Oscillating Stopped MSTOP = 0 MSTOP = 1 MCC = 0 Stopped MCC = 1 Stopped Oscillating Oscillating Stopped Note 1 Note 2 RSTOP = 0 RSTOP = 1 Oscillating Ring-OSC Note 3 Note 4 Stopped Stopped Ring-OSC X1 Oscillator After Release Prescaler Clock Supplied to Peripherals MCM0 = 0 MCM0 = 1 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. When "Cannot be stopped" is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option. When "Can be stopped by software" is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option. Operates using the CPU clock at STOP instruction execution. Operates using the CPU clock at HALT instruction execution. Caution The RSTOP setting is valid only when "Can be stopped by software" is set for Ring-OSC by a mask option. Remark MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC) MCC: MCM0: Bit 7 of the processor clock control register (PCC) Bit 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM) RSTOP: Bit 0 of the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) The standby function is designed to reduce the operating current of the system. The following two modes are available. (1) HALT mode HALT instruction execution sets the HALT mode. In the HALT mode, the CPU operation clock is stopped. If the X1 oscillator, Ring-OSC oscillator, or subsystem clock oscillator is operating before the HALT mode is set, oscillation of each clock continues. In this mode, the operating current is not decreased as much as in the STOP mode, but the HALT mode is effective for restarting operation immediately upon interrupt request generation and carrying out intermittent operations. 342 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION (2) STOP mode STOP instruction execution sets the STOP mode. In the STOP mode, the X1 oscillator stops, stopping the whole system, thereby considerably reducing the CPU operating current. Because this mode can be cleared by an interrupt request, it enables intermittent operations to be carried out. However, because a wait time is required to secure the oscillation stabilization time after the STOP mode is released, select the HALT mode if it is necessary to start processing immediately upon interrupt request generation. In either of these two modes, all the contents of registers, flags and data memory just before the standby mode is set are held. The I/O port output latches and output buffer statuses are also held. Cautions 1. STOP mode can be used only when CPU is operating on the X1 input clock or Ring-OSC clock. HALT mode can be used when CPU is operating on the X1 input clock, Ring-OSC clock, or subsystem clock. However, when the STOP instruction is executed during RingOSC clock operation, the X1 oscillator stops, but Ring-OSC oscillator does not stop. 2. When shifting to the STOP mode, be sure to stop the peripheral hardware operation before executing STOP instruction. 3. The following sequence is recommended for operating current reduction of the A/D converter when the standby function is used: First clear bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 0 to stop the A/D conversion operation, and then execute the HALT or STOP instruction. 4. If the Ring-OSC oscillator is operating before the STOP mode is set, oscillation of the RingOSC clock cannot be stopped in the STOP mode. However, when the Ring-OSC clock is used as the CPU clock, the CPU operation is stopped for 17/fR (s) after STOP mode is released. 18.1.2 Registers controlling standby function The standby function is controlled by the following two registers. * Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) * Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) Remark For the registers that start, stop, or select the clock, see CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 343 CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION (1) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) This is the status register of the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time counter. If the Ring-OSC clock is used as the CPU clock, the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time can be checked. OSTC can be read by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When reset is released (reset by RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT), STOP instruction, MSTOP (bit 7 of MOC register) = 1, and MCC (bit 7 of PCC register) = 1 clear OSTC to 00H. Figure 18-1. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC) Address: FFA3H Symbol OSTC After reset: 00H 7 0 6 0 R 5 0 4 MOST11 3 MOST13 2 MOST14 1 MOST15 0 MOST16 MOST11 1 1 1 1 1 MOST13 0 1 1 1 1 MOST14 0 0 1 1 1 MOST15 0 0 0 1 1 MOST16 0 0 0 0 1 Oscillation stabilization time status 2 /fX min. (204.8 s min.) 11 2 /fX min. (819.2 s min.) 13 2 /fX min. (1.64 ms min.) 2 /fX min. (3.27 ms min.) 2 /fX min. (6.55 ms min.) 16 15 14 Cautions 1. After the above time has elapsed, the bits are set to 1 in order from MOST11 and remain 1. 2. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is being used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows. * Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time Oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts only during the oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS. Therefore, note that only the statuses during the oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS are set to OSTC after STOP mode has been released. 3. The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after STOP mode release until clock oscillation starts ("a" below) regardless of whether STOP mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation. STOP mode release X1 pin voltage waveform a Remarks 1. Values in parentheses are reference value for operation with fX = 10 MHz. 2. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 344 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION (2) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) This register is used to select the X1 oscillation stabilization wait time when STOP mode is released. The wait time set by OSTS is valid only after STOP mode is released when the X1 input clock is selected as the CPU clock. After STOP mode is released when the Ring-OSC clock is selected, check the oscillation stabilization time using OSTC. OSTS can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets OSTS to 05H. Figure 18-2. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS) Address: FFA4H Symbol OSTS After reset: 05H 7 0 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 OSTS2 1 OSTS1 0 OSTS0 OSTS2 0 0 0 1 1 OSTS1 0 1 1 0 0 Other than above OSTS0 1 0 1 0 1 11 Oscillation stabilization time selection 2 /fX (204.8 s) 2 /fX (819.2 s) 13 2 /fX (1.64 ms) 2 /fX (3.27 ms) 2 /fX (6.55 ms) Setting prohibited 16 15 14 Cautions 1. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is being used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows. * Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time Oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts only during the oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS. Therefore, note that only the statuses during the oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS are set to OSTC after STOP mode has been released. 2. The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after STOP mode release until clock oscillation starts ("a" below) regardless of whether STOP mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation. STOP mode release X1 pin voltage waveform a Remarks 1. Values in parentheses are for operation with fX = 10 MHz. 2. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 345 CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION 18.2 Standby Function Operation 18.2.1 HALT mode (1) HALT mode The HALT mode is set by executing the HALT instruction. HALT mode can be set regardless of whether the CPU clock before the setting was the X1 input clock, Ring-OSC clock, or subsystem clock. The operating statuses in the HALT mode are shown below. Table 18-2. Operating Statuses in HALT Mode (1/2) HALT Mode Setting When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on X1 Input Clock When Ring-OSC Oscillation Continues When Subsystem Clock Used Item System clock CPU Port (latch) 16-bit timer/event counter 00 8-bit timer/event counter 50 8-bit timer/event counter 51 8-bit timer H0 When Subsystem Clock Not Used When Ring-OSC Oscillation StoppedNote 1 When Subsystem Clock Used When Subsystem Clock Not Used When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Ring-OSC Clock When X1 Input Clock Oscillation Continues When Subsystem Clock Used When Subsystem Clock Not Used When X1 Input Clock Oscillation Stopped When Subsystem Clock Used When Subsystem Clock Not Used Clock supply to the CPU is stopped. Operation stopped Status before HALT mode was set is retained Operable Operable Operable Operable Operation not guaranteed Operation not guaranteed when count clock other than TI50 is selected Operation not guaranteed when count clock other than TI51 is selected Operation not guaranteed when count clock other than TM50 output is selected during 8-bit timer/event counter 50 operation Operation not guaranteed when count clock other than fR/27 is selected OperableNote 2 Operable - OperableNote 2 OperableNote 3 Operation not OperableNote 3 Operation not guaranteed guaranteed Operable 8-bit timer H1 Watch timer Watchdog timer Ring-OSC cannot be stoppedNote 4 Ring-OSC can be stoppedNote 4 A/D converter Serial interface UART0 UART6 CSI10 Clock monitor Power-on-clear functionNote 5 Low-voltage detection function External interrupt Operable Operable Operable Operation stopped Operable Operable Operable Operable Operable Operable Operable Operable Operation stopped Operation not guaranteed Operation not guaranteed when serial clock other than TM50 output is selected during TM50 operation Operation not guaranteed when serial clock other than external SCK10 is selected Operable Operation stopped Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. When "Stopped by software" is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option and Ring-OSC is stopped by software (for mask options, see CHAPTER 24 MASK OPTIONS). Operable when the X1 input clock is selected. Operation not guaranteed when other than subsystem clock is selected. "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" or "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" can be selected by a mask option. When "POC used" is selected by a mask option. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 346 CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION Table 18-2. Operating Statuses in HALT Mode (2/2) HALT Mode Setting When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Subsystem Clock When X1 Input Clock Oscillation Continues Item System clock CPU Port (latch) 16-bit timer/event counter 00 8-bit timer/event counter 50 8-bit timer/event counter 51 8-bit timer H0 When Ring-OSC Oscillation Continues When Ring-OSC Oscillation StoppedNote 1 When X1 Input Clock Oscillation Stopped When Ring-OSC Oscillation Continues When Ring-OSC Oscillation StoppedNote 1 Clock supply to the CPU is stopped. Operation stopped Status before HALT mode was set is retained Operable Operable Operable Operable Operation stopped Operable only when TI50 is selected as the count clock Operable only when TI51 is selected as the count clock Operable only when TM50 output is selected as the count clock during 8-bit timer/event counter 50 operation Operable only when the X1 input clock is selected as the count clock Operable only when fR/27 is selected as the count clock Operation stopped 8-bit timer H1 Operable Watch timer Watchdog timer Ring-OSC cannot be stoppedNote 2 Ring-OSC can be stoppedNote 2 A/D converter Serial interface UART0 UART6 CSI10 Clock monitor Power-on-clear function Note 3 Operable Operable Operation stopped Operable Operable Operable Operable Operable Operable Operable Operable Operation stopped - Operation guaranteed only when subsystem clock is selected Operable - Not operable Operable only when TM50 output s selected as the serial clock during TM50 operation Operable only when external clock is selected as the serial clock Low-voltage detection function External interrupt Notes 1. 2. 3. When "Stopped by software" is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option and Ring-OSC is stopped by software (for mask options, see CHAPTER 24 MASK OPTIONS). "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" or "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" can be selected by a mask option. When "POC used" is selected by a mask option. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 347 CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION (2) HALT mode release The HALT mode can be released by the following two sources. (a) Release by unmasked interrupt request When an unmasked interrupt request is generated, the HALT mode is released. If interrupt acknowledgement is enabled, vectored interrupt servicing is carried out. If interrupt acknowledgement is disabled, the next address instruction is executed. Figure 18-3. HALT Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation Interrupt request Wait HALT instruction Standby release signal Operating mode Status of CPU X1 input clock, Ring-OSC clock, or subsystem clock HALT mode Oscillation Wait Operating mode Remarks 1. The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request which has released the standby mode is acknowledged. 2. The wait time is as follows: * When vectored interrupt servicing is carried out: 8 or 9 clocks * When vectored interrupt servicing is not carried out: 2 or 3 clocks 348 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION (b) Release by RESET input When the RESET signal is input, HALT mode is released, and then, as in the case with a normal reset operation, the program is executed after branching to the reset vector address. Figure 18-4. HALT Mode Release by RESET Input (1) When X1 input clock is used as CPU clock HALT instruction RESET signal Operation Operating mode stopped (17/fR) (Ring-OSC clock) Oscillation Oscillates stopped Reset period Oscillation stabilization time (211/fXP to 216/fXP) Status of CPU Operating mode (X1 input clock) HALT mode Oscillates X1 input clock (2) When Ring-OSC clock is used as CPU clock HALT instruction RESET signal Operation Operating mode stopped (Ring-OSC clock) Oscillation (17/fR) Oscillates stopped Reset period Status of CPU Operating mode (Ring-OSC clock) HALT mode Oscillates Ring-OSC clock Remarks 1. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 2. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 349 CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION Figure 18-4. HALT Mode Release by RESET Input (2/2) (3) When subsystem clock is used as CPU clock HALT instruction RESET signal Operating mode Subsystem clock Subsystem clock Oscillates Reset period Operation stopped (17/fR) Status of CPU HALT mode Operating mode (Ring-OSC clock) Remark fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency Table 18-3. Operation in Response to Interrupt Request in HALT Mode Release Source Maskable interrupt request 0 0 1 x 1 0 1 x x MKxx 0 PRxx 0 IE 0 ISP x Operation Next address instruction execution Interrupt servicing execution 0 0 0 1 1 1 x - 0 x 1 x x Next address instruction execution Interrupt servicing execution 1 RESET input - HALT mode held Reset processing x: don't care 350 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION 18.2.2 STOP mode (1) STOP mode setting and operating statuses The STOP mode is set by executing the STOP instruction, and it can be set only when the CPU clock before the setting was the X1 input clock or Ring-OSC clock. Caution Because the interrupt request signal is used to clear the standby mode, if there is an interrupt source with the interrupt request flag set and the interrupt mask flag reset, the standby mode is immediately cleared if set. Thus, the STOP mode is reset to the HALT mode immediately after execution of the STOP instruction and the system returns to the operating mode as soon as the wait time set using the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) has elapsed. The operating statuses in the STOP mode are shown below. Table 18-4. Operating Statuses in STOP Mode STOP Mode Setting When STOP Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on X1 Input Clock When Ring-OSC Oscillation Continues Item System clock CPU Port (latch) 16-bit timer/event counter 00 8-bit timer/event counter 50 8-bit timer/event counter 51 8-bit timer H0 8-bit timer H1 Watch timer Watchdog timer Ring-OSC cannot be stoppedNote 4 Ring-OSC can be stoppedNote 4 A/D converter Serial interface UART0 UART6 CSI10 Clock monitor Power-on-clear functionNote 5 Low-voltage detection function External interrupt Operable only when external SCK10 is selected as the serial clock Operation stopped Operable Operable Operable When Ring-OSC Oscillation StoppedNote 1 When STOP Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on RingOSC Clock When Subsystem When Subsystem When Subsystem When Subsystem When Subsystem When Subsystem Clock Used Clock Not Used Clock Used Clock Not Used Clock Used Clock Not Used Only X1 oscillator oscillation is stopped. Clock supply to the CPU is stopped. Operation stopped Status before STOP mode was set is retained Operation stopped Operable only when TI50 is selected as the count clock Operable only when TI51 is selected as the count clock Operable only when TM50 output is selected as the count clock during 8-bit timer/event counter 50 operation OperableNote 2 Operable Note 3 Operation stopped Operation stopped Operable Note 3 OperableNote 2 Note 3 Operation stopped Operable Operation stopped Operable Operation stopped Operation stopped - Operable Operable only when TM50 output is selected as the serial clock during TM50 operation Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. When "Stopped by software" is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option and Ring-OSC is stopped by software (for mask options, see CHAPTER 24 MASK OPTIONS). Operable only when fR/27 is selected as the count clock. Operable when the subsystem clock is selected. "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" or "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" can be selected by a mask option. When "POC used" is selected by a mask option. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 351 CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION (2) STOP mode release Figure 18-5. Operation Timing When STOP Mode Is Released STOP mode release STOP mode X1 input clock Ring-OSC clock X1 input clock is selected as CPU clock when STOP instruction is executed Ring-OSC clock is selected as CPU clock when STOP instruction is executed Operation stopped (17/fR) HALT status (oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS) X1 input clock Ring-OSC clock X1 input clock Clock switched by software The STOP mode can be released by the following two sources. 352 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION (a) Release by unmasked interrupt request When an unmasked interrupt request is generated, the STOP mode is released. out. If interrupt acknowledgment is disabled, the next address instruction is executed. Figure 18-6. STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation (1) When X1 input clock is used as CPU clock STOP instruction Wait (set by OSTS) After the oscillation stabilization time has elapsed, if interrupt acknowledgment is enabled, vectored interrupt servicing is carried Standby release signal Status of CPU Operating mode (X1 input clock) Oscillates STOP mode Oscillation stopped Oscillation stabilization wait (HALT mode status) Oscillates Operating mode (X1 input clock) X1 input clock Oscillation stabilization time (set by OSTS) (2) When Ring-OSC clock is used as CPU clock STOP instruction Standby release signal Operation stopped (17/fR) Oscillates Status of CPU Ring-OSC clock Operating mode (Ring-OSC clock) STOP mode Operating mode (Ring-OSC clock) Remarks 1. The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request that has released the standby mode is acknowledged. 2. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 353 CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION (b) Release by RESET input When the RESET signal is input, STOP mode is released and a reset operation is performed after the oscillation stabilization time has elapsed. Figure 18-7. STOP Mode Release by RESET Input (1) When X1 input clock is used as CPU clock STOP instruction RESET signal Operation Operating mode stopped (17/fR) (Ring-OSC clock) Oscillation Oscillates stopped Oscillation stabilization time (211/fXP to 216/fXP) Reset period Status of CPU Operating mode (X1 input clock) Oscillates STOP mode Oscillation stopped X1 input clock (2) When Ring-OSC clock is used as CPU clock STOP instruction RESET signal Operation Operating mode stopped (17/fR) (Ring-OSC clock) Oscillation Oscillates stopped Reset period Status of CPU Operating mode (Ring-OSC clock) Ring-OSC clock STOP mode Oscillates Remarks 1. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency 2. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency Table 18-5. Operation in Response to Interrupt Request in STOP Mode Release Source Maskable interrupt request 0 0 1 x 1 0 1 x x MKxx 0 PRxx 0 IE 0 ISP x Operation Next address instruction execution Interrupt servicing execution 0 0 0 1 1 1 x - 0 x 1 x x Next address instruction execution Interrupt servicing execution 1 RESET input - STOP mode held Reset processing x: don't care 354 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION The following five operations are available to generate a reset signal. (1) External reset input via RESET pin (2) Internal reset by watchdog timer program loop detection (3) Internal reset by clock monitor X1 clock oscillation stop detection (4) Internal reset by comparison of supply voltage and detection voltage of power-on-clear (POC) circuit (5) Internal reset by comparison of supply voltage and detection voltage of low-power-supply detector (LVI) External and internal resets have no functional differences. In both cases, program execution starts at the address at 0000H and 0001H when the reset signal is input. A reset is applied when a low level is input to the RESET pin, the watchdog timer overflows, X1 clock oscillation stop is detected by the clock monitor, or by POC and LVI circuit voltage detection, and each item of hardware is set to the status shown in Table 19-1. Each pin is high impedance during reset input or during the oscillation stabilization time just after reset release, except for P130, which is low-level output. When a high level is input to the RESET pin, the reset is released and program execution starts using the RingOSC clock after the CPU clock operation has stopped for 17/fR (s). A reset generated by the watchdog timer and clock monitor sources is automatically released after the reset, and program execution starts using the Ring-OSC clock after the CPU clock operation has stopped for 17/fR (s) (see Figures 19-2 to 19-4). Reset by POC and LVI circuit power supply detection is automatically released when VDD > VPOC or VDD > VLVI after the reset, and program execution starts using the Ring-OSC clock after the CPU clock operation has stopped for 17/fR (s) (see CHAPTER 21 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT and CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR). Cautions 1. For an external reset, input a low level for 10 s or more to the RESET pin. 2. During reset input, the X1 input clock and Ring-OSC clock stop oscillating. 3. When the STOP mode is released by a reset, the STOP mode contents are held during reset input. However, the port pins become high-impedance, except for P130, which is set to lowlevel output. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 355 356 Watchdog timer reset signal Clock monitor reset signal User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD Figure 19-1. Block Diagram of Reset Function Internal bus Reset control flag register (RESF) WDTRF Set Clear CLMRF Set Clear LVIRF Set Clear CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION Reset signal RESET Power-on-clear circuit reset signal Reset signal to LVIM/LVIS register Low-voltage detector reset signal Reset signal Caution An LVI circuit internal reset does not reset the LVI circuit. Remarks 1. LVIM: Low-voltage detection register 2. LVIS: Low-voltage detection level selection register CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION Figure 19-2. Timing of Reset by RESET Input Ring-OSC clock X1 input clock Reset period (Oscillation stop) Operation stop (17/fR) Normal operation (Reset processing, Ring-OSC clock) CPU clock RESET Normal operation Internal reset signal Delay Port pin Delay Hi-ZNote Note The port pins become high impedance, except for P130, which is set to low-level output. Figure 19-3. Timing of Reset Due to Watchdog Timer Overflow Ring-OSC clock X1 input clock CPU clock Watchdog timer overflow Normal operation Reset period (Oscillation stop) Operation stop (17/fR) Normal operation (Reset processing, Ring-OSC clock) Internal reset signal Port pin Hi-ZNote Note The port pins become high impedance, except for P130, which is set to low-level output. Caution A watchdog timer internal reset resets the watchdog timer. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 357 CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION Figure 19-4. Timing of Reset in STOP Mode by RESET Input Ring-OSC clock X1 input clock STOP instruction execution Operation stop Normal Reset period Stop status operation (Oscillation stop) (Oscillation stop) (17/fR) CPU clock RESET Normal operation (Reset processing, Ring-OSC clock) Internal reset signal Delay Port pin Delay Hi-ZNote Note The port pins become high impedance, except for P130, which is set to low-level output. Remark For the reset timing of the power-on-clear circuit and low-voltage detector, see CHAPTER 21 POWERON-CLEAR CIRCUIT and CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR. 358 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION Table 19-1. Hardware Statuses After Reset Acknowledgment (1/2) Hardware Program counter (PC) Status After Reset Note 1 Acknowledgment The contents of the reset vector table (0000H, 0001H) are set. Undefined 02H Undefined Undefined Note 2 Stack pointer (SP) Program status word (PSW) RAM Data memory General-purpose registers Port registers (P0 to P3, P6, P7, P12 to P14) (output latches) Port mode registers (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM6, PM7, PM12, PM14) Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, PU12, PU14) Input switch control register (ISC) Internal memory size switching register (IMS) Processor clock control register (PCC) Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) Main clock mode register (MCM) Main OSC control register (MOC) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) 16-bit timer/event counter 00 Timer counter 00 (TM00) Capture/compare registers 000, 010 (CR000, CR010) Mode control register 00 (TMC00) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) Timer output control register 00 (TOC00) 8-bit timer/event counters 50, 51 Timer counters 50, 51 (TM50, TM51) Compare registers 50, 51 (CR50, CR51) Timer clock selection registers 50, 51 (TCL50, TCL51) Mode control registers 50, 51 (TMC50, TMC51) 8-bit timers H0, H1 Compare registers 00, 10, 01, 11 (CMP00, CMP10, CMP01, CMP11) Mode registers (TMHMD0, TMHMD1) Carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1) Watch timer Clock output controller Operation mode register (WTM) Clock output selection register (CKS) Note 3 Note 2 00H (undefined only for P2) FFH 00H 00H CFH 00H 00H 00H 00H 05H 00H 0000H 0000H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H Notes 1. 2. 3. During reset input or oscillation stabilization time wait, only the PC contents among the hardware statuses become undefined. All other hardware statuses remain unchanged after reset. When a reset is executed in the standby mode, the pre-reset status is held even after reset. 8-bit timer H1 only. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 359 CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION Table 19-1. Hardware Statuses After Reset Acknowledgment (2/2) Hardware Watchdog timer Mode register (WDTM) Enable register (WDTE) A/D converter Conversion result register (ADCR) Mode register (ADM) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) Serial interface UART0 Receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) Transmit shift register 0 (TXS0) Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) Serial interface UART6 Receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) Transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) Serial interface CSI10 Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10) Key interrupt Clock monitor Reset function Low-voltage detector Key return mode register (KRM) Mode register (CLM) Reset control flag register (RESF) Low-voltage detection register (LVIM) Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS) Interrupt Request flag registers 0L, 0H, 1L (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L) Mask flag registers 0L, 0H, 1L (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L) Priority specification flag registers 0L, 0H, 1L (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L) External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP) External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN) Status After Reset Acknowledgment 67H 9AH Undefined 00H 00H 00H 00H FFH FFH 01H 1FH FFH FFH 01H 00H 00H 00H FFH 16H Undefined 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H Note Note 00H 00H Note FFH FFH 00H 00H Note These values vary depending on the reset source. Reset Source Register RESF LVIM LVIS See Table 19-2. Cleared (00H) Cleared (00H) Cleared (00H) Cleared (00H) Held RESET Input Reset by POC Reset by WDT Reset by CLM Reset by LVI 360 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION 19.1 Register for Confirming Reset Source Many internal reset generation sources exist in the 78K0/KD1. The reset control flag register (RESF) is used to store which source has generated the reset request. RESF can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input, reset input by power-on-clear (POC) circuit, and reading RESF clear RESF to 00H. Figure 19-5. Format of Reset Control Flag Register (RESF) Address: FFACH Symbol RESF After reset: 00H 7 0 6 0 Note R 5 0 4 WDTRF 3 0 2 0 1 CLMRF 0 LVIRF WDTRF 0 1 Internal reset request by watchdog timer (WDT) Internal reset request is not generated, or RESF is cleared. Internal reset request is generated. CLMRF 0 1 Internal reset request by clock monitor (CLM) Internal reset request is not generated, or RESF is cleared. Internal reset request is generated. LVIRF 0 1 Internal reset request by low-voltage detector (LVI) Internal reset request is not generated, or RESF is cleared. Internal reset request is generated. Note The value after reset varies depending on the reset source. Caution Do not read data by a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction. The status of RESF when a reset request is generated is shown in Table 19-2. Table 19-2. RESF Status When Reset Request Is Generated Reset Source Flag WDTRF CLMRF LVIRF Cleared (0) Cleared (0) Set (1) Held Held Held Set (1) Held Held Held Set (1) RESET input Reset by POC Reset by WDT Reset by CLM Reset by LVI User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 361 CHAPTER 20 CLOCK MONITOR 20.1 Functions of Clock Monitor The clock monitor samples the X1 input clock using the on-chip Ring-OSC, and generates an internal reset signal when the X1 input clock is stopped. When a reset signal is generated by the clock monitor, bit 1 (CLMRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1. For details of RESF, refer to CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION. The clock monitor automatically stops under the following conditions. * Reset is released and during the oscillation stabilization time * In STOP mode and during the oscillation stabilization time * When the X1 input clock is stopped by software (MSTOP = 1 or MCC = 1) and during the oscillation stabilization time * When the Ring-OSC clock is stopped Remark MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC) MCC: Bit 7 of the processor clock control register (PCC) 20.2 Configuration of Clock Monitor The clock monitor includes the following hardware. Table 20-1. Configuration of Clock Monitor Item Control register Clock monitor mode register (CLM) Configuration Figure 20-1. Block Diagram of Clock Monitor Internal bus Clock monitor mode register (CLM) CLME X1 oscillation control signal (MCC, MSTOP) X1 oscillation stabilization status (OSTC overflow) Operation mode controller X1 input clock Ring-OSC clock X1 oscillation monitor circuit Internal reset signal Remark MCC: OSTC: Bit 7 of the processor clock control register (PCC) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC) 362 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 20 CLOCK MONITOR 20.3 Register Controlling Clock Monitor The clock monitor is controlled by the clock monitor mode register (CLM). (1) Clock monitor mode register (CLM) This register sets the operation mode of the clock monitor. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears this register to 00H. Figure 20-2. Format of Clock Monitor Mode Register (CLM) Address: FFA9H Symbol CLM 7 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 <0> CLME CLME 0 1 Enables/disables clock monitor operation Disables clock monitor operation Enables clock monitor operation Cautions 1. Once bit 0 (CLME) is set to 1, it cannot be cleared to 0 except by RESET input or the internal reset signal. 2. If the reset signal is generated by the clock monitor, CLME is cleared to 0 and bit 1 (CLMRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 363 CHAPTER 20 CLOCK MONITOR 20.4 Operation of Clock Monitor This section explains the functions of the clock monitor. The monitor start and stop conditions are as follows. CPU Operation Clock X1 input clock Operation Mode STOP mode X1 Input Clock Status Stopped Ring-OSC Clock Status Oscillating Stopped RESET input Note Clock Monitor Status Stopped Oscillating Stopped Note Normal operation mode HALT mode Ring-OSC clock STOP mode RESET input Normal operation mode HALT mode Oscillating Oscillating Stopped Note Operating Stopped Stopped Stopped Oscillating Oscillating Stopped Operating Stopped Note The Ring-OSC clock is stopped only when the "Ring-OSC can be stopped by software" is selected by a mask option. If "Ring-OSC cannot be stopped" is selected, the Ring-OSC clock cannot be stopped. The clock monitor timing is as shown in Figure 20-3. 364 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 20 CLOCK MONITOR Figure 20-3. Timing of Clock Monitor (1/4) (1) When internal reset is executed by oscillation stop of X1 input clock 4 clocks of Ring-OSC clock X1 input clock Ring-OSC clock Internal reset signal CLME CLMRF (2) Clock monitor status after RESET input (CLME = 1 is set after RESET input and during X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time) Normal operation Clock supply stopped CPU operation X1 input clock Reset Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock) Oscillation stopped Ring-OSC clock Oscillation stopped RESET 17 clocks Oscillation stabilization time Set to 1 by software CLME Clock monitor status Monitoring Monitoring stopped Monitoring Waiting for end of oscillation stabilization time RESET input clears bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) to 0 and stops the clock monitor operation. Even if CLME is set to 1 by software during the oscillation stabilization time (reset value of OSTS register is 05H (216/fXP)) of the X1 input clock, monitoring is not performed until the oscillation stabilization time of the X1 input clock ends. Monitoring is automatically started at the end of the oscillation stabilization time. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 365 CHAPTER 20 CLOCK MONITOR Figure 20-3. Timing of Clock Monitor (2/4) (3) Clock monitor status after RESET input (CLME = 1 is set after RESET input and at the end of X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time) Normal operation Clock supply stopped CPU operation X1 input clock Reset Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock) Oscillation stabilization time Ring-OSC clock 17 clocks RESET Set to 1 by software CLME Clock monitor status Monitoring Monitoring stopped Monitoring RESET input clears bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) to 0 and stops the clock monitor operation. When CLME is set to 1 by software at the end of the oscillation stabilization time (reset value of OSTS register is 05H (216/fXP)) of the X1 input clock, monitoring is started. (4) Clock monitor status after STOP mode is released (CLME = 1 is set when CPU clock operates on X1 input clock and before entering STOP mode) Normal operation CPU operation X1 input clock (CPU clock) STOP Oscillation stabilization time Normal operation Oscillation stopped Ring-OSC clock Oscillation stabilization time (time set by OSTS register) CLME Clock monitor status Monitoring Monitoring stopped Monitoring When bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) is set to 1 before entering STOP mode, monitoring automatically starts at the end of the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time. Monitoring is stopped in STOP mode and during the oscillation stabilization time. 366 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 20 CLOCK MONITOR Figure 20-3. Timing of Clock Monitor (3/4) (5) Clock monitor status after STOP mode is released (CLME = 1 is set when CPU clock operates on Ring-OSC clock and before entering STOP mode) Normal operation Clock supply stopped CPU operation X1 input clock STOP Normal operation Oscillation stopped Ring-OSC clock (CPU clock) Oscillation stabilization time (time set by OSTS register) 17 clocks CLME Clock monitor status Monitoring Monitoring stopped Monitoring stopped Monitoring When bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) is set to 1 before entering STOP mode, monitoring automatically starts at the end of the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time. Monitoring is stopped in STOP mode and during the oscillation stabilization time. (6) Clock monitor status after X1 input clock oscillation is stopped by software CPU operation X1 input clock Oscillation stopped Ring-OSC clock Oscillation stabilization time (time set by OSTS register) Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock or subsystem clockNote) MSTOP or MCCNote CLME Clock monitor status Monitoring Monitoring stopped Monitoring stopped Monitoring When bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) is set to 1 before or while oscillation of the X1 input clock is stopped, monitoring automatically starts at the end of the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time. Monitoring is stopped when oscillation of the X1 input clock is stopped and during the oscillation stabilization time. Note The register that controls oscillation of the X1 input clock differs depending on the type of the clock supplied to the CPU. * When CPU operates on Ring-OSC clock: Controlled by bit 7 (MSTOP) of the main OSC control register (MOC) * When CPU operates on subsystem clock: Controlled by bit 7 (MCC) of the processor clock control register (PCC) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 367 CHAPTER 20 CLOCK MONITOR Figure 20-3. Timing of Clock Monitor (4/4) (7) Clock monitor status after Ring-OSC clock oscillation is stopped by software CPU operation X1 input clock Normal operation (X1 input clock or subsystem clock) Ring-OSC clock Oscillation stopped RSTOP Note CLME Clock monitor status Monitoring Monitoring stopped Monitoring When bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) is set to 1 before or while oscillation of the Ring-OSC clock is stopped, monitoring automatically starts after the Ring-OSC clock is stopped. Monitoring is stopped when oscillation of the Ring-OSC clock is stopped. Note If it is specified by a mask option that Ring-OSC cannot be stopped, the setting of bit 0 (RSTOP) of the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) is invalid. To set RSTOP, be sure to confirm that bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register (MCM) is 1. 368 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT 21.1 Functions of Power-on-Clear Circuit The power-on-clear circuit (POC) has the following functions. * Generates internal reset signal at power on. * Compares supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VPOC), and generates internal reset signal when VDD < VPOC. * The following can be selected by a mask option. * * * POC disabled POC used (detection voltage: VPOC = 2.85 V 0.15 V)Note POC used (detection voltage: VPOC = 3.5 V 0.2 V) Note This option cannot be selected in (A1) and (A2) grade products because the supply voltage VDD is 3.3 to 5.5 V. Caution If an internal reset signal is generated in the POC circuit, the reset control flag register (RESF) is cleared to 00H. Remark This product incorporates multiple hardware functions that generate an internal reset signal. A flag that indicates the reset cause is located in the reset control flag register (RESF) for when an internal reset signal is generated by the watchdog timer (WDT), low-voltage-detection (LVI) circuit, or clock monitor. RESF is not cleared to 00H and the flag is set to 1 when an internal reset signal is generated by WDT, LVI, or the clock monitor. For details of the RESF, refer to CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 369 CHAPTER 21 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT 21.2 Configuration of Power-on-Clear Circuit The block diagram of the power-on-clear circuit is shown in Figure 21-1. Figure 21-1. Block Diagram of Power-on-Clear Circuit VDD VDD Mask option + - Internal reset signal Detection voltage source (VPOC) 21.3 Operation of Power-on-Clear Circuit In the power-on-clear circuit, the supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VPOC) are compared, and when VDD < VPOC, an internal reset signal is generated. Figure 21-2. Timing of Internal Reset Signal Generation in Power-on-Clear Circuit Supply voltage (VDD) POC detection voltage (VPOC) 2.7 V Time Internal reset signal 370 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT 21.4 Cautions for Power-on-Clear Circuit In a system where the supply voltage (VDD) fluctuates for a certain period in the vicinity of the POC detection voltage (VPOC), the system may be repeatedly reset and released from the reset status. In this case, the time from release of reset to the start of the operation of the microcontroller can be arbitrarily set by taking the following action. ; The Ring-OSC clock is set as the CPU clock when the reset signal is generated Reset Checking cause of resetNote 2 Power-on-clear ; The cause of reset (power-on-clear, WDT, LVI, or clock monitor) can be identified by the RESF register. Start timer (set to 50 ms) ; 8-bit timer H1 can operate with the Ring-OSC clock. Source: fR (480 kHz (MAX.))/27 x compare value 200 = 53 ms (fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency) Note 1 Check stabilization of oscillation ; Check the stabilization of oscillation of the X1 input clock by using the OSTC register. Change CPU clock ; Change the CPU clock from the Ring-OSC clock to the X1 input clock. No 50 ms has passed? (TMIFH1 = 1?) ; TMIFH1 = 1: Interrupt request is generated. Yes Initialization processing ; Initialization of ports Notes 1. 2. If reset is generated again during this period, initialization processing is not started. A flowchart is shown on the next page. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 371 CHAPTER 21 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT Figure 21-3. Example of Software Processing After Release of Reset (2/2) * Checking reset cause Check reset cause WDTRF of RESF register = 1? Yes No Reset processing by watchdog timer CLMRF of RESF register = 1? Yes No Reset processing by clock monitor LVIRF of RESF register = 1? Yes No Reset processing by low-voltage detector Power-on-clear/external reset generated 372 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR 22.1 Functions of Low-Voltage Detector The low-voltage detector (LVI) has following functions. * Compares supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VLVI), and generates an internal interrupt signal or internal reset signal when VDD < VLVI. * Detection levels (seven levels)Note of supply voltage can be changed by software. * Interrupt or reset function can be selected by software. * Operable in STOP mode. Note Five levels in the case of (A1) and (A2) grade products. When the low-voltage detector is used to reset, bit 0 (LVIRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1 if reset occurs. For details of RESF, refer to CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION. 22.2 Configuration of Low-Voltage Detector The block diagram of the low-voltage detector is shown below. Figure 22-1. Block Diagram of Low-Voltage Detector VDD Low-voltage detection level selector VDD N-ch Internal reset signal + - Selector INTLVI Detection voltage source (VLVI) 3 LVIS2 LVIS1 LVIS0 Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS) Internal bus LVION LVIE LVIMD LVIF Low-voltage detection register (LVIM) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 373 CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR 22.3 Registers Controlling Low-Voltage Detector The low-voltage detector is controlled by the following registers. * Low-voltage detection register (LVIM) * Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS) 374 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR (1) Low-voltage detection register (LVIM) This register sets low-voltage detection and the operation mode. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears LVIM to 00H. Figure 22-2. Format of Low-Voltage Detection Register (LVIM) Address: FFBEH Symbol LVIM <7> LVION After reset: 00H 6 0 R/WNote 1 5 0 <4> LVIE 3 0 2 0 <1> LVIMD <0> LVIF LVION 0 1 Notes 2, 3 Enables low-voltage detection operation Disables operation Enables operation LVIE Notes 2, 4, 5 Specifies reference voltage generator Disables operation Enables operation 0 1 LVIMD 0 1 Note 2 Low-voltage detection operation mode selection Generates interrupt signal when supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI) Generates internal reset signal when supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI) LVIF 0 1 Note 6 Low-voltage detection flag Supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI), or when operation is disabled Supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI) Notes 1. 2. 3. Bit 0 is read-only. LVION, LVIE, and LVIMD are cleared to 0 in the case of a reset other than an LVI reset. These are not cleared to 0 in the case of an LVI reset. When LVION is set to 1, operation of the comparator in the LVI circuit is started. confirmed at LVIF. Use software to instigate a wait of at least 0.2 ms from when LVION is set to 1 until the voltage is 4. 5. 6. If "POC cannot be used" is selected by a mask option, wait for 2 ms or more by software from when LVIE is set to 1 until LVION is set to 1. If "POC used" is selected by a mask option, setting of LVIE is invalid because the reference voltage generator in the LVI circuit always operates. The value of LVIF is output as the interrupt request signal INTLVI when LVION = 1 and LVIMD = 0. Caution To stop LVI, follow either of the procedures below. * When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction: Write 00H to LVIM. * When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction: Clear LVION to 0 first and then clear LVIE to 0. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 375 CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR (2) Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS) This register selects the low-voltage detection level. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input clears LVIS to 00H. Figure 22-3. Format of Low-Voltage Detection Level Selection Register (LVIS) Address: FFBFH Symbol LVIS 7 0 After reset: 00H 6 0 R/W 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 LVIS2 1 LVIS1 0 LVIS0 LVIS2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 LVIS1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 LVIS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 VLVI0 (4.3 V 0.2 V) VLVI1 (4.1 V 0.2 V) VLVI2 (3.9 V 0.2 V) VLVI3 (3.7 V 0.2 V) VLVI4 (3.5 V 0.2 V) Note 1 Detection level VLVI5 (3.3 V 0.15 V) VLVI6 (3.1 V 0.15 V) Setting prohibited Notes 1, 2 Notes 1, 2 Notes 1. When the detection voltage of the POC circuit is specified as VPOC = 3.5 V 0.2 V by a mask option, do not select VLVI4 to VLVI6 as the LVI detection voltage. Even if VLVI4 to VLVI6 are selected, the POC circuit has priority. 2. This setting is prohibited in (A1) grade products and (A2) grade products. Caution Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to 0. 376 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR 22.4 Operation of Low-Voltage Detector The low-voltage detector can be used in the following two modes. * Used as reset Compares the supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VLVI), and generates an internal reset signal when VDD < VLVI. * Used as interrupt Compares the supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VLVI), and generates an interrupt signal (INTLVI) when VDD < VLVI. The operation is set as follows. (1) When used as reset * When starting operation <1> Mask the LVI interrupt (LVIMK = 1). <2> Set the detection voltage using bits 2 to 0 (LVIS2 to LVIS0) of the low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS). <3> Set bit 4 (LVIE) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) to 1 (enables reference voltage generator operation). <4> Use software to instigate a wait of at least 2 ms. <5> Set bit 7 (LVION) of LVIM to 1 (enables LVI operation). <6> Use software to instigate a wait of at least 0.2 ms. <7> Wait until it is checked that (supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI)) by bit 0 (LVIF) of LVIM <8> Set bit 1 (LVIMD) of LVIM to 1 (generates internal reset signal when supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI)). Figure 22-4 shows the timing of the internal reset signal generated by the low-voltage detector. The numbers in this timing chart correspond to <1> to <8> above. Cautions 1. <1> must always be executed. When LVIMK = 0, an interrupt may occur immediately after the processing in <5>. 2. If "use POC" is selected by a mask option, procedures <3> and <4> are not required. 3. If supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI) when LVIM is set to 1, an internal reset signal is not generated. * When stopping operation Either of the following procedures must be executed. * When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction: Write 00H to LVIM. When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction: Clear LVIMD to 0, LVION to 0, and LVIE to 0 in that order. * User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 377 CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR Figure 22-4. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Internal Reset Signal Generation Supply voltage (VDD) LVI detection voltage (VLVI) POC detection voltage (VPOC) 2.7 V <2> LVIMK flag (set by software) <1>Note 1 Time LVIE flag (set by software) Not cleared <3> <4> 2 ms or longer Not cleared Clear Not cleared Clear LVION flag (set by software) <5> Not cleared <6> 0.2 ms or longer LVIF flag <7> LVIMD flag (set by software) Note 2 Clear Not cleared Not cleared Clear <8> LVIRF flagNote 3 LVI reset signal Cleared by software POC reset signal Cleared by software Internal reset signal Notes 1. 2. 3. The LVIMK flag is set to "1" by RESET input. The LVIF flag may be set (1). LVIRF is bit 0 of the reset control flag register (RESF). For details of RESF, see CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION. Remark <1> to <8> in Figure 22-4 above correspond to <1> to <8> in the description of "when starting operation" in 22.4 (1) When used as reset. 378 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR (2) When used as interrupt * When starting operation <1> Mask the LVI interrupt (LVIMK = 1). <2> Set the detection voltage using bits 2 to 0 (LVIS2 to LVIS0) of the low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS). <3> Set bit 4 (LVIE) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) to 1 (enables reference voltage generator operation). <4> Use software to instigate a wait of at least 2 ms. <5> Set bit 7 (LVION) of LVIM to 1 (enables LVI operation). <6> Use software to instigate a wait of at least 0.2 ms. <7> Wait until it is checked that (supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI)) by bit 0 (LVIF) of LVIM. <8> Clear the interrupt request flag of LVI (LVIIF) to 0. <9> Release the interrupt mask flag of LVI (LVIMK). <10> Execute the EI instruction (when vector interrupts are used). Figure 22-5 shows the timing of the interrupt signal generated by the low-voltage detector. The numbers in this timing chart correspond to <1> to <9> above. Caution If "use POC" is selected by a mask option, procedures <3> and <4> are not required. * When stopping operation Either of the following procedures must be executed. * When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction: Write 00H to LVIM. When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction: Clear LVION to 0 first, and then clear LVIE to 0. * User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 379 CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR Figure 22-5. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Interrupt Signal Generation Supply voltage (VDD) LVI detection voltage (VLVI) POC detection voltage (VPOC) 2.7 V <2> LVIMK flag (set by software) <1>Note 1 <9> Cleared by software LVIE flag (set by software) Time <3> <4> 2 ms or longer LVION flag (set by software) <5> <6> 0.2 ms or longer LVIF flag <7> Note 2 INTLVI LVIIF flag Note 2 <8> Cleared by software Internal reset signal Notes 1. 2. Remark The LVIMK flag is set to "1" by RESET input. The LVIF and LVIIF flags may be set (1). <1> to <9> in Figure 22-5 above correspond to <1> to <9> in the description of "when starting operation" in 22.4 (2) When used as interrupt. 380 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR 22.5 Cautions for Low-Voltage Detector In a system where the supply voltage (VDD) fluctuates for a certain period in the vicinity of the LVI detection voltage (VLVI), the operation is as follows depending on how the low-voltage detector is used. (1) When used as reset The system may be repeatedly reset and released from the reset status. In this case, the time from release of reset to the start of the operation of the microcontroller can be arbitrarily set by taking action (1) below. (2) When used as interrupt Interrupt requests may be frequently generated. Take action (2) below. In this system, take the following actions. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 381 CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR Figure 22-6. Example of Software Processing After Release of Reset (1/2) * If supply voltage fluctuation is 50 ms or less in vicinity of LVI detection voltage ; The Ring-OSC clock is set as the CPU clock when the reset signal is generated Reset Checking cause of resetNote 2 LVI ; The cause of reset (power-on-clear, WDT, LVI, or clock monitor) can be identified by the RESF register. Start timer (set to 50 ms) ; 8-bit timer H1 can operate with the Ring-OSC clock. Source: fR (480 kHz (MAX.))/27 x compare value 200 = 53 ms (fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency) Note 1 Check stabilization of oscillation ; Check the stabilization of oscillation of the X1 input clock by using the OSTC register. Change CPU clock ; Change the CPU clock from the Ring-OSC clock to the X1 input clock. No 50 ms has passed? (TMIFH1 = 1?) ; TMIFH1 = 1: Interrupt request is generated. Yes Initialization processing ; Initialization of ports Notes 1. 2. If reset is generated again during this period, initialization processing is not started. A flowchart is shown on the next page. 382 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR Figure 22-6. Example of Software Processing After Release of Reset (2/2) * Checking reset cause Check reset cause WDTRF of RESF register = 1? Yes No Reset processing by watchdog timer CLMRF of RESF register = 1? Yes No Reset processing by clock monitor LVIRF of RESF register = 1? No Yes Power-on-clear/external reset generated Reset processing by low-voltage detector User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 383 CHAPTER 22 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR (2) When used as interrupt Check that "supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI)" in the servicing routine of the LVI interrupt by using bit 0 (LVIF) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM). Clear bit 0 (LVIIF) of interrupt request flag register 0L (IF0L) to 0 and enable interrupts (EI). In a system where the supply voltage fluctuation period is long in the vicinity of the LVI detection voltage, wait for the supply voltage fluctuation period, check that "supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI)" using the LVIF flag, and then enable interrupts (EI). 384 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 23 REGULATOR 23.1 Outline The 78K0/KD1 includes a circuit to realize constant-voltage operation inside the device. To stabilize the regulator output voltage, connect the REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor (1 F: recommended). The output voltage of the regulator is 3.5 V (TYP.). The supply voltage and oscillation frequency at which the regulator can be used are as follows. * Power supply voltage: VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V * Oscillation frequency: fX = 2.0 to 8.38 MHz The regulator of the 78K0/KD1 stops operating in the following cases. * During the reset period * In STOP mode * In HALT mode when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and when X1 oscillation is stopped Figure 23-1 shows the block diagram of the periphery of the regulator. Figure 23-1. Block Diagram of Regulator Periphery EVDD system I/O buffer Internal digital circuits EVDD A/D converter X1, Ring, sub oscillator AVREF Bidirectional level shifter REGC Flash memory ( PD78F0124 only) Regulator VDD VPP 1 F Cautions 1. Directly connect the REGC pin of standard products and (A) grade products to VDD when the regulator is not used. 2. The regulator cannot be used with (A1) and (A2) grade products. Be sure to connect the REGC pin of these products directly to VDD. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 385 CHAPTER 23 REGULATOR Figure 23-2. REGC Pin Connection (a) When REGC = VDD VDD Input voltage = 2.7 to 5.5 V REG REGC Voltage supply to oscillator/internal logic = 2.7 to 5.5 V (b) When connecting REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor VDD Input voltage = 4.0 to 5.5 V REG REGC Voltage supply to oscillator/internal logic = 3.5 V 1 F (recommended) 386 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 24 MASK OPTIONS Mask ROM versions are provided with the following mask options. 1. Power-on-clear (POC) circuit * POC cannot be used * POC used (detection voltage: VPOC = 2.85 V 0.15 V)Note * POC used (detection voltage: VPOC = 3.5 V 0.2 V) 2. Ring-OSC * Cannot be stopped * Can be stopped by software 3. Pull-up resistor of P60 to P63 pins * Pull-up resistor can be incorporated in 1-bit units (Pull-up resistors are not available for the flash memory versions.) Note This option cannot be selected in (A1) and (A2) grade products because the supply voltage VDD is 3.3 to 5.5 V. Flash memory versions that support the mask options of the mask ROM versions are as follows. Table 24-1. Flash Memory Versions Supporting Mask Options of Mask ROM Versions Mask Option POC Circuit POC cannot be used Ring-OSC Cannot be stopped Can be stopped by software POC used (VPOC = 2.85 V 0.15 V) POC used (VPOC = 3.5 V 0.2 V) Cannot be stopped Can be stopped by software Cannot be stopped Can be stopped by software Flash Memory Version PD78F0124M1, 78F0124M1(A), 78F0124M1(A1) PD78F0124M2, 78F0124M2(A), 78F0124M2(A1) PD78F0124M3, 78F0124M3(A) PD78F0124M4, 78F0124M4(A) PD78F0124M5, 78F0124M5(A), 78F0124M5(A1) PD78F0124M6, 78F0124M6(A), 78F0124M6(A1) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 387 CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 The PD78F0124 is provided as the flash memory version of the 78K0/KD1. The PD78F0124 replaces the internal mask ROM of the PD780124 with flash memory to which a program can be written, erased, and overwritten while mounted on the board. Table 25-1 lists the differences between the PD78F0124 and the mask ROM versions. Table 25-1. Differences Between PD78F0124 and Mask ROM Versions Item Internal ROM configuration Internal ROM capacity PD78F0124 Flash memory 32 KB Note Mask ROM Versions Mask ROM PD780121: 8 KB PD780122: 16 KB PD780123: 24 KB PD780124: 32 KB Note Internal high-speed RAM capacity 1024 bytes PD780121: 512 bytes PD780122: 512 bytes PD780123: 1024 bytes PD780124: 1024 bytes Available None IC pin VPP pin Electrical specifications, recommended soldering conditions None Available Refer to the description of electrical specifications and recommended soldering conditions. Note The same capacity as the mask ROM versions can be specified by means of the internal memory size switching register (IMS). Caution There are differences in noise immunity and noise radiation between the flash memory and mask ROM versions. When pre-producing an application set with the flash memory version and then mass-producing it with the mask ROM version, be sure to conduct sufficient evaluations for the commercial samples (not engineering samples) of the mask ROM versions. 388 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 25.1 Internal Memory Size Switching Register The PD78F0124 allows users to select the internal memory capacity using the internal memory size switching register (IMS) so that the same memory map as that of the mask ROM versions with a different internal memory capacity can be achieved. IMS is set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input sets IMS to CFH. Caution Be sure to set the value of the relevant mask ROM version at initialization. Figure 25-1. Format of Internal Memory Size Switching Register (IMS) Address: FFF0H Symbol IMS After reset: CFH 7 RAM2 6 RAM1 R/W 5 RAM0 4 0 3 ROM3 2 ROM2 1 ROM1 0 ROM0 RAM2 0 1 RAM1 1 1 Other than above RAM0 0 0 512 bytes Internal high-speed RAM capacity selection 1024 bytes Setting prohibited ROM3 0 0 0 1 ROM2 0 1 1 0 ROM1 1 0 1 0 ROM0 0 0 0 0 8 KB 16 KB 24 KB 32 KB Internal ROM capacity selection Other than above Setting prohibited The IMS settings required to obtain the same memory map as mask ROM versions are shown in Table 25-2. Table 25-2. Internal Memory Size Switching Register Settings Target Mask ROM Versions IMS Setting 42H 44H C6H C8H PD780121 PD780122 PD780123 PD780124 Caution When using a mask ROM version, be sure to set the value indicated in Table 25-2 to IMS. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 389 CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 25.2 Writing with Flash Programmer Data can be written to the flash memory on-board or off-board, by using a dedicated flash programmer. (1) On-board programming The contents of the flash memory can be rewritten after the PD78F0124 has been mounted on the target system. The connectors that connect the dedicated flash programmer must be mounted on the target system. (2) Off-board programming Data can be written to the flash memory with a dedicated program adapter (FA series) before the PD78F0124 is mounted on the target system. Remark The FA series is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. Table 25-3. Wiring Between PD78F0124 and Dedicated Flash Programmer (1/2) (1) 3-wire serial I/O (CSI10) Pin Configuration of Dedicated Flash Programmer Signal Name SI/RxD SO/TxD SCK CLK I/O Input Output Output Output Pin Function Receive signal Transmit signal Transfer clock Clock to PD78F0124 With CSI10 Pin Name SO10/P12 SI10/RxD0/P11 SCK10/TxD0/P10 X1 X2 /RESET VPP H/S VDD Output Output Input I/O Reset signal Write voltage Handshake signal VDD voltage generation/voltage monitor Note 2 Note 1 With CSI10 + HS Pin No. 30 31 32 7 8 9 3 Pin Name SO10/P12 SI10/RxD0/P11 SCK10/TxD0/P10 X1 X2 Note 1 Pin No. 30 31 32 7 8 9 3 21 4 27 1 6 26 2 RESET VPP Not needed VDD EVDD AVREF RESET VPP HS/P15/TOH0 VDD EVDD AVREF VSS EVSS AVSS Not needed 4 27 1 6 26 2 GND - Ground VSS EVSS AVSS Notes 1. 2. When using the clock out of the flash programmer, connect CLK of the programmer to X1, and connect its inverse signal to X2. Flashpro III only Cautions 1. Be sure to connect the REGC pin in either of the following ways. * To GND via a 1 F capacitor * Directly to VDD 2. When connecting the REGC pin to GND via a 1 F capacitor, the clock cannot be supplied from the CLK pin of the flash programmer. Create an oscillator on the board to supply a clock. 390 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 Table 25-3. Wiring Between PD78F0124 and Dedicated Flash Programmer (2/2) (2) UART (UART0, UART6) Pin Configuration of Dedicated Flash Programmer Signal Name SI/RxD I/O Input Pin Function Receive signal With UART0 Pin Name TxD0/ SCK10/P10 SO/TxD Output Transmit signal RxD0/SI10/ P11 SCK Output Transfer clock Clock to PD78F0124 Not needed Not needed CLK Output X1 X2 /RESET VPP H/S Output Output Input Reset signal Write voltage Handshake signal Note 1 With UART0 + HS Pin Name TxD0/ SCK10/P10 31 RxD0/SI10/ P11 Not needed Not needed X1 X2 Note 1 With UART6 Pin Name TxD6/P13 Pin No. 29 Pin No. 32 Pin No. 32 31 RxD6/P14 28 Not needed Not needed 7 8 9 3 Not needed 7 8 9 3 21 X1 X2 Note 1 7 8 9 3 Not needed RESET VPP Not needed RESET VPP HS/P15/TOH0 RESET VPP Not needed VDD I/O VDD voltage generation/voltage VDD monitor Note 2 4 27 1 6 26 2 VDD EVDD AVREF VSS EVSS AVSS 4 27 1 6 26 2 VDD EVDD AVREF VSS EVSS AVSS 4 27 1 6 26 2 EVDD AVREF GND - Ground VSS EVSS AVSS Notes 1. 2. When using the clock out of the flash programmer, connect CLK of the programmer to X1, and connect its inverse signal to X2. Flashpro III only Cautions 1. Be sure to connect the REGC pin in either of the following ways. * To GND via a 1 F capacitor * Directly to VDD 2. When connecting the REGC pin to GND via a 1 F capacitor, the clock cannot be supplied from the CLK pin of the flash programmer. Create an oscillator on the board to supply a clock. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 391 CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 Examples of the recommended connection when using the adapter for flash memory writing are shown below. Figure 25-2. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI10) Mode VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)Note 1 GND LVDD (VDD2) VDD GND 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 1 39 2 3 4 5Note 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 23 24 25 26 SI SO SCK CLK /RESET VPP RESERVE/HS WRITER INTERFACE Notes 1. 2. PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): 2.7 to 5.5 V PD78F0124(A1): 3.3 to 5.5 V Connect the REGC pin as follows. PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): Connect directly to VDD or connect to GND via a 1 F capacitor PD78F0124(A1): Connect directly to VDD 392 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 Figure 25-3. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI10 + HS) Mode VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)Note 1 GND LVDD (VDD2) VDD GND 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 1 39 2 3 4 5Note 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 23 24 25 26 SI SO SCK CLK /RESET VPP RESERVE/HS WRITER INTERFACE Notes 1. 2. PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): 2.7 to 5.5 V PD78F0124(A1): 3.3 to 5.5 V Connect the REGC pin as follows. PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): Connect directly to VDD or connect to GND via a 1 F capacitor PD78F0124(A1): Connect directly to VDD User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 393 CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 Figure 25-4. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in UART (UART0) Mode VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)Note 1 GND LVDD (VDD2) VDD GND 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 1 39 2 3 4 5Note 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 23 24 25 26 SI SO SCK CLK /RESET VPP RESERVE/HS WRITER INTERFACE Notes 1. 2. PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): 2.7 to 5.5 V PD78F0124(A1): 3.3 to 5.5 V Connect the REGC pin as follows. PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): Connect directly to VDD or connect to GND via a 1 F capacitor PD78F0124(A1): Connect directly to VDD 394 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 Figure 25-5. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in UART (UART0 + HS) Mode VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)Note 1 GND LVDD (VDD2) VDD GND 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 1 39 2 3 4 5Note 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 23 24 25 26 SI SO SCK CLK /RESET VPP RESERVE/HS WRITER INTERFACE Notes 1. 2. PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): 2.7 to 5.5 V PD78F0124(A1): 3.3 to 5.5 V Connect the REGC pin as follows. PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): Connect directly to VDD or connect to GND via a 1 F capacitor PD78F0124(A1): Connect directly to VDD User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 395 CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 Figure 25-6. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in UART (UART6) Mode VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)Note 1 GND LVDD (VDD2) VDD GND 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 1 39 2 3 4 5Note 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 23 24 25 26 SI SO SCK CLK /RESET VPP RESERVE/HS WRITER INTERFACE Notes 1. 2. PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): 2.7 to 5.5 V PD78F0124(A1): 3.3 to 5.5 V Connect the REGC pin as follows. PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): Connect directly to VDD or connect to GND via a 1 F capacitor PD78F0124(A1): Connect directly to VDD 396 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 25.3 Programming Environment The environment required for writing a program to the flash memory of the PD78F0124 is illustrated below. Figure 25-7. Environment for Writing Program to Flash Memory VPP RS-232C XXXX YYYY XXX YYY Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx XXXX XXXXXX Axxxx VDD PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) XXXXX STATVE VSS RESET PD78F0124 USB Note Dedicated flash programmer Host machine CSI10/UART0/UART6 Note Flashpro IV only A host machine that controls the dedicated flash programmer is necessary. To interface between the dedicated flash programmer and the PD78F0124, CSI10, UART0, or UART6 is used for manipulation such as writing and erasing. To write the flash memory off-board, a dedicated program adapter (FA series) is necessary. 25.4 Communication Mode Communication between the dedicated flash programmer and the PD78F0124 is established by serial communication via CSI10, UART0, or UART6 of the PD78F0124. (1) CSI10 Transfer rate: 200 kHz to 2 MHz Figure 25-8. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (CSI10) VPP VDD GND XXXX YYYY VPP VDD/EVDD/AVREF VSS/EVSS/AVSS RESET SO10 SI10 SCK10 X1 X2 Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx XXXXXX Axxxx XXX YYY PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) XXXXX STATVE /RESET SI/RxD XXXX Dedicated flash programmer SO/TxD SCK CLK PD78F0124 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 397 CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 (2) CSI communication mode supporting handshake Transfer rate: 200 kHz to 2 MHz Figure 25-9. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (CSI10 + HS) VPP VDD GND XXXX YYYY VPP VDD/EVDD/AVREF VSS/EVSS/AVSS RESET SO10 SI10 SCK10 X1 X2 HS Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx XXXXXX Axxxx XXX YYY PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) XXXXX STATVE /RESET SI/RxD XXXX Dedicated flash programmer SO/TxD SCK CLK H/S PD78F0124 (3) UART0 Transfer rate: 4800 to 38400 bps Figure 25-10. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (UART0) VPP VDD XXXX YYYY VPP VDD/EVDD/AVREF VSS/EVSS/AVSS RESET RxD0 TxD0 X1 X2 Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx XXX YYY PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) XXXXX STATVE XXXX XXXXXX Axxxx GND /RESET SO/TxD SI/RxD CLK Dedicated flash programmer PD78F0124 (4) UART communication mode supporting handshake Transfer rate: 4800 to 38400 bps Figure 25-11. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (UART0 + HS) VPP VDD XXXX YYYY VPP VDD/EVDD/AVREF VSS/EVSS/AVSS RESET TxD0 RxD0 X1 X2 HS Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx XXXX XXXXXX Axxxx GND PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) XXXXX XXX YYY STATVE /RESET SI/RxD Dedicated flash programmer SO/TxD CLK H/S PD78F0124 398 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 (5) UART6 Transfer rate: 4800 to 76800 bps Figure 25-12. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (UART6) VPP VDD GND XXXX YYYY VPP VDD VSS RESET TxD6 RxD6 X1 X2 Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx XXXXXX Axxxx XXX YYY PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) XXXXX STATVE /RESET SI/RxD XXXX Dedicated flash programmer SO/TxD CLK PD78F0124 If Flashpro III/Flashpro IV is used as the dedicated flash programmer, Flashpro III/Flashpro IV generates the following signal for the PD78F0124. For details, refer to the Flashpro III/Flashpro IV Manual. Table 25-4. Pin Connection Flashpro III/Flashpro IV Signal Name VPP VDD GND CLK /RESET SI/RxD SO/TxD SCK H/S PD78F0124 Pin Name VPP Note 1 Connection CSI00 UART0 UART6 I/O Output I/O - Output Output Input Output Output Input Pin Function Write voltage VDD voltage generation/voltage monitor Ground Clock output to PD78F0124 Reset signal Receive signal Transmit signal Transfer clock Handshake signal VDD, EVDD, AVREF VSS, EVSS, AVSS X1, X2 Note 2 RESET SO10/TxD0/TxD6 SI10/RxD0/RxD6 SCK10 HS x x x Notes 1. Flashpro III only 2. For off-board writing only: connect the clock output of the flash programmer to X1 and its inverse signal to X2. Remark : Be sure to connect the pin. : The pin does not have to be connected if the signal is generated on the target board. x: The pin does not have to be connected. : In handshake mode User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 399 CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 25.5 Handling of Pins on Board To write the flash memory on-board, connectors that connect the dedicated flash programmer must be provided on the target system. First provide a function that selects the normal operation mode or flash memory programming mode on the board. When the flash memory programming mode is set, all the pins not used for programming the flash memory are in the same status as immediately after reset. Therefore, if the external device does not recognize the state immediately after reset, the pins must be handled as described below. 25.5.1 VPP pin In the normal operation mode, the VPP pin is connected to VSS. In addition, a write voltage of 10.0 V (TYP.) is supplied to the VPP pin in the flash memory programming mode. Perform the following pin handling. (1) Connect pull-down resistor RVPP = 10 k to the VPP pin. (2) Switch the input of the VPP pin to the programmer side by using a jumper on the board or to GND directly. Figure 25-13. Example of Connection of VPP Pin PD78F0124 Dedicated flash programmer connection pin VPP Pull-down resistor (RVPP) 25.5.2 Serial interface pins The pins used by each serial interface are listed below. Table 25-5. Pins Used by Each Serial Interface Serial Interface CSI10 CSI10 + HS UART0 UART0 + HS UART6 Pins Used SO10, SI10, SCK10 SO10, SI10, SCK10, HS/P15 TxD0, RxD0 TxD0, RxD0, HS/P15 TxD6, RxD6 To connect the dedicated flash programmer to the pins of a serial interface that is connected to another device on the board, care must be exercised so that signals do not collide or that the other device does not malfunction. 400 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 (1) Signal collision If the dedicated flash programmer (output) is connected to a pin (input) of a serial interface connected to another device (output), signal collision takes place. To avoid this collision, either isolate the connection with the other device, or make the other device go into an output high-impedance state. Figure 25-14. Signal Collision (Input Pin of Serial Interface) PD78F0124 Signal collision Input pin Dedicated flash programmer connection pin Other device Output pin In the flash memory programming mode, the signal output by the device collides with the signal sent from the dedicated flash programmer. Therefore, isolate the signal of the other device. (2) Malfunction of other device If the dedicated flash programmer (output or input) is connected to a pin (input or output) of a serial interface connected to another device (input), a signal may be output to the other device, causing the device to malfunction. To avoid this malfunction, isolate the connection with the other device. Figure 25-15. Malfunction of Other Device PD78F0124 Dedicated flash programmer connection pin Other device Input pin Pin If the signal output by the PD78F0124 in the flash memory programming mode affects the other device, isolate the signal of the other device. PD78F0124 Dedicated flash programmer connection pin Other device Input pin Pin If the signal output by the dedicated flash programmer in the flash memory programming mode affects the other device, isolate the signal of the other device. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 401 CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 25.5.3 RESET pin If the reset signal of the dedicated flash programmer is connected to the RESET pin that is connected to the reset signal generator on the board, signal collision takes place. To prevent this collision, isolate the connection with the reset signal generator. If the reset signal is input from the user system while the flash memory programming mode is set, the flash memory will not be correctly programmed. Do not input any signal other than the reset signal of the dedicated flash programmer. Figure 25-16. Signal Collision (RESET Pin) PD78F0124 Signal collision RESET Dedicated flash programmer connection signal Reset signal generator Output pin In the flash memory programming mode, the signal output by the reset signal generator collides with the signal output by the dedicated flash programmer. Therefore, isolate the signal of the reset signal generator. 25.5.4 Port pins When the flash memory programming mode is set, all the pins not used for flash memory programming enter the same status as that immediately after reset. If external devices connected to the ports do not recognize the port status immediately after reset, the port pin must be connected to VDD or VSS via a resistor. 25.5.5 REGC pin Handle the REGC pin in the same manner as during normal operation. * PD78F0124, 78F0124(A): Connect directly to VDD or connect to GND via a 1 F capacitor * PD78F0124(A1): 25.5.6 Other signal pins Connect X1 and X2 in the same status as in the normal operation mode when using the on-board clock. To input the operating clock from the programmer, however, connect the clock out of the programmer to X1, and its inverse signal to X2. 25.5.7 Power supply To use the supply voltage output of the flash programmer, connect the VDD pin to VDD of the flash programmer, and the VSS pin to VSS of the flash programmer. To use the on-board supply voltage, connect in compliance with the normal operation mode. Supply the same other power supplies (EVDD, EVSS, AVREF, and AVSS) as those in the normal operation mode. Caution In the dedicated flash programmer PG-FP3 or FL-PR3, VDD has a power monitor function. Be sure to connect VDD and VSS to VDD and GND of the dedicated flash programmer. Connect directly to VDD 402 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 25.6 Programming Method 25.6.1 Controlling flash memory The following figure illustrates the procedure to manipulate the flash memory. Figure 25-17. Flash Memory Manipulation Procedure Start VPP pulse supply Flash memory programming mode is set Selecting communication mode Manipulate flash memory End? Yes End No 25.6.2 Flash memory programming mode To rewrite the contents of the flash memory by using the dedicated flash programmer, set the PD78F0124 in the flash memory programming mode. To set the mode, set the VPP pin and clear the reset signal. Change the mode by using a jumper when writing the flash memory on-board. Figure 25-18. Flash Memory Programming Mode VPP pulse 10.0 V VPP VDD VSS RESET Flash memory programming mode 1 2 *** n VPP VSS 10.0 V Normal operation mode Operation mode Flash memory programming mode User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 403 CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 25.6.3 Selecting communication mode In the PD78F0124 a communication mode is selected by inputting pulses (up to 11 pulses) to the VPP pin after the dedicated flash memory programming mode is entered. These VPP pulses are generated by the flash programmer. The following table shows the relationship between the number of pulses and communication modes. Table 25-6. Communication Modes Communication Mode Port (COMM PORT) 3-wire serial I/O (CSI10) 3-wire serial I/O with handshake supported (CSI10 + HS) UART (UART0) UART (UART6) UART with handshake supported (UART0 + HS) SIO-ch0 (SIO ch-0) SIO-H/S (SIO ch-3 + handshake) UART-ch0 (UART ch-0) UART-ch1 (UART ch-1) UART-ch3 (UART ch-3) 4800 to 38400 bpsNotes 2, 3 TxD0, RxD0, HS/P15 11 4800 to 76800 bpsNotes 2, 3 TxD6, RxD6 9 4800 to 38400 bps Notes 2, 3 Standard (TYPE) SettingNote 1 Speed (SIO CLOCK) 200 kHz to 2 MHzNote 2 200 kHz to 2 MHzNote 2 On Target (CPU CLOCK) Arbitrary Frequency (Flashpro Clock) 2 to 10 MHz Multiply Rate (Multiple Rate) 1.0 Pins Used Number of VPP Pulses SO10, SI10, SCK10 SO10, SI10, SCK10, HS/P15 TxD0, RxD0 0 3 8 Notes 1. Selection items for Standard settings on Flashpro IV (TYPE settings on Flashpro III). 2. The possible setting range differs depending on the voltage. For details, refer to the chapters of electrical specifications. 3. Because factors other than the baud rate error, such as the signal waveform slew, also affect UART communication, thoroughly evaluate the slew as well as the baud rate error. Caution When UART0 or UART6 is selected, the receive clock is calculated based on the reset command sent from the dedicated flash programmer after the VPP pulse has been received. Remark Items enclosed in parentheses in the setting item column are the set value and set item when they differ from those of Flashpro IV. 25.6.4 Communication commands The PD78F0124 communicates with the dedicated flash programmer by using commands. The signals sent from the flash programmer to the PD78F0124 are called commands, and the commands sent from the PD78F0124 to the dedicated flash programmer are called response commands. Figure 25-19. Communication Commands Command XXXX YYYY Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx XXX YYY PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) XXXXX STATVE XXXX XXXXXX Axxxx Dedicated flash programmer Response command PD78F0124 404 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 PD78F0124 The flash memory control commands of the PD78F0124 are listed in the table below. All these commands are issued from the programmer and the PD78F0124 perform processing corresponding to the respective commands. Table 25-7. Flash Memory Control Commands Classification Verify Command Name Batch verify command Function Compares the contents of the entire memory with the input data. Erase Blank check Data write Batch erase command Batch blank check command High-speed write command Erases the contents of the entire memory. Checks the erasure status of the entire memory. Writes data by specifying the write address and number of bytes to be written, and executes a verify check. Successive write command Writes data from the address following that of the high-speed write command executed immediately before, and executes a verify check. System setting, control Status read command Oscillation frequency setting command Erase time setting command Write time setting command Baud rate setting command Silicon signature command Reset command Obtains the operation status Sets the oscillation frequency Sets the erase time for batch erase Sets the write time for writing data Sets the baud rate when UART is used Reads the silicon signature information Escapes from each status The PD78F0124 return a response command for the command issued by the dedicated flash programmer. The response commands sent from the PD78F0124 are listed below. Table 25-8. Response Commands Command Name ACK NAK Function Acknowledges command/data. Acknowledges illegal command/data. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 405 CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET This chapter lists each instruction set of the 78K0/KD1 in table form. For details of each operation and operation code, refer to the separate document 78K/0 Series Instructions User's Manual (U12326E). 26.1 Conventions Used in Operation List 26.1.1 Operand identifiers and specification methods Operands are written in the "Operand" column of each instruction in accordance with the specification method of the instruction operand identifier (refer to the assembler specifications for details). When there are two or more methods, select one of them. Uppercase letters and the symbols #, !, $ and [ ] are keywords and must be written as they are. Each symbol has the following meaning. * #: Immediate data specification * !: Absolute address specification * $: Relative address specification * [ ]: Indirect address specification In the case of immediate data, describe an appropriate numeric value or a label. When using a label, be sure to write the #, !, $, and [ ] symbols. For operand register identifiers r and rp, either function names (X, A, C, etc.) or absolute names (names in parentheses in the table below, R0, R1, R2, etc.) can be used for specification. Table 26-1. Operand Identifiers and Specification Methods Identifier r rp sfr sfrp saddr saddrp addr16 addr11 addr5 word byte bit RBn Specification Method X (R0), A (R1), C (R2), B (R3), E (R4), D (R5), L (R6), H (R7) AX (RP0), BC (RP1), DE (RP2), HL (RP3) Special function register symbol Note Note Special function register symbol (16-bit manipulatable register even addresses only) FE20H to FF1FH Immediate data or labels FE20H to FF1FH Immediate data or labels (even address only) 0000H to FFFFH Immediate data or labels (Only even addresses for 16-bit data transfer instructions) 0800H to 0FFFH Immediate data or labels 0040H to 007FH Immediate data or labels (even address only) 16-bit immediate data or label 8-bit immediate data or label 3-bit immediate data or label RB0 to RB3 Note Addresses from FFD0H to FFDFH cannot be accessed with these operands. Remark For special function register symbols, refer to Table 3-5 Special Function Register List. 406 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET 26.1.2 Description of operation column A: X: B: C: D: E: H: L: AX: BC: DE: HL: PC: SP: PSW: CY: AC: Z: RBS: IE: NMIS: ( ): : : : A register; 8-bit accumulator X register B register C register D register E register H register L register AX register pair; 16-bit accumulator BC register pair DE register pair HL register pair Program counter Stack pointer Program status word Carry flag Auxiliary carry flag Zero flag Register bank select flag Interrupt request enable flag Non-maskable interrupt servicing flag Memory contents indicated by address or register contents in parentheses Logical product (AND) Logical sum (OR) Exclusive logical sum (exclusive OR) : Inverted data Signed 8-bit data (displacement value) XH, XL: Higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits of 16-bit register addr16: 16-bit immediate data or label jdisp8: 26.1.3 Description of flag operation column (Blank): Not affected 0: 1: x: R: Cleared to 0 Set to 1 Set/cleared according to the result Previously saved value is restored User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 407 CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET 26.2 Operation List Instruction Group 8-bit data transfer Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Mnemonic MOV Operands r, #byte saddr, #byte sfr, #byte A, r r, A A, saddr saddr, A A, sfr sfr, A A, !addr16 !addr16, A PSW, #byte A, PSW PSW, A A, [DE] [DE], A A, [HL] [HL], A A, [HL + byte] [HL + byte], A A, [HL + B] [HL + B], A A, [HL + C] [HL + C], A Note 3 Bytes 2 3 3 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 Note 3 Operation r byte (saddr) byte sfr byte Ar rA A (saddr) (saddr) A A sfr sfr A A (addr16) (addr16) A PSW byte A PSW PSW A A (DE) (DE) A A (HL) (HL) A A (HL + byte) (HL + byte) A A (HL + B) (HL + B) A A (HL + C) (HL + C) A Ar A (saddr) A (sfr) x x Flag Z AC CY 4 6 - 2 2 4 4 - - 8 8 - - - 4 4 4 4 8 8 6 6 6 6 2 4 - 8 4 4 8 8 8 - 7 7 - - 5 5 5 5 9+n 9+m 7 5 5 5+n 5+m 5+n 5+m 9+n 9+m 7+n 7+m 7+n 7+m - 6 6 Note 3 x x x x XCH A, r A, saddr A, sfr A, !addr16 A, [DE] A, [HL] A, [HL + byte] A, [HL + B] A, [HL + C] 1 2 2 3 1 1 2 2 2 10 + n + m A (addr16) 6 + n + m A (DE) 6 + n + m A (HL) 10 + n + m A (HL + byte) 10 + n + m A (HL + B) 10 + n + m A (HL + C) Notes 1. 2. 3. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed Except "r = A" Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control register (PCC). 2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program. 3. n is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is read. 4. m is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is written. 408 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET Instruction Group 16-bit data transfer Mnemonic MOVW Operands rp, #word saddrp, #word sfrp, #word AX, saddrp saddrp, AX AX, sfrp sfrp, AX AX, rp rp, AX AX, !addr16 !addr16, AX Note 3 Bytes 3 4 4 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 3 Note 3 Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Operation rp word (saddrp) word sfrp word AX (saddrp) (saddrp) AX AX sfrp sfrp AX AX rp rp AX Flag Z AC CY 6 8 - 6 6 - - 4 4 10 10 4 4 6 4 4 4 8 4 8 8 8 4 6 4 4 4 8 4 8 8 8 - 10 10 8 8 8 8 - - Note 3 12 + 2n AX (addr16) 12 + 2m (addr16) AX - - 8 - - 5 9+n 5+n 9+n 9+n 9+n - 8 - - 5 9+n 5+n 9+n 9+n 9+n AX rp A, CY A + byte (saddr), CY (saddr) + byte A, CY A + r r, CY r + A A, CY A + (saddr) A, CY A + (addr16) A, CY A + (HL) A, CY A + (HL + byte) A, CY A + (HL + B) A, CY A + (HL + C) A, CY A + byte + CY (saddr), CY (saddr) + byte + CY A, CY A + r + CY r, CY r + A + CY A, CY A + (saddr) + CY A, CY A + (addr16) + CY A, CY A + (HL) + CY A, CY A + (HL + byte) + CY A, CY A + (HL + B) + CY A, CY A + (HL + C) + CY x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x XCHW 8-bit operation ADD AX, rp A, #byte saddr, #byte A, r r, A A, saddr A, !addr16 A, [HL] A, [HL + byte] A, [HL + B] A, [HL + C] 1 2 3 Note 4 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 ADDC A, #byte saddr, #byte A, r r, A A, saddr A, !addr16 A, [HL] A, [HL + byte] A, [HL + B] A, [HL + C] Note 4 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed Only when rp = BC, DE or HL Except "r = A" Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control register (PCC). 2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program. 3. n is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is read. 4. m is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is written. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 409 CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET Instruction Group 8-bit operation Mnemonic SUB Operands A, #byte saddr, #byte A, r r, A A, saddr A, !addr16 A, [HL] A, [HL + byte] A, [HL + B] A, [HL + C] Note 3 Bytes 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 Note 3 Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Operation A, CY A - byte (saddr), CY (saddr) - byte A, CY A - r r, CY r - A A, CY A - (saddr) A, CY A - (addr16) A, CY A - (HL) A, CY A - (HL + byte) A, CY A - (HL + B) A, CY A - (HL + C) A, CY A - byte - CY (saddr), CY (saddr) - byte - CY A, CY A - r - CY r, CY r - A - CY A, CY A - (saddr) - CY A, CY A - (addr16) - CY A, CY A - (HL) - CY A, CY A - (HL + byte) - CY A, CY A - (HL + B) - CY A, CY A - (HL + C) - CY A A byte (saddr) (saddr) byte AAr rrA A A (saddr) A A (addr16) A A (HL) A A (HL + byte) A A (HL + B) A A (HL + C) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Flag Z AC CY x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 4 6 4 4 4 8 4 8 8 8 4 6 4 4 4 8 4 8 8 8 4 6 4 4 4 8 4 8 8 8 - 8 - - 5 9+n 5+n 9+n 9+n 9+n - 8 - - 5 9+n 5+n 9+n 9+n 9+n - 8 - - 5 9+n 5+n 9+n 9+n 9+n SUBC A, #byte saddr, #byte A, r r, A A, saddr A, !addr16 A, [HL] A, [HL + byte] A, [HL + B] A, [HL + C] 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 AND A, #byte saddr, #byte A, r r, A A, saddr A, !addr16 A, [HL] A, [HL + byte] A, [HL + B] A, [HL + C] Note 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 Notes 1. 2. 3. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed Except "r = A" Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control register (PCC). 2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program. 3. n is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is read. 410 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET Instruction Group 8-bit operation Mnemonic OR Operands A, #byte saddr, #byte A, r r, A A, saddr A, !addr16 A, [HL] A, [HL + byte] A, [HL + B] A, [HL + C] Note 3 Bytes 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 Note 3 Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Operation A A byte (saddr) (saddr) byte AAr rrA A A (saddr) A A (addr16) A A (HL) A A (HL + byte) A A (HL + B) A A (HL + C) A A byte (saddr) (saddr) byte AAr rrA A A (saddr) A A (addr16) A A (HL) A A (HL + byte) A A (HL + B) A A (HL + C) A - byte (saddr) - byte A-r r-A A - (saddr) A - (addr16) A - (HL) A - (HL + byte) A - (HL + B) A - (HL + C) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Flag Z AC CY 4 6 4 4 4 8 4 8 8 8 4 6 4 4 4 8 4 8 8 8 4 6 4 4 4 8 4 8 8 8 - 8 - - 5 9+n 5+n 9+n 9+n 9+n - 8 - - 5 9+n 5+n 9+n 9+n 9+n - 8 - - 5 9+n 5+n 9+n 9+n 9+n XOR A, #byte saddr, #byte A, r r, A A, saddr A, !addr16 A, [HL] A, [HL + byte] A, [HL + B] A, [HL + C] 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 CMP A, #byte saddr, #byte A, r r, A A, saddr A, !addr16 A, [HL] A, [HL + byte] A, [HL + B] A, [HL + C] Note 3 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 Notes 1. 2. 3. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed Except "r = A" Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control register (PCC). 2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program. 3. n is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is read. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 411 CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET Instruction Group 16-bit operation Mnemonic ADDW SUBW CMPW Operands AX, #word AX, #word AX, #word X C r saddr Bytes 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 6 6 6 16 25 2 4 2 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Operation AX, CY AX + word AX, CY AX - word AX - word AX A x X AX (Quotient), C (Remainder) AX / C rr+1 (saddr) (saddr) + 1 rr-1 (saddr) (saddr) - 1 rp rp + 1 rp rp - 1 (CY, A7 A0, Am - 1 Am) x 1 time (CY, A0 A7, Am + 1 Am) x 1 time (CY A0, A7 CY, Am - 1 Am) x 1 time (CY A7, A0 CY, Am + 1 Am) x 1 time (HL)3 - 0 (HL)7 - 4 x x x x x x x Flag Z AC CY x x x x x x - - - - - - 6 - 6 - - - - - - Multiply/ divide Increment/ decrement MULU DIVUW INC x x x x DEC r saddr INCW DECW Rotate ROR ROL RORC ROLC ROR4 ROL4 BCD adjustment Bit manipulate ADJBA ADJBS MOV1 rp rp A, 1 A, 1 A, 1 A, 1 [HL] [HL] x x x x 10 12 + n + m A3 - 0 (HL)3 - 0, (HL)7 - 4 A3 - 0, 10 12 + n + m A3 - 0 (HL)7 - 4, (HL)3 - 0 A3 - 0, (HL)7 - 4 (HL)3 - 0 4 4 6 - 4 - 6 6 - 4 - 6 - - 7 7 - 7 7+n 8 8 - 8 Decimal Adjust Accumulator after Addition Decimal Adjust Accumulator after Subtract CY (saddr.bit) CY sfr.bit CY A.bit CY PSW.bit CY (HL).bit (saddr.bit) CY sfr.bit CY A.bit CY PSW.bit CY x x x x x x x x x x x x x CY, saddr.bit CY, sfr.bit CY, A.bit CY, PSW.bit CY, [HL].bit saddr.bit, CY sfr.bit, CY A.bit, CY PSW.bit, CY [HL].bit, CY 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 8 + n + m (HL).bit CY Notes 1. 2. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control register (PCC). 2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program. 3. n is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is read. 4. m is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is written. 412 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET Instruction Group Bit manipulate Mnemonic AND1 Operands CY, saddr.bit CY, sfr.bit CY, A.bit CY, PSW.bit CY, [HL].bit Bytes 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 6 - 4 - 6 6 - 4 - 6 6 - 4 - 6 4 - 4 - 6 4 - 4 - 6 2 2 2 Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Operation CY CY (saddr.bit) CY CY sfr.bit CY CY A.bit CY CY PSW.bit CY CY (HL).bit CY CY (saddr.bit) CY CY sfr.bit CY CY A.bit CY CY PSW.bit CY CY (HL).bit CY CY (saddr.bit) CY CY sfr.bit CY CY A.bit CY CY PSW.bit CY CY (HL).bit (saddr.bit) 1 sfr.bit 1 A.bit 1 PSW.bit 1 (saddr.bit) 0 sfr.bit 0 A.bit 0 PSW.bit 0 CY 1 CY 0 CY CY x x Flag Z AC CY x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 7 7 - 7 7+n 7 7 - 7 7+n 7 7 - 7 7+n 6 8 - 6 OR1 CY, saddr.bit CY, sfr.bit CY, A.bit CY, PSW.bit CY, [HL].bit XOR1 CY, saddr.bit CY, sfr.bit CY, A.bit CY, PSW.bit CY, [HL].bit SET1 saddr.bit sfr.bit A.bit PSW.bit [HL].bit x x 8 + n + m (HL).bit 1 6 8 - 6 - - - CLR1 saddr.bit sfr.bit A.bit PSW.bit [HL].bit x x 8 + n + m (HL).bit 0 1 0 x SET1 CLR1 NOT1 CY CY CY Notes 1. 2. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control register (PCC). 2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program. 3. n is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is read. 4. m is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is written. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 413 CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET Instruction Group Call/return Mnemonic CALL CALLF Operands !addr16 !addr11 Bytes 3 2 7 5 Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Operation (SP - 1) (PC + 3)H, (SP - 2) (PC + 3)L, PC addr16, SP SP - 2 (SP - 1) (PC + 2)H, (SP - 2) (PC + 2)L, PC15 - 11 00001, PC10 - 0 addr11, SP SP - 2 Flag Z AC CY - - CALLT [addr5] 1 6 - (SP - 1) (PC + 1)H, (SP - 2) (PC + 1)L, PCH (00000000, addr5 + 1), PCL (00000000, addr5), SP SP - 2 BRK 1 6 - (SP - 1) PSW, (SP - 2) (PC + 1)H, (SP - 3) (PC + 1)L, PCH (003FH), PCL (003EH), SP SP - 3, IE 0 RET RETI RETB Stack manipulate PUSH PSW rp POP PSW rp MOVW SP, #word SP, AX AX, SP Unconditional BR branch !addr16 $addr16 AX Conditional BC branch BNC BZ BNZ $addr16 $addr16 $addr16 $addr16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 6 6 2 4 2 4 - - - 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 - - - - - - - 10 8 8 - - - - - - - PCH (SP + 1), PCL (SP), SP SP + 2 PCH (SP + 1), PCL (SP), PSW (SP + 2), SP SP + 3 PCH (SP + 1), PCL (SP), PSW (SP + 2), SP SP + 3 (SP - 1) PSW, SP SP - 1 (SP - 1) rpH, (SP - 2) rpL, SP SP - 2 PSW (SP), SP SP + 1 rpH (SP + 1), rpL (SP), SP SP + 2 SP word SP AX AX SP PC addr16 PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 PCH A, PCL X PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 1 PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 0 PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 1 PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 0 RRR RRR RRR Notes 1. 2. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control register (PCC). 2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program. 414 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET Instruction Group Mnemonic Operands saddr.bit, $addr16 sfr.bit, $addr16 A.bit, $addr16 PSW.bit, $addr16 [HL].bit, $addr16 Bytes 3 4 3 3 3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 8 - 8 - 10 10 - 8 - 10 10 - 8 - 10 6 6 8 4 2 - - 6 6 Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Operation PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 1 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 1 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 0 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 0 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 0 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW. bit = 0 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 0 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 1 then reset (saddr.bit) PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1 then reset sfr.bit PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1 then reset A.bit PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1 then reset PSW.bit x Flag Z AC CY Conditional BT branch 9 11 - 9 11 + n 11 11 - 11 11 + n 12 12 - 12 BF saddr.bit, $addr16 sfr.bit, $addr16 A.bit, $addr16 PSW.bit, $addr16 [HL].bit, $addr16 BTCLR saddr.bit, $addr16 sfr.bit, $addr16 A.bit, $addr16 PSW.bit, $addr16 [HL].bit, $addr16 x x 12 + n + m PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 1 then reset (HL).bit - - 10 - - 6 6 - - B B - 1, then PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 if B 0 C C -1, then PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 if C 0 (saddr) (saddr) - 1, then PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (saddr) 0 RBS1, 0 n No Operation IE 1 (Enable Interrupt) IE 0 (Disable Interrupt) Set HALT Mode Set STOP Mode DBNZ B, $addr16 C, $addr16 saddr, $addr16 CPU control SEL NOP EI DI HALT STOP RBn Notes 1. 2. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control register (PCC). 2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program. 3. n is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is read. 4. m is the number of waits when the external memory expansion area is written. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 415 CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET 26.3 Instructions Listed by Addressing Type (1) 8-bit instructions MOV, XCH, ADD, ADDC, SUB, SUBC, AND, OR, XOR, CMP, MULU, DIVUW, INC, DEC, ROR, ROL, RORC, ROLC, ROR4, ROL4, PUSH, POP, DBNZ Second Operand #byte A rNote sfr saddr !addr16 PSW [DE] [HL] [HL + byte] $addr16 [HL + B] First Operand A [HL + C] 1 None ADD ADDC SUB SUBC AND OR XOR CMP MOV XCH ADD ADDC SUB SUBC AND OR XOR CMP MOV XCH MOV XCH ADD SUB AND OR XOR CMP MOV XCH ADD SUB AND OR XOR CMP MOV MOV XCH MOV XCH ADD SUB AND OR XOR CMP MOV XCH ADD SUB AND OR XOR CMP ROR ROL RORC ROLC ADDC ADDC SUBC SUBC ADDC ADDC SUBC SUBC r MOV MOV ADD ADDC SUB SUBC AND OR XOR CMP INC DEC B, C sfr saddr MOV MOV ADD ADDC SUB SUBC AND OR XOR CMP !addr16 PSW MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV DBNZ DBNZ INC DEC PUSH POP [DE] [HL] MOV MOV ROR4 ROL4 [HL + byte] [HL + B] [HL + C] X C MOV MULU DIVUW Note Except r = A 416 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET (2) 16-bit instructions MOVW, XCHW, ADDW, SUBW, CMPW, PUSH, POP, INCW, DECW Second Operand First Operand AX ADDW SUBW CMPW rp MOVW MOVW Note #word AX rp Note sfrp saddrp !addr16 SP None MOVW XCHW MOVW MOVW MOVW MOVW INCW DECW PUSH POP sfrp saddrp !addr16 SP MOVW MOVW MOVW MOVW MOVW MOVW MOVW Note Only when rp = BC, DE, HL (3) Bit manipulation instructions MOV1, AND1, OR1, XOR1, SET1, CLR1, NOT1, BT, BF, BTCLR Second Operand First Operand A.bit MOV1 BT BF BTCLR sfr.bit MOV1 BT BF BTCLR saddr.bit MOV1 BT BF BTCLR PSW.bit MOV1 BT BF BTCLR [HL].bit MOV1 BT BF BTCLR CY MOV1 AND1 OR1 XOR1 MOV1 AND1 OR1 XOR1 MOV1 AND1 OR1 XOR1 MOV1 AND1 OR1 XOR1 MOV1 AND1 OR1 XOR1 SET1 CLR1 NOT1 SET1 CLR1 SET1 CLR1 SET1 CLR1 SET1 CLR1 SET1 CLR1 A.bit sfr.bit saddr.bit PSW.bit [HL].bit CY $addr16 None User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 417 CHAPTER 26 INSTRUCTION SET (4) Call instructions/branch instructions CALL, CALLF, CALLT, BR, BC, BNC, BZ, BNZ, BT, BF, BTCLR, DBNZ Second Operand First Operand Basic instruction BR CALL BR CALLF CALLT BR BC BNC BZ BNZ Compound instruction BT BF BTCLR DBNZ AX !addr16 !addr11 [addr5] $addr16 (5) Other instructions ADJBA, ADJBS, BRK, RET, RETI, RETB, SEL, NOP, EI, DI, HALT, STOP 418 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Target products: PD780121, 780122, 780123, 780124, 78F0124, 780121(A), 780122(A), 780123(A), 780124(A), 78F0124(A) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (1/2) Parameter Supply voltage Symbol VDD EVDD REGC VSS EVSS AVREF AVSS VPP Input voltage VI1 Conditions Ratings -0.3 to +6.5 -0.3 to +6.5 -0.3 to +6.5 -0.3 to +0.3 -0.3 to +0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to +0.3 Note 1 Unit V V V V V V V V Note 1 PD78F0124, 78F0124(A) only, Note 2 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P130, P140, X1, X2, XT1, XT2, RESET -0.3 to +10.5 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V VI2 P62, P63 N-ch open drain On-chip pull-up resistor -0.3 to +13 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to +10.5 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 Note 1 Note 1 V V V VI3 VPP in flash programming mode (PD78F0124, 78F0124(A) only) Output voltage Analog input voltage VO VAN V Note 1 AVSS - 0.3 to AVREF + 0.3 and -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 Per pin Total of all pins -60 mA P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 -30 -10 -30 V Note 1 Output current, high IOH mA mA mA Note 1. Must be 6.5 V or lower. (See Note 2 on the next page.) Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 419 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (2/2) Parameter Output current, low Symbol IOL Per pin Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P130, P140 P60 to P63 Total of all pins 70 mA Operating ambient temperature Storage temperature Tstg TA P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 -40 to +85 -10 to +85 -65 to +150 -40 to +125 C C 30 35 35 mA mA mA Ratings 20 Unit mA In normal operation mode In flash memory programming mode PD780121, 780122, 780123, 780124, 780121(A), 780122(A), 780123(A), 780124(A) PD78F0124, 78F0124(A) Note 2. Make sure that the following conditions of the VPP voltage application timing are satisfied when the flash memory is written. * When supply voltage rises VPP must exceed VDD 10 s or more after VDD has reached the lower-limit value (2.7 V) of the operating voltage range (15 s if the supply voltage is dropped by the regulator) (see a in the figure below). * When supply voltage drops VDD must be lowered 10 s or more after VPP falls below the lower-limit value (2.7 V) of the operating voltage range of VDD (see b in the figure below). 2.7 V 0V a b VDD VPP 2.7 V 0V Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. 420 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) X1 Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Resonator Ceramic resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Oscillation frequency (fXP) Note 1 Conditions When a capacitor is connected to the REGC pin Note 2 MIN. 2.0 TYP. MAX. 8.38 Unit MHz VSS X1 X2 4.0 V VDD < 5.5 V C1 C2 When the REGC pin is connected directly to VDD 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 2.7 V VDD < 3.3 V 4.0 V VDD < 5.5 V 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 10 8.38 5.0 8.38 MHz Crystal resonator VSS X1 X2 Oscillation frequency (fXP) Note 1 When a capacitor is connected to the REGC pin Note 2 MHz C1 C2 When the REGC pin is connected directly to VDD 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 2.7 V VDD < 3.3 V 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 46 56 96 10 8.38 5.0 10 8.38 5.0 500 500 500 MHz External clock Note 3 X1 input X1 X2 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V Note 1 MHz frequency (fXP) 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 2.7 V VDD < 3.3 V X1 input high/low-level width (tXPH, tXPL) 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 2.7 V VDD < 3.3 V ns Notes 1. 2. 3. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time. When the REGC pin is connected to VSS via a capacitor (1 F: recommended). Connect the REGC pin directly to VDD. Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. Since the CPU is started by the Ring-OSC after reset is released, check the oscillation stabilization time of the X1 input clock using the oscillation stabilization time status register (OSTC). Determine the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTC register and oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization time with the resonator to be used. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 421 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Ring-OSC Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Resonator On-chip Ring-OSC oscillator Parameter Oscillation frequency (fR) Conditions MIN. 120 TYP. 240 MAX. 480 Unit kHz Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Resonator Crystal resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Oscillation frequency (fXT) Note Conditions MIN. 32 TYP. 32.768 MAX. 35 Unit kHz VSS XT2 Rd C4 XT1 C3 External clock XT2 XT1 XT1 input frequency (fXT) Note 32 38.5 kHz XT1 input high-/low-level width (tXTH, tXTL) 12 15 s Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time. Cautions 1. When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the X1 oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem clock is used. Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation. 422 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Recommended Oscillator Constants Caution For the resonator selection of the PD780121(A), 780122(A), 780123(A), 780124(A), and 78F0124(A) and oscillator constants, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation. (a) PD780121, 780122, 780123, 780124 X1 oscillation: Ceramic resonator (TA = -40 to +85C) Manufacturer Part Number SMD/ Lead Frequency (MHz) Recommended Circuit Constants Oscillation Voltage Range When Capacitor Is Connected to Note REGC Pin MIN. (V) 4.0 MAX. (V) 5.5 REGC Pin Is Connected Directly to VDD MIN. (V) 2.7 MAX. (V) 5.5 C1 (pF) Murata Mfg. CSTCC2M00G56-R0 CSTCR4M00G55-R0 CSTCR4M00G55095-R0 CSTLS4M00G56-B0 CSTLS4M00G56U-B0 CSTCR4M19G55-R0 CSTCR4M19G55095-R0 CSTLS4M19G56-B0 CSTLS4M19G56U-B0 CSTCR4M91G53-R0 CSTCR4M91G53095-R0 CSTLS4M91G53-B0 CSTLS4M91G53U-B0 CSTCR5M00G53-R0 CSTCR5M00G53095-R0 CSTLS5M00G53-B0 CSTLS5M00G53U-B0 CSTCR6M00G53-R0 CSTCR6M00G53095-R0 CSTLS6M00G53-B0 CSTLS6M00G53U-B0 CSTCE8M00G52-R0 CSTLS8M00G53-B0 CSTLS8M00G53U-B0 CSTCE10M0G52-R0 CSTLS10M0G53-B0 CSTLS10M0G53U-B0 SMD Lead 10.0 SMD Lead 8.00 Lead SMD 6.00 Lead SMD 5.00 Lead SMD 4.915 Lead SMD 4.194 Lead SMD SMD 2.00 4.00 Internal (47) Internal (39) Internal (47) Internal (39) Internal (47) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (10) Internal (15) Internal (10) Internal (15) C2 (pF) Internal (47) Internal (39) Internal (47) Internal (39) Internal (47) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (10) Internal (15) Internal (10) Internal (15) - - Note When the REGC pin is connected to VSS via a capacitor (1 F: recommended). Caution The oscillator constants shown above are reference values based on evaluation in a specific environment by the resonator manufacturer. If it is necessary to optimize the oscillator characteristics in the actual application, apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation on the implementation circuit. The oscillation voltage and oscillation frequency only indicate the oscillator characteristic. Use the 78K0/KD1 so that the internal operation conditions are within the specifications of the DC and AC characteristics. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 423 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (b) PD78F0124 X1 oscillation: Ceramic resonator (TA = -40 to +85C) Manufacturer Part Number SMD/ Lead Frequency (MHz) Recommended Circuit Constants Oscillation Voltage Range When Capacitor Is Connected to Note REGC Pin MIN. (V) 4.0 MAX. (V) 5.5 REGC Pin Is Connected Directly to VDD MIN. (V) 2.7 MAX. (V) 5.5 C1 (pF) Murata Mfg. CSTCC2M00G56-R0 CSTCR4M00G55-R0 CSTCR4M00G55095-R0 CSTLS4M00G56-B0 CSTLS4M00G56U-B0 CSTCR4M19G55-R0 CSTCR4M19G55095-R0 CSTLS4M19G56-B0 CSTLS4M19G56U-B0 CSTCR4M91G53-R0 CSTCR4M91G55095-R0 CSTLS4M91G53-B0 CSTLS4M91G56U-B0 CSTCR5M00G53-R0 CSTCR5M00G53095-R0 CSTLS5M00G53-B0 CSTLS5M00G53U-B0 CSTCR6M00G53-R0 CSTCR6M00G55095-R0 CSTLS6M00G53-B0 CSTLS6M00G53U-B0 CSTCE8M00G52-R0 CSTLS8M00G53-B0 CSTLS8M00G53U-B0 CSTCE10M0G52-R0 CSTLS10M0G53-B0 CSTLS10M0G53U-B0 SMD Lead 10.0 SMD Lead 8.00 Lead SMD 6.00 Lead SMD 5.00 Lead SMD 4.915 Lead SMD 4.194 Lead SMD SMD 2.00 4.00 Internal (47) Internal (39) Internal (47) Internal (39) Internal (47) Internal (15) Internal (39) Internal (15) Internal (47) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (10) Internal (15) Internal (10) Internal (15) C2 (pF) Internal (47) Internal (39) Internal (47) Internal (39) Internal (47) Internal (15) Internal (39) Internal (15) Internal (47) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (15) Internal (10) Internal (15) Internal (10) Internal (15) - - Note When the REGC pin is connected to VSS via a capacitor (1 F: recommended). Caution The oscillator constants shown above are reference values based on evaluation in a specific environment by the resonator manufacturer. If it is necessary to optimize the oscillator characteristics in the actual application, apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation on the implementation circuit. The oscillation voltage and oscillation frequency only indicate the oscillator characteristic. Use the 78K0/KD1 so that the internal operation conditions are within the specifications of the DC and AC characteristics. 424 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (1/4) (TA = -40 to +85C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Output current, high Symbol IOH Per pin Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 Total of all pins Output current, low IOL Per pin for P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P130, P140 Per pin for P60 to P63 Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 Total of all pins Input voltage, high VIH1 VIH2 P12, P13, P15 P00 to P03, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VIH3 VIH4 VIH5 P20 to P27 P60, P61 P62, P63 N-ch open drain On-chip pull-up resistor (mask ROM version only) VIH6 Input voltage, low VIL1 VIL2 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 P12, P13, P15 P00 to P03, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VIL3 VIL4 VIL5 VIL6 P20 to P27 P60, P61 P62, P63 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 Note Note Conditions 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V MIN. TYP. MAX. -5 -25 -25 -10 10 Unit mA mA mA mA mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 15 30 mA mA 30 mA 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.7VDD 0.8VDD 10 VDD VDD mA V V 0.7AVREF 0.7VDD 0.7VDD 0.7VDD VDD - 0.5 0 0 AVREF VDD 12 VDD V V V V VDD 0.3VDD 0.2VDD V V V 0 0 0 0 0.3AVREF 0.3VDD 0.3VDD 0.4 V V V V Note When used as digital input ports, set AVREF = VDD. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 425 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (2/4) (TA = -40 to +85C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Output voltage, high Symbol VOH Conditions Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 IOH = -25 mA Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 IOH = -25 mA IOH = -100 A Output voltage, low VOL1 Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 IOL = 30 mA Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 IOL = 30 mA IOL = 400 A VOL2 Input leakage current, high ILIH1 P60 to P63 VI = VDD MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, VDD - 1.0 IOH = -5 mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, VDD - 1.0 IOH = -5 mA 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, IOL = 10 mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, IOL = 10 mA VDD - 0.5 1.3 V V V 1.3 V 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, IOL = 15 mA P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET P20 to P27 X1, X2 Note 1 0.4 2.0 3 V V A VI = AVREF ILIH2 ILIH3 Input leakage current, low ILIL1 VI = VDD VI = 12 V VI = 0 V 3 Note 1 A A A A , XT1, XT2 20 3 -3 P62, P63 (N-ch open drain) P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET X1, X2 Note 1 ILIL2 ILIL3 Output leakage current, high ILOH Output leakage current, low Pull-up resistance value VPP supply voltage (PD78F0124, 78F0124(A) only) ILOL RL VPP1 VO = VDD VO = 0 V VI = 0 V , XT1, XT2 Note 1 -20 -3 Note 2 A A A A k V P62, P63 (N-ch open drain) 3 -3 10 0 30 100 0.2VDD In normal operation mode Notes 1. 2. When the inverse level of X1 is input to X2 and the inverse level of XT1 is input to XT2. If there is no on-chip pull-up resistor for P62 and P63 (specified by a mask option) and if port 6 has been set to input mode when a read instruction is executed to read from port 6, a low-level input leakage current of up to -45 A flows during only one cycle. At all other times, the maximum leakage current is -3 A. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. 426 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (3/4): PD78F0124, 78F0124(A) (TA = -40 to +85C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Supply Note 1 current Symbol IDD1 X1 crystal oscillation operating Note 2 mode Conditions fXP = 10 MHz When A/D converter is stopped Notes 3, 7 VDD = 5.0 V 10% When A/D converter is Note 9 operating fXP = 8.38 MHz When A/D converter is stopped Notes 3, 8 VDD = 5.0 V 10% When A/D converter is Note 9 operating fXP = 5 MHz Note 3 VDD = 3.0 V 10% When A/D converter is stopped When A/D converter is Note 9 operating When peripheral functions are stopped When peripheral functions are operating When peripheral functions are stopped When peripheral functions are operating When peripheral functions are stopped When peripheral functions are operating MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 12.3 13.3 7.4 8.4 4.2 4.8 1.5 21.5 23.5 12.9 14.9 7.0 8.2 3.0 6.9 0.76 1.52 4.83 0.36 0.72 1.9 0.4 0.32 100 83 1.6 1.24 200 166 mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA IDD2 X1 crystal oscillation HALT mode fXP = 10 MHz Note 7 VDD = 5.0 V 10% fXP = 8.38 MHz Note 8 VDD = 5.0 V 10% fXP = 5 MHz Note 3 VDD = 3.0 V 10% IDD3 Ring-OSC operating Note 4 mode VDD = 5.0 V 10% VDD = 3.0 V 10% IDD4 32.768 kHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% crystal oscillation VDD = 3.0 V 10% operating Notes 4, 6 mode 32.768 kHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% crystal oscillation Notes 4, 6 VDD = 3.0 V 10% HALT mode STOP mode VDD = 5.0 V 10% POC: OFF, RING: OFF POC: OFF, RING: ON POC: ON Note 5 A A A A A A A A A A A A IDD5 20 6 0.1 14 3.5 17.5 0.05 7.5 3.5 11 40 12 30 58 35.5 63.5 10 25 15.5 30.5 IDD6 , RING: OFF , RING: ON POC: ON VDD = 3.0 V 10% Note 5 POC: OFF, RING: OFF POC: OFF, RING: ON POC: ON Note 5 , RING: OFF , RING: ON POC: ON Note 5 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included (however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not included). IDD1 includes peripheral operation current. When PCC = 00H. When X1 oscillator is stopped. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 in the PD78F0124M1, 78F0124M2, 78F0124M1(A), and 78F0124M2(A). When the PD78F0124M1, 78F0124M2, 78F0124M1(A), and 78F0124M2(A) (including LVIE = 0) are selected and Ring-OSC oscillation is stopped. When the REGC pin is connected directly to VDD. When the REGC pin is connected to VSS via a capacitor (1 F: recommended). Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 427 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (4/4): PD780121, 780122, 780123, 780124, 780121(A), 780122(A), 780123(A), 780124(A) (TA = -40 to +85C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Supply current Note 1 Symbol IDD1 X1 crystal oscillation operating mode Note 2 Conditions fXP = 10 MHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% Notes 3, 7 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit When A/D converter is stopped When A/D converter is operating Note 9 6.3 7.3 12.2 14.2 mA mA fXP = 8.38 MHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% Notes 3, 8 When A/D converter is stopped When A/D converter is operating Note 9 3.5 4.5 7.3 9.3 mA mA fXP = 5 MHz VDD = 3.0 V 10% Note 3 When A/D converter is stopped When A/D converter is operating Note 9 1.9 2.5 3.4 4.6 mA mA IDD2 X1 crystal oscillation HALT mode fXP = 10 MHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% fXP = 8.38 MHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% fXP = 5 MHz VDD = 3.0 V 10% Note 3 Note 8 Note 7 When peripheral functions are stopped When peripheral functions are operating When peripheral functions are stopped When peripheral functions are operating When peripheral functions are stopped When peripheral functions are operating 1.4 2.8 5.9 mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA 0.67 1.34 4.0 0.29 0.58 1.7 IDD3 Ring-OSC operating mode Note 4 VDD = 5.0 V 10% VDD = 3.0 V 10% VDD = 5.0 V 10% 0.22 0.13 31 13 0.88 0.52 62 26 IDD4 32.768 kHz A A crystal oscillation VDD = 3.0 V 10% operating mode IDD5 Notes 4, 6 32.768 kHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% 20 6 POC: OFF, RING: OFF POC: OFF, RING: ON POC: ON POC: ON Note 5 40 12 30 58 35.5 63.5 10 25 15.5 30.5 A A A A A A A A A A crystal oscillation VDD = 3.0 V 10% Notes 4, 6 HALT mode IDD6 STOP mode VDD = 5.0 V 10% 0.1 14 3.5 17.5 0.05 7.5 3.5 11 , RING: OFF , RING: ON Note 5 VDD = 3.0 V 10% POC: OFF, RING: OFF POC: OFF, RING: ON POC: ON POC: ON Note 5 , RING: OFF , RING: ON Note 5 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included (however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not included). IDD1 includes peripheral operation current. When PCC = 00H. When X1 oscillator is stopped. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 with POC-OFF selected by a mask option. When POC-OFF (including LVIE = 0) is selected by a mask option and Ring-OSC oscillation is stopped. When the REGC pin is connected directly to VDD. When the REGC pin is connected to VSS via a capacitor (1 F: recommended). Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 428 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) AC Characteristics (1) Basic operation (TA = -40 to +85C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Instruction cycle (minimum instruction execution time) Symbol TCY Main system clock operation Ring-OSC clock Subsystem clock operation TI000, TI010 input high-level width, low-level width tTIH0, tTIL0 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V TI50, TI51 input frequency fTI5 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V TI50, TI51 input high-level width, tTIH5, low-level width Interrupt input high-level width, low-level width Key return input low-level width tTIL5 tINTH, tINTL tKR 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V RESET low-level width tRSL 50 100 10 ns ns 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 50 100 1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V X1 input clock Conditions Note 1 Note 2 MIN. 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.238 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.2 TYP. MAX. 16 16 16 16 8.33 122 16.67 125 Unit s s s s s s s s 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.238 2.7 V VDD < 3.3 V 0.4 4.17 114 2/fsam + 0.1 Note 3 2/fsam + 0.2 Note 3 10 5 MHz ns ns s s Notes 1. 2. 3. When the REGC pin is connected to VSS via a capacitor (1 F: recommended). When the REGC pin is connected directly to VDD. Selection of fsam = fXP, fXP/4 or fXP/256 is possible using bits 0 and 1 (PRM000, PRM001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). Note that when selecting the TI000 valid edge as the count clock, fsam = fXP. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 429 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) TCY vs. VDD (X1 Input Clock Operation) (a) When REGC pin is connected to VSS via capacitor (1 F: recommended) 20.0 16.0 10.0 Cycle time TCY [ s] 5.0 2.0 1.0 Guaranteed operation range 0.4 0.238 0.2 0.1 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 Supply voltage VDD [V] (b) When REGC pin is connected directly to VDD 20.0 16.0 10.0 Cycle time TCY [ s] 5.0 2.0 1.0 Guaranteed operation range 0.4 0.238 0.2 0.1 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 2.7 3.3 4.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 Supply voltage VDD [V] 430 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (2) Serial interface (TA = -40 to +85C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (a) UART mode (UART6, dedicated baud rate generator output) Parameter Transfer rate Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. 312.5 Unit kbps (b) UART mode (UART0, dedicated baud rate generator output) Parameter Transfer rate Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. 312.5 Unit kbps (c) 3-wire serial I/O mode (master mode, SCK10... internal clock output) Parameter SCK10 cycle time Symbol tKCY1 Conditions 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 2.7 V VDD < 3.3 V SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH1, tKL1 SI10 setup time (to SCK10) SI10 hold time (from SCK10) Delay time from SCK10 to SO10 output tSIK1 tKSI1 tKSO1 C = 100 pF Note MIN. 200 240 400 tKCY1/2 - 10 30 30 TYP. MAX. Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns 30 ns Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK10 and SO10 output lines. (d) 3-wire serial I/O mode (slave mode, SCK10... external clock input) Parameter SCK10 cycle time SCK10 high-/low-level width Symbol tKCY2 tKH2, tKL2 SI10 setup time (to SCK10) SI10 hold time (from SCK10) Delay time from SCK10 to SO10 output tSIK2 tKSI2 tKSO2 C = 100 pF Note Conditions MIN. 400 tKCY2/2 TYP. MAX. Unit ns ns 80 50 120 ns ns ns Note C is the load capacitance of the SO10 output line. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 431 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) AC Timing Test Points (Excluding X1 Input) 0.8VDD 0.2VDD 0.8VDD 0.2VDD Test points Clock Timing 1/fXP tXPL tXPH X1 input VIH6 (MIN.) VIL6 (MAX.) 1/fXT tXTL tXTH VIH6 (MIN.) VIL6 (MAX.) XT1 input TI Timing tTIL0 tTIH0 TI00, TI010 1/fTI5 tTIL5 tTIH5 TI50, TI51 Interrupt Request Input Timing tINTL tINTH INTP0 to INTP6 432 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) RESET Input Timing tRSL RESET Serial Transfer Timing 3-wire serial I/O mode: tKCYm tKLm tKHm SCK10 tSIKm tKSIm SI10 Input data tKSOm SO10 Output data Remark m = 1, 2 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 433 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) A/D Converter Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Resolution Overall error Notes 1, 2 Symbol Conditions MIN. 10 TYP. 10 0.2 0.3 MAX. 10 0.4 0.6 100 100 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 2.5 4.5 1.5 2.0 Unit bit %FSR %FSR 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 2.7 V AVREF < 4.0 V Conversion time tCONV 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 2.7 V AVREF < 4.0 V 14 17 s s %FSR %FSR %FSR %FSR LSB LSB LSB LSB V Zero-scale error Notes 1, 2 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 2.7 V AVREF < 4.0 V Full-scale error Notes 1, 2 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 2.7 V AVREF < 4.0 V Integral non-linearity error Note 1 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 2.7 V AVREF < 4.0 V Differential non-linearity error Note 1 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 2.7 V AVREF < 4.0 V Analog input voltage VIAN AVSS AVREF Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. POC Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C) Parameter Detection voltage Symbol VPOC0 VPOC1 Power supply rise time tPTH Conditions Mask option = 3.5 V Note 1 MIN. 3.3 2.7 0.0015 0.002 TYP. 3.5 2.85 MAX. 3.7 3.0 Unit V V ms ms Mask option = 2.85 V VDD: 0 V 2.7 V VDD: 0 V 3.3 V Note 2 Response delay time 1 Response delay time 2 Minimum pulse width Note 3 tPTHD tPD tPW When power supply rises, after reaching detection voltage (MAX.) When VDD falls 0.2 3.0 1.0 ms ms ms Note 3 Notes 1. When flash memory version PD78F0124M5, 78F0124M6, 78F0124M5(A), or 78F0124M6(A) is used 2. When flash memory version PD78F0124M3, 78F0124M4, 78F0124M3(A), or 78F0124M4(A) is used 3. Time required from voltage detection to reset release. POC Circuit Timing Supply voltage (VDD) Detection voltage (MAX.) Detection voltage (TYP.) Detection voltage (MIN.) tPW tPTH tPTHD tPD Time 434 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) LVI Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C) Parameter Detection voltage Symbol VLVI0 VLVI1 VLVI2 VLVI3 VLVI4 VLVI5 VLVI6 Response time Note 1 Conditions MIN. 4.1 3.9 3.7 3.5 3.3 3.15 2.95 TYP. 4.3 4.1 3.9 3.7 3.5 3.3 3.1 0.2 MAX. 4.5 4.3 4.1 3.9 3.7 3.45 3.25 2.0 Unit V V V V V V V ms ms tLD tLW 0.2 Minimum pulse width Note 2 Reference voltage stabilization wait tLWAIT0 time Note 3 0.5 2.0 ms Operation stabilization wait time tLWAIT1 0.1 0.2 ms Notes 1. 2. Time required from voltage detection to interrupt output or internal reset output. Time required from setting LVIE to 1 to reference voltage stabilization when POC-OFF is selected by the POC mask option (when flash memory version PD78F0124M1, 78F0124M2, 78F0124M1(A), or 78F0124M2(A) is used). 3. Time required from setting LVION to 1 to operation stabilization. Remarks 1. VLVI0 > VLVI1 > VLVI2 > VLVI3 > VLVI4 > VLVI5 > VLVI6 2. VPOCn < VLVIm (n = 0 or 1, m = 0 to 6) LVI Circuit Timing Supply voltage (VDD) Detection voltage (MAX.) Detection voltage (TYP.) Detection voltage (MIN.) tLW tWAIT0 tWAIT1 tLD LVIE 1 LVION 1 Time Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C) Parameter Data retention supply voltage Symbol VDDDR Note Conditions When POC-OFF is selected by mask option MIN. 1.6 TYP. MAX. 5.5 Unit V Release signal set time tSREL 0 s Note When flash memory version PD78F0124M1, 78F0124M2, 78F0124M1(A), or 78F0124M2(A) is used User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 435 CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Flash Memory Programming Characteristics: PD78F0124, 78F0124(A) (TA = +10 to +60C, 2.7 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (1) Write erase characteristics Parameter VPP supply voltage VDD supply current VPP supply current Step erase time Note 1 Symbol VPP2 IDD IPP Ter Tera Twb Cwb Conditions During flash memory programming When VPP = VPP2, fXP = 10 MHz, VDD = 5.5 V VPP = VPP2 MIN. 9.7 TYP. 10.0 MAX. 10.3 37 100 Unit V mA mA s s/chip ms Times 0.199 When step erase time = 0.2 s 49.4 When writeback time = 50 ms 0.2 0.201 20 Overall erase time Writeback time Note 2 Note 3 50 50.6 60 Number of writebacks per 1 writeback command Note 4 Number of erases/writebacks Step write time Note 5 Cerwb Twr 48 When step write time = 50 s (1 word = 1 byte) 1 erase + 1 write after erase = 1 rewrite 48 50 16 52 520 Times s s Times/ area Overall write time per word Note 6 Twrw Number of rewrites per chip Note 7 Cerwr 20 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The recommended setting value of the step erase time is 0.2 s. The prewrite time before erasure and the erase verify time (writeback time) are not included. The recommended setting value of the writeback time is 50 ms. Writeback is executed once by the issuance of the writeback command. Therefore, the number of retries must be the maximum value minus the number of commands issued. The recommended setting value of the step write time is 50 s. The actual write time per word is 100 s longer. The internal verify time during or after a write is not included. When a product is first written after shipment, "erase write" and "write only" are both taken as one rewrite. Example: P: Write, E: Erase Shipped product P E P E P: 3 rewrites Shipped product E P E P E P: 3 rewrites Remark The range of the operating clock during flash memory programming is the same as the range during normal operation. 436 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (2) Serial write operation characteristics Parameter Set time from VDD to VPP Symbol tDP Conditions MIN. 10 10 2 TYP. MAX. Unit s s ms Release time from VPP to RESET tPR VPP pulse input start time from RESET VPP pulse high-/low-level width VPP pulse input end time from RESET VPP pulse low-level input voltage VPP pulse high-level input voltage VPPL VPPH tPW tRPE tRP 8 14 s ms 0.8VDD 9.7 10.0 1.2VDD 10.3 V V Flash Write Mode Setting Timing VDD VDD 0V VPPH VPP VPPL 0V tPR tRPE VDD RESET (input) 0V tPW tDP tRP tPW User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 437 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) Target products: PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1), 78F0124(A1) Caution Be sure to connect the REGC pin of (A1) grade products directly to VDD. Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (1/2) Parameter Supply voltage Symbol VDD EVDD REGC VSS EVSS AVREF AVSS VPP Input voltage VI1 Conditions Ratings -0.3 to +6.5 -0.3 to +6.5 -0.3 to +6.5 -0.3 to +0.3 -0.3 to +0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to +0.3 Note 1 Unit V V V V V V V V Note 1 PD78F0124(A1) only, Note 2 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P130, P140, X1, X2, XT1, XT2, RESET -0.3 to +10.5 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V VI2 P62, P63 N-ch open drain On-chip pull-up resistor -0.3 to +13 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to +10.5 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 Note 1 Note 1 V V V VI3 VPP in flash programming mode (PD78F0124(A1) only) Output voltage Analog input voltage VO VAN V Note 1 AVSS - 0.3 to AVREF + 0.3 and -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 Per pin Total of all pins -48 mA P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 -24 -8 -24 V Note 1 Output current, high IOH mA mA mA Note 1. Must be 6.5 V or lower. (Refer to Note 2 on the next page.) Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. 438 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (2/2) Parameter Output current, low Symbol IOL Per pin Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P130, P140 P60 to P63 Total of all pins 56 mA P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 Operating ambient temperature TA 28 -40 to +110 -10 to +105 -10 to +85 -65 to +150 -40 to +125 C mA C 24 28 mA mA Ratings 16 Unit mA PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) PD78F0124(A1) In normal operation mode In flash memory programming mode Storage temperature Tstg PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) PD78F0124(A1) Note 2. Make sure that the following conditions of the VPP voltage application timing are satisfied when the flash memory is written. * When supply voltage rises VPP must exceed VDD 10 s or more after VDD has reached the lower-limit value (3.3 V) of the operating voltage range (see a in the figure below). * When supply voltage drops VDD must be lowered 10 s or more after VPP falls below the lower-limit value (3.3 V) of the operating voltage range of VDD (see b in the figure below). 3.3 V 0V a b VDD VPP 3.3 V 0V Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 439 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) X1 Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110CNote 1, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Resonator Ceramic resonator Note 2 Recommended Circuit Parameter Oscillation frequency (fXP) Note 3 Conditions 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD < 4.5 V MIN. 2.0 2.0 2.0 TYP. MAX. 10 8.38 5.0 Unit MHz VSS X1 X2 C1 C2 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V Crystal resonator Note 2 VSS X1 X2 Oscillation frequency (fXP) Note 3 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD < 4.5 V 2.0 2.0 2.0 10 8.38 5.0 MHz C1 C2 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V External clock Note 2 X1 input frequency (fXP) X1 X2 Note 3 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD < 4.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 2.0 2.0 46 56 96 10 8.38 5.0 500 500 500 MHz X1 input high-/low-level width (tXPH, tXPL) 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD < 4.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V ns Notes 1. 2. 3. TA = -40 to +110C: PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) TA = -40 to +105C: PD78F0124(A1) Connect the REGC pin directly to VDD. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time. Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. Since the CPU is started by the Ring-OSC after reset is released, check the oscillation stabilization time of the X1 input clock using the oscillation stabilization time status register (OSTC). Determine the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTC register and oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization time with the resonator to be used. Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation. 440 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) Ring-OSC Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110CNote, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Resonator On-chip Ring-OSC oscillator Parameter Oscillation frequency (fR) Conditions MIN. 120 TYP. 240 MAX. 490 Unit kHz Note TA = -40 to +110C: PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) TA = -40 to +105C: PD78F0124(A1) Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110CNote 1, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Resonator Crystal resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Oscillation frequency (fXT) Note 2 Conditions MIN. 32 TYP. 32.768 MAX. 35 Unit kHz VSS XT2 Rd C4 XT1 C3 External clock XT2 XT1 XT1 input frequency (fXT) Note 2 32 38.5 kHz XT1 input high-/low-level width (tXTH, tXTL) 12 15 s Notes 1. 2. TA = -40 to +110C: PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) TA = -40 to +105C: PD78F0124(A1) Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time. Cautions 1. When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the X1 oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem clock is used. Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 441 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (1/6): PD78F0124(A1) (TA = -40 to +105C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Output current, high Symbol IOH Per pin Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 Total of all pins 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V Output current, low IOL Per pin for P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P130, P140 Per pin for P60 to P63 Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 Total of all pins 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V Input voltage, high VIH1 VIH2 P12, P13, P15 P00 to P03, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VIH3 VIH4 VIH5 VIH6 Input voltage, low VIL1 VIL2 P20 to P27 P60, P61 P62, P63 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 P12, P13, P15 P00 to P03, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VIL3 VIL4 VIL5 VIL6 P20 to P27 P60, P61 P62, P63 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 Note Note Conditions 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V MIN. TYP. MAX. -4 -20 -20 -25 -8 8 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 12 24 mA mA 24 mA 30 8 0.7VDD 0.8VDD VDD VDD mA mA V V 0.7AVREF 0.7VDD N-ch open drain 0.7VDD VDD - 0.5 0 0 AVREF VDD 12 VDD 0.3VDD 0.2VDD V V V V V V 0 0 0 0 0.3AVREF 0.3VDD 0.3VDD 0.4 V V V V Note When used as digital input ports, set AVREF = VDD. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. 442 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (2/6): PD78F0124(A1) (TA = -40 to +105C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Output voltage, high Symbol VOH Conditions Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 IOH = -20 mA Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 IOH = -20 mA IOH = -100 A Output voltage, low VOL1 Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 IOL = 24 mA Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 IOL = 24 mA IOL = 400 A VOL2 Input leakage current, high ILIH1 P60 to P63 VI = VDD 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V IOL = 12 mA P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VI = AVREF ILIH2 ILIH3 Input leakage current, low ILIL1 VI = VDD VI = 12 V VI = 0 V P20 to P27 X1, X2 Note 1 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, VDD - 1.0 IOH = -4 mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, VDD - 1.0 IOH = -4 mA 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, IOL = 8 mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, IOL = 8 mA VDD - 0.5 1.3 V V V 1.3 V 0.4 2.0 10 V V A 10 Note 1 A A A A , XT1, XT2 20 20 -10 P62, P63 (N-ch open drain) P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET Note 1 Note 1 ILIL2 ILIL3 Output leakage current, high ILOH Output leakage current, low Pull-up resistance value VPP supply voltage ILOL RL VPP1 VO = VDD VO = 0 V VI = 0 V X1, X2 , XT1, XT2 -20 -10 Note 2 A A A A k V P62, P63 (N-ch open drain) 10 -10 10 0 30 120 0.2VDD In normal operation mode Notes 1. 2. When the inverse level of X1 is input to X2 and the inverse level of XT1 is input to XT2. If port 6 has been set to input mode when a read instruction is executed to read from port 6, a low-level input leakage current of up to -55 A flows during only one cycle. At all other times, the maximum leakage current is -10 A. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 443 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (3/6): PD78F0124(A1) (TA = -40 to +105C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Supply current Note 1 Symbol IDD1 X1 crystal oscillation operating mode IDD2 Note 2 Conditions fXP = 10 MHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% Note 3 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit When A/D converter is stopped When A/D converter is operating Note 7 12.3 13.3 22.7 24.7 mA mA X1 crystal oscillation HALT mode fXP = 10 MHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% When peripheral functions are stopped When peripheral functions are operating 1.5 4.2 mA 8.1 mA IDD3 Ring-OSC operating mode Note 4 VDD = 5.0 V 10% 0.4 2.8 mA IDD4 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation operating mode Notes 4, 6 VDD = 5.0 V 10% 100 1400 A IDD5 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation HALT mode Notes 4, 6 VDD = 5.0 V 10% 20 1200 A IDD6 STOP mode VDD = 5.0 V 10% POC: OFF, RING: OFF POC: OFF, RING: ON POC: ON Note 5 0.1 14 3.5 1200 1300 1200 A A A A , RING: OFF , RING: ON POC: ON Note 5 17.5 1300 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included (however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not included). IDD1 includes peripheral operation current. When PCC = 00H. When X1 oscillator is stopped. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 in the PD78F0124M1(A1) and 78F0124M2(A1). When the PD78F0124M1(A1) and 78F0124M2(A1) (including LVIE = 0) are selected and Ring-OSC oscillation is stopped. Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin. 444 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (4/6): PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), and 780124(A1) (TA = -40 to +110C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Output current, high Symbol IOH Per pin Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 Total of all pins Output current, low IOL Per pin for P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P130, P140 Per pin for P60 to P63 Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 Total of all pins Input voltage, high VIH1 VIH2 P12, P13, P15 P00 to P03, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VIH3 VIH4 VIH5 P20 to P27 P60, P61 P62, P63 N-ch open drain On-chip pull-up resistor VIH6 Input voltage, low VIL1 VIL2 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 P12, P13, P15 P00 to P03, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VIL3 VIL4 VIL5 VIL6 P20 to P27 P60, P61 P62, P63 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 Note Note Conditions 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V MIN. TYP. MAX. -4 -20 -20 -8 8 Unit mA mA mA mA mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 12 24 mA mA 24 mA 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.7VDD 0.8VDD 8 VDD VDD mA V V 0.7AVREF 0.7VDD 0.7VDD 0.7VDD VDD - 0.5 0 0 AVREF VDD 12 VDD VDD 0.3VDD 0.2VDD V V V V V V V 0 0 0 0 0.3AVREF 0.3VDD 0.3VDD 0.4 V V V V Note When used as digital input ports, set AVREF = VDD. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 445 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (5/6): PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), and 780124(A1) (TA = -40 to +110C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Output voltage, high Symbol VOH Conditions Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 IOH = -20 mA Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 IOH = -20 mA IOH = -100 A Output voltage, low VOL1 Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 IOL = 24 mA Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 IOL = 24 mA IOL = 400 A VOL2 Input leakage current, high ILIH1 P60 to P63 VI = VDD 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V IOL = 12 mA P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VI = AVREF ILIH2 ILIH3 Input leakage current, low ILIL1 VI = VDD VI = 12 V VI = 0 V P20 to P27 X1, X2 Note 1 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, VDD - 1.0 IOH = -4 mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, VDD - 1.0 IOH = -4 mA 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, IOL = 8 mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, IOL = 8 mA VDD - 0.5 1.3 V V V 1.3 V 0.4 2.0 10 V V A 10 Note 1 A A A A , XT1, XT2 20 20 -10 P62, P63 (N-ch open drain) P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET Note 1 Note 1 ILIL2 ILIL3 Output leakage current, high ILOH Output leakage current, low Pull-up resistance value ILOL RL VO = VDD VO = 0 V VI = 0 V X1, X2 , XT1, XT2 -20 -10 Note 2 A A A A k P62, P63 (N-ch open drain) 10 -10 10 30 120 Notes 1. 2. When the inverse level of X1 is input to X2 and the inverse level of XT1 is input to XT2. If no pull-up resistors are connected to P62 and P63 (specified by mask option) and port 6 has been set to input mode when a read instruction is executed to read from port 6, a low-level input leakage current of up to -55 A flows during only one cycle. At all other times, the maximum leakage current is -10 A. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. 446 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (6/6): PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), and 780124(A1) (TA = -40 to +110C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Supply current Note 1 Symbol IDD1 X1 crystal oscillation operating mode IDD2 Note 2 Conditions fXP = 10 MHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% Note 3 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit When A/D converter is stopped When A/D converter is operating Note 7 6.3 7.3 13.1 15.1 mA mA X1 crystal oscillation HALT mode fXP = 10 MHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% When peripheral functions are stopped When peripheral functions are operating 1.4 3.7 mA 6.8 mA IDD3 Ring-OSC operating mode Note 4 VDD = 5.0 V 10% 0.22 1.78 mA IDD4 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation operating mode Notes 4, 6 VDD = 5.0 V 10% 31 1000 A IDD5 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation HALT mode Notes 4, 6 VDD = 5.0 V 10% 20 900 A IDD6 STOP mode VDD = 5.0 V 10% POC: OFF, RING: OFF POC: OFF, RING: ON POC: ON Note 5 0.1 14 3.5 900 1000 900 A A A A , RING: OFF , RING: ON POC: ON Note 5 17.5 1000 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included (however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not included). IDD1 includes peripheral operation current. When PCC = 00H. When X1 oscillator is stopped. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 with POC-OFF selected by a mask option. When POC-OFF (including LVIE = 0) is selected by a mask option and Ring-OSC oscillation is stopped. Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 447 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) AC Characteristics (1) Basic operation (TA = -40 to +110CNote 1, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Instruction cycle (minimum instruction execution time) Symbol TCY Main system clock operation X1 input clock Conditions 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD < 4.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V Ring-OSC clock Subsystem clock operation TI000, TI010 input high-level width, low-level width tTIH0, tTIL0 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V TI50, TI51 input frequency fTI5 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V TI50, TI51 input high-level width, tTIH5, low-level width Interrupt input high-level width, low-level width Key return input low-level width tTIL5 tINTH, tINTL tKR 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V RESET low-level width tRSL 50 100 10 ns ns 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 50 100 1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V MIN. 0.2 0.238 0.4 4.09 114 2/fsam + 0.1 Note 2 TYP. MAX. 16 16 16 Unit s s s s s s s 8.33 122 16.67 125 2/fsam + 0.2 Note 2 10 5 MHz MHz ns ns s s Notes 1. 2. TA = -40 to +110C: PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) TA = -40 to +105C: PD78F0124(A1) Selection of fsam = fXP, fXP/4, or fXP/256 is possible using bits 0 and 1 (PRM000, PRM001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). Note that when selecting the TI000 valid edge as the count clock, fsam = fXP. 448 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) TCY vs. VDD (X1 Input Clock Operation) 20.0 16.0 10.0 Cycle time TCY [ s] 5.0 2.0 1.0 Guaranteed operation range 0.4 0.238 0.2 0.1 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.3 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 Supply voltage VDD [V] User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 449 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) (2) Serial interface (TA = -40 to +110CNote, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Note TA = -40 to +110C: PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) TA = -40 to +105C: PD78F0124(A1) (a) UART mode (UART6, dedicated baud rate generator output) Parameter Transfer rate Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. 312.5 Unit kbps (b) UART mode (UART0, dedicated baud rate generator output) Parameter Transfer rate Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. 312.5 Unit kbps (c) 3-wire serial I/O mode (master mode, SCK10... internal clock output) Parameter SCK10 cycle time Symbol tKCY1 Conditions 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD < 4.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH1, tKL1 SI10 setup time (to SCK10) SI10 hold time (from SCK10) Delay time from SCK10 to SO10 output tSIK1 tKSI1 tKSO1 C = 100 pF Note MIN. 200 240 400 tKCY1/2 - 10 30 30 TYP. MAX. Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns 30 ns Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK10 and SO10 output lines. (d) 3-wire serial I/O mode (slave mode, SCK10... external clock input) Parameter SCK10 cycle time SCK10 high-/low-level width Symbol tKCY2 tKH2, tKL2 SI10 setup time (to SCK10) SI10 hold time (from SCK10) Delay time from SCK10 to SO10 output tSIK2 tKSI2 tKSO2 C = 100 pF Note Conditions MIN. 400 tKCY2/2 TYP. MAX. Unit ns ns 80 50 120 ns ns ns Note C is the load capacitance of the SO10 output line. 450 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) AC Timing Test Points (Excluding X1 Input) 0.8VDD 0.2VDD Test points 0.8VDD 0.2VDD Clock Timing 1/fXP tXPL tXPH X1 input VIH6 (MIN.) VIL6 (MAX.) 1/fXT tXTL tXTH VIH6 (MIN.) VIL6 (MAX.) XT1 input TI Timing tTIL0 tTIH0 TI000, TI0100 1/fTI5 tTIL5 tTIH5 TI50, TI51 Interrupt Request Input Timing tINTL tINTH INTP0 to INTP6 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 451 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) RESET Input Timing tRSL RESET Serial Transfer Timing 3-wire serial I/O mode: tKCYm tKLm tKHm SCK10 tSIKm tKSIm SI10 Input data tKSOm SO10 Output data Remark m = 1, 2 452 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) A/D Converter Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110CNote 1, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Resolution Overall error Notes 2, 3 Symbol Conditions MIN. 10 TYP. 10 0.2 0.3 MAX. 10 0.6 0.8 60 60 0.6 0.8 0.6 0.8 4.5 6.5 2.0 2.5 Unit bit %FSR %FSR 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V Conversion time tCONV 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V 14 19 s s %FSR %FSR %FSR %FSR LSB LSB LSB LSB V Zero-scale error Notes 2, 3 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V Full-scale error Notes 2, 3 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V Integral non-linearity error Note 2 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V Differential non-linearity error Note 2 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V Analog input voltage VAIN AVSS AVREF Notes 1. TA = -40 to +110C: PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) TA = -40 to +105C: PD78F0124(A1) 2. 3. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. POC Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110CNote 1) Parameter Detection voltage Power supply rise time Response delay time 1 Response delay time 2 Minimum pulse width Note 3 Symbol VPOC0 tPTH tPTHD tPD tPW Conditions Mask option = 3.5 V VDD: 0 V 3.3 V When power supply rises, after reaching detection voltage (MAX.) When VDD falls Note 2 MIN. 3.3 0.002 TYP. 3.5 MAX. 3.72 Unit V ms 3.0 1.0 0.2 ms ms ms Note 3 Notes 1. TA = -40 to +110C: PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) TA = -40 to +105C: PD78F0124(A1) 2. When flash memory version PD78F0124M5(A1) or 78F0124M6(A1) is used 3. Time required from voltage detection to reset release. POC Circuit Timing Supply voltage (VDD) Detection voltage (MAX.) Detection voltage (TYP.) Detection voltage (MIN.) tPW tPTH tPTHD tPD Time User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 453 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) LVI Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110CNote 1) Parameter Detection voltage Symbol VLVI0 VLVI1 VLVI2 VLVI3 VLVI4 Response time Note 2 Conditions MIN. 4.1 3.9 3.7 3.5 3.3 TYP. 4.3 4.1 3.9 3.7 3.5 0.2 MAX. 4.52 4.32 4.12 3.92 3.72 2.0 Unit V V V V V ms ms tLD tLW 0.2 Minimum pulse width Reference voltage stabilization wait tLWAIT0 Note 3 time Operation stabilization wait time Note 4 0.5 2.0 ms tLWAIT1 0.1 0.2 ms Notes 1. TA = -40 to +110C: PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) TA = -40 to +105C: PD78F0124(A1) 2. 3. 4. Time required from voltage detection to interrupt output or internal reset output. Time required from setting LVIE to 1 to reference voltage stabilization when POC-OFF is selected by mask option (when flash memory version PD78F0124M1(A1) or 78F0124M2(A1) is used). Time required from setting LVION to 1 to operation stabilization. Remarks 1. VLVI0 > VLVI1 > VLVI2 > VLVI3 > VLVI4 2. VPOCn < VLVIm (n = 0 or 1, m = 0 to 4) LVI Circuit Timing Supply voltage (VDD) Detection voltage (MAX.) Detection voltage (TYP.) Detection voltage (MIN.) tLW tWAIT0 tWAIT1 tLD LVIE 1 LVION 1 Time Note 1 Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110C Parameter Data retention supply voltage Symbol VDDDR Note 2 ) Unit V Conditions When POC-OFF is selected by mask option MIN. 2.0 TYP. MAX. 5.5 Release signal set time tSREL 0 s Notes 1. TA = -40 to +110C: PD780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) TA = -40 to +105C: PD78F0124(A1) 2. When flash memory version PD78F0124M1(A1) or 78F0124M2(A1) is used 454 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) Flash Memory Programming Characteristics: PD78F0124(A1) (TA = +10 to +60C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (1) Write erase characteristics Parameter VPP supply voltage VDD supply current VPP supply current Step erase time Note 1 Symbol VPP2 IDD IPP Ter Tera Twb Cwb Conditions During flash memory programming When VPP = VPP2, fXP = 10 MHz, VDD = 5.5 V VPP = VPP2 MIN. 9.7 TYP. 10.0 MAX. 10.3 37 100 Unit V mA mA s s/chip ms Times 0.199 When step erase time = 0.2 s 49.4 When writeback time = 50 ms 0.2 0.201 20 Overall erase time Writeback time Note 2 Note 3 50 50.6 60 Number of writebacks per 1 writeback command Note 4 Number of erases/writebacks Step write time Note 5 Cerwb Twr 48 When step write time = 50 s (1 word = 1 byte) 1 erase + 1 write after erase = 1 rewrite 48 50 16 52 520 Times s s Times/ area Overall write time per word Note 6 Twrw Number of rewrites per chip Note 7 Cerwr 20 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The recommended setting value of the step erase time is 0.2 s. The prewrite time before erasure and the erase verify time (writeback time) are not included. The recommended setting value of the writeback time is 50 ms. Writeback is executed once by the issuance of the writeback command. Therefore, the number of retries must be the maximum value minus the number of commands issued. The recommended setting value of the step write time is 50 s. The actual write time per word is 100 s longer. The internal verify time during or after a write is not included. When a product is first written after shipment, "erase write" and "write only" are both taken as one rewrite. Example: P: Write, E: Erase Shipped product P E P E P: 3 rewrites Shipped product E P E P E P: 3 rewrites Remark The range of the operating clock during flash memory programming is the same as the range during normal operation. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 455 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) (2) Serial write operation characteristics Parameter Set time from VDD to VPP Symbol tDP Conditions MIN. 10 10 2 TYP. MAX. Unit s s ms Release time from VPP to RESET tPR VPP pulse input start time from RESET VPP pulse high-/low-level width VPP pulse input end time from RESET VPP pulse low-level input voltage VPP pulse high-level input voltage VPPL VPPH tPW tRPE tRP 8 14 s ms 0.8VDD 9.7 10.0 1.2VDD 10.3 V V Flash Write Mode Setting Timing VDD VDD 0V VPPH VPP VPPL 0V tPR tRPE VDD RESET (input) 0V tPW tDP tRP tPW 456 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) Target products: PD780121(A2), 780122(A2), 780123(A2), 780124(A2) Caution Be sure to connect the REGC pin of (A2) grade products directly to VDD. Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (1/2) Parameter Supply voltage Symbol VDD EVDD REGC VSS EVSS AVREF AVSS Input voltage VI1 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P130, P140, X1, X2, XT1, XT2, RESET VI2 P62, P63 N-ch open drain On-chip pull-up resistor Output voltage Analog input voltage VO VAN -0.3 to +13 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 Note Conditions Ratings -0.3 to +6.5 -0.3 to +6.5 -0.3 to +6.5 -0.3 to +0.3 -0.3 to +0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to +0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 Note Note Unit V V V V V V V V V V V Note Note AVSS - 0.3 to AVREF + 0.3 and -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 Per pin Total of all pins -42 mA P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 -21 -7 -21 V Note Output current, high IOH mA mA mA Note Must be 6.5 V or lower. Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 457 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (2/2) Parameter Output current, low Symbol IOL Per pin Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P130, P140 P60 to P63 Total of all pins 49 mA P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 Operating ambient temperature Storage temperature Tstg -65 to +150 C TA In normal operation mode -40 to +125 C 24.5 mA 21 24.5 mA mA Ratings 14 Unit mA Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. 458 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) X1 Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Resonator Ceramic resonator Note 2 Recommended Circuit Parameter Oscillation frequency (fXP) Note 1 Conditions 4.0 V VDD < 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V MIN. 2.0 2.0 TYP. MAX. 8.38 5.0 Unit MHz VSS X1 X2 C1 C2 Crystal resonator Note 2 VSS X1 X2 Oscillation frequency (fXP) Note 1 4.0 V VDD < 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 2.0 8.38 5.0 MHz C1 C2 External clock Note 2 X1 X2 X1 input frequency (fXP) Note 1 4.0 V VDD < 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 V VDD < 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 2.0 56 96 8.38 5.0 500 500 MHz X1 input high-/lowlevel width (tXPH, tXPL) ns Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time. 2. Connect the REGC pin directly to VDD. Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. Since the CPU is started by the Ring-OSC after reset is released, check the oscillation stabilization time of the X1 input clock using the oscillation stabilization time status register (OSTC). Determine the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTC register and oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization time with the resonator to be used. Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 459 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) Ring-OSC Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Resonator On-chip Ring-OSC oscillator Parameter Oscillation frequency (fR) Conditions MIN. 120 TYP. 240 MAX. 495 Unit kHz Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Resonator Crystal resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Oscillation frequency (fXT) Note Conditions MIN. 32 TYP. 32.768 MAX. 35 Unit kHz VSS XT2 Rd C4 XT1 C3 External clock XT2 XT1 XT1 input frequency (fXT) Note 32 38.5 kHz XT1 input high-/low-level width (tXTH, tXTL) 12 15 s Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time. Cautions 1. When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the X1 oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem clock is used. Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation. 460 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (1/3) (TA = -40 to +125C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Output current, high Symbol IOH Per pin Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 Total of all pins Output current, low IOL Per pin for P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P130, P140 Per pin for P60 to P63 Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 Total of all pins Input voltage, high VIH1 VIH2 P12, P13, P15 P00 to P03, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VIH3 VIH4 VIH5 P20 to P27 P60, P61 P62, P63 N-ch open drain On-chip pull-up resistor VIH6 Input voltage, low VIL1 VIL2 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 P12, P13, P15 P00 to P03, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VIL3 VIL4 VIL5 VIL6 P20 to P27 P60, P61 P62, P63 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 Note Note Conditions 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V MIN. TYP. MAX. -3.5 -17.5 -17.5 -7 7 Unit mA mA mA mA mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 10.5 21 mA mA 21 mA 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.7VDD 0.8VDD 7 VDD VDD mA V V 0.7AVREF 0.75VDD 0.7VDD 0.7VDD VDD - 0.5 0 0 AVREF VDD 12 VDD VDD 0.3VDD 0.2VDD V V V V V V V 0 0 0 0 0.3AVREF 0.25VDD 0.3VDD 0.4 V V V V Note When used as digital input ports, set AVREF = VDD. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 461 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (2/3) (TA = -40 to +125C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Output voltage, high Symbol VOH Conditions Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 IOH = -17.5 mA Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130, P140 IOH = -17.5 mA IOH = -100 A Output voltage, low VOL1 Total of P00 to P03, P10 to P14, P70 to P77 IOL = 21 mA Total of P15 to P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63, P120, P130, P140 IOL = 21 mA IOL = 400 A VOL2 Input leakage current, high ILIH1 P60 to P63 VI = VDD 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V IOL = 10.5 mA P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET VI = AVREF ILIH2 ILIH3 Input leakage current, low ILIL1 VI = VDD VI = 12 V VI = 0 V P20 to P27 X1, X2 Note 1 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, VDD - 1.0 IOH = -3.5 mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, VDD - 1.0 IOH = -3.5 mA 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, IOL = 7 mA 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, IOL = 7 mA VDD - 0.5 1.3 V V V 1.3 V 0.4 2.0 10 V V A 10 Note 1 A A A A , XT1, XT2 20 40 -10 P62, P63 (N-ch open drain) P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P77, P120, P140, RESET Note 1 Note 1 ILIL2 ILIL3 Output leakage current, high ILOH Output leakage current, low Pull-up resistance value ILOL RL VO = VDD VO = 0 V VI = 0 V X1, X2 , XT1, XT2 -20 -10 Note 2 A A A A k P62, P63 (N-ch open drain) 10 -10 10 30 120 Notes 1. 2. When the inverse level of X1 is input to X2 and the inverse level of XT1 is input to XT2. If there is no on-chip pull-up resistor for P62 and P63 (specified by a mask option) and if port 6 has been set to input mode when a read instruction is executed to read from port 6, a low-level input leakage current of up to -55 A flows during only one cycle. At all other times, the maximum leakage current is -10 A. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins. 462 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (3/3) (TA = -40 to +125C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Supply current Note 1 Symbol IDD1 X1 crystal oscillation operating mode IDD2 Note 2 Conditions fXP = 8.38 MHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% Note 3 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit When A/D converter is stopped When A/D converter is operating Note 7 5.5 6.5 11.9 13.9 mA mA X1 crystal oscillation HALT mode fXP = 8.38 MHz VDD = 5.0 V 10% Note 3 When peripheral functions are stopped When peripheral functions are operating 1.3 4.0 mA 6.7 mA IDD3 Ring-OSC operating mode Note 4 VDD = 5.0 V 10% 0.22 2.28 mA IDD4 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation operating mode Notes 4, 6 VDD = 5.0 V 10% 31 1500 A IDD5 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation HALT mode Notes 4, 6 VDD = 5.0 V 10% 20 1400 A IDD6 STOP mode VDD = 5.0 V 10% POC: OFF, RING: OFF POC: OFF, RING: ON POC: ON Note 5 0.1 14 3.5 1400 1500 1400 A A A A , RING: OFF , RING: ON POC: ON Note 5 17.5 1500 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included (however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not included). IDD1 includes peripheral operation current. When PCC = 00H. When X1 oscillator is stopped. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 with POC-OFF selected by a mask option. When POC-OFF (including LVIE = 0) is selected by a mask option and Ring-OSC oscillation is stopped. Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 463 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) AC Characteristics (1) Basic operation (TA = -40 to +125C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Instruction cycle (minimum instruction execution time) Symbol TCY Main system clock operation X1 input clock Conditions 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V MIN. 0.238 0.4 4.04 114 2/fsam + 0.1 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V TI50, TI51 input frequency fTI5 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V TI50, TI51 input high-level width, tTIH5, low-level width Interrupt input high-level width, low-level width Key return input low-level width tTIL5 tINTH, tINTL tKR 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V RESET low-level width tRSL 59.6 100 10 ns ns 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V 59.6 100 1 Note TYP. MAX. 16 16 Unit s s s s s s Ring-OSC clock 8.33 122 16.67 125 Subsystem clock operation TI000, TI010 input high-level width, low-level width tTIH0, tTIL0 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2/fsam + 0.2 Note 8.38 5 MHz MHz ns ns s s Note Selection of fsam = fXP, fXP/4, or fXP/256 is possible using bits 0 and 1 (PRM000, PRM001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). Note that when selecting the TI000 valid edge as the count clock, fsam = fXP. 464 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) TCY vs. VDD (X1 Input Clock Operation) 20.0 16.0 10.0 Cycle time TCY [ s] 5.0 2.0 1.0 Guaranteed operation range 0.4 0.238 0.2 0.1 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.3 4.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 Supply voltage VDD [V] User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 465 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) (2) Serial interface (TA = -40 to +125C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (a) UART mode (UART6, dedicated baud rate generator output) Parameter Transfer rate Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. 261.9 Unit kbps (b) UART mode (UART0, dedicated baud rate generator output) Parameter Transfer rate Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. 261.9 Unit kbps (c) 3-wire serial I/O mode (master mode, SCK10... internal clock output) Parameter SCK10 cycle time Symbol tKCY1 Conditions 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 3.3 V VDD < 4.0 V SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH1, tKL1 SI10 setup time (to SCK10) SI10 hold time (from SCK10) Delay time from SCK10 to SO10 output tSIK1 tKSI1 tKSO1 C = 100 pF Note MIN. 240 400 tKCY1/2 - 10 30 30 TYP. MAX. Unit ns ns ns ns ns 30 ns Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK10 and SO10 output lines. (d) 3-wire serial I/O mode (slave mode, SCK10... external clock input) Parameter SCK10 cycle time SCK10 high-/low-level width Symbol tKCY2 tKH2, tKL2 SI10 setup time (to SCK10) SI10 hold time (from SCK10) Delay time from SCK10 to SO10 output tSIK2 tKSI2 tKSO2 C = 100 pF Note Conditions MIN. 400 tKCY2/2 TYP. MAX. Unit ns ns 80 50 120 ns ns ns Note C is the load capacitance of the SO10 output line. 466 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) AC Timing Test Points (Excluding X1 Input) 0.8VDD 0.2VDD Test points 0.8VDD 0.2VDD Clock Timing 1/fXP tXPL tXPH X1 input VIH6 (MIN.) VIL6 (MAX.) 1/fXT tXTL tXTH VIH6 (MIN.) VIL6 (MAX.) XT1 input TI Timing tTIL0 tTIH0 TI000, TI010 1/fTI5 tTIL5 tTIH5 TI50, TI51 Interrupt Request Input Timing tINTL tINTH INTP0 to INTP6 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 467 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) RESET Input Timing tRSL RESET Serial Transfer Timing 3-wire serial I/O mode: tKCYm tKLm tKHm SCK10 tSIKm tKSIm SI10 Input data tKSOm SO10 Output data Remark m = 1, 2 468 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) A/D Converter Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 3.3 V VDD = EVDD 5.5 V, 3.3 V AVREF VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Resolution Overall error Notes 1, 2 Symbol Conditions MIN. 10 TYP. 10 0.2 0.3 MAX. 10 0.7 0.9 48 48 0.7 0.9 0.7 0.9 5.5 7.5 2.5 3.0 Unit bit %FSR %FSR 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V Conversion time tCONV 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V 16 19 s s %FSR %FSR %FSR %FSR LSB LSB LSB LSB V Zero-scale error Notes 1, 2 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V Full-scale error Notes 1, 2 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V Integral non-linearity error Note 1 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V Differential non-linearity error Note 1 4.0 V AVREF 5.5 V 3.3 V AVREF < 4.0 V Analog input voltage VIAN AVSS AVREF Notes 1. 2. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. POC Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C) Parameter Detection voltage Power supply rise time Response delay time 1 Note Symbol VPOC0 tPTH tPTHD Conditions Mask option = 3.5 V VDD: 0 V 3.3 V When power supply rises, after reaching detection voltage (MAX.) MIN. 3.3 0.002 TYP. 3.5 MAX. 3.76 Unit V ms 3.0 ms Response delay time 2 Minimum pulse width Note tPD tPW When VDD falls 0.2 1.0 ms ms Note Time required from voltage detection to reset release. POC Circuit Timing Supply voltage (VDD) Detection voltage (MAX.) Detection voltage (TYP.) Detection voltage (MIN.) tPW tPTH tPTHD tPD Time User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 469 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) LVI Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C) Parameter Detection voltage Symbol VLVI0 VLVI1 VLVI2 VLVI3 VLVI4 Response time Note 1 Conditions MIN. 4.1 3.9 3.7 3.5 3.3 TYP. 4.3 4.1 3.9 3.7 3.5 0.2 MAX. 4.56 4.36 4.16 3.96 3.76 2.0 Unit V V V V V ms ms tLD tLW 0.2 Minimum pulse width Reference voltage stabilization wait tLWAIT0 Note 2 time Operation stabilization wait time Note 3 0.5 2.0 ms tLWAIT1 0.1 0.2 ms Notes 1. 2. 3. Time required from voltage detection to interrupt output or internal reset output. Time required from setting LVIE to 1 to reference voltage stabilization when POC-OFF is selected by the mask option. Time required from setting LVION to 1 to operation stabilization. Remarks 1. VLVI0 > VLVI1 > VLVI2 > VLVI3 > VLVI4 2. VPOCn < VLVIm (n = 0 or 1, m = 0 to 4) LVI Circuit Timing Supply voltage (VDD) Detection voltage (MAX.) Detection voltage (TYP.) Detection voltage (MIN.) tLW tWAIT0 tWAIT1 tLD LVIE 1 LVION 1 Time Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C) Parameter Data retention supply voltage Symbol VDDDR Conditions When POC-OFF is selected by mask option Release signal set time tSREL 0 MIN. 2.0 TYP. MAX. 5.5 Unit V s 470 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 30 PACKAGE DRAWING 52-PIN PLASTIC LQFP (10x10) A B detail of lead end 39 40 27 26 S P C D T R 52 1 F J G H I M L U 14 13 Q K M ITEM A B C MILLIMETERS 12.00.2 10.00.2 10.00.2 12.00.2 1.1 1.1 0.320.06 0.13 0.65 (T.P.) 1.00.2 0.5 0.17 +0.03 -0.05 0.10 1.4 0.10.05 3 +4 -3 1.50.1 0.25 0.60.15 S52GB-65-8ET-2 N S S D F G H I J K L M N P Q R S T U User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 471 CHAPTER 31 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS These products should be soldered and mounted under the following recommended conditions. For soldering methods and conditions other than those recommended below, please contact an NEC Electronics sales representative. For technical information, see the following website. Semiconductor Device Mount Manual (http://www.necel.com/pkg/en/mount/index.html) Table 31-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (1/2) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) PD780121GB-xxx-8ET, 780122GB-xxx-8ET, 780123GB-xxx-8ET, 780124GB-xxx-8ET, PD780121GB(A)-xxx-8ET, 780122GB(A)-xxx-8ET, 780123GB(A)-xxx-8ET, 780124GB(A)-xxx-8ET, PD780121GB(A1)-xxx-8ET, 780122GB(A1)-xxx-8ET, 780123GB(A1)-xxx-8ET, 780124GB(A1)-xxx-8ET, PD780121GB(A2)-xxx-8ET, 780122GB(A2)-xxx-8ET, 780123GB(A2)-xxx-8ET, 780124GB(A2)-xxx-8ET Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended Condition Symbol Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 235C, Time: 30 seconds max. (at 210C or higher), Count: 2 times or less, Exposure limit: 7 days 10 hours) VPS Note IR35-107-2 (after that, prebake at 125C for Package peak temperature: 215C, Time: 40 seconds max. (at 200C or higher), Count: 2 times or less, Exposure limit: 7 days 10 hours) Note VP15-107-2 (after that, prebake at 125C for Wave soldering Solder bath temperature: 260C max., Time: 10 seconds max., Count: Once, Preheating temperature: 120C max. (package surface temperature), Exposure Note limit: 7 days (after that, prebake at 125C for 10 hours) WS60-107-1 Partial heating Pin temperature: 300C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) - Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period. Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). 472 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 31 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS Table 31-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (2/2) 52-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10) PD78F0124M1GB-8ET, 78F0124M2GB-8ET, 78F0124M3GB-8ET, 78F0124M4GB-8ET, PD78F0124M5GB-8ET, 78F0124M6GB-8ET, 78F0124M1GB(A)-8ET, PD78F0124M2GB(A)-8ET, 78F0124M3GB(A)-8ET, 78F0124M4GB(A)-8ET, PD78F0124M5GB(A)-8ET, 78F0124M6GB(A)-8ET, 78F0124M1GB(A1)-8ET, PD78F0124M2GB(A1)-8ET, 78F0124M5GB(A1)-8ET, 78F0124M6GB(A1)-8ET Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended Condition Symbol Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 235C, Time: 30 seconds max. (at 210C or higher), Count: 2 times or less, Exposure limit: 3 days 10 hours) VPS Note IR35-103-2 (after that, prebake at 125C for Package peak temperature: 215C, Time: 40 seconds max. (at 200C or higher), Count: 2 times or less, Exposure limit: 3 days 10 hours) Note VP15-103-2 (after that, prebake at 125C for Wave soldering Solder bath temperature: 260C max., Time: 10 seconds max., Count: Once, Preheating temperature: 120C max. (package surface temperature), Exposure Note limit: 3 days (after that, prebake at 125C for 10 hours) WS60-103-1 Partial heating Pin temperature: 300C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) - Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period. Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 473 CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT 32.1 Cautions for Wait This product has two internal system buses. One is a CPU bus and the other is a peripheral bus that interfaces with the low-speed peripheral hardware. Because the clock of the CPU bus and the clock of the peripheral bus are asynchronous, unexpected illegal data may be passed if an access to the CPU conflicts with an access to the peripheral hardware. When accessing the peripheral hardware that may cause a conflict, therefore, the CPU repeatedly executes processing, until the correct data is passed. As a result, the CPU does not start the next instruction processing but waits. If this happens, the number of execution clocks of an instruction increases by the number of wait clocks (for the number of wait clocks, refer to Table 32-1). This must be noted when real-time processing is performed. 474 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT 32.2 Peripheral Hardware That Generates Wait Table 32-1 lists the registers that issue a wait request when accessed by the CPU, and the number of CPU wait clocks. Table 32-1. Registers That Generate Wait and Number of CPU Wait Clocks Peripheral Hardware Watchdog timer Serial interface UART0 Serial interface UART6 A/D converter WDTM ASIS0 ASIS6 ADM ADS PFM PFT ADCR Register Write Read Read Write Write Write Write Read 1 to 5 clocks (when ADM.5 flag = "1") 1 to 9 clocks (when ADM.5 flag = "0") 2 Access Number of Wait Clocks 3 clocks (fixed) 1 clock (fixed) 1 clock (fixed) 2 to 5 clocks 2 to 9 clocks Note (when ADM.5 flag = "1") Note (when ADM.5 flag = "0") Note No wait cycle is generated for the CPU if the number of wait clocks calculated by the above expression is 1. Caution When the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped (MCC = 1), do not access the registers listed above using an access method in which a wait request is issued. Remark The clock is the CPU clock (fCPU). User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 475 CHAPTER 32 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT 32.3 Example of Wait Occurrence <1> Watchdog timer Value of Bit 5 (FR2) of ADM Register 0 fX fX/2 fX/2 fX/2 fX/2 1 fX fX/2 fX/2 fX/2 fX/2 2 2 fCPU Number of Wait Clocks 9 clocks 5 clocks 3 clocks 2 clocks 0 clocks (1 clock 5 clocks 3 clocks 2 clocks 0 clocks (1 clock 0 clocks (1 clock Note Note Number of Execution Clocks 14 clocks 10 clocks 8 clocks 7 clocks 3 4 ) 5 clocks (6 clocks 10 clocks 8 clocks 7 clocks Note ) 3 ) ) 5 clocks (6 clocks 5 clocks (6 clocks Note ) ) 4 Note Note Note On execution of MOV A, ADCR Remark The clock is the CPU clock (fCPU). fX: X1 input clock frequency tCPUL: Low-level width of CPU clock 476 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS The following development tools are available for the development of systems that employ the 78K0/KD1. Figure A-1 shows the development tool configuration. * Support for PC98-NX series Unless otherwise specified, products supported by IBM PC/ATTM compatibles are compatible with PC98-NX series computers. When using PC98-NX series computers, refer to the explanation for IBM PC/AT compatibles. * Windows Unless otherwise specified, "Windows" means the following OSs. * Windows 3.1 * Windows 95, 98, 2000 * Windows NTTM Ver 4.0 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 477 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration (1/2) (1) When using the in-circuit emulators IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A Software package * Software package Language processing software * Assembler package * C compiler package * Device file * C library source fileNote 1 Debugging software * Integrated debugger * System simulator Control software * Project manager (Windows only)Note 2 Embedded software * Real-time OS Host machine (PC or EWS) Interface adapter, PC card interface, etc. Power supply unit Flash memory write environment Flash programmer In-circuit emulatorNote 3 Emulation board Flash memory write adapter Performance board Flash memory Emulation probe Conversion socket or conversion adapter Target system Notes 1. 2. 3. The C library source file is not included in the software package. The project manager is included in the assembler package. The project manager is only used for Windows. Products other than in-circuit emulators IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0-NS-A are all sold separately. 478 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration (2/2) (2) When using the in-circuit emulator IE-78K0K1-ET Software package * Software package Language processing software * Assembler package * C compiler package * Device file * C library source fileNote 1 Debugging software * Integrated debugger * System simulator Control software * Project manager (Windows only)Note 2 Embedded software * Real-time OS Host machine (PC or EWS) Interface adapter, PC card interface, etc. Flash memory write environment Flash programmer Power supply unit In-circuit emulatorNote 3 Flash memory write adapter Emulation probe Flash memory Conversion socket or conversion adapter Target system Notes 1. 2. 3. The C library source file is not included in the software package. The project manager is included in the assembler package. The project manager is only used for Windows. In-circuit emulator IE-78K0K1-ET is supplied with integrated debugger ID78K0-NS, a device file, power supply unit, and PCI bus interface adapter IE-70000-PCI-IF-A. Any other products are sold separately. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 479 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS A.1 Software Package SP78K0 78K/0 Series software package Development tools (software) common to the 78K/0 Series are combined in this package. Part number: SxxxxSP78K0 Remark xxxx in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used. SxxxxSP78K0 xxxx AB17 BB17 Host Machine PC-9800 series, IBM PC/AT compatibles OS Windows (Japanese version) Windows (English version) Supply Medium CD-ROM A.2 Language Processing Software RA78K0 Assembler package This assembler converts programs written in mnemonics into object codes executable with a microcontroller. This assembler is also provided with functions capable of automatically creating symbol tables and branch instruction optimization. This assembler should be used in combination with a device file (DF780124) (sold separately). Notes 1 This file contains information peculiar to the device. This device file should be used in combination with a tool (RA78K0, CC78K0, SM78K0, ID78K0-NS, and ID78K0) (all sold separately). The corresponding OS and host machine differ depending on the tool to be used. Part number: SxxxxDF780124 CC78K0-L Note 2 This is a source file of the functions that configure the object library included in the C compiler package. This file is required to match the object library included in the C compiler package to the user's specifications. Since this is a source file, its working environment does not depend on any particular operating system. Part number: SxxxxCC78K0-L C library source file Notes 1. 2. The DF780124 can be used in common with the RA78K0, CC78K0, SM78K0, ID78K0-NS, and ID78K0. The CC78K0-L is not included in the software package (SP78K0). 480 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Remark xxxx in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used. SxxxxRA78K0 SxxxxCC78K0 xxxx AB13 BB13 AB17 BB17 3P17 3K17 HP9000 series 700 SPARCstation TM TM Host Machine PC-9800 series, IBM PC/AT compatibles OS Windows (Japanese version) Windows (English version) Windows (Japanese version) Windows (English version) HP-UX TM Supply Medium 3.5-inch 2HD FD CD-ROM (Rel. 10.10) (Rel. 4.1.4), (Rel. 2.5.1) SunOS Solaris TM TM SxxxxDF780124 SxxxxCC78K0-L xxxx AB13 BB13 3P16 3K13 3K15 Host Machine PC-9800 series, IBM PC/AT compatibles HP9000 series 700 SPARCstation OS Windows (Japanese version) Windows (English version) HP-UX (Rel. 10.10) SunOS (Rel. 4.1.4), Solaris (Rel. 2.5.1) DAT 3.5-inch 2HD FD 1/4-inch CGMT Supply Medium 3.5-inch 2HD FD A.3 Control Software Project manager This is control software designed to enable efficient user program development in the Windows environment. All operations used in development of a user program, such as starting the editor, building, and starting the debugger, can be performed from the project manager. A.4 Flash Memory Writing Tools Flashpro III (part number: FL-PR3, PG-FP3) Flashpro IV (part number: FL-PR4, PG-FP4) Flash programmer FA-52GB-8ET Flash memory writing adapter Flash memory writing adapter used connected to the Flashpro III/Flashpro IV. * FA-52GB-8ET: For 52-pin plastic LQFP (GB-8ET type) Flash programmer dedicated to microcontrollers with on-chip flash memory. Remark FL-PR3, FL-PR4, and FA-52GB-8ET are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. TEL: +81-45-475-4191 Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 481 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS A.5 Debugging Tools (Hardware) A.5.1 When using in-circuit emulators IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0-NS-A IE-78K0-NS In-circuit emulator The in-circuit emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing application systems using a 78K/0 Series product. It corresponds to the integrated debugger (ID78K0-NS). This emulator should be used in combination with a power supply unit, emulation probe, and the interface adapter required to connect this emulator to the host machine. IE-78K0-NS-PA Performance board This board is connected to the IE-78K0-NS to expand its functions. Adding this board adds a coverage function and enhances debugging functions such as tracer and timer functions. IE-78K0-NS-A In-circuit emulator IE-70000-MC-PS-B Power supply unit IE-70000-98-IF-C Interface adapter IE-70000-CD-IF-A PC card interface IE-70000-PC-IF-C Interface adapter IE-70000-PCI-IF-A Interface adapter IE-780148-NS-EM1 Emulation board NP-H52GB-TQ Emulation probe TGB-052SBP Conversion adapter This board emulates the operations of the peripheral hardware peculiar to a device. It should be used in combination with an in-circuit emulator. This emulation probe is used to connect the in-circuit emulator and target system, and is designed for a 52-pin plastic LQFP (GB-8ET type). This conversion adapter is used to connect the NP-H52GB-TQ and target system board to which a 52-pin plastic LQFP (GB-8ET type) can be connected. This adapter is required when using a PC-9800 series computer (except notebook type) as the host machine (C bus compatible). This is PC card and interface cable required when using a notebook-type computer as the host machine (PCMCIA socket compatible). This adapter is required when using an IBM PC/AT compatible computer as the host machine (ISA bus compatible). This adapter is required when using a computer with a PCI bus as the host machine. This adapter is used for supplying power from a 100 V to 240 V AC outlet. Product that combines the IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0-NS-PA Remarks 1. NP-H52GB-TQ is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. TEL: +81-45-475-4191 Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. 2. TGB-052SBP is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION. For further information, contact: Daimaru Kogyo, Ltd. Tokyo Electronics Department (TEL +81-3-3820-7112) Osaka Electronics Department (TEL +81-6-6244-6672) 482 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS A.5.2 When using in-circuit emulator IE-78K0K1-ET IE-78K0K1-ET Notes 1, 2 The in-circuit emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing application systems using a 78K0/Kx1 product. It corresponds to the integrated debugger (ID78K0-NS). This emulator should be used in combination with a power supply unit, emulation probe, and the interface adapter required to connect this emulator to the host machine. In-circuit emulator IE-70000-98-IF-C Interface adapter IE-70000-CD-IF-A PC card interface IE-70000-PC-IF-C Interface adapter IE-70000-PCI-IF-A Interface adapter NP-H52GB-TQ Emulation probe TGB-052SBP Conversion adapter This adapter is required when using a PC-9800 series computer (except notebook type) as the host machine (C bus compatible). This is PC card and interface cable required when using a notebook-type computer as the host machine (PCMCIA socket compatible). This adapter is required when using an IBM PC/AT compatible computer as the host machine (ISA bus compatible). This adapter is required when using a computer with a PCI bus as the host machine. This is supplied with IE-78K0K1-ET. This emulation probe is used to connect the in-circuit emulator and target system, and is designed for a 52-pin plastic LQFP (GB-8ET type). This conversion adapter is used to connect the NP-H52GB-TQ and target system board to which a 52-pin plastic LQFP (GB-8ET type) can be connected. Notes 1. 2. IE-78K0K1-ET is supplied with a power supply unit and PCI bus interface adapter IE-70000-PCI-IF-A. It is also supplied with integrated debugger ID78K0-NS and a device file as control software. Under development Remarks 1. NP-H52GB-TQ is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. TEL: +81-45-475-4191 Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. 2. TGB-052SBP is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION. For further information, contact: Daimaru Kogyo, Ltd. Tokyo Electronics Department (TEL +81-3-3820-7112) Osaka Electronics Department (TEL +81-6-6244-6672) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 483 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS A.6 Debugging Tools (Software) SM78K0 System simulator This is a system simulator for the 78K/0 Series. The SM78K0 is Windows-based software. It is used to perform debugging at the C source level or assembler level while simulating the operation of the target system on a host machine. Use of the SM78K0 allows the execution of application logical testing and performance testing on an independent basis from hardware development, thereby providing higher development efficiency and software quality. The SM78K0 should be used in combination with the device file (DF780124) (sold separately). Part number: SxxxxSM78K0 ID78K0-NS Integrated debugger (supporting in-circuit emulators IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A, and IE-78K0K1-ET) This debugger supports the in-circuit emulators for the 78K/0 Series. The ID78K0-NS is Windows-based software. It has improved C-compatible debugging functions and can display the results of tracing with the source program using an integrating window function that associates the source program, disassemble display, and memory display with the trace result. It should be used in combination with the device file (sold separately). Part number: SxxxxID78K0-NS Remark xxxx in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used. SxxxxSM78K0 SxxxxID78K0-NS xxxx AB13 BB13 AB17 BB17 Host Machine PC-9800 series, IBM PC/AT compatibles OS Windows (Japanese version) Windows (English version) Windows (Japanese version) Windows (English version) CD-ROM Supply Medium 3.5-inch 2HD FD 484 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS A.7 Embedded Software RX78K0 Real-time OS The RX78K0 is a real-time OS conforming to the ITRON specifications. A tool (configurator) for generating the nucleus of the RX78K0 and multiple information tables is supplied. Used in combination with an assembler package (RA78K0) and device file (DF780124) (both sold separately). Caution To purchase the RX78K0, first fill in the purchase application form and sign the user agreement. Remark xxxx and in the part number differ depending on the host machine and OS used. SxxxxRX78013- 001 100K 001M 010M S01 Source program Product Outline Evaluation object Mass-production object Maximum Number for Use in Mass Production Do not use for mass-produced product. 0.1 million units 1 million units 10 million units Object source program for mass production xxxx AA13 AB13 BB13 Host Machine PC-9800 series IBM PC/AT compatibles OS Windows (Japanese version) Windows (Japanese version) Windows (English version) Supply Medium 3.5-inch 2HD FD User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 485 APPENDIX B NOTES ON TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN The following shows a diagram of the connection conditions between the emulation probe and conversion adapter. Design your system making allowances for conditions such as the shape of parts mounted on the target system, as shown below. Figure B-1. Distance Between IE System and Conversion Adapter In-circuit emulator IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A, or IE-78K0K1-ET Target system Emulation board IE-780148-NS-EM1 370 mm CN1 Emulation probe NP-H52GB-TQ Conversion adapter TGB-052SBP 78012X PROBE Board Remark The NP-H52GB-TQ is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. The TGB-052SBP is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION. 486 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD APPENDIX B NOTES ON TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN Figure B-2. Connection Conditions of Target System Emulation board IE-780148-NS-EM1 Emulation probe NP-H52GB-TQ 22 mm Conversion adapter TGB-052SBP 16.45 mm 42 mm 11 mm 16.45 mm 45 mm Target system Remark The NP-H52GB-TQ is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. The TGB-052SBP is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION. User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 487 APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX C.1 Register Index (In Alphabetical Order with Respect to Register Names) [A] A/D conversion result register (ADCR)........................................................................................................................234 A/D converter mode register (ADM) ............................................................................................................................232 Analog input channel specification register (ADS) ......................................................................................................233 Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) ..........................................................................................283 Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) .............................................................................253 Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) .............................................................................277 Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) .....................................................................255 Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) .....................................................................279 Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) ........................................................................280 [B] Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) .........................................................................................................256 Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) .........................................................................................................282 [C] Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)............................................................................................................134 Clock monitor mode register (CLM) ............................................................................................................................363 Clock output selection register (CKS) .........................................................................................................................226 Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6).............................................................................................................................281 [E] 8-bit timer compare register 50 (CR50) .......................................................................................................................168 8-bit timer compare register 51 (CR51) .......................................................................................................................168 8-bit timer counter 50 (TM50)......................................................................................................................................167 8-bit timer counter 51 (TM51)......................................................................................................................................167 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)........................................................................................................191 8-bit timer H compare register 00 (CMP00).................................................................................................................186 8-bit timer H compare register 01 (CMP01).................................................................................................................186 8-bit timer H compare register 10 (CMP10).................................................................................................................186 8-bit timer H compare register 11 (CMP11).................................................................................................................186 8-bit timer H mode register 0 (TMHMD0) ....................................................................................................................187 8-bit timer H mode register 1 (TMHMD1) ....................................................................................................................187 8-bit timer mode control register 50 (TMC50)..............................................................................................................171 8-bit timer mode control register 51 (TMC51)..............................................................................................................171 External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN)..................................................................................................331 External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP)...................................................................................................331 [I] Input switch control register (ISC) ...............................................................................................................................284 Internal memory size switching register (IMS).............................................................................................................389 Interrupt mask flag register 0H (MK0H).......................................................................................................................329 488 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX Interrupt mask flag register 0L (MK0L)........................................................................................................................329 Interrupt mask flag register 1L (MK1L)........................................................................................................................329 Interrupt request flag register 0H (IF0H) .....................................................................................................................328 Interrupt request flag register 0L (IF0L) ......................................................................................................................328 Interrupt request flag register 1L (IF1L) ......................................................................................................................328 [K] Key return mode register (KRM) .................................................................................................................................341 [L] Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS)..................................................................................................376 Low-voltage detection register (LVIM) ........................................................................................................................375 [M] Main clock mode register (MCM) ................................................................................................................................105 Main OSC control register (MOC) ...............................................................................................................................106 [O] Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) ..............................................................................107, 344 Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)............................................................................................108, 345 [P] Port mode register 0 (PM0)...................................................................................................................................95, 137 Port mode register 1 (PM1)................................................................................................... 95, 173, 191, 257, 284, 312 Port mode register 12 (PM12).......................................................................................................................................95 Port mode register 14 (PM14)...............................................................................................................................95, 227 Port mode register 3 (PM3)...................................................................................................................................95, 173 Port mode register 6 (PM6)...........................................................................................................................................95 Port mode register 7 (PM7)...........................................................................................................................................95 Port register 0 (P0)........................................................................................................................................................97 Port register 1 (P1)........................................................................................................................................................97 Port register 12 (P12)....................................................................................................................................................97 Port register 13 (P13)....................................................................................................................................................97 Port register 14 (P14)....................................................................................................................................................97 Port register 2 (P2)........................................................................................................................................................97 Port register 3 (P3)........................................................................................................................................................97 Port register 6 (P6)........................................................................................................................................................97 Port register 7 (P7)........................................................................................................................................................97 Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM)...............................................................................................................235 Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT)..........................................................................................................235 Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)..........................................................................................................................136 Priority specification flag register 0H (PR0H) ..............................................................................................................330 Priority specification flag register 0L (PR0L) ...............................................................................................................330 Priority specification flag register 1L (PR1L) ...............................................................................................................330 Processor clock control register (PCC) .......................................................................................................................103 Pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0) .........................................................................................................................98 Pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1) .........................................................................................................................98 Pull-up resistor option register 12 (PU12) .....................................................................................................................98 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 489 APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX Pull-up resistor option register 14 (PU14) .................................................................................................................... 98 Pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3) ........................................................................................................................ 98 Pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7) ........................................................................................................................ 98 [R] Receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) ................................................................................................................................252 Receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) ................................................................................................................................276 Reset control flag register (RESF) ..............................................................................................................................361 Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) .................................................................................................................................104 [S] Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10) .................................................................................................................311 Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) ..............................................................................................................................309 Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) ...............................................................................................................310 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) ....................................................................................................129 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) ....................................................................................................131 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00)....................................................................................................................................129 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)............................................................................................................132 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)...........................................................................................................135 [T] Timer clock selection register 50 (TCL50)...................................................................................................................169 Timer clock selection register 51 (TCL51)...................................................................................................................169 Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) .........................................................................................................................309 Transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6)................................................................................................................................276 Transmit shift register 0 (TXS0) ..................................................................................................................................252 [W] Watch timer operation mode register (WTM) ..............................................................................................................210 Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) ....................................................................................................................219 Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM)......................................................................................................................218 490 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX C.2 Register Index (In Alphabetical Order with Respect to Register Symbol) [A] ADCR: ADM: ADS: ASICL6: ASIF6: ASIM0: ASIM6: ASIS0: ASIS6: [B] BRGC0: BRGC6: [C] CKS: CKSR6: CLM: CMP00: CMP01: CMP10: CMP11: CR000: CR010: CR50: CR51: CRC00: CSIC10: CSIM10: [E] EGN: EGP: [I] IF0H: IF0L: IF1L: IMS: ISC: [K] KRM: Key return mode register.........................................................................................................................341 Interrupt request flag register 0H.............................................................................................................328 Interrupt request flag register 0L .............................................................................................................328 Interrupt request flag register 1L .............................................................................................................328 Internal memory size switching register ..................................................................................................389 Input switch control register.....................................................................................................................284 External interrupt falling edge enable register .........................................................................................331 External interrupt rising edge enable register..........................................................................................331 Clock output selection register ................................................................................................................226 Clock selection register 6 ........................................................................................................................281 Clock monitor mode register ...................................................................................................................363 8-bit timer H compare register 00............................................................................................................186 8-bit timer H compare register 01............................................................................................................186 8-bit timer H compare register 10............................................................................................................186 8-bit timer H compare register 11............................................................................................................186 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000...............................................................................................129 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010...............................................................................................131 8-bit timer compare register 50 ...............................................................................................................168 8-bit timer compare register 51 ...............................................................................................................168 Capture/compare control register 00 .......................................................................................................134 Serial clock selection register 10.............................................................................................................311 Serial operation mode register 10 ...........................................................................................................310 Baud rate generator control register 0.....................................................................................................256 Baud rate generator control register 6.....................................................................................................282 A/D conversion result register .................................................................................................................234 A/D converter mode register ...................................................................................................................232 Analog input channel specification register .............................................................................................233 Asynchronous serial interface control register 6......................................................................................283 Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6..................................................................280 Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0........................................................................253 Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6........................................................................277 Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0...............................................................255 Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6...............................................................279 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 491 APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX [L] LVIM: LVIS: [M] MCM: MK0H: MK0L: MK1L: MOC: [O] OSTC: OSTS: [P] P0: P1: P12: P13: P14: P2: P3: P6: P7: PCC: PFM: PFT: PM0: PM1: PM12: PM14: PM3: PM6: PM7: PR0H: PR0L: PR1L: PRM00: PU0: PU1: PU12: PU14: PU3: PU7: Port register 0 ........................................................................................................................................... 97 Port register 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 97 Port register 12 ......................................................................................................................................... 97 Port register 13 ......................................................................................................................................... 97 Port register 14 ......................................................................................................................................... 97 Port register 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 97 Port register 3 ........................................................................................................................................... 97 Port register 6 ........................................................................................................................................... 97 Port register 7 ........................................................................................................................................... 97 Processor clock control register...............................................................................................................102 Power-fail comparison mode register ......................................................................................................235 Power-fail comparison threshold register ................................................................................................235 Port mode register 0 ..........................................................................................................................95, 137 Port mode register 1 ..........................................................................................95, 173, 191, 257, 284, 312 Port mode register 12 ............................................................................................................................... 95 Port mode register 14 ........................................................................................................................95, 227 Port mode register 3 ..........................................................................................................................95, 173 Port mode register 6 ................................................................................................................................. 95 Port mode register 7 ................................................................................................................................. 95 Priority specification flag register 0H .......................................................................................................330 Priority specification flag register 0L ........................................................................................................330 Priority specification flag register 1L ........................................................................................................330 Prescaler mode register 00 .....................................................................................................................136 Pull-up resistor option register 0 ............................................................................................................... 98 Pull-up resistor option register 1 ............................................................................................................... 98 Pull-up resistor option register 12 ............................................................................................................. 98 Pull-up resistor option register 14 ............................................................................................................. 98 Pull-up resistor option register 3 ............................................................................................................... 98 Pull-up resistor option register 7 ............................................................................................................... 98 Oscillation stabilization time counter status register ........................................................................107, 344 Oscillation stabilization time select register .....................................................................................108, 345 Main clock mode register.........................................................................................................................105 Interrupt mask flag register 0H ................................................................................................................329 Interrupt mask flag register 0L .................................................................................................................329 Interrupt mask flag register 1L .................................................................................................................329 Main OSC control register .......................................................................................................................106 Low-voltage detection register.................................................................................................................375 Low-voltage detection level selection register .........................................................................................376 492 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX [R] RCM: RESF: RXB0: RXB6: [S] SIO10: SOTB10: [T] TCL50: TCL51: TM00: TM50: TM51: TMC00: TMC50: TMC51: TMCYC1: Timer clock selection register 50.............................................................................................................169 Timer clock selection register 51.............................................................................................................169 16-bit timer counter 00 ............................................................................................................................129 8-bit timer counter 50 ..............................................................................................................................167 8-bit timer counter 51 ..............................................................................................................................167 16-bit timer mode control register 00.......................................................................................................133 8-bit timer mode control register 50.........................................................................................................171 8-bit timer mode control register 51.........................................................................................................171 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 ......................................................................................................191 Serial I/O shift register 10........................................................................................................................309 Transmit buffer register 10 ......................................................................................................................309 Ring-OSC mode register .........................................................................................................................104 Reset control flag register .......................................................................................................................361 Receive buffer register 0 .........................................................................................................................252 Receive buffer register 6 .........................................................................................................................276 TMHMD0: 8-bit timer H mode register 0...................................................................................................................187 TMHMD1: 8-bit timer H mode register 1...................................................................................................................187 TOC00: TXB6: TXS0: [W] WDTE: WDTM: WTM: Watchdog timer enable register ..............................................................................................................219 Watchdog timer mode register ................................................................................................................218 Watch timer operation mode register ......................................................................................................210 16-bit timer output control register 00......................................................................................................135 Transmit buffer register 6 ........................................................................................................................276 Transmit shift register 0...........................................................................................................................252 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 493 APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY D.1 Major Revisions in This Edition (1/3) Page Throughout Addition of products Description PD78F0124(A1), 780121(A2), 780122(A2), 780123(A2), 780124(A2) Under development Under mass production PD780121, 780122, 780123, 780124, 78F0124, 780121(A), 780122(A), 780123(A), 780124(A), 78F0124(A), 780121(A1), 780122(A1), 780123(A1), 780124(A1) Modification of names of the following special function registers (SFRs) * Ports 0 to 3, 6, 7, and 12 to 14 Port registers 0 to 3, 6, 7, and 12 to 14 p.21 p.23 p.28 p.30 p.37 p.39 Addition of Cautions 3 and 4 to 1.4 Pin Configuration (Top View) Modification of 1.5 K1 Family Lineup Modification of outline of timer in and addition of Remark to 1.7 Outline of Functions Addition of Table 2-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies Modification of descriptions in 2.2.10 AVREF, 2.2.13 REGC, and 2.2.18 VPP (flash memory versions only) Modification of the following contents in Table 2-2 Pin I/O Circuit Types * Modification of recommended connection when P60 to P63 are not used * Modification of I/O circuit type of P62 and P63 * Addition of Note to AVREF * Modification of recommended connection when VPP is not used p.57 p.58 p.70 pp.73 to 75 Modification of Figure 3-14 Data to Be Saved to Stack Memory Modification of Figure 3-15 Data to Be Restored from Stack Memory Modification of [Description example] in 3.4.4 Short direct addressing Addition of [Illustration] to 3.4.7 Based addressing, 3.4.8 Based indexed addressing, and 3.4.9 Stack addressing p.76 p.78 p.87 p.93 p.95 Addition of Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies Modification of Table 4-3 Port Configuration Modification of Figure 4-10 Block Diagram of P20 to P27 Addition of Remark to Figure 4-16 Block Diagram of P130 Deletion of input switch control register (ISC) from and addition of port registers (P0 to P3, P6, P7, P12 to P14) to 4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function p.99 p.101 p.102 p.107 Partial modification of descriptions in 4.4.1 (1) Output mode, 4.4.3 (1) Output mode, and (2) Input mode Modification of Figure 5-1 Block Diagram of Clock Generator Addition of Note to 5.3 (1) Processor clock control register (PCC) Addition of Cautions 2 and 3 to Figure 5-6 Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC) pp.109 to 111 Modification of Figure 5-8 Examples of External Circuit of X1 Oscillator, Figure 5-9 Examples of External Circuit of Subsystem Clock Oscillator, and Figure 5-10 Examples of Incorrect Resonator Connection p.116 p.118 p.119 p.122 Modification of Notes 4 and 5 in Figure 5-13 Status Transition Diagram (2) Modification of Note 4 and illustration in Figure 5-13 Status Transition Diagram (4) Modification of Table 5-3 Relationship Between Operation Clocks in Each Operation Status Modification of Note in Figure 5-14 Switching from Ring-OSC Clock to X1 Input Clock (Flowchart) 494 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY (2/3) Page p.124 p.127 p.165 p.183 p.208 p.214 Description Addition of Note to Figure 5-16 Switching from X1 Input Clock to Subsystem Clock (Flowchart) Revision of CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 Revision of CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51 Revision of CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 Modification of Figure 9-1 Watch Timer Block Diagram Addition of Figure 9-4 Example of Generation of Watch Timer Interrupt Request (INTWT) (When Interrupt Period = 0.5 s) p.225 p.228 p.249 p.270 p.308 pp.323, 324 p.327 p.328 p.331 p.336 Modification of Figure 11-1 Block Diagram of Clock Output Controller Revision of CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Revision of CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 Revision of CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 Revision of CHAPTER 15 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 Addition of Note to INTVLI, POC, and LVI in Table 16-1 Interrupt Source List Addition of Note 2 to Table 16-2 Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources Addition of Caution 2 to Figure 16-2 Format of Interrupt Request Flag Registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L) Addition of Caution to Table 16-3 Ports Corresponding to EGPn and EGNn Addition of software interrupt request item to Table 16-5 Relationship Between Interrupt Requests Enabled for Multiple Interrupt Servicing During Interrupt Servicing p.340 p.342 Modification of Figure 17-1 Block Diagram of Key Interrupt Modification of Table 18-1 Relationship Between HALT Mode, STOP Mode, and Clock in old edition to Table 18-1 Relationship Between Operation Clocks in Each Operation Status p.344 Addition of Cautions 2 and 3 to Figure 18-1 Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC) p.346 p.350 Modification of Table 18-2 Operating Statuses in HALT Mode Addition of (3) When subsystem clock is used as CPU clock to Figure 18-4 HALT Mode Release by RESET Input p.351 Modification of the following items in Table 18-4 Operating Statuses in STOP Mode * 8-bit timer H0 * Serial interfaces UART0 and UART6 pp.356 to 358 Modification of Figure 19-1 Block Diagram of Reset Function to Figure 19-4 Timing of Reset in STOP Mode by RESET Input p.362 p.364 pp.367, 368 Modification of Figure 20-1 Block Diagram of Clock Monitor Addition of normal operation mode to Table 20-2 Operation Status of Clock Monitor (When CLME = 1) Addition of (6) Clock monitor status after X1 input clock oscillation is stopped by software and (7) Clock monitor status after Ring-OSC clock oscillation is stopped by software to Figure 20-3 Timing of Clock Monitor p.369 p.370 p.373 p.373 p.375 p.376 Addition of Note to description in 21.1 Functions of Power-on-Clear Circuit Modification of Figure 21-1 Block Diagram of Power-on-Clear Circuit Addition of Note to description in 22.1 Functions of Low-Voltage Detector Modification of Figure 22-1 Block Diagram of Low-Voltage Detector Modification of Note 5 in Figure 22-2 Format of Low-Voltage Detection Register (LVIM) Addition of Note 2 and Caution to Figure 22-3 Format of Low-Voltage Detection Level Selection Register (LVIS) User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD 495 APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY (3/3) Page pp.378, 380 Description Modification of Figure 22-4 Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Internal Reset Signal Generation and Figure 22-5 Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Interrupt Signal Generation p.384 Partial modification of description of (2) When used as interrupt under 496 User's Manual U16315EJ2V0UD |
Price & Availability of UPD780121GB-XXX-8ET
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |